Operation & Maintenance Instruction Manual

For

Skid Mounted Seawater Reverse Osmosis

Desalination System

MODEL: AWS 840‐20

Nominal Capacity:
20,000 Liters/ Day

Power Supply:
3 Phase, 380/415V, 50 Hz

Client :

ATLANTIC SHIP MANAGEMENT LTD

“TF VICTORIA”
Watertek Job No. P18013/001/03.2019

Designed & Manufactured By:

Advanced Watertek Pty Ltd. Advanced Watertek Industries LLC

P.O. Box 4478, Myaree P.O. Box. 24647, Dubai,
Western Australia 6960 United Arab Emirates
Tel: + 61 8 9317 4893 Tel: + 971 4 3333100
Fax: + 61 8 9317 4873 Fax: + 971 4 3332570

sales@[Link]
[Link]
 Sea Water Reverse Osmosis Desalination System
Model: Watertek AWS 840-20
INDEX
Contents Page No.

Important Notice 1 2
Important Notice 2 3
Sea Water Membrane Protection Instructions 4-6

Specifications 7-11

General Warranty 12

Warranty Agreement 13

Section 1 14 – 18
General Information
- General Introduction to R.O.
- Principles of Reverse Osmosis
- Definition Of Terms
- Variability Of Output
- RO membrane and Filter Disposal

Section 2 19
Environment, Health & Safety

Section 3 20 – 25
Significant Component Description
Section 4 26 - 27
System Installation

Section 5 28 – 29
Initial System Start-up
Section 6 30 – 31
Flushing procedures

Section 7 32 – 34
Chemical Cleaning Procedures

Section 8 35 – 36
Control Philosophy

Section 9 37
Preventive / Routine Maintenance

Section 10 38 - 41
Troubleshooting
Section 11 42
Utilities Summary/Chemicals & Consumables Requirement

Section 12 ---
Drawings
Section 13 ---
Factory Acceptance Report
Section 14 ---
R.O. Unit Daily Log Sheet
Section 15 ---
Significant Components Literature
Section 16 ---
As Built BOM & Spare Parts List
Section 17 ---
Chemical MSDS
 OPERATIONS & MAINTENANCE MANUAL

AWS 840-20, 50 HZ | P18013/001/03.2019| 20,000LPD

Advanced Watertek is a registered trademark of Advanced Watertek Pty Ltd

© Advanced Watertek 2018

All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or
transmitted, in any form or by any means, without written permission from Advanced Watertek Pty Ltd,
P.O. Box 4478, Myaree, Western Australia 6960. Exceptions are allowed as permitted under the
Copyright, Designs and Patents Act or in the case of reprographic reproduction in accordance with the
terms of the licenses issued by the Copyright Licensing Agency. Enquiries concerning reproduction outside
these terms and in other countries should be sent to Advanced Watertek Pty Ltd, P.O. Box 4478, Myaree,
Western Australia 6960.

1|Page
 OPERATIONS & MAINTENANCE MANUAL

AWS 840-20, 50 HZ | P18013/001/03.2019| 20,000LPD

IMPORTANT NOTICE 1

CAUTION

YOUR ADVANCED WATERTEK SEA WATER REVERSE OSMOSIS DESALINATION SYSTEM WITH THE
PRETREATMENT PROVIDED IS DESIGNED TO OPERATE FROM CLEAN / BEACH WELL SEAWATER.

DO NOT OPERATE THE SYSTEM IN HARBOURS, ANCHORAGE AREAS, OILY WATER, HIGH TURBIDITY
WATER OR POLLUTED WATER.

SYSTEM/MEMBRANE DAMAGE RESULTING FROM FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH THIS REQUIREMENT IS

NOT COVERED UNDER WARRANTY.

PLEASE CAREFULLY READ OUR MEMBRANE PROTECTION INSTRUCTIONS.

2|Page
 OPERATIONS & MAINTENANCE MANUAL

AWS 840-20, 50 HZ | P18013/001/03.2019| 20,000LPD

IMPORTANT NOTICE 2

CAUTION

AVOID HIGH PRESSURE PUMP CAVITATION

Always ensure your filtration system is in excellent condition.

Cartridge/Bag filters can be blocked with no visible sign of blockage. Such condition will cause pump
starvation, the feed pressure may indicate adequate pressure e.g. 4.17 bar yet because the cartridge/bag filter
blocked the volume of water reaching the inlet of the high‐pressure pump can be less that the required flow.
This leads to pump cavitations damage. Never allow the flow to drop from the level indicated while
cartridge/bag filters are new. When monitoring for pump cavitations, focus on total feed flow adding product
and reject flow rates will provide total pump flow rate. At a constant 50 Hz it will be 40.17 LPM. Focus shall
remain on the total flow; it must be constant during the entire 300 hours. Any slight drop from normal level
shall prompt immediate cartridge/bag filter replacement. According to the pump manufacturer over 90% of
pump failures inspected is a result of filtration system failure. Change cartridge/bag filters at first sign of flow
drop.

Failure to replace your cartridge/bag filters whenever necessary shall render our guarantee null and void.

The longest period permitted between cartridge/ bag filter changes is 300 hours. In many situations you may
need to change earlier. Cartridge/Bag filter replacement depends on the quality of the pre‐treatment and,
above all, the quality of the raw water, naturally; we have no control over the quality of the raw water.

Do not allow the pressure drop across the cartridge/bag filter more than 0.35 bar (5psi), replace
cartridges/bag filters whenever CF outlet pressure drops from the normal level, e.g. 3.0 bar

S.N.

1. MMF backwash should be initiated every after 24 hrs. of MMF running in service mode or if feed pressure
increased by 9 PSI (Approx. 0.6 bar), whichever occurs earlier.

3|Page
 OPERATIONS & MAINTENANCE MANUAL

AWS 840-20, 50 HZ | P18013/001/03.2019| 20,000LPD

SEAWATER MEMBRANE PROTECTION INSTRUCTIONS

An RO system consists of RO Pressure Vessel and RO membranes. Each RO pressure vessel contains reverse
osmosis membranes (also called as elements). One pressure vessel can accommodate from 1 element to 8
elements long depending on RO design requirement and pressure vessels are rated for operating design
conditions.

These membranes are sensitive and care must be taken to avoid conditions that can adversely affect their
performance. Failure to adhere to the following precautions can result in decreased performance or possible
destruction of the membranes and voiding of all warranties.

1. Avoid Chlorine:
In Reverse Osmosis system, even a small amount of chlorine, if present in the feed water, can damage the R.
O. Membranes. Chlorine damage to the membrane can lead to lower salt rejection and poor quality permeate,
which could result in costly membrane replacement and downtime.

Fortunately, chlorine is not a naturally occurring element in either seawater or freshwater. There are
situations where you can still encounter Chlorine in the feed water. An example of this might be if the feed
water intake is located near a discharge of chlorinated sewage. Regardless of the situation, if, for any reason,
you suspect the presence of Chlorine in the feed water, make sure that you test for Chlorine content.

A test kit, available from most swimming pool supply houses or scientific equipment companies, should be
able to determine chlorine level at ranges from 0.02 ppm to 2 ppm and 0.01 ppm to 10.0 ppm (parts per
million) accurately. Please ensure the correct testing kit is used. If unable to locate a chlorine test kit contact
WATERTEK. Consult WATERTEK or your local distributor if chlorine is unavoidable. A Chlorine filter assembly is
available as an optional accessory to accommodate a feed water condition where chlorine is unavoidable.
Dosing of a de‐chlorinating chemical may be required if chlorine presence is more than mere traces.

2. Avoid Extreme Temperature

A. High Temperature ‐ The membranes have been tested with feed water temperatures as high as (40°C).
Continuous operation at or above (40°C) however is not recommended since such temperature can cause
permanent damage to membrane support structures.

4|Page
 OPERATIONS & MAINTENANCE MANUAL

AWS 840-20, 50 HZ | P18013/001/03.2019| 20,000LPD

The unit should neither be stored in direct sunlight nor in area where internal temperature could exceed
(40°C). High feed water temperatures will also decrease the membrane’s ability to reject salt and
consequently result in saltier product water. NOTE: When encountering higher feed water temperatures it will
be necessary to reduce operating pressure in order not to exceed design product flow rates (over recovering).

B. Low Temperature ‐ The significance of low feed water temperatures is reflected in the decrease in feed
pump flow rates. As the system pump flow rate is fixed irrespective of water temperature, the feed pump
pressure will be lower reflecting the effect of moving heavier water.

3. Avoid Rust
The feed water must be free from rust. The membranes are highly susceptible to iron (rust) fouling. Therefore,
every possible precaution must be exercised to avoid contamination by rust. If rust cannot be avoided, acid
dosing may be required. Contact WATERTEK or your local distributor for recommendations.

4. Avoid Oil
Try to prevent oil from entering the R.O. System since oil will coat the membrane and decrease its efficiency.
The most likely location one would encounter oil is in a harbor or around drilling operations, although coastal
waters are susceptible to oil spills and other pollution. In most instances, membranes that have been coated
with oil can be cleaned. However, there is no guarantee that their efficiency will ever be the same. An oil‐
water separator package may be installed to remove oil.

5. Avoid Industrial Waste

The unit may purify water that contains some industrial waste, but it is best to avoid contaminated waste
entirely since an unknown chemical could damage the membrane.

6. Avoid Fouling
Fouling occurs when suspended solids, silt, mud, sand, microbes and organic material deposit on the surface
of the membranes. Besides posing a serious threat to the membranes, they can decrease system performance
and increase maintenance unless adequately filtered. You would most likely encounter heavy concentrations
of such solids when operating in harbors which are not, at all, recommended. When encountered in heavy
concentration, it will require additional pre‐treatment. Additional filtration packages are available to
accommodate operations under such high suspended solids conditions. Contact WATERTEK or your local
distributor.

5|Page
 OPERATIONS & MAINTENANCE MANUAL

AWS 840-20, 50 HZ | P18013/001/03.2019| 20,000LPD

7. Avoid Drying of Membranes

Membranes, once they have been wetted, must be kept moist or mechanical damage may occur. Membranes
shipped separately from WATERTEK are sealed in a nylon bag. Membranes and unit must be stored away from
direct sun‐light in a well‐ventilated area. It must be stored in ambient temperature between 10°C and 40°C. An
air‐conditioned location is a must for prolonged membrane storage

6|Page
 OPERATIONS & MAINTENANCE MANUAL

AWS 840-20, 50 HZ | P18013/001/03.2019| 20,000LPD

EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATION FOR AWS 840‐20, 50Hz

DESIGN DETAILS

Feed Flow Rate : 2.41 m3/hr ≈ 40.17 LPM

Feed TDS : 42,000 ppm
Recovery : Approx. 35%
3
Product Flow : 0.833 m /hr ≈ 13.89 LPM
Product Quality : Less than 500 ppm @ 25°C
Type : Skid Mounted Seawater Reverse Osmosis Desalination System

Feed Pump
Quantity : 1 Number
Feed Capacity : 2.41 m3/hr @ 4.17 bar
Backwash : Manual
Brand : Grundfos
Model : CRN 3 – 7
Country of Origin : Hungary
Type : Vertical Multistage Centrifugal Pump
MOC : Stainless Steel
Power : 0.55 kW, 3Ø, 380 – 415 V, 50 Hz

PRIMARY TREATMENT

Multimedia Filter
Tag Number : MMF‐1
Quantity : 1 Number
Size : ø 18” x 65” HT
Brand : Pentair ‐ Structural
Model : 1865
Type : Vertical Cylindrical
MOC : FRP
Backwash Mode : Manual Backwash

ANTISCALANT DOSING SYSTEM

Antiscalant Dosing Pump

Tag Number : DP‐1
Quantity : 1 Number
Rated Flow @ pressure rating : 0.7 liters/hr @ 8.0 bar
Brand : Grundfos ‐ Alldos
Type : Manual Diaphragm Pump
Model : DDE 6‐10
Country of Origin : France
MOC : PP (Head)
Power : 0.019 kW, 1Ø, 230 V, 50 Hz

7|Page
 OPERATIONS & MAINTENANCE MANUAL

AWS 840-20, 50 HZ | P18013/001/03.2019| 20,000LPD

Antiscalant Dosing Tank

Tag Number : DT‐1
Quantity : 1 Number
Capacity : 75 Liters
Model : FDA‐75
Country of Origin : Germany
Type : Vertical Cylindrical
MOC : Polyethylene

MICRO FILTRATION

5µ – Cartridge Filtration
Filter Housing
Tag Number : CF‐1
Quantity : 1 Number
Dimension : 4” Dia. x 20” Long
Country of Origin : USA
MOC : Polypropylene

Filter Element
Quantity : 1 Number per housing
Dimension : 4”Diameter x 20”Length
Type : Cartridge Filter
MOC : Polypropylene

1µ – Cartridge Filtration
Filter Housing
Tag Number : CF‐2
Quantity : 1 Number
Dimension : 4” Dia. x 20” Long
Country of Origin : USA
MOC : Polypropylene

Filter Element
Quantity : 1 Number per housing
Dimension : 4”Diameter x 20”Length
Type : Cartridge Filter
MOC : Polypropylene

8|Page
 OPERATIONS & MAINTENANCE MANUAL

AWS 840-20, 50 HZ | P18013/001/03.2019| 20,000LPD

SECONDARY TREATMENT

RO System Pump
Tag Number : P‐2
Quantity : 1 Number
Capacity : 2.41 m3/hr @ 59.1 bars
Brand : CAT
Model : 7CP 6171
Country of Origin : USA
Type : Plunger
MOC : SS316 (wetted parts)
Motor : WEG
Power : 5.5 kW, 3Ø, 380‐415V, 50 Hz

RO Pressure Vessels
Tag Number : PV‐1 to 8
Quantity : 8 Numbers
Dimension : 4.6” Diameter x 56.6” Length
Brand : Pentair ‐ Codeline
Model : 40E100‐1
MOC : Filament wound Epoxy / Glass Composites
Pressure rating : 1000 psi (68.96 bar)

RO Membranes
Quantity : 8 Numbers (1 Element per Vessel)
Dimension : 4” Diameter x 40” Length
Brand : Hydranautics
Model : SWC5‐LD4040
Membrane : Spiral wound
Type : Polyamide

CHEMICAL CLEANING SYSTEM

Chemical Cleaning Pump

Tag Number : P‐3
Quantity : 1 Number
Feed Capacity : 2.0 m3/hr @ 3.0 bar
Brand : Davey
Model : XF‐192S
Country of Origin : Australia
Type : Horizontal Centrifugal Pump
MOC : Stainless Steel/GFP
Power : 1.15 kW, 1Ø, 230 V, 50 Hz

Chemical Cleaning Tank

Tag Number : TK‐1
Quantity : 1 Number
Capacity : 100 Liters
Model : FDA‐100
Country of Origin : Germany
Type : Vertical Cylindrical Tank
MOC : Polyethylene

9|Page
 OPERATIONS & MAINTENANCE MANUAL

AWS 840-20, 50 HZ | P18013/001/03.2019| 20,000LPD

INSTRUMENTS AND FAIL‐SAFE DEVICES

TAG INSTRUMENT INSTRUMENT SET MODEL

NO LOCATION SERVICE BRAND
NUMBER TYPE RANGE POINT NUMBER MOC
MMF
Pressure 0‐6 bar
1 PG1 MMF Inlet Inlet NA Aschroft 1009SW SS
Gauge (0‐85psi)
Pressure
MMF
Pressure MMF 0‐6 bar
2 PG2 Outlet NA Aschroft 1009SW SS
Gauge Outlet (0‐85psi)
Pressure
Cartridge
Cartridge
Pressure Filter 0‐6 bar
3 PG3 Filter (1M) NA Aschroft 1009SW SS
Gauge Outlet (0‐85psi)
Outlet
Pressure
Diff.
Pressure Across RO Pressure 0‐100bar
4 PG4 NA Aschroft 1009SW SS
Gauge System Across RO (0‐1400psi)
System
CIP Pump
Pressure CIP Pump 0‐6 bar
5 PG5 Discharge NA Aschroft 1009SW SS
Gauge Discharge (0‐85psi)
Pressure
Cartridge Feed
Temperature
6 TG1 Filter (1M) Water 0‐50degC NA Aschroft 30EI60 SS
Gauge
Inlet Temp.
Flowmeter RO RO Acrylic (meter
7 FM1 (Rotameter Product Product 0.5‐5.0 GPM NA Blue‐White F‐550 body) / SS316
Type) Line Flow (Floats)
Flowmeter Acrylic (meter
RO Reject RO Reject
8 FM2 (Rotameter 1.0‐10 GPM NA Blue‐White F‐550 body) / SS316
Line Flow
Type) (Floats)
Plastic
RO enclosure for
RO
Conductivity Product panel mounting
10 CM1 Product 0‐2000 ppm <500ppm Jumo dTrans CR02
Meter Water to DIN IEC
Line
TDS 61554
(Enclosure)
RO Enclosure:
RO
System 1.7 enamelled
Low Pressure System
11 LPS1 Pump 0‐3.5bar bar Danfoss KPS33 pressure die
Switch Pump
Low (25psi) cast aluminium
Suction
Pressure (GD‐AlSi 12).
RO
RO
System 62
High Pressure System Enclosure:
12 HPS1 Pump 10‐100bar bar Danfoss MBC 5100
Switch Pump AIMgSi1
High (900psi)
Discharge
Pressure

ELECTRICAL

Control Panel
Panel : Single door, relay based
MOC : Enclosure (Polyester)
Brand : Enclosure (Schneider), Components (ABB)
Cable Entry : Bottom

10 | P a g e
 OPERATIONS & MAINTENANCE MANUAL

AWS 840-20, 50 HZ | P18013/001/03.2019| 20,000LPD

Run Hour Meter

Quantity : 1 Number
Model : 4RK46
Brand : Revalco
Country of Origin : Italy
Location : Wired to high pressure pump motor

Pulsation Dampener
Quantity : 1 Number
Model : 6031.800
Brand : CAT
Country of Origin : Germany
Location : System Pump Discharge

PIPING DETAILS

Piping Details
All Low‐Pressure Piping : PVC, Sch – 80/ Flexible Hose (315psi)
Brand : Hydroseal/George Fischer / Parker

All High‐Pressure Piping : SS316 Tubing / Flexible hose (1525psi)

Brand : Sandvik / Gates

SKID DETAILS

Overall RO Skid Dimension : L 1815mm x W 650 mm x H 1400 mm

CIP Skid Dimension : L 760mm x W 640 mm x H 850 mm
Material of Construction : Stainless Steel – 316Ti

UTILITY REQUIREMENT

Total Power Required : Approx. 7.75 kW

Power Supply : 3Ø, 380 – 415 V, 50 Hz,

TERMINATION POINTS

Termination Points End Connection

1 FEED INLET 1 ‐ ½” BSPT (F)PVC
2 MMF B/W OUTLET 1” BSPT (F)PVC
3 PRODUCT OUTLET 3/4” BSPT (F)PVC
4 REJECT OUTLET 1” BSPT (F)PVC
5 CIP/FLUSHING OUTLET ½” Hose Connector
6 CIP TANK DRAIN 1” BSPT (F)PVC

11 | P a g e
 OPERATIONS & MAINTENANCE MANUAL

AWS 840-20, 50 HZ | P18013/001/03.2019| 20,000LPD

GENERAL WARRANTY

ADVANCED WATERTEK guarantees the proposed system to be free from defects in materials or workmanship
when operated in accordance with the written instructions for a period of one‐year (1) from start up or
eighteen (18) months from delivery, whichever is shorter. Parts not manufactured by ADVANCED WATERTEK
are covered by their manufacturers' warranties that are normally for 12 months. Plunger pumps are
guaranteed for 3,000 Hours or six months whichever occurs first.

It is the obligation of user to maintain Daily operating data records preferably on the forms supplied in this
Operating Manual.

Copies of the data records are to be forwarded to ADVANCED WATERTEK at the end of first month operation
and thereafter every two months. The user must notify ADVANCED WATERTEK at the first sign of change in
the operation of the ADVANCED WATERTEK system, such notification being in writing accompanied by the
immediately preceding data records.

12 | P a g e
 OPERATIONS & MAINTENANCE MANUAL

AWS 840-20, 50 HZ | P18013/001/03.2019| 20,000LPD

WARRANTY AGREEMENT

I HAVE READ THE GENERAL WARRANTY AND AGREE TO THE CONDITIONS SET OUT THEREIN

IN ADDITION, I FURTHER SPECIFICALLY AGREE TO THE FOLLOWING SPECIAL PROVISION:

THE OPERATOR OR RESPONSIBLE PERSON INCHARGE WILL STUDY THE OPERATING MANUAL AND SHALL BE AS
FAMILIAR WITH ITS CONTENTS AS IS REQUIRED TO OPERATE THE SYSTEM STRICTLY IN ACCORDANCE WITH
THE WRITTEN INSTRUCTIONS THEREIN.

NO WARRANTY CLAIM WILL BE CONSIDERED WHERE LACK OF SUCH FAMILIARITY IS APPARENT.

DISCLAIMER:

ADVANCED WATERTEK MAKES NO WARRANTIES EITHER EXPRESSED IMPLIED OR STATUTORY BEYOND WHAT
IS DECLARED AND IN NO EVENT MAY ADVANCED WATERTEK BE LIABLE IN ANY MANNER WHATSOEVER FOR
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INDIRECT DAMAGES OR CONTINGENT LIABILITY INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS
OF PROFITS OR SUITS BY A THIRD PARTY AGAINST ADVANCED WATERTEK’S CLIENT.

Signature of Purchaser .............................................................

For : ADVANCED WATERTEK .............................................................

Date …………......./ …………......./….................

WARRANTY WILL BE CONSIDERED VOID UNLESS THIS AGREEMENT IS SIGNED BY BOTH PARTIES OR BY THEIR
RESPONSIBLE AGENTS.

13 | P a g e
 OPERATIONS & MAINTENANCE MANUAL

AWS 840-20, 50 HZ | P18013/001/03.2019| 20,000LPD

SECTION 1

GENERAL INFORMATION

1. General Introduction to R.O.

2. Principles of Reverse Osmosis

3. Definition of Terms

4. Variable of Output

5. The R.O membrane and Filter Disposal

14 | P a g e
 OPERATIONS & MAINTENANCE MANUAL

AWS 840-20, 50 HZ | P18013/001/03.2019| 20,000LPD

GENERAL INFORMATION

Please read this owner's manual carefully before attempting installation or operation. A subsequent better
understanding of the system will ensure optimum performance and longer service life from the system.

All WATERTEK reverse osmosis desalination systems are designed and engineered to function as a complete
working unit. Generally speaking the performance of each component within the unit is dependent on the
component prior to it and governs the performance of all components after it. Proper performance of the
system is thus dependent upon proper operation of every single component within the system.

The intent of this manual is to allow the operator to become familiar with each component within the R.O.
system. By understanding the function, importance, and normal operation of each component within each
subsystem of the unit, the operator can readily diagnose minor problems. Such problems, when they first
develop, usually require minor maintenance and are easily corrected. Left unattended, though, a problem in
one component will affect the rest of the system and lead to further required repairs.

Please take time to read this entire manual several times.

1. OSMOSIS AND REVERSE OSMOSIS

A. THE PROBLEM: Osmosis is the diffusion of two miscible (mixable) solutions through a semi
permeable membrane in such a manner as to equalize their concentration. (By allowing a
lesser concentration ‐ potable water to naturally diffuse through a semi permeable
membrane into a higher concentration ‐sea or brackish water)

Therefore, Seawater or Brackish water cannot naturally diffuse through a semi permeable
membrane to provide potable water.

B. THE SOLUTION: Reverse Osmosis, overcome this natural phenomenon.

By forcing Sea or Brackish water (under high pressure) through a semi permeable
membrane, potable water can be produced.
Reverse Osmosis Desalination Systems make possible the once impossible: potable water
from undrinkable water sources.

15 | P a g e
 OPERATIONS & MAINTENANCE MANUAL

AWS 840-20, 50 HZ | P18013/001/03.2019| 20,000LPD

2. PRINCIPLES OF REVERSE OSMOSIS

2.1 OSMOSIS: Osmosis can be defined as the spontaneous passage of a liquid from a
dilute to a more concentrated solution across an ideal semi permeable membrane which
allows the passage of the solvent (water) but not the dissolved solids (solutes).

2.2 OSMOTIC PRESSURE: The transfer of the water from one side of the membrane to
the other will continue until the head or pressure is large enough to prevent any net transfer
of the solvent (water) to the concentrated solution. At equilibrium, the quantity of water
passing in either direction is equal, and the pressure is then defined as the Osmotic Pressure
of the solution having that particular concentration of dissolved solids.

2.3 REVERSE OSMOSIS: As described above, water will continue to flow from the pure
water side of the membrane to the saline solution side until the pressure created by the rise
in the water level on the saline solution side of the membrane equals the osmotic pressure.
If the pressure of the saline solution is increased until it exceeds the osmotic pressure, water
is forced to flow through the membrane from the solution containing the higher salt
concentration into the solution with the lower salt concentration. The process is called
Reverse Osmosis.

2.4 SPIRAL‐WOUND MEMBRANE: The spiral‐wound membrane consists of one or more

membrane envelops each form by enclosing a channelized product water carrying material
between two large flat membrane sheets. The membrane envelope is sealed on three edges
with a special adhesive and attached with the adhesive to a small diameter pipe to form a
cylinder 2½, 4, 6, 8, inches in diameter and up to 60 inches in length. A polypropylene screen
is used to form the feed water channel between the membrane envelopes. A fiberglass wrap
is applied to the membrane element to maintain the cylindrical configuration. The center
tube is also permeate (product water) collecting channel. Several elements may be
connected in series within a single pressure vessel.

2.5 COMPACTION: Some densification of the membrane structure may take place
while operating at elevated pressures, above 1000 psi. The change is known as compaction
and is accompanied by a reduction in the water permeation rate.

16 | P a g e
 OPERATIONS & MAINTENANCE MANUAL

AWS 840-20, 50 HZ | P18013/001/03.2019| 20,000LPD

2.6 WATER TEMPERATURE EFFECT: As stated earlier, the product water flow through
the membrane is significantly affected by the water temperature, at any given pressure this
flow increases with increasing water temperature and is reduced at lower temperatures

2.7 PRESSURE: The operating pressure has a direct effect on product water quality and
quantity. Both factors will increase as the system pressure increases (within design limits).
The system must be operated at the lowest pressure required to achieve the designed
product water flow rate. This parameter also affects compaction, which proceeds at a faster
rate at higher pressures as well as at higher temperatures.

3. DEFINITION OF TERMS

The process water flow in Reverse Osmosis Desalination systems can be divided into three basic
streams:
Feed: The filtered, raw water supplied to machine.
Permeate: The purified water produced by forcing the feed through the semi‐permeable membranes
where it is desalinated for use, also called “Product”.
Concentrate: The discarded waste water containing the concentrated salts removed from the feed
water, also called “Reject”. Disposal of the reject water should be considered according to the legal
guidelines, local and federal regulations in the applicable jurisdiction.

These bold terms will be used in all further descriptions.

4. VARIABILITY OF OUTPUT

The nominal daily output stated in m3/Day as depicted in the machine specification is a guide only
and is applicable to when the membranes are new and operated under standard conditions of feed
salinity, temperature and recovery rate.

Feed Water Salinity:

The standard nominal salinity selected by various membrane manufacturers for Seawater is normally
2,000 ppm of total dissolved solids (TDS), it is important to note that as the TDS rises the product
(permeate) flow rate will fall.

17 | P a g e
 OPERATIONS & MAINTENANCE MANUAL

AWS 840-20, 50 HZ | P18013/001/03.2019| 20,000LPD

Feed Water Temperature:

A significant drop in the product (permeate) flow rate can occur when feed water temperature falls
0
below 25 C., an increase in water temperature will cause the product flow rate to increase and the
concentrate (reject) to decrease hence leading over recovery. Prolonged over recovery will cause
serious membrane deterioration hence drop in quantity and quality of the product water.

Recovery Rate:

The recovery rate is a term used to describe the volume of permeates recovered as a proportion of
the total feed water supplied to the system. If the feed flow rate is 40.17 LPM and the product
(permeate) is 13.89 LPM then the recovery rate would be:

Recovery Rate = Permeate Flow Rate / Feed Flow Rate x 100

Recovery Rate = 13.89 / 40.17 x 100

Recovery Rate = 34.57 %

Please note the recovery rate is subject to various factors e.g. water salinity, water temperature, feed flow
rate, age of membrane etc. It is important that the recovery rate stated in the specification section is not
exceeded. (For Model AWS 840‐20, recovery rate is approx. 35 %).

‘NEVER OVER‐RECOVER’
I.E. NEVER EXCEED 13.89 LPM OF PERMEATE (PRODUCT)
OVER‐RECOVERY MAY CAUSE SEVERE IRREVERSIBLE MEMBRANE SCALING/FOULING.

5. R.O. MEMBRANE and CARTRIDGE/BAG FILTERS DISPOSAL

Users are responsible for ensuring that R.O. membranes and cartridges/bag filters are disposed of in
accordance with all local and federal regulations in the applicable jurisdiction. Used R.O. membranes
and cartridge/bag filter typically can be disposed of as municipal wastes, provided that they do not
contain any free liquids or hazardous substances at levels that exceed regulatory thresholds.

18 | P a g e
 OPERATIONS & MAINTENANCE MANUAL

AWS 840-20, 50 HZ | P18013/001/03.2019| 20,000LPD

SECTION 2

ENVIRONMENT, HEALTH & SAFETY

Advanced Watertek Industries continuously strives to minimize the impact of our products and our
operations on the environment. We also are committed to Health and Safety of the various stakeholders.

We advise our clients to:

1. Dispose off the reject water (Concentrate water) in accordance to the local regulatory norms. In
most places it is illegal to dump the water to the soil without proper regulatory approvals.

2. Dispose off other wastes such as RO membranes; filter bags and/or cartridges in a responsible
manner along with regular municipal waste, provided they do not contain any free liquids or
hazardous substances.

3. Under no circumstances should chemicals be dumped into the drains or into the soil. Chemicals
including expired or off spec chemicals and chemical containers / pails should be disposed off
with approval from local authority and using authorized service providers.

4. Always use your PPE (gloves, masks, coveralls, goggles) when handling any chemicals.

5. The system should only be operated by competent operator. An untrained operator can cause
accident/injury or can damage the system. For training, please contact us.

6. A combination of sound level that exceeds 90dB of sound and duration of exposure is a hazard
even with short duration. Ear muff should be used to ensure the reduction of noise to an
acceptable level, while allowing for safety and communication.

7. Follow instructions and guidelines for operating the machine as detailed in the O&M Manual.

8. For any queries please contact our service team.

19 | P a g e
 OPERATIONS & MAINTENANCE MANUAL

AWS 840-20, 50 HZ | P18013/001/03.2019| 20,000LPD

SECTION 3
SIGNIFICANT COMPONENTS DESCRIPTION

1. System’s Skid

2. Feed Pump

3. Pre‐Treatment

4. System Pump

5. RO Pressure Vessel & Membranes

6. Chemical Cleaning System

7. Fail‐Safe Devices

Pressure Switches
Pulsation Dampener

8. Instruments

Pressure Gauge
Temperature Gauge
Flow Meters
Conductivity Meter
Run Hour Meter

9. Pressure Control Valve

10. Piping

20 | P a g e
 OPERATIONS & MAINTENANCE MANUAL

AWS 840-20, 50 HZ | P18013/001/03.2019| 20,000LPD

SIGNIFICANT COMPONENT’S DESCRIPTION

1. System Skid
The Sea Water Reverse Osmosis Desalination System is built on a quality 316Ti stainless steel skid.

2. Feed/ Backwash Pump

A feed pump is provided in order to drive the raw water through the filtration units and on to the suction of
the RO system pump.

The feed pump is flooded suction Multistage Centrifugal type, closed coupled to a suitable motor. The pump is
protected via a strainer, fitted on the suction inlet.

The feed pump is expected to deliver approx. 40.17 LPM at 4.17 bar to the RO system pump inlet at a rated
pressure above the low pressure cut off. The feed pump is also used for backwashing of the multimedia filters.

3. Pre‐Treatment

 Multimedia Filter

One Multimedia Filter of 18” Dia. x 65” Height, manually back washable is provided. The vessel is filled with
different layers of media. Multimedia filters are provided in order to trap the presence of physical impurities,
such as Suspended Solids present in the water.

The filter has four manual ball valves; the provision of four valves enables the operator to perform various
functions by arranging the valves to conduct service and cleaning operation.

Daily backwashing for ten minutes to flush out trapped sediments, if any, and disturbs any bacteria
attempting to live in the filter. MMF backwash should be initiated every after 24 hrs. of MMF running in
service mode or if feed pressure increased by 9 PSI (Approx. 0.6 bar), whichever occurs earlier.

A Chart is fixed on the body of the filter depicting the valves to be opened and closed to perform the various
operations, i.e. service and backwash.

The entire filter and its components are non‐metal to avoid corrosion leading to possible fouling of the
membrane.

MULTI MEDIA FILTER CHART

Operation M1 M2 M3 M4
Normal Close Open Close Open
Backwash Open Close Open Close

21 | P a g e
 OPERATIONS & MAINTENANCE MANUAL

AWS 840-20, 50 HZ | P18013/001/03.2019| 20,000LPD

 Antiscalant Dosing System

Existing Antiscalant dosing system is consists of a diaphragm pump and a storage tank. The pump is manually
controlled.

The dosing system is located before the cartridge filter system the dosing rate depends on the raw water
quality and the level of recovery.

The dosing of anti‐scalant in the feed water delays the precipitation of certain scaling material on the
membrane surface e.g. Calcium Carbonate and Calcium Sulphate. As a result, the time between chemical
cleaning can be extended dramatically.

The dosing of chemical to be filled manually when the level of dosing tank is low. Normally the anti‐scalant is
diluted with permeate water. In normal operation, one batch of Antiscalant solution will last for 30 Days
(approx.). Normally the Antiscalant is diluted with permeate

 Micro Filtration

The micro filtration system consists of two cartridge filter housings (holding) one x 5‐micron cartridge filter
followed by one x 1‐micron cartridge Filter.

IT IS IMPORTANT TO ENSURE THAT THE FILTER CHAMBER O‐RING IS PROPERLY SEATED, EACH TIME THE
UNIT IS REASSEMBLED OR WATER LEAK WILL OCCUR.

REPLACE CARTRIDGE FILTER WHENEVER FLOW METER INDICATES THE SLIGHTEST REDUCTION IN FLOW,
FAILURE TO ACT PROMPTLY WILL CAUSE PUMP CAVITATION. THE HIGH‐PRESSURE PUMP IS THE MOST
EXPENSIVE COMPONENT IN THE ENTIRE SYSTEM.

AS SOON AS PRESSURE DROP ACROSS CARTRIDGE FILTERS IS INCREASED BY 0.3 BAR FROM INITIAL READING
(e.g. IF INITIAL ΔP IS 0.2 BAR THEN CARTRIDGE FILTER ELEMENTS SHALL BE REPLACED AT ΔP 0.5 BAR, i.e 0.2
+ 0.3 = 0.5) OR EVERY 300 HOURS WHICHEVER OCCURS FIRST.

CARTRIDGE FILTERS SHOULD ALSO BE REPLACED AFTER RO MEMBRANES HAVE BEEN CHEMICALLY CLEANED.

4. System Pump

A high – pressure pump is always required in a sea water RO system in order to overcome osmotic pressure of
sea water. We have provided a high‐pressure pump which is a stainless‐steel plunger type pump, the pump is
oil lubricated. The model selected is rated at 40.17 LPM up to 59.1 bar.

A minimum inlet pressure of 1.7 bar must be maintained at all times, which permits the pump to start at
preset level, which prevents the possibility of pump failure in the event of feed supply failure. The pump is
protected via low‐ and high‐pressure cutout switches. The pump is directly coupled to 5.5 kW motor at 50 Hz.

ALWAYS ALTER THE OPERATING PRESSURE SLOWLY.

For further system pump details, please refer to the enclosed installation and repair manual.

22 | P a g e
 OPERATIONS & MAINTENANCE MANUAL

AWS 840-20, 50 HZ | P18013/001/03.2019| 20,000LPD

A COMBINATION OF SOUND LEVEL AND DURATION OF EXPOSURE IS A HAZARD EVEN WITH SHORT
DURATION. A PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (PPE) SHOULD BE PROVIDED i.e., EAR PLUG / EAR
MUFF IN THE AREA TO ENSURE THE REDUCTION OF NOISE TO AN ACCEPTABLE LEVEL, WHILE ALLOWING
FOR SAFETY AND COMMUNICATION.

5. RO Pressure Vessels & Membranes

The filtered & pressurized water will pass to the RO membrane elements housed in pressure vessels and will
be desalinated.

The pressure vessels are of 4” Dia x 1 element each made of filament‐wound fiberglass, rated at 69 bar
(1000psi). The vessel selected is of the highest quality, such vessels normally offer years of trouble‐free
operation. Normally no maintenance is required.

The TFC type membrane has a typical salt rejection capacity of up to 99.5%, this type of membrane is most
suitable for the high TDS water.

Replacement of the membrane is recommended whenever, after cleaning, the product flow volume or
quality is unacceptable or if the differential pressure increases.

6. Chemical Cleaning System

Cleaning of the membrane is to be conducted whenever there is a drop of 10 to 15% in the normal product
flow rate. The system has to be cleaned once in 3 months with acid and alkaline cleaning alternately, in order
to avoid scaling or fouling in membrane surfaces.

A dedicated Chemical Cleaning Pump rated at 2m3/hr up to 3 bar along with Chemical Cleaning Tank, of 100
Liters capacity is provided for flushing and chemical cleaning of the membranes.

Chemical cleaning operation is manual.

7. Fail – Safe Devices

 For System Pump

The system pump (High pressure pump) is protected via a low‐pressure switch which will trip the motor at
approximately <1.7 bar (25 psi). The system pump is also protected against over pressurizing, a high‐pressure
switch is set at 62 bar (900 psi) and it will turn off the motor upon reaching this maximum operating pressure.
Naturally, an overload relay is also provided to protect the motor.

A pulsation dampener is also provided at the outlet of the system pump, in order to regulate flow to the system
and to avoid damage due to vibration.

23 | P a g e
 OPERATIONS & MAINTENANCE MANUAL

AWS 840-20, 50 HZ | P18013/001/03.2019| 20,000LPD

8. Instruments

Proper monitoring of the RO system will prolong the life of entire system.
Advanced Watertek Model AWS 840‐20 is equipped with the following:

 Pressure Gauge

One (1) pressure gauge each are provided at the inlet and outlet of MMF to establish the differential pressure
(Approx. 0.6 bar maximum to initiate backwash operation)

One (1) pressure gauge mounted in the wet panel is provided at outlet of 1micron cartridge filter in order to
establish differential across cartridge filter. (Approx 0.3 bar maximum for replacement of cartridge filter)

One (1) pressure gauge mounted in the wet panel is provided across the RO membranes in order to establish
differential pressure across the membranes. The system pressure pre module indicates the pressure at the point of
entry at the first pressure vessel and post is indicates the pressure at the point of reject outlet of last pressure
vessel.

One (1) pressure gauge is provided at the outlet of CIP pump to check pressure during CIP and flushing of the
system.

 Temperature Gauge

One (1) temperature gauge is provided before 05M Cartridge Filter in order to measure temperature of the
feed water.

 Flow Meter – Rota meter Type

The rota meter type unit measures the flow rate of the RO permeate and RO reject line.

RO permeate should be maintained at approx. 13.89 LPM

The reject flow rate shall indicate approx. 26.28 LPM

Note: Total feed flow rate must be constant at 40.17 LPM at all times.

 Conductivity Meter

RO Product water salinity can be measured with the help of conductivity meter. The probe is located at the
RO permeate line and this digital meter will display the water conductivity in the conductivity meter. This
is also mounted on a wet panel.

 Total Hour Run Meter

The total run hour meter is mounted at the control panel. It records the total run hour of the system, and
from it the frequency of cartridge replacement and chemical cleaning can be determined.

9. PRESSURE CONTROL VALVE

The system operating pressure is regulated by turning the needle valve’s (NV1) handle clockwise to increase
the pressure and counter clockwise to reduce it (ALWAYS DO IT SLOWLY), i.e., gradual increase.

24 | P a g e
 OPERATIONS & MAINTENANCE MANUAL

AWS 840-20, 50 HZ | P18013/001/03.2019| 20,000LPD

The operating pressure is subject to the salinity and the temperature of the raw water. Assuming salinity is
constant, higher the temperature, the lower the pressure vice versa lower the temperature higher the
pressure.

NEVER CLOSE PRESSURE CONTROL VALVE FULLY

10. PIPING

All low‐pressure piping is made up of PVC material – SCH 80.

All high‐pressure piping and fitting are SS316L tubing/wire breaded rubber hose.

The exceptions are the suction and discharge hoses on the high‐pressure pump; they are rubber on the
suction and discharge sides. They act as a suction stabilizer and a pulsation dampener respectively.

25 | P a g e
 OPERATIONS & MAINTENANCE MANUAL

AWS 840-20, 50 HZ | P18013/001/03.2019| 20,000LPD

SECTION 4

SYSTEM INSTALLATION

Refer to the following drawings in Section 12 of this O&M manual.

Drawing No Drawing Title

P18013‐I‐001 Process and Instrumentation Diagram (P&ID)
P18013‐P‐001 RO Skid General Arrangement Drawing
P18013‐P‐002 CIP Skid General Arrangement Drawing
P18013‐P‐003 MMF General Arrangement Drawing
P18013‐E‐001 Control Panel Wiring Diagram

When installing the unit, be certain that the following requirements are satisfied.

A. LOCATION

1. We recommend you mount the Skid on a level solid base to prevent possible vibration,
noise or vibration absorbing mats may be used.

2. Locate the unit away from direct sunshine in a well‐ventilated location. Ensure the
system is protected from weather, excessive dust, salt spray etc. We strongly
recommend air‐conditioned environment.

3. When installing on a vessel/rig, chose a location away from excessive heat, vibration e.g.
away from the engine room, DC generator.

CAUTION: The feed pump fittings are to be PVC, never use ferrous pipes or fittings. As this will cause
membrane fouling and premature failure of membrane. Quality PVC pipes and fittings are acceptable, if
approved by the owner / class. If not then use SS316L pipes and fittings.

CAUTION: Intake should be via fine strainer to protect feed pump and prolong life of cartridge filters.

B. SYSTEM CONNECTIONS

The Reverse Osmosis (RO) plant is a factory tested, pre‐piped, pre‐wired package. Additional
pipework required will be the interconnecting pipework between the Skids and to the
platform/Rig/Vessels services, i.e. suction/overboard discharges, gravity drains and potable
water storage tanks (if any).

Termination Points End Connection

1 FEED INLET 1 ‐ ½” BSPT (F)PVC
2 MMF B/W OUTLET 1” BSPT (F)PVC
3 PRODUCT OUTLET 3/4” BSPT (F)PVC
4 REJECT OUTLET 1” BSPT (F)PVC
5 CIP/FLUSHING OUTLET ½” Hose Connector
6 CIP TANK DRAIN 1” BSPT (F)PVC
CAUTION: Do not allow backpressure at the product (permeate) side.

26 | P a g e
 OPERATIONS & MAINTENANCE MANUAL

AWS 840-20, 50 HZ | P18013/001/03.2019| 20,000LPD

Do not place any valves in the product or reject line, water must flow freely and easily to the
product tank and back to sea, respectively.

Product tank should not be more than two meters higher than product outlet, otherwise back
pressure in product line will occur which is not allowed.

The product tank must have atmospheric vent, ensure the flow line ends above the level in the
tank to prevent back flow.

Both product and reject outlets are to be provided with PVC non‐return valves.

C. ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

Flexible cables are provided.

The system is fully factory wired and requires only a power source.

If power source is a generator, the Generator must be sized correctly to take care of the starting
current demand.

The electrical system is internally protected via thermal overload relays.

Electrical supply required : 3 Phase, 380/415V, 50 Hz

Power Requirements : Approx. 7.75 kW

Power Requirements
No. Item Power (kW)
1 Feed Pump, P‐1 0.55
2 Anti‐scalant Dosing Pump, DP‐1 0.019
3 System Pump, P‐2 5.5
4 Chemical Cleaning Pump, P‐3 1.15
5 Miscellaneous Loads 0.5

27 | P a g e
 OPERATIONS & MAINTENANCE MANUAL

AWS 840-20, 50 HZ | P18013/001/03.2019| 20,000LPD

SECTION 5

INITIAL SYSTEM STARTING UP

It is recommended that the initial start up is conducted by WATERTEK personnel or an authorized

distributor.

Please note that it is not uncommon to encounter several minor problems during the start up period.
For assistance, refer to the trouble shooting section.

After pressure test of MMF vessel and filter media loading, please follow below procedure for the
initial system start up.

1. Ensure suction valve (BV1) of feed pump is open; strainer on pump suction is free from debris. Ensure
feed pump is getting a required positive head with adequate water.

NOTE:
The required inlet pressure is 1 bar, please ensure that inlet pressure do not exceed 1 bar (15 psi).

2. Open valves M1 and M3 and close the other valves. Start feed pump and backwash the multimedia
minimum for 2 hrs. to flush the filter media properly.

3. After completing the back‐wash operation, stop feed pump, close valve M1 and M3 and open valve M2 &
M4.

4. Flush the system properly (piping & RO membrane pressure vessel) with filtered non‐chlorinated water
and load the RO membranes.

5. Ensure valve NV1, BV2 & BV3 are fully open prior to proceed next step. All other sample & drain valves
remain closed.

6. Ensure anti‐scalant chemical is prepared in tank, dosing pump is running well and dosing rate set as per
requirements. Minor fine‐tuning can be done during normal operation to stabilize the system.

7. Start feed pump. The feed pump discharge pressure will reach approximately 4.17 bar.

8. Start anti‐scalant dosing pumps and ensure dosing rate is correct.

9. After getting sufficient pressure at the inlet of system pump (PG‐3), Start the RO system pump (P‐2) and
check the direction of rotation is correct or not. It should be clockwise from pump end and run the system
pump for 30 minutes for the initial flushing of RO membranes.

10. After flushing the RO membranes for 30 minutes, close manual ball valve BV2 & BV3 and slowly turn the
pressure control valve (NV1) in clockwise direction to increase the system operating pressure. (Never
exceed 62 bar).

11. Adjust the pressure control valve (NV1) till the product flow meter level indicates 13.89 LPM and reject
flow meter indicates 26.28 LPM at the same time outlet pressure at reject line will be approximately 1 bar
(15.0 psi). Also ensure the system feed pressure is below 62 bar (900 psi).

28 | P a g e
 OPERATIONS & MAINTENANCE MANUAL

AWS 840-20, 50 HZ | P18013/001/03.2019| 20,000LPD

12. Compare your results with our WET TEST report included in this manual (Slight variations are acceptable).

After stabilizing the system in normal mode, ensure the following valves position for the normal operation
of system. This will remain unchanged for the normal operation of system at any point of time.

NORMAL OPERATION VALVE ARRANGEMENT

OPEN BV1 M2 M4 NV1

CLOSE BV2 BV3 BV4 BV6 BV7 M1 M3

Notes:

During normal operation NV1 will remain at its original throttled position set at the time of initial
commissioning.

All sample and drain valves will always remain closed unless otherwise specified.

IMPORTANT
WATERTEK AWS 840‐20 is rated at a maximum of 13.89 LPM of product.
Do not exceed the maximum product allowed as this will lead to rapid membrane scaling.

NOTE: Please refer “Valve Schedule” in P&ID for complete valve list/details.

29 | P a g e
 OPERATIONS & MAINTENANCE MANUAL

AWS 840-20, 50 HZ | P18013/001/03.2019| 20,000LPD

SECTION 6

FLUSHING PROCEDURES

Seawater RO System must be protected when not in operation.

The procedure to protect the entire system is simple, the key to protecting the system while not in
operation is

“FLUSHING WITH FILTERED RAW WATER”

The entire system must be flushed with filtered sea water, each time the system is turned off. The
flushing process will enhance the life span of the entire system.

Whenever system restarts after shutdown, arrange the Valve settings as below and start feed pump (P‐1)
and run the flushing operation for 5 min:

FLUSHING OPERATION VALVE ARRANGEMENT (WITH FILTERED RAW WATER)

OPEN BV1 M2 M4 BV2 BV3 NV1

CLOSE BV4 BV6 BV7 M1 M3

Note: During flushing operations of system NV1 will remain at its original throttled position set at
the time of initial commissioning.

All sample and drain valves will always remain closed unless otherwise specified.

If system requires shutdown up to 72 hours, then flushing should be done with RO product water instead
of raw water and for longer duration (say more than 3 days), the entire system must be preserved with
preservative chemicals. For flushing with permeate water, ensure valves are arranged as below and run
the CIP pump (P‐3). DO NOT RUN FEED PUMP (P‐1).

PERMEATE FLUSHING OPERATION VALVE ARRANGEMENT

OPEN BV1 M2 M4 BV2 BV3 BV6 BV7 NV1

CLOSE BV4 M1 M3

Note: If system is preserved for long duration then please refer below preservation procedure for the
flushing of membranes.

30 | P a g e
 OPERATIONS & MAINTENANCE MANUAL

AWS 840-20, 50 HZ | P18013/001/03.2019| 20,000LPD

THE PROCEDURE OF PRESERVATION IS AS FOLLOWS:

1. Fill the chemical cleaning tank (TK‐1) with fresh permeate water prior to shut down the system via
opening SV1. Ensure water is NOT chlorinated.

2. Connect CIP pump (P‐3) outlet to BV7 with flexible hose and arrange the manual valves as per
“PERMEATE FLUSHING OPERATION VALVE ARRANGEMENT”. Start CIP pump (P‐3) and run the flushing
operation for 5 min or till the tank drains.

3. Complete the normal shut down procedures after flushing the system with permeate water.

4. Refill the chemical cleaning tank (TK‐1) with RO permeates water (from the storage tank). Ensure
water is not chlorinated.

4. Pour preservative chemical in the tank and dissolve preservative in the tank. The ratio of preservative
chemical must not exceed 0.5 % i.e. for 100 L of water add 0.5 kg of membrane preservative. Mix the
preservative thoroughly, ensure it is totally dissolved.

5. Arrange manual valve as per “PERMEATE FLUSHING OPERATION VALVE ARRANGEMENT” and run the
CIP pump (P‐3), at 2 ‐ 2.5 bar pressure and pass solution through RO membranes. Once all preservative
solution passes through RO membranes, stop chemical cleaning pump and seal all inlets and outlets i.e.
raw water feed, product and reject outlets, flushing outlet by closing manual valves. Ensure no leaks from
anywhere.

6. Keep the system away from direct sunlight and ensure Temperature should not exceed 300 C during
whole preservation period.

7. The system may now be left unused for 3 months.

8. When the RO system is ready to be returned to service, flush the system for approximately one hour
using low‐pressure filtered raw water. To run the flushing operation, arrange the Valve settings manually
as per “FLUSHING WITH FILTERED RAW WATER VALVE ARRANGEMENT” and start feed pump (P‐1).

9. After flushing the system, stop feed pump and close valves BV2, BV3 slowly to run system in normal
operation.

S.N. The best method to preserve the system is to run it every day for approximately 30 minutes.
This will flush any breeding bacteria and will keep all mechanical components in good working
order.

31 | P a g e
 OPERATIONS & MAINTENANCE MANUAL

AWS 840-20, 50 HZ | P18013/001/03.2019| 20,000LPD

SECTION 7

CHEMICAL CLEANING PROCEDURES

CHEMICAL CLEANING IS COMPLETELY MANUAL OPERATION. PRESENCE OF OPERATOR AND CONTINOUS

MONITORING OF CHEMICAL CLEANING OPERATION IS MANDATORY.

NEVER START THE FEED AND SYSTEM PUMP DURING CHEMICAL CLEANING OPERATION, RUN THE CHEMICAL
CLEANING PUMP ONLY IN CHEMICAL CLEANING MODE.

Note: Before starting the chemical cleaning, operator should make sure that sufficient chlorine free RO
product/fresh water is stored. If CIP tank capacity is not enough then another storage to be arranged prior
to start CIP and then follow below steps.

A preventive cleaning procedure is recommended after every 2,000 hours of operation. Or every three
months, whichever occurs first. Normally the membrane system should be cleaned whenever;

1. The permeate flow rate drops by 10%.

2. The permeate conductivity increases by 10%.

3. The pre / post system pressure increase by 15% compared with initial performance. (Provided the
facilities to measure both are available).

All of the above data to be based on the system’s normal parameters i.e. steady raw water salinity, steady
temperature, steady operating pressure.

The AWS 840‐20 utilizes the chemical cleaning pump (P‐3), XF‐192S, 1.15 kW

Cleaning procedures are as follows:

1. Connect CIP pump outlet to BV6 and chemical return line from BV4 to chemical cleaning tank
(TK‐1) with flexible hose. Also connect flexible hose to SV1 and fill the chemical cleaning tank
(TK‐1) with fresh untreated permeates water prior to shut down the system. Ensure water is NOT
chlorinated

2. Shutdown the entire system and arrange the Valve settings manually as per “PERMEATE
FLUSHING OPERATION VALVE ARRANGEMENT” and start CIP Pump (P‐3). Flush the system with
permeate water using sufficient quantity of water (minimum 15 L/membrane) and stop the
pump.

3. Ensure new cartridge filters elements are placed in five and one micron housing.

4. Refill the chemical cleaning tank (TK‐1) with fresh UNTREATED permeates water (from the
storage tank if any chemical is NOT added in product water). Ensure water is NOT chlorinated.

5. Watertek supplies two basic cleaning chemicals:

 Alkaline Cleaner
 Acidic Cleaner

32 | P a g e
 OPERATIONS & MAINTENANCE MANUAL

AWS 840-20, 50 HZ | P18013/001/03.2019| 20,000LPD

Both are in powder form. The ratio is 2.5 kg of cleaning powder to every 100 liters of water, i.e.,
2.5 kgs of cleaning powder for 100 L of water.

6. Pour Alkali cleaner first and dissolve it properly in the tank. Ensure that chemical is totally
dissolved.

7. Make sure that all valves are positioned as shown in below chart. Start CIP pump (P‐3) and
circulate the solution.

CIP OPERATION VALVE ARRANGEMENTOPERATION

BV6 BV7 NV1 BV2 BV4

OPEN
BV1 M2 M4 ‐ ‐

CLOSE BV3 M1 M3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐

Note: During chemical cleaning operations NV1 will remain at its original throttled position set at the
time of initial commissioning.

All sample and drain valves will always remain closed unless otherwise specified.
st nd rd
8. Total duration of Alkaline cleaning is 3hours. 1 hour circulation, 2 hour soaking, 3 hour
0
circulation. During circulation solution temperature should not exceed 45 C.

9. Upon completing above three steps drain out all solution. Return all connections and valves to
normal position “FLUSHING WITH FILTERED RAW WATER VALVE ARRANGEMENT” for Flushing
with filtered raw water.

10. Change the cartridge filters in the five‐ and one‐micron housing, start feed pump and flush the
system for 15‐20 min. with filtered sea water at low pressure.

NOTE: IN BETWEEN ALKALINE AND ACID CLEANING WATERMAKER SHOULD RUN FOR 50HOURS.

11. Once flushing is completed, stop the feed pump and slowly return the system to normal
operating mode by following normal operation valve arrangement. Run the system in normal
mode.

12. After running the system 50 hours, if performance of system is back to normal, then no further
action is required. If performance of system is not back to normal then acid cleaning should be
performed.

13. In preventive mode, every 2.000 hours or every 3 months whichever occurs first, first cleaning
should be done with alkaline solution, then alternate acidic cleaning for the next preventive
cleaning and so on every 2000 hours or 3 months.

33 | P a g e
 OPERATIONS & MAINTENANCE MANUAL

AWS 840-20, 50 HZ | P18013/001/03.2019| 20,000LPD

In corrective mode (if permeate flow rate drops by 10%, permeate conductivity increases by 10%
or pressure over the membranes increases by 15%), starts with alkaline cleaning run the system
for 48 hours, if performance is back to normal, no further action is required. If figures are not
back to normal acid cleaning should be performed.

In any mode, never use both chemicals at the same time.

WARNING:
WHILE PERFORMING CHEMICAL CLEANING THE OPERATOR MUST BE PRESENT AT ALL TIMES.

IMPORTANT:
FOR FEW HOURS, FOLLOWING CHEMICAL CLEANING, YOU MAY ENCOUNTER POOR SALT
REJECTION, NORMAL PERFORMANCE WILL BE RESTORED WITHIN 25‐50 HOURS

34 | P a g e
 OPERATIONS & MAINTENANCE MANUAL

AWS 840-20, 50 HZ | P18013/001/03.2019| 20,000LPD

SECTION 8

CONTROL PHILOSOPHY – RELAY BASED

The system is designed for manual control. But necessary interlocks are provided for protecting system
from damage. Operator assistance is required for fault free operation.

1. Filter Feed Pump (P‐1)

 Provided with 3‐position selector switch (Backwash/OFF/Normal)
 Starting is manually by putting the selector switch in Normal mode.
 Manual Backwash

2. Antiscalant dosing pump (DP‐1)

 Start & Stop Interlock with P‐2.
 Stops locally, when dosing tank level goes below the low level
(interlocked with inbuilt level switch)

3. System Pump ( P‐2)

 Provided with 2 position selector switch (ON/OFF)
 If system pump is under maintenance, please refer notes before starting the plant.
 When the switch position is in ON condition, the pump starts after a 30
Seconds time delay, after low pressure switch (LPS1) cut off.
 Interlocked with feed pump run feedback and low‐pressure switch.

4. Chemical cleaning (P‐3)

 Manual operation
 Starting is manually by putting CIP MCB in ‘ON’ position.

5. Flushing
 Manual operation

6. Product Conductivity Meter

 Interlocked with system high pressure
 Indication and control
 Plant will shut down if conductivity is higher than 500 ppm.

7. Panel Indications are provided for the following

 Feed pressure low (LPS1)

 Product salinity high
 System pressure high (HPS 1)
 Feed pump Run & Trip
 System pump Run & Trip
 Panel live

35 | P a g e
 OPERATIONS & MAINTENANCE MANUAL

AWS 840-20, 50 HZ | P18013/001/03.2019| 20,000LPD

8. Plant Shutdown conditions is as follows

Time delay in
TAG Trip (package
Sr. No. DESCRIPTION Action Set point seconds (for Trip
NUMBER shutdown)
only)
Immediate
1 P‐1 Feed Pump tripped
shutdown
_  0
High pressure pump Immediate
2 P‐2
tripped shutdown
_  0
HPP suction low Immediate 0
3 LPS 1
pressure shutdown
< 1.7 bar 
HPP discharge Immediate 0
4 HPS 1
pressure high shutdown
> 62 bar 
Immediate 300 sec
5 CM1 Product salinity high
shutdown
> 500 ppm 
Antiscalant
Antiscalant dosing
6 LS dosing pump _ _ 0
tank low level
stops (locally)
Emergency Shut Immediate
7 ESD
Down shutdown  0

Note: ‐
 If low pressure in not active within 1 min (adjustable timer) after feed pump starts, the plant will shut down.
 Emergency switch is provided in the control panel.
 Sequential startup of feed pump followed by system pump is possible, if both switches are in ON position with respect
to the start‐up conditions.
 If system pump is under maintenance, following steps shall be followed, before the system starts,
 Put System pump MPCB in OFF position till the pump is fixed.
 Once maintenance is over, Put system pump MPCB back to ON condition.

36 | P a g e
 OPERATIONS & MAINTENANCE MANUAL

AWS 840-20, 50 HZ | P18013/001/03.2019| 20,000LPD

SECTION 9

PREVENTIVE / ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

1. Data Logging:

THE LOG SHEET AT SECTION 14 OF THIS MANUAL SHOULD BE COMPLETED ON DAILY BASIS. THE
SHEET SHOULD THEN BE FORWARDED TO ADVANCED WATERTEK OR THE AUTHORIZED
RESELLER. THIS IS NECESSARY SO PROBLEMS THAT MAY OCCUR CAN BE QUICKLY PINPOINTED BY
EXAMINING THE RECORDED DATA. ANALYSIS OF THE TRENDS REFLECTED IN THE DATA RECORDS
CAN RESULT IN DETECTION OF POTENTIAL PROBLEMS AND REMEDIAL ACTION CAN BE TAKEN
PRIOR TO SYSTEM FAILURE.

NOTE:
 READINGS MUST BE TAKEN AT CONSTANT SYSTEM PRESSURE TO FACILITATE COMPARISON.
 TEMPERATURE VARIATION CAN SIGNIFICANTLY AFFECT THE PERMEATE FLOW RATE.
 NORMALLY DEEP WELL WATER TEMPERATURE REMAINS ALMOST CONSTANT IRRESPECTIVE OF
THE AMBIENT TEMPERATURE.

2. Routine Checks

At regular interval the following routine checks should be made:

 Inspect the machine for water leaks and rectify promptly.

 Check the feed and system pumps for water leaks or noisy operation.

 Check condition of the cartridge filter by removing a cartridge and inspecting it visually; replace
cartridge if excessive contamination is evident. Do not over tighten the filter bowl.

 Check that the low‐pressure cutout switch is functioning properly by attempting to start the
system pump at low inlet pressure.

 Check oil level in System Pump.(CAT Pump only)

 Daily clean and maintain the system.

 All the instruments should be calibrated every after six months.

37 | P a g e
 OPERATIONS & MAINTENANCE MANUAL

AWS 840-20, 50 HZ | P18013/001/03.2019| 20,000LPD

SECTION 10

TROUBLE SHOOTING

In order to identify problems within the system, it will be helpful to be familiar with the
characteristics of a normal, properly running WATERTEK System.

During normal operation:

1. The unit WILL be quiet and free from excessive vibration, clicking or “metallic” noises.

2. The pressure gauges needle is steady (not pulsating).

3. All high and low pressure fittings WILL be dry, and free from leaks.

4. Pump exterior surfaces WILL be free from excessive mineral and salt deposits.

INDEX

1. UNIT WILL NOT START.

2. UNIT STARTS, TRIPS OUT.

3. EXCESSIVE VIBRATION.

4. PRESSURE CONTROL VALVE WHISTLES OR LEAKS.

5. UNUSUAL FLAVOUR OR ODOUR IN PRODUCT WATER.

6. CHANGE IN PERMEATE QUALITY / FLOW

38 | P a g e
 OPERATIONS & MAINTENANCE MANUAL

AWS 840-20, 50 HZ | P18013/001/03.2019| 20,000LPD

1. UNIT WILL NOT START

Possible Causes Corrective Action

Check with Volt‐Ohm Meter to be sure power is

No Power present at the unit. If no power at unit, check line
breakers etc.

Check that line voltage/frequency/phase is identical

Incorrect Voltage, Frequency with voltage/frequency/phase required for Model
or Phase AWS 840‐20 (3Ø, 380 ‐ 415 V, 50 Hz)

Confirm that feed pump is operating properly and that

all valves are open
Low Feed Water Pressure Check filters for clogging.
Check inlet lines for blockage or for diversions.
Check all inlet piping for correct piping runs.

Loose or Wrong Connection Check all control box connection for tightness. Verify
in Control Box all wire numbers match terminal block number exactly.

The thermal overload reset function is factory set on

automatic and should reset itself within five minutes. If
it does not, check to see that re set function switch on
Thermal Overload on Motor
the motor starter is set on automatic. If it is on test or
Starter Tripped
manual, reset by depressing reset button. Then turn
function switch to automatic. An audible “click” will be
heard when the motor start resets.

Be sure that overload has had time to cool off. If the

overload temperature remains above its set point, it
will not reset. This does not indicate a faulty overload.
Overload is faulty if its temperature is below its set
Thermal Overload on Motor
point and the overload remains open circuited. Also
Starter Malfunction
verify that the adjustable amperage setting on the
motor starter is set at least at the full load amperage
draw found on the motor rating plate. If not, use a
small screwdriver to adjust it to the correct setting.

Circuit Breaker Tripped Check circuit breaker

39 | P a g e
 OPERATIONS & MAINTENANCE MANUAL

AWS 840-20, 50 HZ | P18013/001/03.2019| 20,000LPD

2. UNIT STARTS, TRIPS OUT

Possible Causes Corrective Action

Verify that low pressure switch is operating properly.

Confirm that feed pump is operating properly and
there are no restrictions in feed line.
Check inlet line to be sure there are no diversion
between feed pump and high pressure pump inlet.
Low Feed Water Pressure
Check filters for clogging.
Check inlet lines for blockage.
Be sure supply piping is adequate in volume for size
of pump. Properly remove the air from feed pump.

Improper Voltage / Hertz / Check that voltage/frequency/phase to motor are as

Phase to Motor per voltage/frequency/phase required.

Check motor rating plate and motor wiring diagram

(on rating plate or inside lid of motor junction box) to
Motor Wired Incorrectly
be sure motor is correctly connected to incoming
power cable. Check the motor rotation.

Depress reset button on overload and restart unit. If

thermal overload trips again, use ammeter to check
motor current draw.
Verify that overload is set at 110% of full load current
Thermal Overload on Motor draw of motor and that motor is not drawing more
Starter Tripped than this setting.

Check motor for overheating.

Check motor wiring as above

3. EXCESSIVE VIBRATION

Possible Causes Corrective Action

Unit Not Positioned on an Be sure unit is placed on a firm, non‐vibrating

Even Surface surface.

Low feed water flow can cause pump cavitation

which may cause vibration in the system (high
pressure pump) pump. THIS CONDITION WILL
Low Feed Water Flow ULTIMATELY CAUSE PUMP FAILURE; DO NOT
OPERATE THE UNIT WITH THE PUMP CAVITATING.

40 | P a g e
 OPERATIONS & MAINTENANCE MANUAL

AWS 840-20, 50 HZ | P18013/001/03.2019| 20,000LPD

4. OPERATING PRESSURE CONTROL VALVES WHISTLES OR LEAKS

Possible Cause Corrective Action

Tighten gland nut if handle binds after tightening, back

Loose Gland Nut
off gland nuts slightly until binding is relieved.

5. UNUSUAL FLAVOR OR ODOR IN PRODUCT WATER

Possible Cause Corrective Action

Clean the membranes as outlined above in the section

Bacterial Growth On Membrane
entitled “Membrane Cleaning”

6. CHANGE IN PERMEATE QUALITY/FLOW

Possible Cause Corrective Action

Increase system pressure to obtain the original level of

recovery. Feed water salinity should not more than
Increase Feed Salinity
design limits.

Decrease/Increase in Water Increase/Decrease pressure to achieve normal product

Temperature flow rate of Lit/min.

Fouled Membrane Chemical Cleaning

Operate system for several hours, performance should

System Recently Preservatized
return to normal.

Membranes End of Useful Life Replace the membrane

41 | P a g e
 OPERATIONS & MAINTENANCE MANUAL

AWS 840-20, 50 HZ | P18013/001/03.2019| 20,000LPD

SECTION 11
UTILITIES SUMMARY/CHEMICALS & CONSUMABLES REQUIREMENT

UTILITY REQUIREMENT
Requirements @ 24 Hours
Utility Location Remarks
operation
Sea water within the design
Sea Water 57.84 m3/day At MMF inlet
range as specified
At the Inlet of the
Power for
Connected Load – 7.75 kW Control Panel of 380 ~ 415V, 3pH, 50Hz
SWRO System
SWRO Skid

CHEMICAL & CONSUMABLES REQUIREMENTS

Description of
Concentration Required Quantity Consumed Remarks
Chemical/Consumables
RO Antiscalant ‐
98% 5.3 kgs/month *Approx. Values
Disperso 370
Membrane
100% 0.5 Kg/batch *Approx. Values
Preservative
Acid Cleaner 100% 2.5 kgs/cleaning *Approx. Values
Alkali Cleaner 100% 2.5 kgs/cleaning *Approx. Values
Cartridge Filter
5 Micron –4 x 20” Long 2 Nos./month First Fill Only
Element
Cartridge Filter
1 Micron –4 x 20” Long 2 Nos./month First Fill Only
Element

42 | P a g e
.
 Head Office: e:
Middle East Office
Reverse
e Osmosis Desalination
D n system ADVANCED WA ATERTEK PTY ADVANCED WATE ERTEK INDUSTRIES LLCC
LTD PO Box 24647, Dubai, United
U Arab Emirate
es
DAILY LOG
L SHEET PO Box 4478, Myaree,
M Tel: + 971 4 3333100 / Fax: + 971 4 333257
70
JOB NO: P180
013/001/03.2019 Western Australia - 6960

Email: sales@ad
[Link]
m
[Link] [Link]
Owners Name
e: TF VICTORIA Machine Model: AWS 840--20 Nominal Capac
city: 20,0
000 Litres/Day
# Particulars Tag New Data
1 Date
2 Tim
me
3 Approximate Locatiion
4 Op
peration hours (Ho
our Meter Reading)
5 Multi Media inlet Pre
essure (PSI)/ Bar PG-1

6 Multi Media Outlet Pressure

P (PSI)/ Barr PG-2

7 Pre
essure drop acrosss MM filter (PSI)/Ba
ar (5-6) PG-1 - PG2

8 Cartridge Filter inlet Pressure (PSI)/ Ba

ar PG-3(Pre)

9 Cartridge Filter outle

et Pressure (PSI)/ Bar
B PG-3(Post)

10 Pre
essure drop acrosss Cartridge Filter (PSI)/Bar
( (8-9) Pre – Post (PG3)
System Pressure Pre Module (PSI)/Barr PG-4(Pre)
11
(Meembrane inlet pre
essure)
System Pressure Postt Module (PSI)/Ba
ar PG-4(Post)
12
(Meembrane outlet ppressure)
13 Pre
essure drop acrosss the modules (PS
SI)/Bar (11-12) Pre – Post (PG4)

14 Pro
oduct Flow Rate (Liters/M) FM-1

15 Reject Flow Rate (Litters/M) FM-2

16 Fee
ed Flow Rate (Lite
ers/M) (14+15) FM-1+FM-2
୊୑ିଵ
x100
17 System Recovery ( % ) (14/16 x 100) ୊୑ିଵା୊୑ିଶ

18 Fee
ed water Temp (°C) TG-1

19 Pro
oduct TDS (ppm) CM-1
Anttiscalant Dosing TTank Level & Injec
ction Rate O.K
Cartridge filter repla
aced date
Chemically Cleaned d date
Multimedia Backwash (Yes/No)
DATA SHOU
ULD BE LOGGED AT CONSTANT
C SYSTEM PRESSURE TO FACILLITATE COMPARISON

PROJ FM-5
57 - Issue / Rev: A/2 (24/12/2017)
( Pa
age 1 of 1
GRUNDFOS
MODEL: CRN 3‐7
3PH, 0.55KW, 380‐415V, 50HZ
 GRUNDFOS INSTRUCTIONS

CR, CRI, CRN

Installation and operating instructions
 Declaration of conformity
Declaration of conformity

GB: EC declaration of conformity CN: EC 产品合格声明书

We, Grundfos, declare under our sole responsibility that the products 我们格兰富在我们的全权责任下声明，产品 CR, CRI 和 CRN，即该合格证
CR, CRI and CRN, to which this declaration relates, are in conformity 所指之产品，符合欧共体使其成员国法律趋于一致的以下欧共理事会指令：
with these Council directives on the approximation of the laws of the EC — 机械设备指令 (2006/42/EC)。
member states: 所用标准 : EN 809:1998, A1:2009。
— Machinery Directive (2006/42/EC). — 电磁兼容性指令 (2004/108/EC)。
Standard used: EN 809:1998, A1:2009. — 生态化设计指令 (2009/125/EC)。
— EMC Directive (2004/108/EC). 电动机 :
— Ecodesign Directive (2009/125/EC). 欧委会规定第 640/2009 号。
Electric motors: 只适用于带有 IE2 或 IE3 标志的格兰富三相电机。 参见电机铭牌。
Commission Regulation No 640/2009. 所用标准 : EN 60034-30:2009。
Applies only to three-phase Grundfos motors marked IE2 or IE3. — 生态化设计指令 (2009/125/EC)。
See motor nameplate. 水泵：
Standard used: EN 60034-30:2009. 欧委会规定第 547/2012 号。
— Ecodesign Directive (2009/125/EC). 仅适用于标有最低效率指标 （MEI）的水泵。 见泵铭牌。
Water pumps: 本EC合格性声明仅在作为格兰富安装与操作指导手册 （出版号97688538
Commission Regulation No 547/2012. 1112）的一部分时有效。
Applies only to water pumps marked with the minimum efficiency
index MEI. See pump nameplate.
This EC declaration of conformity is only valid when published as part of
the Grundfos installation and operating instructions (publication number
97688538 1112).

Bjerringbro, 1th November 2012

Svend Aage Kaae

Technical Director
Grundfos Holding A/S
Poul Due Jensens Vej 7
8850 Bjerringbro, Denmark

Person authorised to compile technical file and

empowered to sign the EC declaration of conformity.

2
English (GB) Installation and operating instructions

English (GB)
Original installation and operating instructions. 1. Symbols used in this document

CONTENTS Warning
Page If these safety instructions are not observed, it
1. Symbols used in this document 3 may result in personal injury.
2. Handling 3
Warning
3. Type designation 4
If these instructions are not observed, it may lead
3.1 Type key for CR, CRI, CRN 1s, 1, 3, 5, 10, 15 and 20 4
to electric shock with consequent risk of serious
3.2 Type key for CR, CRN 32, 45, 64, 90, 120 and 150 4
personal injury or death.
4. Applications 4
5. Technical data 4 If these safety instructions are not observed, it
5.1 Ambient temperature and altitude 4 Caution may result in malfunction or damage to the
5.2 Liquid temperature 5 equipment.
5.3 Maximum permissible operating pressure and liquid
temperature for the shaft seal 5 Notes or instructions that make the job easier
Note
5.4 Minimum inlet pressure 5 and ensure safe operation.
5.5 Maximum inlet pressure 6
5.6 Minimum flow rate 6 2. Handling
5.7 Electrical data 6 When lifting the entire pump with motor, follow these instructions:
5.8 Frequency of starts and stops 6 • Pump with motor sizes 0.37 - 7.5 kW:
5.9 Dimensions and weights 6 Lift the pump in the motor flange by means of straps or the
5.10 Sound pressure level 6 like.
6. Installation 6 • Pump with motor sizes 11-75 kW:
6.1 Foundation 7 Lift the pump by means of the motor eyebolts.
6.2 Vibration dampening 7
6.3 Outdoor installation 8
6.4 Hot surfaces 8
6.5 Torques 8
6.6 Flange forces and torques 8
7. Electrical connection 9
7.1 Cable entry/screwed connection 9
7.2 Three-phase connection 9
7.3 Single-phase connection 10
TM04 0339 0608

TM04 0341 0608

7.4 Terminal box position 10
7.5 Frequency converter operation 10
8. Start-up 10
8.1 Shaft seal run-in 11
9. Maintenance 11 0.37 - 7.5 kW 11-75 kW
10. Frost protection 11 Fig. 1 Correct lifting of a CR pump
11. Service 11
11.1 Service kits and manuals 11 In the case of CR, CRI and CRN pumps with other motor makes
12. Fault finding 12 than those mentioned above, we recommend that you lift the
pump by means of straps in the motor flange.
13. Disposal 12

Warning
Prior to installation, read these installation and
operating instructions. Installation and operation
must comply with local regulations and accepted
codes of good practice.

3
 3. Type designation 5. Technical data
English (GB)

3.1 Type key for CR, CRI, CRN 1s, 1, 3, 5, 10, 15 and 20 5.1 Ambient temperature and altitude

Example CR 3- 10 X- X- X- X- XXXX Maximum

Maximum
Motor Motor altitude
Type range: CR, CRI, CRN Motor ambient
power efficiency above sea
Nominal flow rate in m3/h [kW]
make
class
temperature
level
[°C]
Number of impellers [m]
Code for pump version Grundfos
0.37 - 0.55 - +40 1000
Code for pipework connection MG
Code for materials Grundfos
0.75 - 22 IE3 +60 3500
MG
Code for rubber pump parts
30 - 75 Siemens IE3 +55 2750
Code for shaft seal
If the ambient temperature exceeds the above temperature
3.2 Type key for CR, CRN 32, 45, 64, 90, 120 and 150 values or the pump is installed at an altitude exceeding the above
altitude values, the motor must not be fully loaded due to the risk
Example CR 32- 2 1- X- X- X- X- XXXX of overheating. Overheating may result from excessive ambient
Pump range: CR, CRN temperatures or the low density and consequently low cooling
effect of the air.
Nominal flow rate in m3/h
In such cases, it may be necessary to use a motor with a higher
Number of stages rated output.
Number of impellers with reduced diameter
Code for pump version P2
[%] 3
Code for pipework connection
Code for materials 100 2
90
Code for rubber pump parts
80 1
Code for shaft seal
70
4. Applications 60
50

TM03 2479 4405

Grundfos multistage in-line centrifugal pumps, types CR, CRI and
CRN, are designed for a wide range of applications. 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80
t [°C]
CR, CRI, CRN
1000 2250 3500 4750 m
CR, CRI CRN pumps are suitable for liquid transfer, circulation
and pressure boosting of cold or hot clean liquids. Fig. 2 Motor output depends on temperature/altitude
CRN
Use CRN pumps in systems where all parts in contact with the Motor power
liquid are made of high-grade stainless steel. Pos. Motor make
[kW]
Pumped liquids 0.37 - 0.55 MG
Thin, clean, non-flammable liquids, not containing solid particles 1
0.37 - 22 MGE
or fibres. The liquid must not attack the pump materials
chemically. 2 0.75 - 22 MG
When pumping liquids with a density and/or viscosity higher than 3 30 - 75 Siemens
that of water, use motors with correspondingly higher outputs, if Example
required.
Figure 2 shows that the load of an IE3 motor at an ambient
temperature of 70 °C must not be loaded more than 89 % of the
rated output. If the pump is installed 4750 metres above sea
level, the motor must not be loaded more than 89 % of the rated
output.
In cases where both the maximum temperature and the maximum
altitude are exceeded, the derating factors must be multiplied
(0.89 x 0.89 = 0.79).

For motor bearing maintenance at ambient

Note temperatures above 40 °C, see section
9. Maintenance.

4
5.2 Liquid temperature 5.4 Minimum inlet pressure

English (GB)
The table on page 27 states the relationship between liquid
temperature range and maximum permissible operating pressure.

The maximum permissible operating pressure

Note and liquid temperature ranges apply to the pump
only.
Hf
5.3 Maximum permissible operating pressure and
liquid temperature for the shaft seal

The diagram below applies to clean water and H

Note Pb NPSH

TM02 0118 3800

water containing anti-freeze liquids.
CR, CRI, CRN 1s to 20 and CR, CRN 32 to 150

p [bar]
Hv
35
30 Fig. 4 Schematic view of open system with a CR pump
25
H H H H H
20 Q Q Q HQQE/V Q B The maximum suction lift "H" in metres head can be calculated as
15 Q Q Q Q Q follows:
HBQE/V

TM03 8853 4907

E V E E E
10
H = p b x 10.2 - NPSH - Hf - Hv - Hs
5
0 pb = Barometric pressure in bar.
-60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140
(Barometric pressure can be set to 1 bar.)
t [°C] In closed systems, pb indicates the system pressure in
bar.
Fig. 3 Maximum permissible operating pressure and liquid
temperature NPSH = Net Positive Suction Head in metres head (to be read
from the NPSH curve on page 25 at the highest flow the
pump will be delivering).
Motor Max. temperature range Hf = Friction loss in suction pipe in metres head at the
Standard shaft seal
[kW] [°C] highest flow the pump will be delivering.
HQQE 0.37 - 45 -40 °C to +120 °C Hv = Vapour pressure in metres head, see fig. E on page 30.
HBQE 55 - 75 0 °C to +120 °C tm = liquid temperature.
HQQV 0.37 - 45 -20 °C to +90 °C Hs = Safety margin = minimum 0.5 metres head.
If the calculated "H" is positive, the pump can operate at a suction
HBQV 55 - 75 0 °C to +90 °C
lift of maximum "H" metres head.
CRI and CRN pumps using a type H shaft seal with EPDM rubber If the calculated "H" is negative, an inlet pressure of minimum "H"
parts, HxxE, can be cleaned in place (CIP) with liquids up to metres head is required. There must be a pressure equal to the
150 °C for maximum 15 minutes. calculated "H" during operation.
The pumping of liquids above +120 °C may result Example
Note
in periodical noise and reduced pump life. pb = 1 bar.
CR, CRI, CRN pumps are not suitable for the pumping of liquids Pump type: CR 15, 50 Hz.
above 120 °C for long periods. Flow rate: 15 m3/h.
NPSH (from page 25): 1.1 metres head.
Hf = 3.0 metres head.
Liquid temperature: +60 °C.
Hv (from fig. E, page 30): 2.1 metres head.
H = p b x 10.2 - NPSH - Hf - Hv - Hs [metres head].
H = 1 x 10.2 - 1.1 - 3.0 - 2.1 - 0.5 = 3.5 metres head.
This means that the pump can operate at a suction lift of
maximum 3.5 metres head.
Pressure calculated in bar: 3.5 x 0.0981 = 0.343 bar.
Pressure calculated in kPa: 3.5 x 9.81 = 34.3 kPa.

5
 5.5 Maximum inlet pressure 6. Installation
English (GB)

The table on page 28 states the maximum permissible inlet The pump must be secured to a horizontal, plane and solid
pressure. However, the actual inlet pressure + maximum pump foundation by bolts through the holes in the base plate.
pressure (at no flow) must always be lower than the values stated When installing the pump, follow the procedure below in order to
in fig. A, page 27. avoid damaging the pump.
The pumps are pressure-tested at a pressure of 1.5 times the
values stated in fig. B, page 28. Step Action
1
5.6 Minimum flow rate
Due to the risk of overheating, do not use the pump at flows
below the minimum flow rate. Arrows on the pump base show

TM02 0013 3800

The curves below show the minimum flow rate as a percentage of the direction of flow of liquid
the nominal flow rate in relation to the liquid temperature. through the pump.
- - - - = air-cooled top.

Qmin 2 This information is stated on

[%] page 29:
30
• port-to-port lengths

TM00 2256 3393

4xø
20 • dimensions of the base

TM01 2816 2302

10 L1 B1 • pipework connections
L2 B2 • diameter and position of
0
foundation bolts.
40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 t [°C] 3 The pump can be installed
Fig. 5 Minimum flow rate vertically or horizontally
(CR, CRN 120 and 150, 75 kW,
The pump must not run against a closed only vertically). However, the
Caution motor must neither fall below
discharge valve.
the horizontal plane nor be
5.7 Electrical data installed upside down.
Ensure that an adequate

TM01 1241 4097

See motor nameplate.
supply of cool air reaches the
5.8 Frequency of starts and stops motor cooling fan.
Motors above 4 kW must be
supported.
Motor size
Maximum number of starts per hour 4 To minimize possible noise
[kW]
from the pump, we advise you
≤3 200 to fit expansion joints on either
4-30 100 side of the pump.
37-55 75 The foundation/installation
must be carried out as
75 50
described in section 6.1.
5.9 Dimensions and weights Fit isolating valves on either
side of the pump to avoid
Dimensions: See fig. C, page 29. draining the syestem if the
Weights: See label on the packing. pump needs to be removed for
cleaning, repair or
TM02 0116 3800

5.10 Sound pressure level replacement.

See fig. D, page 30. Always protect the pump
against backflow by means of a
non-return valve (foot valve).
5

Install the pipes so that air

locks do not occur, especially
TM02 0114 3800

on the suction side of the

pump.

6
Fit a vacuum valve close to the
pump if the installation has one
of these characteristics:
• The discharge pipe slopes
downwards away from the
pump.
TM02 0115 3800

• There is a risk of siphon

effect.
• Protection against backflow
of unclean liquids is needed.

6
6.1 Foundation

English (GB)
The foundation/installation must be carried out in
accordance with the following instructions.
Note
Non-compliance may result in functional faults

TM03 4589 2206

which will damage the pump components.
Grundfos recommends to install the pump on a concrete
foundation which is heavy enough to provide permanent and rigid
support to the entire pump. The foundation must be capable of
absorbing any vibration, normal strain or shock. The concrete Fig. 8 Bolt in foundation
foundation must have an absolutely level and even surface.
Place the pump on the foundation, and fasten it. The base plate When the foundation bolts are in position, the pump can be
must be supported on the whole area. See fig. 6. placed on the foundation. The base plate can now be aligned
using shims, if necessary, so that it is completely horizontal.
See fig. 9.

TM04 0342 0608

TM04 0362 0608

Shims

Fig. 6 Correct installation

Fig. 9 Alignment with shims

6.2 Vibration dampening

If vibration dampers are used, they must be installed under the
foundation. Pumps with motor size ≤ 30 kW can use vibration
dampers as shown in fig. 10.
For pumps with motor sizes ≥ 37 kW, use a Sylomer® plate as
shown in fig. 11.

Vibration dampers
TM04 0343 0608

TM04 1691 1008

Fig. 7 Foundation Fig. 10 Pump on vibration dampers

The recommended length and width are shown in fig. 7. Note that
the length and width of the foundation for pumps with motor size
≤ 30 kW must be 200 mm larger than the base plate.
For pumps with motor size ≥ 37 kW, the length and width must
always be 1.5 x 1.5 (Lf x Wf) metres.
The mass of the foundation must be at least 1.5 times the total
mass of the pump. The minimum height of the foundation (hf) can
then be calculated:
mpump × 1.5
hf =
Lf × Bf × δconcrete

The density (δ) of concrete is usually taken as 2,200 kg/m3.

Sylomer® plate
TM04 1692 1008

In installations where noise-less operation is particularly

important, a foundation with a mass up to 5 times that of the
pump is recommended.
The foundation must be provided with bolts for fixing the base
plate. See fig. 8.
Fig. 11 Pump on Sylomer® plate

7
 6.3 Outdoor installation 6.6 Flange forces and torques
English (GB)

When installed outdoors, it is recommended to provide the motor If not all loads reach the maximum permissible value stated in the
with a rain cover. We also recommend to open one of the drain tables below, one of these value may exceed the normal limit.
holes in the motor flange. Contact Grundfos for further information.

6.4 Hot surfaces

Warning
When pumping hot liquids, care should be taken
to ensure that persons cannot accidentally come
into contact with hot surfaces.
Figure 12 shows which pump parts get as hot as the pumped
liquid.

TM04 0346 0608

TM04 0361 0608
Pump head
Pump sleeve
Base Fig. 13 Flange forces and torques

Fig. 12 Hot surfaces on a CR, CRI, CRN pump Y-direction: Direction of chamber stack
6.5 Torques Z-direction: 90 ° from inlet/outlet

The table shows the recommended torques for bolts in base and X-direction: Inlet/outlet
flanges. Forces

Base Flange

CR, CRI, CRN

CR, CRI, CRN
[Nm] [Nm]

Y-direction

X-direction
Flange, DN

Z-direction
1s to 5 40 50-60

Force,

Force,

Force,
[mm]

10 to 20 50 60-70

[N]

[N]

[N]
32 to 150 70 70-80
25/32 1s to 5 760 1170 780
40 10 1000 1250 1100
50 15 and 20 1350 1650 1500
65 32 1700 2075 1875
80 45 2050 2500 2250
100 64 and 90 2700 3350 3000
125/150 120 and 150 2700 3350 3000

Torques
CR, CRI, CRN

Y-direction

X-direction
Flange, DN

Z-direction
Torque,

Torque,

Torque,
[mm]

[Nm]

[Nm]

[Nm]

25/32 1s to 5 820 970 1220

40 10 900 1050 1300
50 15 and 20 1000 1150 1400
65 32 1075 1225 1500
80 45 1150 1300 1600
100 64 and 90 1250 1450 1750
125/150 120 and 150 1250 1450 1750

8
7. Electrical connection 7.2 Three-phase connection

English (GB)
The electrical connection should be carried out by an authorised
electrician in accordance with local regulations. Mains supply [V]

Warning Delta connection Star connection

Before removing the terminal box cover and 220-240 / 380-415
before removing/dismantling the pump, make 50 Hz
380-415 / 660-690
sure that the power supply has been switched off 1)
220-277 / 380-480
and that it cannot be accidentally switched on. 60 Hz
The pump must be connected to a main switch. 380-480 / 660-690

The user is to consider whether it is necessary to 1) 60 Hz motors, 0.37 - 1.1 kW: 220-277/380-440 V.
Caution
install an emergency stop switch.
The operating voltage and frequency are marked on the motor
W2 U1 W2 U2 V2
nameplate. Make sure that the motor is suitable for the power
supply on which it will be used and the motor terminal connection

TM02 6656 1305

is correct. You will find a wiring diagram in the terminal box. U1 V1 W1
W1 U2
7.1 Cable entry/screwed connection
V2 V1
All motors are supplied without screwed cable entries. The table L1 L2 L3
below shows the numbers and sizes of cable entry holes of the
terminal box (standard EN 50262). Fig. 14 Delta connection

Motor Number and size U1

Description
[kW] of cable entries W2 U2 V2

The holes have precast

TM02 6655 1305

0.25 - 0.55 2 x M20 x 1.5 threads and are closed with U2
U1 V1 W1
knock-out cable entries W2
V2
The holes are closed with
0.75 - 3.0 2 x M20
knock-out cable entries W1 V1 L1 L2 L3
The holes are closed with
4.0 - 7.5 4 x M25 Fig. 15 Star connection
knock-out cable entries
2 x M20 The holes are closed with If the motor is provided with PTC sensors or PTO contacts, the
11 - 22
4 x M40 knock-out cable entries connection must be in accordance with the wiring diagram in the
30 - 45 2 x M50 x 1.5 Blanking plug terminal box.
55 - 75 2 x M63 x 1.5 Blanking plug Three-phase motors must be connected to a motor-protective
circuit breaker.

9
 7.3 Single-phase connection 7.4 Terminal box position
English (GB)

The terminal box can be turned to four positions, in 90 ° steps.

Mains supply [V] Follow this procedure:
"Low voltage" "High voltage" 1. If necessary, remove the coupling guards. Do not remove the
coupling.
50 Hz 220-230 / 240 2. Remove the bolts securing the motor to the pump.
3. Turn the motor to the required position.
4. Replace and tighten the bolts.
5. Replace the coupling guards.
Carry out the electrical connection as shown in the diagram
inside the terminal box cover.

7.5 Frequency converter operation

TM04 1693 1008

Motors supplied by Grundfos
All three-phase motors supplied by Grundfos can be connected to
a frequency converter. The frequency converter must be set to
variable torque.
Fig. 16 Connection, "low voltage", 0.37 - 0.75 kW Depending on the frequency converter type, this may cause
increased acoustic noise from the motor. Furthermore, it may
cause the motor to be exposed to detrimental voltage peaks.

Grundfos motors, types MG 71 and MG 80, for

supply voltages up to and including 440 V
Caution without phase insulation (see motor nameplate),
must be protected against voltage peaks above
650 V (peak value) between the supply terminals.
TM04 1694 1008

We recommend to protect all other motors against voltage peaks

higher than 1200 V by 2000 V/μsec.
The above disturbances, i.e. both increased acoustic noise and
detrimental voltage peaks, can be eliminated by fitting an LC filter
Fig. 17 Connection, "high voltage", 0.37 - 0.75 kW between the frequency converter and the motor.
For further information, please contact the frequency converter or
motor supplier.
Other motor makes than those supplied by Grundfos
Please contact Grundfos or the motor manufacturer.

8. Start-up
TM04 0345 0608

Do not start the pump until it has been filled with

Caution liquid and vented. If the pump runs dry, the pump
bearings and the shaft seal may be damaged.

Warning
Fig. 18 Connection, "low voltage", 1.1 - 2.2 kW Pay attention to the direction of the vent hole and
take care to ensure that the escaping water does
not cause injury to persons or damage to the
motor or other components.
In hot-water installations, pay special attention to
the risk of injury caused by scalding hot water.
Follow the instructions on page 40.
TM04 0344 0608

CR, CRI, CRN 1s to 5

For these pumps, we advise you to open the bypass valve during
start-up, see fig. 20 for bypass valve location. The bypass valve
connects the suction and discharge sides of the pump, thus
making the filling procedure easier. Close the bypass valve again
Fig. 19 Connection, "high voltage", 1.1 - 2.2 kW when the operation is stable.
When pumping liquids containing air, we advise you to leave the
Single-phase Grundfos motors incorporate a thermal switch and
bypass valve open if the operating pressure is lower than 6 bar.
require no additional motor protection.
Close the bypass valve if the operating pressure constantly
exceeds 6 bar. Otherwise the material at the opening will be worn
because of the high liquid velocity.

10
8.1 Shaft seal run-in 10. Frost protection

English (GB)
The seal faces are lubricated by the pumped liquid, meaning that Pumps which are not being used during periods of frost should be
there may be a certain amount of leakage from the shaft seal. drained to avoid damage.
When the pump is started up for the first time, or when a new Drain the pump by loosening the vent screw in the pump head
shaft seal is installed, a certain run-in period is required before and by removing the drain plug from the base.
the leakage is reduced to an acceptable level. The time required
for this depends on the operating conditions, i.e. every time the Warning
operating conditions change, a new run-in period will be started. Pay attention to the direction of the vent hole and
Under normal conditions, the leaking liquid will evaporate. As a take care to ensure that the escaping water does
result, no leakage will be detected. not cause injury to persons or damage to the
motor or other components.
However, liquids such as kerosene will not evaporate.
In hot-water installations, pay special attention to
The leakage may therefore be seen as a shaft seal failure.
the risk of injury caused by scalding hot water.

9. Maintenance Do not tighten the vent screw and replace the drain plug until the
pump is to be used again.
Warning CR, CRI, CRN 1s to 5
Before starting work on the pump, make sure that Before replacing the drain plug in the base, screw the bypass
all power supplies to the pump have been valve out against the stop. See fig. 20.
switched off and that they cannot be accidentally
switched on.
Pump bearings and shaft seal are maintenance-free.
Motor bearings Drain plug
Motors not fitted with grease nipples are maintenance-free. Bypass valve
Motors fitted with grease nipples should be lubricated with a high-
temperature, lithium-based grease. See the instructions on the
fan cover.
In the case of seasonal operation (motor is idle for more than
6 months of the year), we recommend you to grease the motor
when the pump is taken out of operation.
Depending on the ambient temperature, the motor bearings must

TM01 1243 4097

be replaced or lubricated according to the table below. The table
applies to 2-pole motors. The number of operating hours stated
for bearing replacement are guidelines only.

Motor size Bearing replacement interval [operating hours]

[kW] Fig. 20 Location of drain plug and bypass valve
40 °C 45 °C 50 °C 55 °C 60 °C
Fit the drain plug by tightening the large union nut followed by the
0.37 - 0.75 18000 - - - -
bypass valve.
1.1 - 7.5 20000 15500 12500 10000 7500
11. Service
Motor size Lubrication interval [operating hours]
It is advisable to repair pumps with motors of 7.5 kW and up at
[kW] 40 °C 45 °C 50 °C 55 °C 60 °C pump site. Necessary lifting equipment must be available.

11 - 18.5 4500 3400 2500 1700 1100 If a pump has been used for a liquid which is
Note toxic or injurious to health, the pump will be
22 4000 3100 2300 1500 1000 classified as contaminated.
30 - 55 4000 3000 2000 1500 - If Grundfos is requested to service the pump, Grundfos must be
contacted with details about the pumped liquid, etc. before the
75 2000 1500 1000 500 - pump is returned for service. Otherwise Grundfos can refuse to
accept the pump for service.
Intervals for 4-pole motors are twice as long as those for 2-pole
Possible costs of returning the pump are to be paid by the
motors.
customer.
If the ambient temperature is lower than 40 °C, bearings must be
However, any application for service (no matter to whom it may
replaced/lubricated at the intervals mentioned under 40 °C.
be made) must include details about the pumped liquid if the
pump has been used for liquids which are toxic or injurious to
health.

11.1 Service kits and manuals

Service kits and manuals for CR, CRI and CRN, see
[Link] (WebCAPS), WinCAPS or Service Kit
Catalogue.

11
 12. Fault finding
English (GB)

Warning
Before removing the terminal box cover and before removing/dismantling the pump, make sure that the power
supply has been switched off and that it cannot be accidentally switched on.

Fault Cause Remedy

1. Motor does not run a) Supply failure. Connect the power supply.
when started. b) Fuses are blown. Replace fuses.
c) Motor-protective circuit breaker has tripped out. Reactivate the motor-protective circuit breaker.
d) Thermal protection has tripped out. Reactivate the thermal protection.
e) Main contacts in motor-protective circuit breaker
Replace contacts or magnetic coil.
are not making contact or the coil is faulty.
f) Control circuit is defective. Repair the control circuit.
g) Motor is defective. Replace the motor.
2. Motor-protective circuit a) One fuse/automatic circuit breaker is blown. Replace the fuse/cut in the circuit breaker.
breaker trips out b) Contacts in motor-protective circuit breaker are
immediately when Replace motor-protective circuit breaker contacts.
faulty.
supply is switched on.
c) Cable connection is loose or faulty. Fasten or replace the cable connection.
d) Motor winding is defective. Replace the motor.
e) Pump mechanically blocked. Remove the mechanical blocking of the pump.
f) Motor-protective circuit breaker setting is too
Set the motor-protective circuit breaker correctly.
low.
3. Motor-protective circuit a) Motor-protective circuit breaker setting is too
Set the motor-protective circuit breaker correctly.
breaker trips out low.
occasionally. b) Low voltage at peak times. Check the power supply.
4. Motor-protective circuit a) Check 1 a), b), d), e) and f).
breaker has not tripped
out but the pump does
not run.
5. Pump performance not a) Pump inlet pressure is too low (cavitation). Check the suction conditions.
constant. b) Suction pipe/pump partly blocked by impurities. Clean the suction pipe/pump.
c) Pump draws in air. Check the suction conditions.
6. Pump runs but gives no a) Suction pipe/pump blocked by impurities. Clean the suction pipe/pump.
water. b) Foot or non-return valve blocked in closed
Repair the foot or non-return valve.
position.
c) Leakage in suction pipe. Repair the suction pipe.
d) Air in suction pipe or pump. Check the suction conditions.
e) Motor runs in the wrong direction of rotation. Change the direction of rotation of the motor.
7. Pump runs backwards a) Leakage in suction pipe. Repair the suction pipe.
when switched off. b) Foot or non-return valve defective. Repair the foot or non-return valve.
8. Leakage in shaft seal. a) Shaft seal is defective. Replace the shaft seal.
9. Noise. a) Cavitation. Check the suction conditions.
b) Pump does not rotate freely Adjust the pump shaft.
(frictional resistance) because of incorrect pump Follow the procedure in fig. F, G or H at the end of
shaft position. these instructions.
c) Frequency converter operation. See section 7.5 Frequency converter operation.

13. Disposal
This product or parts of it must be disposed of in an
environmentally sound way:
1. Use the public or private waste collection service.
2. If this is not possible, contact the nearest Grundfos company
or service workshop.

Subject to alterations.

12
 NPSH
Appendix

TM02 7125 2703 TM01 9884 3801 TM01 9883 3300 TM01 9882 3801 TM02 7387 3403

TM01 1936 0899 TM01 1935 0899 TM01 1934 0899 TM02 7127 2703 TM02 7126 2703
1

13
Appendix
 Appendix

14
TM03 8765 2507 TM03 8764 2507 TM01 1937 0899
Fig. A

Appendix
Maximum permissible operating pressure / liquid temperature range

Oval PJE - CLAMP - CA - UNION

DIN - FGJ

Operating Liquid temperature Operating Liquid temperature

pressure range pressure range
CR, CRI, CRN 1s 16 bar -20 °C to +120 °C 25 bar -20 °C to +120 °C
CR, CRI, CRN 1 16 bar -20 °C to +120 °C 25 bar -20 °C to +120 °C
CR, CRI, CRN 3 16 bar -20 °C to +120 °C 25 bar -20 °C to +120 °C
CR, CRI, CRN 5 16 bar -20 °C to +120 °C 25 bar -20 °C to +120 °C
CR, CRI 10-1 → 10-16 16 bar -20 °C to +120 °C 16 bar -20 °C to +120 °C
CR, CRI 10-17 → 10-22 - - 25 bar -20 °C to +120 °C
CRN 10 - - 25 bar -20 °C to +120 °C
CR, CRI 15-1 → 15-7 10 bar -20 °C to +120 °C - -
CR, CRI 15-1 → 15-10 - - 16 bar -20 °C to +120 °C
CR, CRI 15-12 → 15-17 - - 25 bar -20 °C to +120 °C
CRN 15 - - 25 bar -20 °C to +120 °C
CR, CRI 20-1 → 20-7 10 bar -20 °C to +120 °C - -
CR, CRI 20-1 → 20-10 - - 16 bar -20 °C to +120 °C
50 Hz
CR, CRI 20-12 → 20-17 - - 25 bar -20 °C to +120 °C
CRN 20 - - 25 bar -20 °C to +120 °C
CR, CRN 32-1-1 → 32-7 - - 16 bar -30 °C to +120 °C
CR, CRN 32-8-2 → 32-14 - - 30 bar -30 °C to +120 °C
CR, CRN 45-1-1 → 45-5 - - 16 bar -30 °C to +120 °C
CR, CRN 45-6-2 → 45-11 - - 30 bar -30 °C to +120 °C
CR, CRN 45-12-2 → 45-13-2 - - 33 bar -30 °C to +120 °C
CR, CRN 64-1-1 → 64-5 - - 16 bar -30 °C to +120 °C
CR, CRN 64-6-2 → 64-8-1 - - 30 bar -30 °C to +120 °C
CR, CRN 90-1-1 → 90-4 - - 16 bar -30 °C to +120 °C
CR, CRN 90-5-2 → 90-6 - - 30 bar -30 °C to +120 °C
CR, CRN 120 - - 30 bar -30 °C to +120 °C
CR, CRN 150 - - 30 bar -30 °C to +120 °C
CR, CRI, CRN 1s 16 bar -20 °C to +120 °C 25 bar -20 °C to +120 °C
CR, CRI, CRN 1 16 bar -20 °C to +120 °C 25 bar -20 °C to +120 °C
CR, CRI, CRN 3 16 bar -20 °C to +120 °C 25 bar -20 °C to +120 °C
CR, CRI, CRN 5 16 bar -20 °C to +120 °C 25 bar -20 °C to +120 °C
CR, CRI 10-1 → 10-10 16 bar -20 °C to +120 °C 16 bar -20 °C to +120 °C
CR, CRI 10-12 → 10-17 - - 25 bar -20 °C to +120 °C
CRN 10 16 bar -20 °C to +120 °C 25 bar -20 °C to +120 °C
CR, CRI 15-1 → 15-5 10 bar -20 °C to +120 °C - -
CR, CRI 15-1 → 15-8 - - 16 bar -20 °C to +120 °C
CR, CRI 15-9 → 15-12 - - 25 bar -20 °C to +120 °C
CRN 15 10 bar -20 °C to +120 °C 25 bar -20 °C to +120 °C
CR, CRI 20-1 → 20-5 10 bar -20 °C to +120 °C - -
60 Hz CR, CRI 20-1 → 20-7 - - 16 bar -20 °C to +120 °C
CR, CRI 20-8 → 20-10 - - 25 bar -20 °C to +120 °C
CRN 20 10 bar -20 °C to +120 °C 25 bar -20 °C to +120 °C
CR, CRN 32-1-1 → 32-5 - - 16 bar -30 °C to +120 °C
CR, CRN 32-6-2 → 32-10-2 - - 30 bar -30 °C to +120 °C
CR, CRN 45-1-1 → 45-4 - - 16 bar -30 °C to +120 °C
CR, CRN 45-5-2 → 45-7 - - 30 bar -30 °C to +120 °C
CR, CRN 64-1-1 → 64-3 - - 16 bar -30 °C to +120 °C
CR, CRN 64-4-2 → 64-5-2 - - 30 bar -30 °C to +120 °C
CR, CRN 90-1-1 → 90-3 - - 16 bar -30 °C to +120 °C
CR, CRN 90-4-2 - - 30 bar -30 °C to +120 °C
CR, CRN 120 - - 30 bar -30 °C to +120 °C
CR, CRN 150 - - 30 bar -30 °C to +120 °C

15
Appendix

Fig. B

Maximum inlet pressure for CR, CRI and CRN

50 Hz 60 Hz

CR, CRI, CRN 1s

CR, CRI, CRN 1s-2 → CR, CRI, CRN 1s-36 10 bar CR, CRI, CRN 1s-2 → CR, CRI, CRN 1s-27 10 bar

CR, CRI, CRN 1

CR, CRI, CRN 1-2 → CR, CRI, CRN 1-36 10 bar CR, CRI, CRN 1-2 → CR, CRI, CRN 1-25 10 bar
CR, CRI, CRN 1-27 15 bar

CR, CRI, CRN 3

CR, CRI, CRN 3-2 → CR, CRI, CRN 3-29 10 bar CR, CRI, CRN 3-2 → CR, CRI, CRN 3-15 10 bar
CR, CRI, CRN 3-31 → CR, CRI, CRN 3-36 15 bar CR, CRI, CRN 3-17 → CR, CRI, CRN 3-25 15 bar

CR, CRI, CRN 5

CR, CRI, CRN 5-2 → CR, CRI, CRN 5-16 10 bar CR, CRI, CRN 5-2 → CR, CRI, CRN 5-9 10 bar
CR, CRI, CRN 5-18 → CR, CRI, CRN 5-36 15 bar CR, CRI, CRN 5-10 → CR, CRI, CRN 5-24 15 bar

CR, CRI, CRN 10

CR, CRI, CRN 10-1 → CR, CRI, CRN 10-6 8 bar CR, CRI, CRN 10-1 → CR, CRI, CRN 10-5 8 bar
CR, CRI, CRN 10-7 → CR, CRI, CRN 10-22 10 bar CR, CRI, CRN 10-6 → CR, CRI, CRN 10-17 10 bar

CR, CRI, CRN 15

CR, CRI, CRN 15-1 → CR, CRI, CRN 15-3 8 bar CR, CRI, CRN 15-1 → CR, CRI, CRN 15-2 8 bar
CR, CRI, CRN 15-4 → CR, CRI, CRN 15-17 10 bar CR, CRI, CRN 15-3 → CR, CRI, CRN 15-12 10 bar

CR, CRI, CRN 20

CR, CRI, CRN 20-1 → CR, CRI, CRN 20-3 8 bar CR, CRI, CRN 20-1 8 bar
CR, CRI, CRN 20-4 → CR, CRI, CRN 20-17 10 bar CR, CRI, CRN 20-2 → CR, CRI, CRN 20-10 10 bar

CR, CRN 32
CR, CRN 32-1-1 → CR, CRN 32-4 4 bar CR, CRN 32-1-1 → CR, CRN 32-2 4 bar
CR, CRN 32-5-2 → CR, CRN 32-10 10 bar CR, CRN 32-3-2 → CR, CRN 32-6 10 bar
CR, CRN 32-11-2 → CR, CRN 32-14 15 bar CR, CRN 32-7-2 → CR, CRN 32-10-2 15 bar

CR, CRN 45
CR, CRN 45-1-1 → CR, CRN 45-2 4 bar CR, CRN 45-1-1 → CR, CRN 45-1 4 bar
CR, CRN 45-3-2 → CR, CRN 45-5 10 bar CR, CRN 45-2-2 → CR, CRN 45-3 10 bar
CR, CRN 45-6-2 → CR, CRN 45-13-2 15 bar CR, CRN 45-4-2 → CR, CRN 45-7 15 bar

CR, CRN 64
CR, CRN 64-1-1 → CR, CRN 64-2-2 4 bar CR, CRN 64-1-1 4 bar
CR, CRN 64-2-1 → CR, CRN 64-4-2 10 bar CR, CRN 64-1 → CR, CRN 64-2-1 10 bar
CR, CRN 64-4-1 → CR, CRN 64-8-1 15 bar CR, CRN 64-2 → CR, CRN 64-5-2 15 bar

CR, CRN 90
CR, CRN 90-1-1 → CR, CRN 90-1 4 bar CR, CRN 90-1-1 → CR, CRN 90-2-2 10 bar
CR, CRN 90-2-2 → CR, CRN 90-3-2 10 bar CR, CRN 90-2-1 → CR, CRN 90-4-2 15 bar
CR, CRN 90-3 → CR, CRN 90-6 15 bar

CR, CRN 120

CR, CRN 120-1 → CR, CRN 120-2-1 10 bar CR, CRN 120-1 10 bar
CR, CRN 120-2 → CR, CRN 120-5-1 15 bar CR, CRN 120-2-2 → CR, CRN 120-3 15 bar
CR, CRN 120-6-1 → CR, CRN 120-7 20 bar CR, CRN 120-4-1 → CR, CRN 120-5-2 20 bar

CR, CRN 150

CR, CRN 150-1-1 → CR, CRN 150-1 10 bar CR, CRN 150-1-1 10 bar
CR, CRN 150-2-1 → CR, CRN 150-4-1 15 bar CR, CRN 150-1 → CR, CRN 150-2 15 bar
CR, CRN 150-5-2 → CR, CRN 150-6 20 bar CR, CRN 150-3-2 → CR, CRN 150-4-2 20 bar

16
 Oval PJE CLAMP - FlexiClamp UNION DIN - FGJ
Fig. C

D D DN 4xø

D
Pump

H
H

H
H
Type L1 B1
L L L D L L L2 B2

TM00 2251 3393

TM00 2252 3393
TM00 2253 3393
TM00 2254 3393
TM00 2255 3393
TM00 2256 3393

L H D L H D L H D L H D L H L1 L2 B1 B2 ∅
[mm] [mm] [Rp] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [G] [mm] [mm] DN [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm]

CR 1s 160 50 1 - - - - - - - - - 250 75 25/32 100 145 180 220 13

CRI, CRN 1s - - - 210 50 42.2 162 50 30 228 50 2 250 75 25/32 100 150 180 220 13

CR 1 160 50 1 - - - - - - - - - 250 75 25/32 100 145 180 220 13

CRI, CRN 1 - - - 210 50 42.2 162 50 30 228 50 2 250 75 25/32 100 150 180 220 13

CR 3 160 50 1 - - - - - - - - - 250 75 25/32 100 145 180 220 13

CRI, CRN 3 - - - 210 50 42.2 162 50 30 228 50 2 250 75 25/32 100 150 180 220 13

CR 5 160 50 1¼ - - - - - - - - - 250 75 25/32 100 145 180 220 13

CRI, CRN 5 - - - 210 50 42.2 162 50 30 228 50 2 250 75 25/32 100 150 180 220 13

CR 10 200 80 1½ - - - - - - - - - 280 80 40 130 178 215 256 13.5

CRI, CRN 10 - - - 261 80 60.1 202 80 50 - - - 280 80 40 130 200 215 248 13

CR 15 200 80 2 - - - - - - - - - 300 90 50 130 176 215 256 13.5

CRI, CRN 15 - - - 261 90 60.1 202 90 50 - - - 300 90 50 130 200 215 248 13

CR 20 200 80 2 - - - - - - - - - 300 90 50 130 176 215 256 13.5

CRI, CRN 20 - - - 261 90 60.1 202 90 50 - - - 300 90 50 130 200 215 248 13

CR 32 - - - - - - - - - - - - 320 105 65 170 223 240 298 14

CRN 32 - - - - - - - - - - - - 320 105 65 170 226 240 298 14

CR 45 - - - - - - - - - - - - 365 140 80 190 248 266 331 14

CRN 45 - - - - - - - - - - - - 365 140 80 190 251 266 331 14

CR 64 - - - - - - - - - - - - 365 140 100 190 248 266 331 14

CRN 64 - - - - - - - - - - - - 365 140 100 190 251 266 331 14

CR 90 - - - - - - - - - - - - 380 140 100 199 261 280 348 14

CRN 90 - - - - - - - - - - - - 380 140 100 199 261 280 348 14

CR 120 - - - - - - - - - - - - 380 180 125 275 344 380 472 18

CRN 120 - - - - - - - - - - - - 380 180 125 275 344 380 472 18

CR 150 - - - - - - - - - - - - 380 180 125 275 344 380 472 18

CRN 150 - - - - - - - - - - - - 380 180 125 275 344 380 472 18

17
Appendix
Appendix

Fig. D

Airborne noise emitted by pumps with motors fitted by Grundfos

50 Hz 60 Hz
Motor
[kW] LpA LpA
[dB(A)] [dB(A)]
0.37 50 55
0.55 50 53
0.75 50 54
1.1 52 57
1.5 54 59
2.2 54 59
3.0 55 60
4.0 62 66
5.5 60 65
7.5 60 65
11 60 65
15 60 65
18.5 60 65
22 66 70
30 71 75
37 71 75
45 71 75
55 71 75
75 73 77

Fig. E

tm Hv
(°C) (m)
190 126

180 100

170 79

160 62

150 45
40
140 35
30
130
25
120 20

110 15
12
100 10
8,0
90
6,0
80 5,0
4,0
70 3,0

60 2,0
1,5
50
1,0
40 0,8
0,6
30 0,4
TM02 7445 3503

0,3
20
0,2
10
0,1
0

18
CR, CRI, CRN 1s, 1, 3 and 5

Appendix
Fig. F

A B

TM02 0459 4600

TM02 0460 4600

C D

M6 - 13 Nm
M8 - 31 Nm
M10 - 62 Nm

M5 - 2.5 Nm
x

TM02 1051 0501

TM02 1052 0501

0.5x

19
Appendix

CR, CRI, CRN 10, 15 and 20

Fig. G

A B

TM02 1045 0501

TM02 8500 0304

M5 - 2.5 Nm

C D
TM02 7923 4403

TM02 0459 4600

E F

M6 - 13 Nm
M8 - 31 Nm
M10 - 62 Nm
TM02 8542 0404

TM02 8515 0304

20
 C
B
A
Fig. H

1
CR, CRN 32, 45, 64, 90

1.7 mm

TM01 2146 3600 TM01 9878 4409 TM01 2144 3600

21
Appendix
 Appendix

E
C
A

22
Fig. I
CR, CRN 120 and 150

TM03 8907 2707 TM03 8905 2707 TM03 8903 2707

F
D
B

TM03 8908 2707 TM03 8906 2707 TM03 8904 2707

 Appendix
Designation
Pos.

1 Adapter flange 接头法兰

1a Motor stool 电机座
2 Pump head 泵头
3 Chamber, top 腔体，顶部
3a Chamber without neck ring 无耐磨环的腔体
4 Chamber complete 完整腔体
4a Chamber with bearing ring 有耐磨环的腔体
5a Chamber complete 完整腔体
6 Base 基架
6a Stop pin 止动销
6d Guide plate for base 基架导板
6g Bearing ring 轴承环
7 Coupling guard 联轴器护罩
7a Screw 螺丝
8 Coupling complete 联轴器成品
9 Screw 螺丝
10 Shaft pin 轴销
18 Air vent screw 排气螺丝
19 Pipe plug 管塞
21 Plug 塞
23 Plug 塞
25 Drain plug 放水螺塞
26 Staybolt 定位螺栓
26a Strap 拉紧板条
26b Screw 螺丝
26c Washer 垫圈
28 Screw 螺丝
28a Screw 螺丝
31 Screw 螺丝
32a Washer 垫圈
35 Screw 螺丝
36 Nut 螺母
36a Nut 螺母
37 O-ring/gasket O型圈/垫圈
38 O-ring O型圈
38a O-ring O型圈
44 Inlet part complete 进口部分
45 Neck ring 颈环
45a Neck ring complete 颈环成品
47 Bearing ring 轴承环
47a Bearing with driver 带驱动器的轴承
47b Bearing ring, rotating 轴承动环
47c Bush 衬套
47d Retaining ring 挡圈
47e Retaining ring 挡圈
48 Split cone nut 花键圆锥螺母
49 Impeller 叶轮
49a Impeller 叶轮
49b Split cone 花键圆锥
49c Wear ring 耐磨环
51 Pump shaft 泵轴
55 Sleeve 外套
56 Base plate 基板
56a Base plate 基板
56c Screw 螺丝
56d Washer 垫圈
57 O-ring O型圈
58 Seal carrier 密封载体
58a Screw 螺丝
60 Spring 弹簧
61 Seal driver 密封驱动
62 Stop ring 止动环
64 Spacing pipe 隔管
64a Spacing pipe 隔管
64c Clamp, splined 花键夹
64d Spacing pipe 隔管
65 Neck ring retainer 颈环挡圈
66 Washer 垫圈
66a Washer 垫圈
66b Lock washer 锁紧垫圈
67 Nut/screw 螺母/螺丝
69 Spacing pipe 隔管
76 Nameplate set 铭牌套件
100 O-ring O型圈
105 Shaft seal 轴封
201 Flange 法兰
203 Retaining ring 挡圈

23
Appendix

CR, CRI, CRN 1s, 1, 3 and 5

50a

51
36a
10a
8 9
10 49

64

105 65
4 45
7a

2 2 7 2
100 28 18
23 100 49
28 36
66a 64a
65
7
76a 4a 45
7a 76

60 26 47a
77 77
49

64c
37
66
67

65
5a 45

55

6 6

37

38

35 12 39 25

203

201

6 6 6

38 25
TM02 0455 3403

56 56 56

24
CR, CRI, CRN 10, 15 and 20

Appendix
36a 51
62

61
69
10a
8 9 3
10

49
49c
10a
1 8 9 64
10
65

28a 45 4
105

18
2 2 2
100
28 36
23 66a
100 49
7 49c
76a
7 7a 76 64
65
26
45 4
77 77
60

37
80

49
49c

64a
65

45 4a

55

47a
37 64d

49
6 6 49c
38a
64b
25 64c
39 66
38 67
12
35 65
45 44a
203

201

6 6 6 26a
38a
44b
TM02 7383 3403

25
26c
38
26b

56 56 56

25
Appendix

CR, CRN 32, 45, 64 and 90

48
49b

49
28a 49c

51
65

26b 45 45a
26c
9
7 8

4
3
47c
47d
7a 47c
1a 47d
26a
48
28
49b
36a 7a
48 49
7 49b 49c

65
7a 49a
58a 49c
105 45 45a
58
36 65 44
66a
76 45 45a
100 2
18 23
100 4a

37
60
47 47b 51
26 47e 66
66b
47a 67

37
55
31
32
6g
21
6

38a
31 38
32
6g
21
38a 6

21 38
38a 203 201 25
TM01 9996 3600

25
38
25
203 201 56

26
 CR, CRN 120 and 150

TM03 6001 4106

27
Appendix
 Appendix

7
5
3
1

28
Start-up
Appendix

TM01 1409 4497 TM01 1407 4497 TM01 1405 4497 TM01 1403 4497

8
6
4
2

?
TM01 9988 3600 TM01 1408 4497 TM01 1406 4497 TM01 1404 4497
2
Quickguide

Appendix
Start-up

1 2
Close the isolating valve on the discharge side of the pump and Remove the priming plug from the pump head and slowly fill the
open the isolating valve on the suction side. pump with liquid. Replace the priming plug and tighten securely.
3 4
See the correct direction of rotation of the pump on the motor fan Start the pump and check the direction of rotation.
cover.
5 6
Vent the pump by means of the vent valve in the pump head. Continue to vent the pump. At the same time, open the discharge
At the same time, open the discharge isolating valve a little. isolating valve a little more.
7 8
Close the vent valve when a steady stream of liquid runs out of it. For further information, see page 12.
Completely open the discharge isolating valve.

启动

1 2
关闭水泵排出侧的隔离阀，打开吸入侧的隔离阀。 从泵头拆去引水塞并缓慢加注水泵。 装好引水塞并安全拧紧。
3 4
在电机风扇盖上察看水泵正确的转动方向。 启动水泵，检查转动方向。
5 6
通过位于泵头内的除气阀对泵除气。 与此同时，稍稍打开排出侧隔 水泵继续除气。 与此同时，再稍大些打开排出侧隔离阀。
离阀。
7 8
在看到液体持续平稳地从除气阀流出后关闭此阀。 进一步信息请见第22页。
完全打开排出侧隔离阀。

29
30
Argentina Finland Lithuania Spain

Grundfos companies
Bombas GRUNDFOS de Argentina S.A. OY GRUNDFOS Pumput AB GRUNDFOS Pumps UAB Bombas GRUNDFOS España S.A.
Ruta Panamericana, ramal Campana Cen- Mestarintie 11 Smolensko g. 6 Camino de la Fuentecilla, s/n
tro Industrial Garín - Esq. Haendel y FIN-01730 Vantaa LT-03201 Vilnius E-28110 Algete (Madrid)
Mozart Phone: +358-3066 5650 Tel: + 370 52 395 430 Tel.: +34-91-848 8800
AR-1619 Garín Pcia. de Buenos Aires Telefax: +358-3066 56550 Fax: + 370 52 395 431 Telefax: +34-91-628 0465
Pcia. de Buenos Aires
Phone: +54-3327 414 444 France Malaysia Sweden
Telefax: +54-3327 45 3190 Pompes GRUNDFOS Distribution S.A. GRUNDFOS Pumps Sdn. Bhd. GRUNDFOS AB
Parc d’Activités de Chesnes 7 Jalan Peguam U1/25 Box 333 (Lunnagårdsgatan 6)
Australia 57, rue de Malacombe Glenmarie Industrial Park 431 24 Mölndal
GRUNDFOS Pumps Pty. Ltd. F-38290 St. Quentin Fallavier (Lyon) 40150 Shah Alam Tel.: +46 31 332 23 000
P.O. Box 2040 Tél.: +33-4 74 82 15 15 Selangor Telefax: +46 31 331 94 60
Regency Park Télécopie: +33-4 74 94 10 51 Phone: +60-3-5569 2922
South Australia 5942 Telefax: +60-3-5569 2866 Switzerland
Phone: +61-8-8461-4611 Germany GRUNDFOS Pumpen AG
Telefax: +61-8-8340 0155 GRUNDFOS GMBH Mexico Bruggacherstrasse 10
Schlüterstr. 33 Bombas GRUNDFOS de México S.A. de CH-8117 Fällanden/ZH
Austria 40699 Erkrath C.V. Tel.: +41-1-806 8111
GRUNDFOS Pumpen Vertrieb Ges.m.b.H. Tel.: +49-(0) 211 929 69-0 Boulevard TLC No. 15 Telefax: +41-1-806 8115
Grundfosstraße 2 Telefax: +49-(0) 211 929 69-3799 Parque Industrial Stiva Aeropuerto
A-5082 Grödig/Salzburg e-mail: infoservice@[Link] Apodaca, N.L. 66600 Taiwan
Tel.: +43-6246-883-0 Service in Deutschland: Phone: +52-81-8144 4000 GRUNDFOS Pumps (Taiwan) Ltd.
Telefax: +43-6246-883-30 e-mail: kundendienst@[Link] Telefax: +52-81-8144 4010 7 Floor, 219 Min-Chuan Road
Taichung, Taiwan, R.O.C.
Belgium HILGE GmbH & Co. KG Netherlands Phone: +886-4-2305 0868
N.V. GRUNDFOS Bellux S.A. Hilgestrasse 37-47 GRUNDFOS Netherlands Telefax: +886-4-2305 0878
Boomsesteenweg 81-83 55292 Bodenheim/Rhein Veluwezoom 35
B-2630 Aartselaar Germany 1326 AE Almere Thailand
Tél.: +32-3-870 7300 Tel.: +49 6135 75-0 Postbus 22015 GRUNDFOS (Thailand) Ltd.
Télécopie: +32-3-870 7301 Telefax: +49 6135 1737 1302 CA ALMERE 92 Chaloem Phrakiat Rama 9 Road,
e-mail: hilge@[Link] Tel.: +31-88-478 6336 Dokmai, Pravej, Bangkok 10250
Belarus Telefax: +31-88-478 6332 Phone: +66-2-725 8999
Представительство ГРУНДФОС в Greece E-mail: info_gnl@[Link] Telefax: +66-2-725 8998
Минске GRUNDFOS Hellas A.E.B.E.
220125, Минск 20th km. Athinon-Markopoulou Av. New Zealand Turkey
ул. Шафарнянская, 11, оф. 56 P.O. Box 71 GRUNDFOS Pumps NZ Ltd. GRUNDFOS POMPA San. ve Tic. Ltd. Sti.
Тел.: +7 (375 17) 286 39 72, 286 39 73 GR-19002 Peania 17 Beatrice Tinsley Crescent Gebze Organize Sanayi Bölgesi
Факс: +7 (375 17) 286 39 71 Phone: +0030-210-66 83 400 North Harbour Industrial Estate Ihsan dede Caddesi,
E-mail: minsk@[Link] Telefax: +0030-210-66 46 273 Albany, Auckland 2. yol 200. Sokak No. 204
Phone: +64-9-415 3240 41490 Gebze/ Kocaeli
Bosnia/Herzegovina Hong Kong Telefax: +64-9-415 3250 Phone: +90 - 262-679 7979
GRUNDFOS Sarajevo GRUNDFOS Pumps (Hong Kong) Ltd. Telefax: +90 - 262-679 7905
Trg Heroja 16, Unit 1, Ground floor Norway E-mail: satis@[Link]
BiH-71000 Sarajevo Siu Wai Industrial Centre GRUNDFOS Pumper A/S
Phone: +387 33 713 290 29-33 Wing Hong Street & Strømsveien 344 Ukraine
Telefax: +387 33 659 079 68 King Lam Street, Cheung Sha Wan Postboks 235, Leirdal ТОВ ГРУНДФОС УКРАЇНА
e-mail: grundfos@[Link] Kowloon N-1011 Oslo 01010 Київ, Вул. Московська 8б,
Phone: +852-27861706 / 27861741 Tlf.: +47-22 90 47 00 Тел.:(+38 044) 390 40 50
Brazil Telefax: +852-27858664 Telefax: +47-22 32 21 50 Фах.: (+38 044) 390 40 59
BOMBAS GRUNDFOS DO BRASIL E-mail: ukraine@[Link]
Av. Humberto de Alencar Castelo Branco, Hungary Poland
630 GRUNDFOS Hungária Kft. GRUNDFOS Pompy Sp. z o.o. United Arab Emirates
CEP 09850 - 300 Park u. 8 ul. Klonowa 23 GRUNDFOS Gulf Distribution
São Bernardo do Campo - SP H-2045 Törökbálint, Baranowo k. Poznania P.O. Box 16768
Phone: +55-11 4393 5533 Phone: +36-23 511 110 PL-62-081 Przeźmierowo Jebel Ali Free Zone
Telefax: +55-11 4343 5015 Telefax: +36-23 511 111 Tel: (+48-61) 650 13 00 Dubai
Fax: (+48-61) 650 13 50 Phone: +971 4 8815 166
Bulgaria India Telefax: +971 4 8815 136
Grundfos Bulgaria EOOD GRUNDFOS Pumps India Private Limited Portugal
Slatina District 118 Old Mahabalipuram Road Bombas GRUNDFOS Portugal, S.A. United Kingdom
Iztochna Tangenta street no. 100 Thoraipakkam Rua Calvet de Magalhães, 241 GRUNDFOS Pumps Ltd.
BG - 1592 Sofia Chennai 600 096 Apartado 1079 Grovebury Road
Tel. +359 2 49 22 200 Phone: +91-44 2496 6800 P-2770-153 Paço de Arcos Leighton Buzzard/Beds. LU7 4TL
Fax. +359 2 49 22 201 Tel.: +351-21-440 76 00 Phone: +44-1525-850000
email: bulgaria@[Link]
Indonesia Telefax: +351-21-440 76 90 Telefax: +44-1525-850011
PT GRUNDFOS Pompa
Canada Jl. Rawa Sumur III, Blok III / CC-1 Romania U.S.A.
GRUNDFOS Canada Inc. Kawasan Industri, Pulogadung GRUNDFOS Pompe România SRL GRUNDFOS Pumps Corporation
2941 Brighton Road Jakarta 13930 Bd. Biruintei, nr 103 17100 West 118th Terrace
Oakville, Ontario Phone: +62-21-460 6909 Pantelimon county Ilfov Olathe, Kansas 66061
L6H 6C9 Telefax: +62-21-460 6910 / 460 6901 Phone: +40 21 200 4100 Phone: +1-913-227-3400
Phone: +1-905 829 9533 Telefax: +40 21 200 4101 Telefax: +1-913-227-3500
Telefax: +1-905 829 9512
Ireland E-mail: romania@[Link]
GRUNDFOS (Ireland) Ltd. Uzbekistan
China Unit A, Merrywell Business Park Russia Представительство ГРУНДФОС в
GRUNDFOS Pumps (Shanghai) Co. Ltd. Ballymount Road Lower ООО Грундфос Ташкенте
50/F Maxdo Center No. 8 XingYi Rd. Dublin 12 Россия, 109544 Москва, ул. Школьная 700000 Ташкент ул.Усмана Носира 1-й
Hongqiao development Zone Phone: +353-1-4089 800 39 тупик 5
Shanghai 200336 Telefax: +353-1-4089 830 Тел. (+7) 495 737 30 00, 564 88 00 Телефон: (3712) 55-68-15
PRC Факс (+7) 495 737 75 36, 564 88 11 Факс: (3712) 53-36-35
Phone: +86 21 612 252 22
Italy E-mail [Link]@[Link]
Telefax: +86 21 612 253 33 GRUNDFOS Pompe Italia S.r.l. Revised 10.12.2012
Via Gran Sasso 4 Serbia
Croatia I-20060 Truccazzano (Milano) GRUNDFOS Predstavništvo Beograd
GRUNDFOS CROATIA d.o.o. Tel.: +39-02-95838112 Dr. Milutina Ivkovića 2a/29
Cebini 37, Buzin Telefax: +39-02-95309290 / 95838461 YU-11000 Beograd
HR-10010 Zagreb Phone: +381 11 26 47 877 / 11 26 47 496
Phone: +385 1 6595 400
Japan Telefax: +381 11 26 48 340
Telefax: +385 1 6595 499 GRUNDFOS Pumps K.K.
[Link] Gotanda Metalion Bldg., 5F, Singapore
5-21-15, Higashi-gotanda GRUNDFOS (Singapore) Pte. Ltd.
Czech Republic Shiagawa-ku, Tokyo 25 Jalan Tukang
GRUNDFOS s.r.o. 141-0022 Japan Singapore 619264
Čajkovského 21 Phone: +81 35 448 1391 Phone: +65-6681 9688
779 00 Olomouc Telefax: +81 35 448 9619 Telefax: +65-6681 9689
Phone: +420-585-716 111
Telefax: +420-585-716 299
Korea Slovenia
GRUNDFOS Pumps Korea Ltd. GRUNDFOS d.o.o.
Denmark 6th Floor, Aju Building 679-5 Šlandrova 8b, SI-1231 Ljubljana-Črnuče
GRUNDFOS DK A/S Yeoksam-dong, Kangnam-ku, 135-916 Phone: +386 1 568 0610
Martin Bachs Vej 3 Seoul, Korea Telefax: +386 1 568 0619
DK-8850 Bjerringbro Phone: +82-2-5317 600 E-mail: slovenia@[Link]
Tlf.: +45-87 50 50 50 Telefax: +82-2-5633 725
Telefax: +45-87 50 51 51 South Africa
E-mail: info_GDK@[Link]
Latvia GRUNDFOS (PTY) LTD
SIA GRUNDFOS Pumps Latvia Corner Mountjoy and George Allen Roads
[Link]/DK
Deglava biznesa centrs Wilbart Ext. 2
Estonia Augusta Deglava ielā 60, LV-1035, Rīga, Bedfordview 2008
GRUNDFOS Pumps Eesti OÜ Tālr.: + 371 714 9640, 7 149 641 Phone: (+27) 11 579 4800
Peterburi tee 92G Fakss: + 371 914 9646 Fax: (+27) 11 455 6066
11415 Tallinn E-mail: lsmart@[Link]
Tel: + 372 606 1690
Fax: + 372 606 1691
 Being responsible is our foundation
Thinking ahead makes it possible
Innovation is the essence

97688538 1112
ECM: 1104018 The name Grundfos, the Grundfos logo, and the payoff be think innovate are registered trademarks
owned by Grundfos Holding A/S or Grundfos A/S, Denmark. All rights reserved worldwide.

[Link]
PENTAIR ‐ STRUCTURAL
MODEL: 1865
SIZE: 18” DIA X 65”HT
COMPOSITE PRESSURE VESSELS
COMPOSITE VS. STEEL

Global Leaders in Composite

Pressure Vessel Technology
The non-corrosive, cost-effective
solution for commercial/industrial
water treatment and storage

STRUCTURAL® TECHNOLOGY AND APPLICATIONS

MANUFACTURING PROCESSES Composite Pressure Vessels are used
for large commercial and industrial
Our exclusive, patented manufacturing applications such as:
process creates a seamless polyethylene • Softening
shell that is wound continuously with fiber- • Filtration
glass roving and sealed with epoxy resin. • Storage
This process results in a corrosion-resistant,
leak-free vessel. Computer-aided winding
WHY CUSTOMERS
machines and other customized equipment SPECIFY STRUCTURAL
are used to produce a tank that offers out- • Trusted performance
standing performance and durability. • High quality products
• Unparalleled customer support
• Rapid delivery
COMPOSITE PRESSURE VESSELS
SPECIFICATIONS
description opening operating Height w/ height w/o diameter capacity base weight w/
pressure base (IN/mm) 1 base (IN/mm) 1 (in/mm) 2 (gal/LITER) base
(PSI/bar) (LBS/KG) 3
18 x 65 4"T 150/10.34 66.25/1682.0 65.00/1651.0 18.65/473.8 64/242.0 SMC 67/30.4

18 x 65 4"TB 150/10.34 73.13/1857.5 65.63/1667.0 18.65/473.8 64/242.0 SMC EXT 67/30.4

21 x 62 4"T 150/10.34 67.13/1705.0 63.50/1612.9 22.00/558.8 84/318.0 SMC 95/43.1

21 x 62 4"TB 150/10.34 72.75/1847.9 63.50/1612.9 21.75/552.5 84/318.0 SMC EXT 95/43.1

24 x 72 4"T 150/10.34 74.66/1896.3 70.60/1793.2 24.25/616.0 118/446.7 SMC 109/49.4

24 x 72 4"TB 150/10.34 80.42/2042.7 70.30/1785.6 24.60/624.8 119/450.5 SMC EXT 124/56.2

24 x 72 6"TBF 150/10.34 88.50/2247.9 74.50/1892.3 24.20/614.7 119/450.5 TRIPOD 137/62.1

30 x 60 6"TF 150/10.34 71.63/1819.4 64.34/1634.2 30.20/767.0 151/571.6 SMC EXT 185/83.9

30 x 60 6"TBF 150/10.34 82.50/2095.5 68.50/1739.9 30.20/767.0 151/571.6 TRIPOD 185/83.9

30 x 72 4"TB 150/10.34 78.90/2004.1 70.40/1788.2 30.07/763.8 187/707.9 SMC EXT 198/89.8

30 x 72 6"TBF 150/10.34 88.90/2258.1 74.90/1902.5 30.20/767.1 187/707.9 TRIPOD 211/95.7

36 x 72 4"TB 150/10.34 80.50/2004.7 70.50/1790.7 36.00/914.4 264/999.3 SMC EXT 285/129.3

36 x 72 6"TBF 150/10.34 90.39/2295.9 76.14/1933.9 36.12/917.4 264/999.3 TRIPOD 285/129.3

42 x 72 6"TF 150/10.34 72.52/1842.0 71.14/1807.0 42.25/1073.2 345/1306.0 SMC LOW 370/168.0

42 x 72 6"TBF 150/10.34 90.12/2289.0 73.00/1854.2 42.25/1073.2 345/1306.0 TRIPOD 400/181.0

48 x 72 6"TF 150/10.34 81.54/2071.2 75.16/1909.1 48.25/1225.6 463/1753.0 SMC LOW 494/224.0

48 x 72 6"TBF 150/10.34 92.90/2359.7 76.90/1953.3 48.25/1225.6 463/1753.0 TRIPOD 494/224.0

63 x 67 6"TBF 150/10.34 81.41/2067.8 67.10/1704.3 64.00/1625.7 600/2271.0 TRIPOD 680/308.0

63 x 67 16"TMY, 6"BF 150/10.34 82.24/2088.9 67.80/1722.1 64.00/1625.7 600/2271.0 TRIPOD 680/308.0

63 x 86 6"TBF 150/10.34 98.54/2502.9 84.10/2136.1 64.00/1625.7 900/3407.0 TRIPOD 950/431.0

63 x 86 16"TMY, 6"BF 150/10.34 98.94/2513.1 84.50/2146.3 64.00/1625.7 900/3407.0 TRIPOD 950/431.0

63 x 116 16"TMY, 6"BF 150/10.34 130.44/3313.2 116.00/2946.4 64.00/1625.7 1250/4732.0 TRIPOD 1190/540.0

63 x 144 16"TMY, 6"BF 150/10.34 160.18/4068.6 145.50/3695.7 64.50/1638.3 1600/6057.0 TRIPOD 1398/634.0

1
Height Tolerance is +/- 1.00in/ 25.4 mm Note: ASME Code available on flanged tanks 18" to 48" in diameter
2
Diameter Tolerence is +/- .50in/ 12.7 mm
3
Product Weight – Contact customer service for shipping weight

COMPOSITE VESSEL BENEFITS OVER STEEL TANKS COMPOSITE VESSELS: LOWER TOTAL
OPERATION COSTS VERSUS STEEL TANKS
Steel Tanks STRUCTURAL
Composite Vessels
Very heavy and difficult 60% lighter than steel and STRUCTURAL Composite Vessels
to handle thus involves easier to handle thus lower
higher labor cost to install installation costs
Steel Tanks
Corrode and rust over a Corrosion-resistant both
period of time inside and out
Cost
Lining has to be Low maintenance
periodically treated Product Price Installation Maintenance Over 10 Years

Painting and coating Natural fiberglass shell

have to be undertaken never fades or changes color;
regularly colored shells recommended
for UV protection

Pentair Water Chardon • Home of Structural

220 Park Drive, Chardon, OH 44024
Phone: 440.286.4116
Toll Free Phone: 800.922.8265
Fax: 440.286.7145 © 2007 Pentair Water
[Link] Printed in U.S.A. NO07 Part No. 42575
PUMP:
GRUNDFOS ‐ ALLDOS
MODEL: DDE 6‐10
1PH, 0.019KW, 230V, 50HZ,
TANK:
MODEL: FDA 75
CAPACITY: 75 LITERS, POLYETHYLENE
 GRUNDFOS INSTRUCTIONS

SMART Digital - DDE

Installation and operating instructions
 Declaration of conformity
Declaration of conformity

GB: EC declaration of conformity BG: EC декларация за съответствие

We, Grundfos, declare under our sole responsibility that the products Ние, фирма Grundfos, заявяваме с пълна отговорност, че
DDA, DDC and DDE, to which this declaration relates, are in продуктите DDA, DDC и DDE, за които се отнася настоящата
conformity with these Council directives on the approximation of the декларация, отговарят на следните указания на Съвета за
laws of the EC member states: уеднаквяване на правните разпоредби на държавите членки на
– Machinery Directive (2006/42/EC). ЕС:
Standards used: EN 809: 1998, EN ISO 12100-1+A1: 2009, – Директива за машините (2006/42/EC).
EN ISO 12100-2+A1: 2009. Приложени стандарти: EN 809: 1998, EN ISO 12100-1+A1: 2009,
– Low Voltage Directive (2006/95/EC). * EN ISO 12100-2+A1: 2009.
Standard used: EN 61010-1: 2001 (second edition). – Директива за нисковолтови системи (2006/95/EC). *
– EMC Directive (2004/108/EC). Приложен стандарт: EN 61010-1: 2001 (второ издание).
Standards used: EN 61326-1: 2006, – Директива за електромагнитна съвместимост (2004/108/EC).
EN 61000-3-2: 2006+A1: 2009+A2: 2009, EN 61000-3-3: 2008. Приложени стандарти: EN 61326-1: 2006,
EN 61000-3-2: 2006+A1: 2009+A2: 2009, EN 61000-3-3: 2008.
* Only for products with operating voltage > 50 VAC or > 75 VDC.
* Само за продукти, работещи при напрежение > 50 VAC или
This EC declaration of conformity is only valid when published as part > 75 VDC.
of the Grundfos installation and operating instructions.
Тази ЕС декларация за съответствие е валидна само когато е
публикувана като част от инструкциите за монтаж и експлоатация
на Grundfos.

CZ: ES prohlášení o shodě DK: EF-overensstemmelseserklæring

My firma Grundfos prohlašujeme na svou plnou odpovědnost, Vi, Grundfos, erklærer under ansvar at produkterne DDA, DDC og DDE
že výrobky DDA, DDC a DDE, na něž se toto prohlášení vztahuje, som denne erklæring omhandler, er i overensstemmelse med disse af
jsou v souladu s ustanoveními směrnice Rady pro sblížení právních Rådets direktiver om indbyrdes tilnærmelse til EF-medlemsstaternes
předpisů členských států Evropského společenství v oblastech: lovgivning:
– Směrnice pro strojní zařízení (2006/42/ES). – Maskindirektivet (2006/42/EF).
Použité normy: EN 809: 1998, EN ISO 12100-1+A1: 2009, Anvendte standarder: EN 809: 1998, EN ISO 12100-1+A1: 2009,
EN ISO 12100-2+A1: 2009. EN ISO 12100-2+A1: 2009.
– Směrnice pro nízkonapět’ové aplikace (2006/95/ES). * – Lavspændingsdirektivet (2006/95/EF). *
Použitá norma: EN 61010-1: 2001 (druhé vydání). Anvendt standard: EN 61010-1: 2001 (anden udgave).
– Směrnice pro elektromagnetickou kompatibilitu (EMC) – EMC-direktivet (2004/108/EF).
(2004/108/ES). Anvendte standarder: EN 61326-1: 2006,
Použité normy: EN 61326-1: 2006, EN 61000-3-2: 2006+A1: 2009+A2: 2009, EN 61000-3-3: 2008.
EN 61000-3-2: 2006+A1: 2009+A2: 2009, EN 61000-3-3: 2008.
* Gælder kun for produkter med driftsspænding > 50 VAC eller
* Pouze pro výrobky s provozním napětím > 50 VAC nebo > 75 VDC.
> 75 VDC.
Denne EF-overensstemmelseserklæring er kun gyldig når den
Toto ES prohlášení o shodě je platné pouze tehdy, pokud je zveřejněno publiceres som en del af Grundfos-monterings- og driftsinstruktionen.
jako součást instalačních a provozních návodů Grundfos.

DE: EG-Konformitätserklärung EE: EL vastavusdeklaratsioon

Wir, Grundfos, erklären in alleiniger Verantwortung, dass die Produkte Meie, Grundfos, deklareerime enda ainuvastutusel, et tooted DDA,
DDA, DDC und DDE, auf die sich diese Erklärung bezieht, mit den DDC ja DDE, mille kohta käesolev juhend käib, on vastavuses EÜ
folgenden Richtlinien des Rates zur Angleichung der Nõukogu direktiividega EMÜ liikmesriikide seaduste ühitamise kohta,
Rechtsvorschriften der EU-Mitgliedsstaaten übereinstimmen: mis käsitlevad:
– Maschinenrichtlinie (2006/42/EG). – Masinate ohutus (2006/42/EC).
Normen, die verwendet wurden: EN 809: 1998, Kasutatud standardid: EN 809: 1998, EN ISO 12100-1+A1: 2009,
EN ISO 12100-1+A1: 2009, EN ISO 12100-2+A1: 2009. EN ISO 12100-2+A1: 2009.
– Niederspannungsrichtlinie (2006/95/EG). * – Madalpinge direktiiv (2006/95/EC). *
Norm, die verwendet wurde: EN 61010-1: 2001 (zweite Ausgabe). Kasutatud standard: EN 61010-1: 2001 (teine väljaanne).
– EMV-Richtlinie (2004/108/EG). – Elektromagnetiline ühilduvus (EMC direktiiv) (2004/108/EC).
Normen, die verwendet wurden: EN 61326-1: 2006, Kasutatud standardid: EN 61326-1: 2006,
EN 61000-3-2: 2006+A1: 2009+A2: 2009, EN 61000-3-3: 2008. EN 61000-3-2: 2006+A1: 2009+A2: 2009, EN 61000-3-3: 2008.

* Nur für Produkte mit Betriebsspannungen > 50 VAC oder * Ainult toodete jaoks mille tööpinge on suurem kui > 50 VAC või
> 75 VDC. suurem kui > 75 VDC.

Diese EG-Konformitätserklärung gilt nur, wenn sie in Verbindung mit Käesolev EL-i vastavusdeklaratsioon kehtib ainult siis, kui see
der Grundfos Montage- und Betriebsanleitung veröffentlicht wird. avaldatakse Grundfosi paigaldus- ja kasutusjuhendi osana.

2
 Declaration of conformity
GR: ∆ήλωση συμμόρφωσης EC ES: Declaración CE de conformidad
Εμείς, η Grundfos, δηλώνουμε με αποκλειστικά δική μας ευθύνη ότι Nosotros, Grundfos, declaramos bajo nuestra entera responsabilidad
τα προϊόντα DDA, DDC και DDE στα οποία αναφέρεται η παρούσα que los productos DDA, DDC y DDE, a los cuales se refiere esta
δήλωση, συμμορφώνονται με τις εξής Οδηγίες του Συμβουλίου περί declaración, están conformes con las Directivas del Consejo en la
προσέγγισης των νομοθεσιών των κρατών μελών της ΕΕ: aproximación de las leyes de las Estados Miembros del EM:
– Οδηγία για μηχανήματα (2006/42/EC). – Directiva de Maquinaria (2006/42/CE).
Πρότυπα που χρησιμοποιήθηκαν: EN 809: 1998, Normas aplicadas: EN 809: 1998, EN ISO 12100-1+A1: 2009,
EN ISO 12100-1+A1: 2009, EN ISO 12100-2+A1: 2009. EN ISO 12100-2+A1: 2009.
– Οδηγία χαμηλής τάσης (2006/95/EC). * – Directiva de Baja Tensión (2006/95/CE). *
Πρότυπο που χρησιμοποιήθηκε: EN 61010-1: 2001 (δεύτερη Norma aplicada: EN 61010-1: 2001 (segunda edición).
έκδοση). – Directiva EMC (2004/108/CE).
– Οδηγία Ηλεκτρομαγνητικής Συμβατότητας (EMC) (2004/108/EC). Normas aplicadas: EN 61326-1: 2006,
Πρότυπα που χρησιμοποιήθηκαν: EN 61326-1: 2006, EN 61000-3-2: 2006+A1: 2009+A2: 2009, EN 61000-3-3: 2008.
EN 61000-3-2: 2006+A1: 2009+A2: 2009, EN 61000-3-3: 2008.
* Sólo para productos con tensión de funcionamiento > 50 VAC o
* Μόνο για προϊόντα με τάση λειτουργίας > 50 VAC ή > 75 VDC. > 75 VDC.

Αυτή η δήλωση συμμόρφωσης EC ισχύει μόνον όταν συνοδεύει τις Esta declaración CE de conformidad sólo es válida cuando se publique
οδηγίες εγκατάστασης και λειτουργίας της Grundfos. como parte de las instrucciones de instalación y funcionamiento de
Grundfos.

FR: Déclaration de conformité CE HR: EZ izjava o usklađenosti

Nous, Grundfos, déclarons sous notre seule responsabilité, que les Mi, Grundfos, izjavljujemo pod vlastitom odgovornošću da je proizvod
produits DDA, DDC et DDE, auxquels se réfère cette déclaration, sont DDA, DDC i DDE, na koji se ova izjava odnosi, u skladu s direktivama
conformes aux Directives du Conseil concernant le rapprochement ovog Vijeća o usklađivanju zakona država članica EU:
des législations des Etats membres CE relatives aux normes – Direktiva za strojeve (2006/42/EZ).
énoncées ci-dessous : Korištene norme: EN 809: 1998, EN ISO 12100-1+A1: 2009,
– Directive Machines (2006/42/CE). EN ISO 12100-2+A1: 2009.
Normes utilisées : EN 809: 1998, EN ISO 12100-1+A1: 2009, – Direktiva za niski napon (2006/95/EZ). *
EN ISO 12100-2+A1: 2009. Korištena norma: EN 61010-1: 2001 (drugo izdanje).
– Directive Basse Tension (2006/95/CE). * – Direktiva za elektromagnetsku kompatibilnost (2004/108/EZ).
Norme utilisée : EN 61010-1: 2001 (deuxième édition). Korištene norme: EN 61326-1: 2006,
– Directive Compatibilité Electromagnétique CEM (2004/108/CE). EN 61000-3-2: 2006+A1: 2009+A2: 2009, EN 61000-3-3: 2008.
Normes utilisées : EN 61326-1: 2006,
EN 61000-3-2: 2006+A1: 2009+A2: 2009, EN 61000-3-3: 2008. * Samo za proizvode s radnim naponom > 50 VAC ili > 75 VDC.

* Convient uniquement aux produits avec tension de service Ova EZ izjava o suklađnosti važeća je jedino kada je izdana kao dio
> 50 VAC ou > 75 VDC. Grundfos montažnih i pogonskih uputa.

Cette déclaration de conformité CE est uniquement valide lors de sa

publication dans la notice d'installation et de fonctionnement Grundfos.

IT: Dichiarazione di conformità CE LV: EK paziņojums par atbilstību prasībām

Grundfos dichiara sotto la sua esclusiva responsabilità che i prodotti Sabiedrība GRUNDFOS ar pilnu atbildību dara zināmu, ka produkti
DDA, DDC e DDE, ai quali si riferisce questa dichiarazione, sono DDA, DDC un DDE, uz kuriem attiecas šis paziņojums, atbilst šādām
conformi alle seguenti direttive del Consiglio riguardanti il Padomes direktīvām par tuvināšanos EK dalībvalstu likumdošanas
riavvicinamento delle legislazioni degli Stati membri CE: normām:
– Direttiva Macchine (2006/42/CE). – Mašīnbūves direktīva (2006/42/EK).
Norme applicate: EN 809: 1998, EN ISO 12100-1+A1: 2009, Piemērotie standarti: EN 809: 1998, EN ISO 12100-1+A1: 2009,
EN ISO 12100-2+A1: 2009. EN ISO 12100-2+A1: 2009.
– Direttiva Bassa Tensione (2006/95/CE). * – Zema sprieguma direktīva (2006/95/EK). *
Norma applicata: EN 61010-1: 2001 (seconda edizione). Piemērotais standarts: EN 60335-1: 2006
– Direttiva EMC (2004/108/CE). – Elektromagnētiskās saderības direktīva (2004/108/EK).
Norme applicate: EN 61326-1: 2006, Piemērotie standarti: EN 61326-1: 2006,
EN 61000-3-2: 2006+A1: 2009+A2: 2009, EN 61000-3-3: 2008. EN 61000-3-2: 2006+A1: 2009+A2: 2009, EN 61000-3-3: 2008.

* Solo per prodotti con tensione di alimentazione > 50 VAC o * Tikai produktiem, kuru darba spriegums ir > 50 V maiņstrāvas vai
> 75 VDC. > 75 V līdzstrāvas.

Questa dichiarazione di conformità CE è valida solo quando pubblicata Šī EK atbilstības deklarācija ir derīga vienīgi tad, ja ir publicēta kā daļa
come parte delle istruzioni di installazione e funzionamento Grundfos. no GRUNDFOS uzstādīšanas un ekspluatācijas instrukcijām.

LT: EB atitikties deklaracija HU: EK megfelelőségi nyilatkozat

Mes, Grundfos, su visa atsakomybe pareiškiame, kad gaminiai DDA, Mi, a Grundfos, egyedüli felelősséggel kijelentjük, hogy a DDA, DDC
DDC ir DDE, kuriems skirta ši deklaracija, atitinka šias Tarybos és DDC termékek, amelyekre jelen nyilatkozik vonatkozik, megfelelnek
Direktyvas dėl Europos Ekonominės Bendrijos šalių narių įstatymų az Európai Unió tagállamainak jogi irányelveit összehangoló tanács
suderinimo: alábbi előírásainak:
– Mašinų direktyva (2006/42/EB). – Gépek (2006/42/EK).
Taikomi standartai: EN 809: 1998, EN ISO 12100-1+A1: 2009, Alkalmazott szabványok: EN 809: 1998, EN ISO 12100-1+
EN ISO 12100-2+A1: 2009. A1: 2009,
– Žemų įtampų direktyva (2006/95/EB). * EN ISO 12100-2+A1: 2009.
Taikomas standartas: EN 61010-1: 2001 (antrasis leidimas). – Kisfeszültségű Direktíva (2006/95/EK). *
– EMS direktyva (2004/108/EB). Alkalmazott szabvány: EN 61010-1: 2001 (második kiadás).
Taikomi standartai: EN 61326-1: 2006, – EMC Direktíva (2004/108/EK).
EN 61000-3-2: 2006+A1: 2009+A2: 2009, EN 61000-3-3: 2008. Alkalmazott szabványok: EN 61326-1: 2006,
EN 61000-3-2: 2006+A1: 2009+A2: 2009, EN 61000-3-3: 2008.
* Tik produktams, kurių darbinė įtampa yra > 50 V kintama arba
> 75 V nuolatinė. * Csak a > 50 VAC vagy > 75 VDC feszültségnél magasabb üzemi
feszültségű berendezések.
Ši EB atitikties deklaracija galioja tik tuo atveju, kai yra pateikta kaip
"Grundfos" įrengimo ir naudojimo instrukcijos dalis. Ez az EK megfelelőségi nyilatkozat kizárólag akkor érvényes, ha
Grundfos telepítési és üzemeltetési utasítás részeként kerül kiadásra.

3
Declaration of conformity

NL: EC overeenkomstigheidsverklaring UA: Свідчення про відповідність вимогам ЄС

Wij, Grundfos, verklaren geheel onder eigen verantwoordelijkheid dat Компанія Grundfos заявляє про свою виключну відповідальність за
de producten DDA, DDC en DDE waarop deze verklaring betrekking те, що продукти DDA, DDC та DDE, на які поширюється дана
heeft, in overeenstemming zijn met de Richtlijnen van de Raad in zake декларація, відповідають таким рекомендаціям Ради з уніфікації
de onderlinge aanpassing van de wetgeving van de EG Lidstaten правових норм країн - членів ЄС:
betreffende: – Механічні прилади (2006/42/ЄС).
– Machine Richtlijn (2006/42/EC). Стандарти, що застосовувалися: EN 809: 1998,
Gebruikte normen: EN 809: 1998, EN ISO 12100-1+A1: 2009, EN ISO 12100-1+A1: 2009, EN ISO 12100-2+A1: 2009.
EN ISO 12100-2+A1: 2009. – Низька напруга (2006/95/ЄС). *
– Laagspannings Richtlijn (2006/95/EC). * Стандарти, що застосовувалися: EN 61010-1: 2001
Gebruikte norm: EN 61010-1: 2001 (tweede editie). (друге видання).
– EMC Richtlijn (2004/108/EC). – Електромагнітна сумісність (2004/108/ЄС).
Gebruikte normen: EN 61326-1: 2006, Стандарти, що застосовувалися: EN 61326-1: 2006,
EN 61000-3-2: 2006+A1: 2009+A2: 2009, EN 61000-3-3: 2008. EN 61000-3-2: 2006+A1: 2009+A2: 2009, EN 61000-3-3: 2008.

* Alleen voor producten met bedrijfspanning > 50 VAC of > 75 VDC. * Тільки для продуктів з робочою напругою > 50 VAC або
> 75 VDC.
Deze EC overeenkomstigheidsverklaring is alleen geldig wanneer
deze gepubliceerd is als onderdeel van de Grundfos installatie- en Ця декларація відповідності ЄС дійсна тільки в тому випадку, якщо
bedieningsinstructies. публікується як частина інструкцій Grundfos з монтажу та
експлуатації.

PL: Deklaracja zgodności WE PT: Declaração de conformidade CE

My, Grundfos, oświadczamy z pełną odpowiedzialnością, że nasze A Grundfos declara sob sua única responsabilidade que os produtos
wyroby DDA, DDC oraz DDE, których deklaracja niniejsza dotyczy, DDA, DDC e DDE, aos quais diz respeito esta declaração, estão em
są zgodne z następującymi wytycznymi Rady d/s ujednolicenia conformidade com as seguintes Directivas do Conselho sobre
przepisów prawnych krajów członkowskich WE: a aproximação das legislações dos Estados Membros da CE:
– Dyrektywa Maszynowa (2006/42/WE). – Directiva Máquinas (2006/42/CE).
Zastosowane normy: EN 809: 1998, EN ISO 12100-1+A1: 2009, Normas utilizadas: EN 809: 1998, EN ISO 12100-1+A1: 2009,
EN ISO 12100-2+A1: 2009. EN ISO 12100-2+A1: 2009.
– Dyrektywa Niskonapięciowa (LVD) (2006/95/WE). * – Directiva Baixa Tensão (2006/95/CE). *
Zastosowana norma: EN 61010-1: 2001 (drugie wydanie). Norma utilizada: EN 61010-1: 2001 (segunda edição).
– Dyrektywa EMC (2004/108/WE). – Directiva EMC (compatibilidade electromagnética) (2004/108/CE).
Zastosowane normy: EN 61326-1: 2006, Normas utilizadas: EN 61326-1: 2006,
EN 61000-3-2: 2006+A1: 2009+A2: 2009, EN 61000-3-3: 2008. EN 61000-3-2: 2006+A1: 2009+A2: 2009, EN 61000-3-3: 2008.

* Dotyczy produktów o napięciu zasilania > 50 VAC lub > 75 VDC. * Apenas para produtos com tensão de funcionamento > 50 VCA
ou > 75 VCC.
Deklaracja zgodności WE jest ważna tylko i wyłącznie wtedy kiedy jest
opublikowana przez firmę Grundfos i umieszczona w instrukcji Esta declaração de conformidade CE é apenas válida quando
montażu i eksploatacji. publicada como parte das instruções de instalação e funcionamento
Grundfos.

RU: Декларация о соответствии ЕС RO: Declaraţie de conformitate CE

Мы, компания Grundfos, со всей ответственностью заявляем, что Noi, Grundfos, declarăm pe propria răspundere că produsele DDA,
изделия DDA, DDC и DDE, к которым относится настоящая DDC şi DDE, la care se referă această declaraţie, sunt în conformitate
декларация, соответствуют следующим Директивам Совета cu aceste Directive de Consiliu asupra armonizării legilor Statelor
Евросоюза об унификации законодательных предписаний Membre CE:
стран-членов ЕС: – Directiva Utilaje (2006/42/CE).
– Механические устройства (2006/42/ЕС). Standarde utilizate: EN 809: 1998,
Применявшиеся стандарты: EN 809: 1998, EN ISO 12100-1+A1: 2009, EN ISO 12100-2+A1: 2009.
EN ISO 12100-1+A1: 2009, EN ISO 12100-2+A1: 2009. – Directiva Tensiune Joasă (2006/95/CE). *
– Низковольтное оборудование (2006/95/EC). * Standard utilizat: EN 61010-1: 2001 (a doua editie).
Применявшийся стандарт: EN 61010-1: 2001 (второе издание). – Directiva EMC (2004/108/CE).
– Электромагнитная совместимость (2004/108/EC). Standarde utilizate: EN 61326-1: 2006,
Применявшиеся стандарты: EN 61326-1: 2006, EN 61000-3-2: 2006+A1: 2009+A2: 2009, EN 61000-3-3: 2008.
EN 61000-3-2: 2006+A1: 2009+A2: 2009, EN 61000-3-3: 2008.
* Numai pentru produse cu tensiunea de funcţionare > 50 VAC ori
* Только для изделий с рабочим напряжением > 50 В AC или > 75 VDC.
> 75 В DC.
Această declarație de conformitate CE este valabilă numai când este
Данная декларация о соответствии ЕС имеет силу только в случае publicată ca parte a instrucțiunilor Grundfos de instalare și funcționare.
публикации в составе инструкции по монтажу и эксплуатации на
продукцию производства компании Grundfos.

SK: Prehlásenie o konformite EÚ SI: ES izjava o skladnosti

My firma Grundfos prehlasujeme na svoju plnú zodpovednost’, V Grundfosu s polno odgovornostjo izjavljamo, da so naši izdelki DDA,
že výrobky DDA, DDC a DDE, na ktoré sa toto prehlásenie vzt’ahuje, DDC in DDE, na katere se ta izjava nanaša, v skladu z naslednjimi
sú v súlade s ustanovením smernice Rady pre zblíženie právnych direktivami Sveta o približevanju zakonodaje za izenačevanje pravnih
predpisov členských štátov Európskeho spoločenstva v oblastiach: predpisov držav članic ES:
– Smernica pre strojové zariadenie (2006/42/EC). – Direktiva o strojih (2006/42/ES).
Použité normy: EN 809: 1998, Uporabljeni normi: EN 809: 1998,
EN ISO 12100-1+A1: 2009, EN ISO 12100-2+A1: 2009. EN ISO 12100-1+A1: 2009, EN ISO 12100-2+A1: 2009.
– Smernica pre nízkonapät’ové aplikácie (2006/95/EC). * – Direktiva o nizki napetosti (2006/95/ES). *
Použitá norma: EN 61010-1: 2001 (druhé vydanie). Uporabljena norma: EN 61010-1: 2001 (druga izdaja).
– Smernica pre elektromagnetickú kompatibilitu (2004/108/EC). – Direktiva o elektromagnetni združljivosti (EMC) (2004/108/ES).
Použité normy: EN 61326-1: 2006, Uporabljeni normi: EN 61326-1: 2006,
EN 61000-3-2: 2006+A1: 2009+A2: 2009, EN 61000-3-3: 2008. EN 61000-3-2: 2006+A1: 2009+A2: 2009, EN 61000-3-3: 2008.

* Len pre produkty s prevádzkovým napätím > 50 VAC or > 75 VDC. * Samo za izdelke z delovno napetostjo, večjo od 50 V AC ali
manjšo od 75 V DC.
Toto prehlásenie o konformite ES je platné iba vtedy, ak je zverejnené
ako súčasť montážnych a prevádzkových pokynov Grundfos. ES izjava o skladnosti velja samo kadar je izdana kot del Grundfos
instalacije in navodil delovanja.

4
 Declaration of conformity
RS: EC deklaracija o konformitetu FI: EY-vaatimustenmukaisuusvakuutus
Mi, Grundfos, izjavljujemo pod vlastitom odgovornošću da je proizvod Me, Grundfos, vakuutamme omalla vastuullamme, että tuotteet DDA,
DDA, DDC i DDE, na koji se ova izjava odnosi, u skladu sa direktivama DDC ja DDE, joita tämä vakuutus koskee, ovat EY:n jäsenvaltioiden
Saveta za usklađivanje zakona država članica EU: lainsäädännön yhdenmukaistamiseen tähtäävien Euroopan neuvoston
– Direktiva za mašine (2006/42/EC). direktiivien vaatimusten mukaisia seuraavasti:
Korišćeni standardi: EN 809: 1998, – Konedirektiivi (2006/42/EY).
EN ISO 12100-1+A1: 2009, EN ISO 12100-2+A1: 2009. Sovellettavat standardit: EN 809: 1998,
– Direktiva niskog napona (2006/95/EC). * EN ISO 12100-1+A1: 2009, EN ISO 12100-2+A1: 2009.
Korišćen standard: EN 61010-1: 2001 (drugo izdanje). – Pienjännitedirektiivi (2006/95/EY). *
– EMC direktiva (2004/108/EC). Sovellettu standardi: EN 61010-1: 2001 (uudistettu versio).
Korišćeni standardi: EN 61326-1: 2006, – EMC-direktiivi (2004/108/EY).
EN 61000-3-2: 2006+A1: 2009+A2: 2009, EN 61000-3-3: 2008. Sovellettavat standardit: EN 61326-1: 2006,
EN 61000-3-2: 2006+A1: 2009+A2: 2009, EN 61000-3-3: 2008.
* Samo za proizvode sa radnim naponom > 50 VAC ili > 75 VDC.
* Vain laitteille, joiden käyttöjännite on > 50 VAC tai > 75 VDC.
Ova EC deklaracija o konformitetu važeća je jedino kada je izdata kao
deo Grundfos uputstava za instalaciju i rad. Tämä EY-vaatimustenmukaisuusvakuutus on voimassa vain, kun se
julkaistaan osana Grundfosin asennus- ja käyttöohjeita.

SE: EG-försäkran om överensstämmelse TR: EC uygunluk bildirgesi

Vi, Grundfos, försäkrar under ansvar att produkterna DDA, DDC och Grundfos olarak bu beyannameye konu olan DDA, DDC ve DDE
DDE, som omfattas av denna försäkran, är i överensstämmelse med ürünlerinin, AB Üyesi Ülkelerin kanunlarını birbirine yaklaştırma
rådets direktiv om inbördes närmande till EU-medlemsstaternas üzerine Konsey Direktifleriyle uyumlu olduğunun yalnızca bizim
lagstiftning, avseende: sorumluluğumuz altında olduğunu beyan ederiz:
– Maskindirektivet (2006/42/EG). – Makineler Yönetmeliği (2006/42/EC).
Tillämpade standarder: EN 809: 1998, Kullanılan standartlar: EN 809: 1998,
EN ISO 12100-1+A1: 2009, EN ISO 12100-2+A1: 2009. EN ISO 12100-1+A1: 2009, EN ISO 12100-2+A1: 2009.
– Lågspänningsdirektivet (2006/95/EG). * – Düşük Voltaj Yönetmeliği (2006/95/EC). *
Tillämpad standard: EN 61010-1: 2001 (andra upplagan). Kullanılan standart: EN 61010-1: 2001 (ikinci baskı).
– EMC-direktivet (2004/108/EG). – EMC Diretifi (2004/108/EC).
Tillämpade standarder: EN 61326-1: 2006, Kullanılan standartlar: EN 61326-1: 2006,
EN 61000-3-2: 2006+A1: 2009+A2: 2009, EN 61000-3-3: 2008. EN 61000-3-2: 2006+A1: 2009+A2: 2009, EN 61000-3-3: 2008.

* Endast för produkter med driftspänning > 50 VAC eller > 75 VDC. * Çalışma voltajı yalnızca > 50 VAC veya > 75 VDC değerinde olan
ürünler için.
Denna EG-försäkran om överensstämmelse är endast giltig när den
publiceras som en del av Grundfos monterings- och driftsinstruktion. İşbu EC uygunluk bildirgesi, yalnızca Grundfos kurulum ve çalıştırma
talimatlarının bir parçası olarak basıldığı takdirde geçerlilik
kazanmaktadır.

CN: EC 产品合格声明书 JP: EC 適合宣言

我们格兰富在我们的全权责任下声明，产品 DDA, DDC 和 DDE，即该 Grundfos は、 その責任の下に、 DDA, DDC 製品お よ び DDE 製品が EC
合格证所指之产品，符合欧共体使其成员国法律趋于一致的以下欧共理 加盟諸国の法規に関連す る 、 以下の評議会指令に適合 し て い る こ と を
事会指令： 宣言 し ます ：
– 机械设备指令 (2006/42/EC)。 ‒ 機械指令 （2006/42/EC）。
所用标准 : EN 809: 1998, 適用規格 ： EN 809: 1998, EN ISO 12100-1+A1: 2009,
EN ISO 12100-1+A1: 2009, EN ISO 12100-2+A1: 2009。 EN ISO 12100-2+A1: 2009。
– 低电压指令 (2006/95/EC)。* ‒ 低電圧指令 （2006/95/EC）。 *
所用标准 : EN 61010-1: 2001 ( 第 2 版 )。 適用規格 ： EN 61010-1: 2001 ( 第 2 版 )。
– 电磁兼容性指令 (2004/108/EC)。 ‒ EMC 指令 （2004/108/EC）。
所用标准 : EN 61326-1: 2006, 適用規格 ： EN 61326-1: 2006, EN 61000-3-2: 2006+A1: 2009+
EN 61000-3-2: 2006+A1: 2009+A2: 2009, EN 61000-3-3: 2008. A2: 2009, EN 61000-3-3: 2008。

* 仅适用于工作电压 > 50 VAC 或 > 75 VDC 的产品。 * 動作電圧 > 50 VAC ま たは > 75 VDC。

本 EC 合格性声明仅在作为格兰富安装与操作指导手册的一部分时有 こ の EC 適合宣言は、 グルン ド フ ォ ス取扱説明書の一部に掲載 さ れる

效。 場合のみ有効です。

KO: EC 적합성 선언
Pfinztal, 1 June 2011
Grundfos 에서는 자사의 단독 책임에 따라 이 선언과 관련된 DDA,
DDC 및 DDE 제품이 EC 회원국 법률에 기반한 다음 이사회 지침을 준
수함을 선언합니다 :
– 기계류 지침 (2006/42/EC).
사용된 표준 : EN 809: 1998,
Ulrich Stemick
EN ISO 12100-1+A1: 2009, EN ISO 12100-2+A1: 2009.
Technical Director
– 저전압 지침 (2006/95/EC). *
Grundfos Water Treatment GmbH
사용된 표준 : EN 61010-1: 2001 ( 제 2 출간 ). Reetzstr. 85, D-76327 Pfinztal, Germany
– EMC 지침 (2004/108/EC).
사용된 표준 : EN 61326-1: 2006, Person authorised to compile technical file and
EN 61000-3-2: 2006+A1: 2009+A2: 2009, empowered to sign the EC declaration of conformity.
EN 61000-3-3: 2008.

* 작동 전압 50 VAC 미만 또는 75 VDC 미만인 제품에만 해당 .

본 EC 인증은 그런포스에서 인쇄 배포한 설치 가이드 및 작업 매뉴얼에

포함되어 발행되었을 경우에만 유효합니다 .

5
 English (GB) Installation and operating instructions
English (GB)

Original installation and operating instructions. 8. Faults 21

8.1 Indication of faults 21
CONTENTS 8.2 List of faults 22
Page 9. Disposal 22
1. Safety instructions 6
1.1 Symbols used in this document 6 Warning
1.2 Qualification and training of personnel 6 Prior to installation, read these
1.3 Safety instructions for the operator/user 7 installation and operating instructions.
1.4 Safety of the system in the event of a Installation and operation must comply
failure in the dosing pump 7 with local regulations and accepted
1.5 Dosing chemicals 7 codes of good practice.
2. General information 7
2.1 Warranty 8 1. Safety instructions
2.2 Applications 8 These installation and operating instructions contain
2.3 Improper operating methods 8 general instructions that must be observed during
2.4 Symbols on the pump 9 installation, operation and maintenance of the pump.
2.5 Nameplate 9 It must therefore be read by the installation engineer
and the relevant qualified operator prior to
2.6 Type key 10
installation and start-up, and must be available at the
2.7 Product overview 11 installation location at all times.
3. Technical data / Dimensions 11
3.1 Technical data 11 1.1 Symbols used in this document
3.2 Dimensions 13
Warning
4. Assembly and installation 14
If these safety instructions are not
4.1 Pump assembly 14 observed, it may result in personal
4.1.1 Requirements 14 injury.
4.1.2 Align and install mounting plate 14
4.1.3 Engage pump in mounting plate 14 If these safety instructions are not
4.2 Hydraulic connection 14 Caution observed, it may result in malfunction
4.3 Electrical connection 15 or damage to the equipment.
5. Start-up 17
Note
Notes or instructions that make the job
5.1 General notes 17 easier and ensure safe operation.
5.2 Check before commissioning 17
5.3 Start and deaerate the pump 17 1.2 Qualification and training of personnel
6. Operation 17 The personnel responsible for the installation,
6.1 Operating elements 17 operation and service must be appropriately
6.2 Operation modes 18 qualified for these tasks. Areas of responsibility,
6.2.1 Manual 18 levels of authority and the supervision of the
6.2.2 Pulse 18 personnel must be precisely defined by the operator.
If necessary, the personnel must be trained
6.2.3 Change operation modes 18
appropriately.
6.3 Inputs/outputs 18
6.3.1 External stop 18 Risks of not observing the safety instructions
6.3.2 Empty and low-level signals 18 Non-observance of the safety instructions may have
6.3.3 Relay outputs 19 dangerous consequences for the personnel, the
6.3.4 Change settings 19 environment and the pump and may result in the loss
of any claims for damages.
7. Service 20
It may lead to the following hazards:
7.1 Cleaning 20
• Personal injury from exposure to electrical,
7.2 Service intervals 20 mechanical and chemical influences.
7.3 Perform service 20
• Damage to the environment and personal injury
7.3.1 Dosing head overview 20 from leakage of harmful substances.
7.3.2 Dismantling the diaphragm and valves 21
7.3.3 Reassembling the diaphragm and valves 21
7.4 Repairs 21

6
1.3 Safety instructions for the
Warning
operator/user

English (GB)
When working with chemicals, the
The safety instructions described in these accident prevention regulations
instructions, existing national regulations on health applicable at the installation site
protection, environmental protection and for accident should be applied (e.g. wearing
prevention and any internal working, operating and protective clothing).
safety regulations of the operator must be observed. Observe the chemical manufacturer's
Information attached to the pump must be observed. safety data sheets and safety
Leakages of dangerous substances must be instructions when handling chemicals!
disposed of in a way that is not harmful to the
personnel or the environment. Warning
Damage caused by electrical energy must be If the diaphragm leaks or is broken,
prevented, see the regulations of the local electricity dosing liquid will escape from the drain
supply company. opening on the dosing head (see fig. 2).
Take suitable precautions to prevent
Before starting work on the pump, the harm to health and damage to property
pump must be disconnected from the from escaping dosing liquid!
Caution
mains. The system must be
pressureless! Check daily whether liquid is escaping
from the discharge opening!
The mains plug is the separator Changing the diaphragm,
Note see section 7. Service.
separating the pump from the mains.

Only original accessories and original spare parts A deaeration hose, which is routed into
should be used. Using other parts can result in Caution a container, e.g. a drip tray, must be
exemption from liability for any resulting connected to the deaeration valve.
consequences.
The dosing medium must be in liquid
1.4 Safety of the system in the event of a aggregate state!
Caution
failure in the dosing pump Observe the freezing and boiling points
The dosing pump was designed according to the of the dosing medium!
latest technologies and is carefully manufactured
and tested. The resistance of the parts that come
If it fails regardless of this, the safety of the overall into contact with the dosing medium,
system must be ensured. Use the relevant such as the dosing head, valve ball,
monitoring and control functions for this. gaskets and lines, depends on the
medium, media temperature and
Make sure that any chemicals that are operating pressure.
released from the pump or any Ensure that parts in contact with the
damaged lines do not cause damage to Caution dosing medium are resistant to the
Caution system parts and buildings. dosing medium under operating
The installation of leak monitoring conditions, see data booklet!
solutions and drip trays is Should you have any questions
recommended. regarding the material resistance and
suitability of the pump for specific
1.5 Dosing chemicals dosing media, please contact
Grundfos.
Warning
Before switching the supply voltage
back on, the dosing lines must be 2. General information
connected in such a way that any The DDE dosing pump is a self-priming
chemicals in the dosing head cannot diaphragm pump. It consists of a housing
spray out and put people at risk. with stepper motor and electronics and a
The dosing medium is pressurised and dosing head with diaphragm and valves.
can be harmful to health and the Excellent dosing features of the pump:
environment.
• Optimal intake even with degassing media, as
the pump always works at full suction stroke
volume.
• Continuous dosing, as the medium is sucked up
with a short suction stroke, regardless of the
current dosing flow, and dosed with the longest
possible dosing stroke.

7
 2.1 Warranty 2.3 Improper operating methods
English (GB)

A guarantee claim in accordance with our general The operational safety of the pump is only
terms of sale and delivery is only valid if the following guaranteed if it is used in accordance with section
requirements are fulfilled: 2.2 Applications.
• The pump is used in accordance with the
information within this manual. Warning
• The pump is not dismantled or incorrectly Other applications or the operation of
handled. pumps in ambient and operating
conditions, which are not approved,
• The maintenance is carried out by authorised and are considered improper and are not
qualified personnel. permitted. Grundfos cannot be held
• Original spare parts are used for repairs during liable for any damage resulting from
maintenance. incorrect use.

2.2 Applications Warning

The pump is suitable for liquid, non-abrasive, The pump is NOT approved for
non-flammable and non-combustible media strictly in operation in potentially explosive
accordance with the instructions in these installation areas!
and operating instructions.
Areas of application Warning
• Drinking water treatment A sunscreen is required for outdoor
installation!
• Wastewater treatment
• Swimming pool water treatment
• Boiler water treatment
• CIP (Clean-In-Place)
• Cooling water treatment
• Process water treatment
• Wash plants
• Chemical industry
• Ultrafiltration processes and reverse osmosis
• Irrigation
• Paper and pulp industry
• Food and beverage industries.

8
2.4 Symbols on the pump

English (GB)
Symbol Description

Indication of universally dangerous spot.

In case of emergency and prior to all maintenance work and repairs, take the mains plug out
of the mains supply!

The device complies with electrical safety class II.

Connection for deaeration hose at dosing head. If the deaeration hose is not correctly
connected, danger will arise due to possible leakage of dosing liquid!

2.5 Nameplate

      

Type Pmax W IP 65

TM04 8144 2011

U f Imax A Q l/h gph
Model P Bar psi NEMA 4X
97694877

Made in France N5454

  
Fig. 1 Nameplate

Pos. Description Pos. Description

1 Type designation 6 Enclosure class

2 Voltage 7 Mark of approval, CE mark, etc.
3 Frequency 8 Country of origin
4 Power consumption 9 Max. operating pressure
5 Max. dosing flow 10 Model

9
 2.6 Type key
English (GB)

The type key is used to identify the precise pump and is not used for configuration purposes.

Code Example DDE 6- 10 P- PP/ V/ C- X- 3 1 U2U2 F G

Pump type
Max. flow [l/h]
Max. pressure [bar]

Control variant
B Basic
P B with pulse mode
PR P with relay output

Dosing head material

PP Polypropylene
PVC PVC (polyvinyl chloride, only up to 10 bar)
PV PVDF (polyvinylidene fluoride)
SS Stainless steel DIN 1.4401

Gasket material
E EPDM
V FKM
T PTFE

Valve ball material

C Ceramic
SS Stainless steel DIN 1.4401

Control cube position

X No control cube

Voltage
3 1 x 100-240 V, 50/60 Hz

Valve type
1 Standard
2 Spring-loaded (HV version)

Suction/discharge side connection

U2U2 Hose, 4/6 mm, 6/9 mm, 6/12 mm, 9/12 mm
U7U7 Hose 0.17" x 1/4"; 1/4" x 3/8"; 3/8" x 1/2"
AA Threaded Rp 1/4", female (stainless steel)
VV Threaded 1/4" NPT, female (stainless steel)
XX No connection
Installation set*
I001 Hose, 4/6 mm (up to 7.5 l/h, 13 bar)
I002 Hose, 9/12 mm (up to 60 l/h, 9 bar)
I003 Hose, 0.17" x 1/4" (up to 7.5 l/h, 13 bar)
I004 Hose, 3/8" x 1/2" (up to 60 l/h, 10 bar)

Mains plug
F EU
B USA, Canada
G UK
I Australia, New Zealand, Taiwan
E Switzerland
J Japan
L Argentina

Design
G Grundfos

* Including: 2 pump connections, foot valve, injection unit, 6 m PE discharge hose, 2 m PVC suction hose,
2 m PVC deaeration hose (4/6 mm).

10
2.7 Product overview

English (GB)
Valve, discharge side
Operating elements
(Section 6.1)

Deaeration valve
Capacity (Section 5.3)
adjustment knob
Dosing head

Keys* and status LED

Connection,
deaeration hose
Mechanical lock
Drain opening in
case of diaphragm
breakage
Signal
inputs/outputs *
(Section 4.3)

TM04 1149 5111

Mains connection Mounting plate Valve, suction side

* only control variant DDE-PR/P

Fig. 2 Overview

3. Technical data / Dimensions

3.1 Technical data

Data 6-10 15-4

Turndown ratio (setting range) [1:X] 1000 1000

[l/h] 6.0 15.0
Max. dosing capacity
[gph] 1.5 4.0
[l/h] 0.006 0.015
Min. dosing capacity
[gph] 0.0015 0.0040
[bar] 10 4
Max. operating pressure
Mechanical [psi] 150 60
data
Max. stroke frequency [strokes/min] 140 180
Stroke volume [ml] 0.81 1.58
Accuracy of repeatability [%] ±5
Max. suction lift during operation1) [m] 6
Max. suction lift when priming with wet valves1) [m] 2 3
Min. pressure difference between suction and
[bar] 1
discharge side

11
 Data 6-10 15-4
English (GB)

Max. inlet pressure, suction side [bar] 2

2) [mPas]
Max. viscosity with spring-loaded valves 600 500
(= cP)
[mPas]
Max. viscosity without spring-loaded valves2) 50
(= cP)
Min. internal hose/pipe diameter
[mm] 4 6
suction/discharge side1), 3)
Mechanical
data Min. internal hose/pipe diameter
[mm] 9
suction/discharge side (high viscosity)3)
Min./Max. liquid temperature [°C] -10/45
Min./Max. ambient temperature [°C] 0/45
Min./Max. storage temperature [°C] -20/70
Max. relative humidity (non-condensing) [%] 96
Max. altitude above sea level [m] 2000
100-240 V, - 10 %/+ 10 %,
Voltage [V]
50/60 Hz
Length of mains cable [m] 1.5
Max. inrush current for 2 ms (100 V) [A] 8
Electrical Max. inrush current for 2 ms (230 V) [A] 25
data
Max. power consumption P1 [W] 19
Enclosure class IP65, Nema 4X
Electrical safety class II
Pollution degree 2
Max. load for level input 12 V, 5 mA
Max. load for pulse input 12 V, 5 mA

Signal Max. load for external stop input 12 V, 5 mA

input Min. pulse length [ms] 5
Max. pulse frequency [Hz] 100
Max. resistance in level/pulse circuit [Ω] 1000

Signal Max. ohmic load on relay output [A] 0.5

output Max. voltage on relay output [V] 30 VDC/30 VAC
Weight (PVC, PP, PVDF) [kg] 2.4
Weight/size Weight (stainless steel) [kg] 3.2
Diaphragm diameter [mm] 44 50

Sound
Max. sound pressure level [dB(A)] 60
pressure

Approvals CE, CB, CSA-US, NSF61, GOST, C-Tick

1) Data is based on measurements with water

2) Maximum suction lift: 1 m, dosing capacity reduced (approx. 30 %)
3) Length of suction line: 1.5 m, length of discharge line: 10 m (at max. viscosity)

12
3.2 Dimensions

English (GB)
The indicated dimensions are the same for all control variants of the DDE range.
The following drawing shows the DDE-PR control variant.

A1

17.5 110 G 5/8

161.5
C

TM04 1147 5111

105 D 161 17
4 x Ø6
120

Fig. 3 Dimensional sketch

Pump type A1 [mm] B [mm] C [mm] D [mm]

DDE 6-10 251 196 46.5 24

DDE 15-4 251 200.5 39.5 24

13
 4. Assembly and installation 4.1.3 Engage pump in mounting plate
1. Attach the pump to the mounting plate support
English (GB)

For use in Australia: clamps and slide under slight pressure until it
Installation of this product must engages.
comply with AS/NZS3500!
Note
Certificate of suitability number:
CS9431
c-tick number: N20683

TM04 1159 0110

4.1 Pump assembly

Warning
Install the pump in such a way that the
plug can easily be reached by the
operator during operation! This will Fig. 5 Engaging the pump
enable the operator to separate the
pump from the mains quickly in case of 4.2 Hydraulic connection
emergency!
Warning
The pump is delivered with a mounting plate.
The mounting plate can be mounted vertically, e.g. Risk of chemical burns!
on a wall, or horizontally, e.g. on a tank. It takes just Wear protective clothing (gloves and
a few quick steps to firmly secure the pump to the goggles) when working on the dosing
mounting plate by means of a slot mechanism. head, connections or lines!
The pump can easily be released from the mounting
plate for maintenance. The dosing head may contain water
from the factory check!
4.1.1 Requirements Caution When dosing media which should not
• The mounting surface must be stable and must come into contact with water, another
not vibrate. medium must be dosed beforehand!
• Dosing must flow upwards vertically.
Faultless function can only be
4.1.2 Align and install mounting plate
Caution guaranteed in conjunction with lines
• Vertical installation: Mounting plate slot supplied by Grundfos!
mechanism must be above.
• Horizontal installation: Mounting plate slot The lines used must comply with the
mechanism must be opposite the dosing head. Caution pressure limits as per section
• The mounting plate can be used as a drill 3.1 Technical data!
template, please see fig. 3 for drill hole distances. Important information on installation
• Observe suction lift and hose diameter,
see section 3.1 Technical data.
• Shorten hoses at right angles.
• Ensure that there are no loops or kinks in the
hoses.
• Keep suction line as short as possible.
TM04 1162 0110

• Route suction line up towards the suction valve.

• Installing a filter in the suction line protects the
entire installation against dirt and reduces the
risk of leakage.

Fig. 4 Locate mounting plate

Warning
Make sure that you do not damage any
cables and lines during installation!
1. Indicate drill holes.
2. Drill holes.
3. Secure mounting plate using four screws,
diameter 5 mm, to the wall, on the bracket or the
tank.

14
Hose connection procedure 4.3 Electrical connection
1. Push union nut and tensioning ring across hose.

English (GB)
Mains connection
2. Push cone part fully into the hose, see fig. 6.
3. Attach cone part with hose to the corresponding Warning
pump valve. The enclosure class (IP65/Nema 4X) is
4. Tighten union nut manually. only guaranteed if plugs or protective
– Do not use tools! caps are correctly installed!
5. Tighten up union nuts after 2-5 operating hours,
Warning
if using PTFE gaskets!
The pump can start automatically when
6. Attach deaeration hose to the corresponding
the mains voltage is switched on!
connection (see fig. 2) and run into a container or
a collecting tray. Do not manipulate mains plug or cable!

Cone part The mains plug is the separator

Tensioning ring separating the pump from the mains.
Union nut Note The rated voltage of the pump, see

TM04 1155 0110

section 2.5 Nameplate, must conform
to local conditions.
The pump is supplied with assembled mains cable
Hose and plug.
1. Set capacity adjustment knob to 0 %
Fig. 6 Hydraulic connection (see 6.1 Operating elements).
2. Connect the mains plug with the mains socket.
Pressure differential between suction
Note and discharge side must be at least
1 bar/14.5 psi!

Tighten up the dosing head screws

Caution once before commissioning and after
2-5 operating hours at 3 Nm.
Installation example
The pump offers various installation options. In the
picture below, the pump is installed in conjunction
with a suction line, level switch and multifunction
valve on a Grundfos tank.

Multifunction
valve

Deaeration
hose

Tank

Suction line with

TM04 8171 3510

empty signal

Fig. 7 Installation example

15
 Signal connections
English (GB)

Applies to DDE-PR/P control variant.

Warning
Electric circuits of external devices connected to the pump inputs must be separated from
dangerous voltage by means of double or reinforced insulation!

2 1

3 4

4 3 2 1

1 2 3 4

TM04 8172 5111

4 3
3 3 4 2
2 1
1 GND
1 ►
GND
2
1

Fig. 8 Wiring diagram of the electrical connections (DDE-PR/P)

External stop and pulse input

Pins
Function Plug type
1/brown 2/white 3/blue 4/black
External stop GND X Pulse
Pulse GND X Pulse

Level signals: empty and low-level signal

Pins
Function Plug type
1 2 3 4
Low-level signal X GND Pulse
Empty signal X GND Pulse

Relay outputs*

Pins
Function Plug type
1/brown 2/white 3/blue 4/black
Relay 1 (Alarm) X X Pulse
Relay 2 (selectable) X X Pulse

* applies to DDE-PR control variant

16
5. Start-up 6. Operation

English (GB)
5.1 General notes 6.1 Operating elements

Warning Logarithmic scale

Suction and discharge hoses must be Capacity adjustment knob
connected correctly!
The deaeration hose must be
Status LED
connected correctly and inserted into a 2 3 4 5
1
1.5 6
8 10
"Pulse" *
suitable tank!
0.8
0.6 15
0.5 20
Tighten up the dosing head screws 0.4 [Operation
Caution once before commissioning and after 0.3
30 mode] key *
40
2-5 operating hours at 3 Nm. 0.2 50
0.15 60
80 100%
5.2 Check before commissioning Status LED
0% 100% "Manual"
• Check that the rated voltage indicated on the

TM04 1150 5111

nameplate complies with the local conditions.
• Check that all connections are assembled
correctly. Tighten connections, if necessary.
• Check that the dosing head screws are tightened Mechanical lock [100 %] key *
with the indicated torque (3 Nm). Tighten dosing
head screws, if necessary. Fig. 9 Operating elements
• Check that all electrical cables and plugs are
connected correctly. * Applies to DDE-PR/P control variant.
Capacity adjustment knob
5.3 Start and deaerate the pump
The capacity adjustment knob is used to set the
1. Connect mains supply capacity in percent of the maximum dosing flow of
(see 4.3 Electrical connection). the pump. Due to the logarithmical increase of the
2. Open the deaeration valve by approximately half percent values, even small dosing capacities can be
a turn. set accurately.
3. DDE-PR/P control variant: Press the [100 %] key Mechanical lock
and hold it down, until liquid flows out of the The mechanical lock protects the set dosing capacity
deaeration hose continuously and without any against unauthorised manipulation. For locking,
bubbles. tighten the screw until the adjustment knob cannot
4. DDE-B control variant: Turn the capacity be turned anymore.
adjustment knob to 100 % and wait, until liquid
flows out of the deaeration hose continuously Keys and LEDs
and without any bubbles. Then set the capacity
The DDE-B control variant is only
adjustment knob back to 0 %. Note
equipped with a status LED.
5. Close the deaeration valve.
When pressing and holding down the [100 %] key,
The pump is deaerated.
the pump doses at 100 % for a certain time.
The [100 %] key can be used e.g. for deaeration.
The [Operation mode] key is used to change
between the "Manual" and "Pulse" mode
(see section 6.2.3). According to the selected
operation mode, the respective status LED is active
("Pulse" = LED above key; "Manual" = LED below
key).

17
 The status LEDs indicate the following operating 6.2.3 Change operation modes
statuses and faults:
English (GB)

Applies to DDE-PR/P control variant.

1. Set adjustment knob to 0 %.
LED colour Pump status/fault
2. Connect mains supply
Green (flashing) stop (see section 4.3 Electrical connection).
3. Hold down the [Operation mode] key for at least
Green running
5 seconds.
Red-green The new operation mode is saved.
standby (external stopped) *
(flashing)
Yellow low-level signal * 6.3 Inputs/outputs
Red empty signal, pump stops * Applies to DDE-PR/P control variant.

Red (flashing) motor blocked, pump stops 6.3.1 External stop

The pump can be stopped via an external pulse, e.g.
* only DDE-PR/P control variant from a control room. When activating the external
stop pulse, the pump switches from the operating
6.2 Operation modes state "Running" into the operating state "Standby".
Following operation modes are available: According to the selected operation mode, the
respective LED flashes red-green.
• Manual, see section 6.2.1
• Pulse *, see section 6.2.2 6.3.2 Empty and low-level signals
* Applies to DDE-PR/P control variant. In order to monitor the filling level in the tank, a
dual-level sensor can be connected to the pump.
6.2.1 Manual The pump responds to the signals as follows:
In this operation mode, the pump doses constantly
the dosing quantity set by the adjustment knob. Sensor signal Pump status
The setting range depends on the pump type:
• LED lights up in yellow
Low level
Type Setting range [l/h] • Pump continues running
• LED lights up in red
DDE 6-10 0.0060 - 6 Empty
• Pump stops
DDE 15-4 0.0150 - 15

6.2.2 Pulse When the tank is filled up again,

Caution
the pump restarts automatically!
Applies to DDE-PR/P control variant.
In this operation mode, the pump doses the set
dosing volume for each incoming (potential-free)
pulse, e.g. from a water meter. The pump
automatically calculates the optimum stroke
frequency for dosing the set volume per pulse.
The calculation is based on:
• the frequency of external pulses
• the set stroke volume in percent.
The dosing quantity per pulse is set to a value
between 0.1 % and 100 % of the stroke volume using
the adjustment knob.
The setting range depends on the pump type:

Type Setting range [ml/pulse]

DDE 6-10 0.0008 - 0.81

DDE 15-4 0.0016 - 1.58

The frequency of incoming pulses is multiplied by the

set dosing volume. If the pump receives more pulses
than it can process at the maximum dosing flow, it
runs at the maximum stroke frequency in continuous
operation. Excess pulses will be ignored.

18
6.3.3 Relay outputs

English (GB)
Applies to DDE-PR control variant.
The pump can switch two external signals using installed relays. The relays are switched by potential-free
pulses. The connection diagram of the relays is shown in section 4.3 Electrical connection.
Relay 1 is allocated with the alarm signals (tank empty, motor blocked) as standard. Relay 2 can be allocated
with the following signals:

Relay 2 signal Description

Low-level signal * low level in tank

Stroke signal each full stroke
Pulse input ** each incoming pulse from pulse input

* Default setting
** The correct transmission of incoming pulses can only be guaranteed up to a pulse frequency of 5 Hz.
6.3.4 Change settings
The signal inputs (level signals, external stop) and the relay outputs are configured at the factory as normally
open (NO) contacts. They can be re-configured as normally closed (NC) contacts. Relay 2 can be allocated
with different signals.
The activated settings are indicated by the status LEDs when the pump is in the setup mode. For entering the
setup mode and changing settings, proceed as follows:
1. Set adjustment knob to 0 %.
2. Connect mains supply (see section 4.3 Electrical connection).
3. Press [100 %] key and [Operation mode] key simultaneously and hold them down for at least 5 seconds.
– The pump switches into setup mode 1. The active setup mode is indicated by the color of the upper
status LED. The current setting is indicated by the color of the lower status LED.
4. Make the desired settings according to the following table:

Switch setup modes with [Operation mode]

key

Setup mode 1 Setup mode 2 * Setup mode 3 *

upper status LED Green Yellow Red

Contact type of signal

inputs (low-level, Contact type of relay Allocated signal of
setup mode description
empty and external outputs Relay 2
stop)
lower status LED

Green NO ** NO ** Low-level signal **

Change setting
with [100 %] key
Yellow NC NC stroke signal

Red – – pulse input

* Only DDE-PR control variant

** Default setting
5. To exit setup mode, keep [100%] key and [Operation mode] key simultaneously pressed for at least
1 second.

19
 7. Service 7.3 Perform service
English (GB)

In order to ensure a long service life and Only spare parts and accessories from Grundfos
dosing accuracy, wearing parts such as should be used for maintenance. The usage of
diaphragms and valves must be regularly checked non-original spare parts and accessories renders
for signs of wear. Where necessary, replace worn any liability for resulting damages null and void.
parts with original spare parts made from suitable Information about carrying out maintenance can be
materials. found in the service kit catalog on our homepage
Should you have any questions, please contact your ([Link]).
service partner.
Warning
7.1 Cleaning Risk of chemical burns!
If necessary, clean all pump surfaces with a dry and When dosing dangerous media,
clean cloth. observe the corresponding precautions
in the safety data sheets!
7.2 Service intervals Wear protective clothing (gloves and
goggles) when working on the dosing
Warning head, connections or lines!
If the diaphragm leaks or is broken, Do not allow any chemicals to leak
dosing liquid will escape from the drain from the pump. Collect and dispose of
opening on the dosing head (see fig. 2). all chemicals correctly!
Take suitable precautions to prevent
harm to health and damage to property Before any work to the pump, the pump
caused by escaping dosing liquid! Caution must be disconnected from the mains.
Check daily whether liquid is escaping The system must be pressureless!
from the drain opening!
7.3.1 Dosing head overview

Interval Task 1 2 3 5 7 8 9
Check, if liquid leaks from
dosing head, drain opening or
valves (see fig. 2). If necessary,
Every day tighten dosing head screws
(3 Nm), valves and cap nuts,
or perform service
(see 7.3 Perform service).

TM04 1123 2110

Every 2 years or
Replace diaphragm and valves
8000 operating
(see 7.3 Perform service)
hours

4 6 10

Fig. 10 Dosing head, exploded view

1 Safety diaphragm
2 Flange
3 O-ring
4 Diaphragm
5 Valve on discharge side
6 Valve on suction side
7 Dosing head
8 Screws with discs
9 Cover
10 Deaeration valve

20
7.3.2 Dismantling the diaphragm and valves 7.4 Repairs
1. Make system pressureless.

English (GB)
2. Empty the dosing head before maintenance and Warning
flush it, if necessary. The pump housing must only be
3. Set adjustment knob to 0 %. opened by personnel authorised by
Grundfos!
4. Switch off mains supply.
Repairs must only be carried out by
5. Take suitable steps to ensure that the returning authorised and qualified personnel!
liquid is safely collected.
Switch off the pump and disconnect it
6. Dismantle suction, pressure and deaeration from the voltage supply before carrying
hoses. out maintenance work and repairs!
7. Dismantle valves on suction and discharge side
(5, 6). After consulting Grundfos, please send the pump,
8. Remove the cover (9). together with the safety declaration completed by a
specialist, to Grundfos. The safety declaration can
9. Loosen screws (8) on the dosing head (7) and
be found at the end of these instructions. It must be
remove the screws and discs.
copied, completed and attached to the pump.
10. Remove the dosing head (7).
11. Unscrew diaphragm (4) counter-clockwise and If the pump has been used to dose
remove with flange (2). toxic liquids or liquids hazardous to
Caution
health, the pump must be cleaned prior
7.3.3 Reassembling the diaphragm and valves to dispatch!
1. Attach flange (2) correctly and screw on new
If the above requirements are not met, Grundfos may
diaphragm (4) clockwise.
refuse to accept delivery of the pump. The shipping
– Make sure that the O-ring (3) is seated costs will be charged to the sender.
correctly!
2. Connect/switch on mains supply. 8. Faults
3. Turn the adjustment knob slowly to bring the
diaphragm into its service position "inside" 8.1 Indication of faults
(end of suction phase, diaphragm retracted).
Set adjustment knob back to 0 %. Depending on the selected operation mode,
the pump indicates the following faults with its LEDs:
4. Switch off mains supply again.
5. Attach the dosing head (7). LED
6. Install screws with discs (8) and cross-tighten. Fault Remedy
colour
– Torque: 3 Nm.
• fill tank
7. Attach the cover (9). low-level
Yellow • check contact type
8. Install new valves (5, 6). signal
(see section 6.3.4).
– Do not interchange valves and pay attention to
• fill tank
direction of arrow.
Red empty signal • check contact type
9. Connect suction, pressure and deaeration hoses (see section 6.3.4).
(see section 4.2 Hydraulic connection).
10. Deaerate dosing pump (see section 5.3 Start and • reduce
deaerate the pump). Red motor backpressure
(flashing) blocked • have gear repaired,
11. Please observe the notes on commissioning in
if necessary.
section 5. Start-up!
For further faults, please see 8.2 List of faults.

21
 8.2 List of faults
English (GB)

Fault Possible cause Possible remedy

Install additional spring-loaded valve

Inlet pressure greater than (approx. 3 bar) on the discharge side.
Dosing flow too high
backpressure
Increase pressure differential.
Air in dosing head Deaerate the pump.
Change the diaphragm
Faulty diaphragm
(see section 7.3 Perform service).
Leakage/fracture in lines Check and repair lines.
Valves leaking or blocked Check and clean valves.
Check that the arrow on the valve housing is
Valves installed incorrectly pointing in the direction of flow. Check whether all
No dosing flow or
O-rings are installed correctly.
dosing flow too low
Blocked suction line Clean suction line/install filter.
Reduce suction lift.
Suction lift too high
Install priming aid.
Use hose with larger diameter.
Viscosity too high
Install spring-loaded valve on the discharge side.
Deaeration valve open Close the deaeration valve.
Tighten up valves, replace valves if necessary
Valves leaking or blocked
Irregular dosing (see section 7.3 Perform service).
Backpressure fluctuations Keep backpressure constant.
Liquid escaping from
Change the diaphragm
the drain opening on Faulty diaphragm
(see section 7.3 Perform service).
the flange
Dosing head screws not Tighten up screws
tightened (see section 4.2 Hydraulic connection).
Liquid escaping
Tighten up valves/union nuts
Valves not tightened
(see section 4.2 Hydraulic connection).
Reduce suction lift; if necessary, provide positive
Suction lift too high
inlet pressure.
Pump not sucking in Backpressure too high Open the deaeration valve.
Flush system, replace valves if necessary
Soiled valves
(see section 7.3 Perform service).

9. Disposal
This product or parts of it must be disposed
of in an environmentally sound way.
Use appropriate waste collection services.
If this is not possible, contact the nearest Grundfos
company or service workshop.

Subject to alterations.

22
Appendix 1

Appendix
Safety declaration
Please copy, fill in and sign this sheet and attach it to the pump returned for service.

Note Fill in this document using english or german language.

Product type (nameplate)

Model number (nameplate)

Dosing medium

Fault description
Please make a circle around the damaged parts.
In the case of an electrical or functional fault, please mark the cabinet.

TM04 8173 5111

Please describe the error/cause of the error in brief.

We hereby declare that the pump has been cleaned and is completely free from chemical, biological and
radioactive substances.

_____________________________________
Date and signature

_____________________________________
Company stamp

23
24
25
 Argentina China Germany
Bombas GRUNDFOS de Argentina S.A. Grundfos Alldos GRUNDFOS GMBH
Grundfos companies

Ruta Panamericana km. 37.500 Lote Dosing & Disinfection Schlüterstr. 33

34A ALLDOS (Shanghai) Water Technology 40699 Erkrath
1619 - Garin Co. Ltd. Tel.: +49-(0) 211 929 69-0
Pcia. de Buenos Aires West Unit, 1 Floor, No. 2 Building (T 4-2) Telefax: +49-(0) 211 929 69-3799
Phone: +54-3327 414 444 278 Jinhu Road, Jin Qiao Export Pro- E-mail: infoservice@[Link]
Telefax: +54-3327 411 111 cessing Zone Service in Deutschland:
Pudong New Area E-mail: kundendienst@[Link]
Australia Shanghai, 201206
GRUNDFOS Pumps Pty. Ltd. Phone: +86 21 5055 1012 Greece
P.O. Box 2040 Telefax: +86 21 5032 0596 GRUNDFOS Hellas A.E.B.E.
Regency Park E-mail: grundfosalldos-CN@grund- 20th km. Athinon-Markopoulou Av.
South Australia 5942 [Link] P.O. Box 71
Phone: +61-8-8461-4611 GR-19002 Peania
Telefax: +61-8-8340 0155 China Phone: +0030-210-66 83 400
GRUNDFOS Pumps (Shanghai) Co. Ltd. Telefax: +0030-210-66 46 273
Austria 50/F Maxdo Centre No. 8 Xing Yi Rd.
GRUNDFOS Pumpen Vertrieb Hongqiao Development Zone Hong Kong
Ges.m.b.H. Shanghai 200336 GRUNDFOS Pumps (Hong Kong) Ltd.
Grundfosstraße 2 PRC Unit 1, Ground floor
A-5082 Grödig/Salzburg Phone: +86-21 6122 5222 Siu Wai Industrial Centre
Tel.: +43-6246-883-0 Telefax: +86-21 6122 5333 29-33 Wing Hong Street &
Telefax: +43-6246-883-30 68 King Lam Street, Cheung Sha Wan
Croatia Kowloon
Belgium GRUNDFOS CROATIA d.o.o. Phone: +852-27861706 / 27861741
N.V. GRUNDFOS Bellux S.A. Cebini 37, Buzin Telefax: +852-27858664
Boomsesteenweg 81-83 HR-10010 Zagreb
B-2630 Aartselaar Phone: +385 1 6595 400 Hungary
Tél.: +32-3-870 7300 Telefax: +385 1 6595 499 GRUNDFOS Hungária Kft.
Télécopie: +32-3-870 7301 [Link] Park u. 8
H-2045 Törökbálint,
Belarus Czech Republic Phone: +36-23 511 110
Представительство ГРУНДФОС в GRUNDFOS s.r.o. Telefax: +36-23 511 111
Минске Čapkovského 21
220123, Минск, 779 00 Olomouc India
ул. В. Хоружей, 22, оф. 1105 Phone: +420-585-716 111 GRUNDFOS Pumps India Private
Тел.: +(375) 17 233 97 65 Telefax: +420-585-716 299 Limited
Факс: (375) 17 233 97 69 118 Old Mahabalipuram Road
E-mail: grundfos_minsk@[Link] Denmark Thoraipakkam
GRUNDFOS DK A/S Chennai 600 097
Bosnia/Herzegovina Martin Bachs Vej 3 Phone: +91-44 4596 6800
GRUNDFOS Sarajevo DK-8850 Bjerringbro
Trg Heroja 16, Tlf.: +45-87 50 50 50 Indonesia
BiH-71000 Sarajevo Telefax: +45-87 50 51 51 PT GRUNDFOS Pompa
Phone: +387 33 713 290 E-mail: info_GDK@[Link] Jl. Rawa Sumur III, Blok III / CC-1
Telefax: +387 33 659 079 [Link]/DK Kawasan Industri, Pulogadung
e-mail: grundfos@[Link] Jakarta 13930
Estonia Phone: +62-21-460 6909
Brazil GRUNDFOS Pumps Eesti OÜ Telefax: +62-21-460 6910 / 460 6901
BOMBAS GRUNDFOS DO BRASIL Peterburi tee 92G
Av. Humberto de Alencar Castelo 11415 Tallinn Ireland
Branco, 630 Tel: + 372 606 1690 GRUNDFOS (Ireland) Ltd.
CEP 09850 - 300 Fax: + 372 606 1691 Unit A, Merrywell Business Park
São Bernardo do Campo - SP Ballymount Road Lower
Phone: +55-11 4393 5533 Finland Dublin 12
Telefax: +55-11 4343 5015 OY GRUNDFOS Pumput AB Phone: +353-1-4089 800
Mestarintie 11 Telefax: +353-1-4089 830
Bulgaria FIN-01730 Vantaa
Grundfos Bulgaria EOOD Phone: +358-3066 5650 Italy
Slatina District Telefax: +358-3066 56550 GRUNDFOS Pompe Italia S.r.l.
Iztochna Tangenta street no. 100 Via Gran Sasso 4
BG - 1592 Sofia France I-20060 Truccazzano (Milano)
Tel. +359 2 49 22 200 Pompes GRUNDFOS Distribution S.A. Tel.: +39-02-95838112
Fax. +359 2 49 22 201 Parc d’Activités de Chesnes Telefax: +39-02-95309290 / 95838461
email: bulgaria@[Link] 57, rue de Malacombe
F-38290 St. Quentin Fallavier (Lyon) Japan
Canada Tél.: +33-4 74 82 15 15 GRUNDFOS Pumps K.K.
GRUNDFOS Canada Inc. Télécopie: +33-4 74 94 10 51 Gotanda Metalion Bldg. 5F,
2941 Brighton Road 5-21-15, Higashi-gotanda
Oakville, Ontario Germany Shiagawa-ku, Tokyo,
L6H 6C9 GRUNDFOS Water Treatment GmbH 141-0022 Japan
Phone: +1-905 829 9533 Reetzstraße 85 Phone: +81 35 448 1391
Telefax: +1-905 829 9512 D-76327 Pfinztal (Söllingen) Telefax: +81 35 448 9619
Tel.: +49 7240 61-0
Telefax: +49 7240 61-177
E-mail: gwt@[Link]
Korea Portugal Switzerland
GRUNDFOS Pumps Korea Ltd. Bombas GRUNDFOS Portugal, S.A. GRUNDFOS Pumpen AG

Grundfos companies
6th Floor, Aju Building 679-5 Rua Calvet de Magalhães, 241 Bruggacherstrasse 10
Yeoksam-dong, Kangnam-ku, 135-916 Apartado 1079 CH-8117 Fällanden/ZH
Seoul, Korea P-2770-153 Paço de Arcos Tel.: +41-1-806 8111
Phone: +82-2-5317 600 Tel.: +351-21-440 76 00 Telefax: +41-1-806 8115
Telefax: +82-2-5633 725 Telefax: +351-21-440 76 90
Taiwan
Latvia Romania GRUNDFOS Pumps (Taiwan) Ltd.
SIA GRUNDFOS Pumps Latvia GRUNDFOS Pompe România SRL 7 Floor, 219 Min-Chuan Road
Deglava biznesa centrs Bd. Biruintei, nr 103 Taichung, Taiwan, R.O.C.
Augusta Deglava ielā 60, LV-1035, Rīga, Pantelimon county Ilfov Phone: +886-4-2305 0868
Tālr.: + 371 714 9640, 7 149 641 Phone: +40 21 200 4100 Telefax: +886-4-2305 0878
Fakss: + 371 914 9646 Telefax: +40 21 200 4101
E-mail: romania@[Link] Thailand
Lithuania GRUNDFOS (Thailand) Ltd.
GRUNDFOS Pumps UAB Russia 92 Chaloem Phrakiat Rama 9 Road,
Smolensko g. 6 ООО Грундфос Dokmai, Pravej, Bangkok 10250
LT-03201 Vilnius Россия, 109544 Москва, ул. Школьная Phone: +66-2-725 8999
Tel: + 370 52 395 430 39 Telefax: +66-2-725 8998
Fax: + 370 52 395 431 Тел. (+7) 495 737 30 00, 564 88 00
Факс (+7) 495 737 75 36, 564 88 11 Turkey
Malaysia E-mail [Link]@[Link] GRUNDFOS POMPA San. ve Tic. Ltd.
GRUNDFOS Pumps Sdn. Bhd. Sti.
7 Jalan Peguam U1/25 Serbia Gebze Organize Sanayi Bölgesi
Glenmarie Industrial Park GRUNDFOS Predstavništvo Beograd Ihsan dede Caddesi,
40150 Shah Alam Dr. Milutina Ivkovića 2a/29 2. yol 200. Sokak No. 204
Selangor YU-11000 Beograd 41490 Gebze/ Kocaeli
Phone: +60-3-5569 2922 Phone: +381 11 26 47 877 / 11 26 47 Phone: +90 - 262-679 7979
Telefax: +60-3-5569 2866 496 Telefax: +90 - 262-679 7905
Telefax: +381 11 26 48 340 E-mail: satis@[Link]
Mexico
Bombas GRUNDFOS de México S.A. de Singapore Ukraine
C.V. GRUNDFOS (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. ТОВ ГРУНДФОС УКРАЇНА
Boulevard TLC No. 15 24 Tuas West Road 01010 Київ, Вул. Московська 8б,
Parque Industrial Stiva Aeropuerto Jurong Town Тел.:(+38 044) 390 40 50
Apodaca, N.L. 66600 Singapore 638381 Фах.: (+38 044) 390 40 59
Phone: +52-81-8144 4000 Phone: +65-6865 1222 E-mail: ukraine@[Link]
Telefax: +52-81-8144 4010 Telefax: +65-6861 8402
United Arab Emirates
Netherlands Slovenia GRUNDFOS Gulf Distribution
GRUNDFOS Netherlands GRUNDFOS d.o.o. P.O. Box 16768
Veluwezoom 35 Šlandrova 8b, SI-1231 Ljubljana-Črnuče Jebel Ali Free Zone
1326 AE Almere Phone: +386 1 568 0610 Dubai
Postbus 22015 Telefax: +386 1 568 0619 Phone: +971-4- 8815 166
1302 CA ALMERE E-mail: slovenia@[Link] Telefax: +971-4-8815 136
Tel.: +31-88-478 6336
Telefax: +31-88-478 6332 South Africa United Kingdom
E-mail: info_gnl@[Link] Grundfos (PTY) Ltd. GRUNDFOS Pumps Ltd.
Corner Mountjoy and George Allen Grovebury Road
New Zealand Roads Leighton Buzzard/Beds. LU7 8TL
GRUNDFOS Pumps NZ Ltd. Wilbart Ext. 2 Phone: +44-1525-850000
17 Beatrice Tinsley Crescent Bedfordview 2008 Telefax: +44-1525-850011
North Harbour Industrial Estate Phone: (+27) 11 579 4800
Albany, Auckland Fax: (+27) 11 455 6066 U.S.A.
Phone: +64-9-415 3240 E-mail: lsmart@[Link] GRUNDFOS Pumps Corporation
Telefax: +64-9-415 3250 17100 West 118th Terrace
Spain Olathe, Kansas 66061
Norway Bombas GRUNDFOS España S.A. Phone: +1-913-227-3400
GRUNDFOS Pumper A/S Camino de la Fuentecilla, s/n Telefax: +1-913-227-3500
Strømsveien 344 E-28110 Algete (Madrid)
Postboks 235, Leirdal Tel.: +34-91-848 8800 Uzbekistan
N-1011 Oslo Telefax: +34-91-628 0465 Представительство ГРУНДФОС в
Tlf.: +47-22 90 47 00 Ташкенте
Telefax: +47-22 32 21 50 Sweden 700000 Ташкент ул.Усмана Носира 1-й
GRUNDFOS AB тупик 5
Poland (Box 333) Lunnagårdsgatan 6 Телефон: (3712) 55-68-15
GRUNDFOS Pompy Sp. z o.o. 431 24 Mölndal Факс: (3712) 53-36-35
ul. Klonowa 23 Tel.: +46 31 332 23 000
Baranowo k. Poznania Telefax: +46 31-331 94 60 Addresses revised 27.04.2012
PL-62-081 Przeźmierowo
Tel: (+48-61) 650 13 00 Switzerland
Fax: (+48-61) 650 13 50 GRUNDFOS ALLDOS International AG
Schönmattstraße 4
CH-4153 Reinach
Tel.: +41-61-717 5555
Telefax: +41-61-717 5500
E-mail: grundfosalldos-CH@grund-
[Link]
 Being responsible is our foundation
Thinking ahead makes it possible
Innovation is the essence

95725839 0412
ECM: 1090662

The name Grundfos, the Grundfos logo, and the payoff Be–Think–Innovate are registrated trademarks
owned by Grundfos Management A/S or Grundfos A/S, Denmark. All rights reserved worldwide.

[Link]
 GRUNDFOS QUICK GUIDE

DDE
2

This Quick Guide belongs to the DDE dosing Ta Hitri vodnik sodi k dozirni črpalki DDE in je
GB pump and is only valid together with the respective SI veljaven samo v povezavi s pripadajočimi navodili
installation and operating instructions. za montažo in obratovanje.

Dieser Quick-Guide gehört zu der Dosierpumpe Ovaj Brzi vodič priložen je crpki za doziranje
DE DDE und ist nur in Verbindung mit der zugehörigen HR DDE i vrijedi samo uz odgovarajuće montažne
Montage- und Betriebsanleitung gültig. i pogonske upute.

Ce guide rapide concerne la pompe de dosage Ovaj brzi vodič pripada pumpi za doziranje DDE
FR DDE et n‘est valable qu‘en liaison avec la notice RS i važi samo u povezanosti sa za to pripadajućim
d‘installation et d‘entretien correspondante. uputstvom za montažu i upotrebu.

La presente guida rapida riguarda la pompa di Acest ghid sumar este aferent pompei de dozare
IT dosaggio DDE ed è valida solo se accompagnata RO DDE şi este valabil numai în combinaţie cu
dalle relative istruzioni di installazione instrucţiuni de instalare şi utilizare.
e funzionamento.
Това Кратко ръководство принадлежи към
Esta Guía Rápida pertenece a la bomba BG дозиращата помпа DDE и е валидно само във
ES dosificadora DDE y sólo se considera válida връзка със съответното Упътване за монтаж
en combinación con las instrucciones de instalación и експлоатация.
y funcionamiento.
Tento stručný průvodce je součástí dávkovacího
Este guia rápido faz parte da bomba de dosagem CZ čerpadla DDE a je platný pouze ve spojení s
PT DDE e só é válido em conjunto com as instruções příslušným montážním a provozním návodem.
de instalação e funcionamento correspondentes.
Tento rýchly návod patrí k dávkovaciemu čerpadlu
Αυτός ο σύντομος οδηγός ανήκει στην δοσομετρική SK DDE a je platný iba v spojení s príslušným návodom
GR αντλία DDE και ισχύει μόνο σε συνδυασμό με τις na montáž a prevádzku.
αντίστοιχες Οδηγίες εγκατάστασης και λειτουργίας.
Bu Hızlı Başvuru Kılavuzu, DDE dozajlama pompası
Deze quick-guide hoort bij de doseerpomp DDE en TR içindir ve ilgili montaj ve kullanım kılavuzu ile birlikte
NL is uitsluitend geldig in combinatie met de bijhorende geçerlidir.
installatie- en bedieningsinstructies.
Käesolev kiirjuhend kuulub doseerimispumba DDE
Denna snabbguide hör samman med doseringspump EE juurde ning on kehtiv üksnes koos juurdekuuluva
SE DDE och gäller bara i kombination med monterings- paigaldus- ja kasutusjuhendiga.
och driftsinstruktion.
Šis trumpasis žinynas skirtas dozavimo siurbliui
Tämä pikaopas kuuluu annostelupumppuun LT DDE ir galioja tik kartu su susijusia įrengimo ir
FI DDE ja on voimassa vain vastaavien asennus- naudojimo instrukcija.
ja käyttöohjeiden kanssa.
Šī īsā lietošanas pamācība attiecas uz dozatorsūkni
Denne quick-guide vedrører doseringspumpen LV DDE un ir spēkā tikai kopā ar atbilstošo uzstādīšanas
DK DDA / DDC og er udelukkende gyldig i forbindelse un ekspluatācijas instrukciju.
med den tilhørende monterings- og driftsinstruktion.
Це експрес-керівництво стосується насоса-
Niniejszy krótki przewodnik należy do pompy UA дозатора DDE та є чинним тільки у сполученні
PL dozującej DDE i obowiązuje jedynie w połączeniu з відповідними інструкціями з монтажу та
z odpowiednią instrukcją montażu i eksploatacji. експлуатації.

Данное краткое руководство по эксплуатации 本 快 速 指 南 是 DDE 型 剂 量 泵 的 附 件 ， 仅 限 于 与

RU относитя к дозирующему насосу DDE CN 安装和使用说明书同时使用。
и действительно только вместе с инструкцией
по монтажу и эксплуатации. このクイックガイドは定量ポンプ DDE に属してお
JP り、それぞれ取付・取扱説明書と共に使用される場合
Jelen összefoglaló útmutató a DDE adagoló-szivattyú に限り、有効です。
HU tartozékát képezi, és kizárólag a hozzá tartozó
szerelési és üzemeltetési utasítással együtt érvényes. 이 퀵가이드는 DDE 도징펌프의 구성품으로서 설치 및
KO 작동 지침과 함께 사용할 때만 유효하다.
 3

4 19 – 23

Chap.
6.

7 – 13

Chap.
9.

14 – 18

Chap.
8.
4

+ +
Chap.
1.
 5

1x

Chap.
2.

1x

2x

1x
6

0 °C – +45 °C
(32 °F – 113 °F)

IP 65 (Nema 4x)

-10 °C – +45 °C
(14 °F – 113 °F)

p [bar]
(psi)

10 3.
DDE 6-10 Chap.
(150)

4
DDE 15-4
(60)

0
6 15 Q [l/h]
(1.5) (4.0) (gph)
 7

max.
1,5 m
(59")

min. min.
10 cm 10 cm
(4") (4")

max. 4 kg (8.8 lb)

8

Ø 5 mm (0.2")
 9

1.

2.

*Click

1. 2.
*Click
10

p2 – p1 ≥ 1 bar (15 psi)

p2

p1
 11

l/h
Ø (gph)

1.

2.
12

1. 2.

1.
2.
 13

= DDE-P / DDE-PR

100-240 V,
50 / 60 Hz

4 3 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 4 3
5
1 2 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 1 2

1 2 3 1 3 4
GND GND

1 4 2 3
18
1 2

≠ DDE-P
14

17

min. 3 s

min. 3 s

100% 15 16
 15

1.
= DDE-P / DDE-PR

2.

3.

4.
16

1.
= DDE-B

2.

3.

4.
 17

= DDE-P / DDE-PR

14

DDE 6-10 ca. 0,81 ml / ca. 0,41 ml / ca. 0,08 ml /

DDE 15-4 ca. 1,58 ml / ca. 0,79 ml / ca. 0,16 ml /

18

OK OK
e. g.

1. 2.
2.
1.

2 (default)
Warning
e. g.

1
Alarm
e. g.

Chap.
8.

Standby e. g.
 19

1.

14

= 0 bar (0 psi)
3. 2.

4
20

4.

5.

4 mm [M5]

6.

7.

8.
 21

9.

10.

11.
22

12.

3 Nm (2.21 lb/ft)

13.
 23

14.
15.

12

+
15 16
24

Safety declaration
 25

EC declaration of conformity

We, Grundfos, declare under our sole responsibility Vi, Grundfos, försäkrar under ansvar att
GB that the products DDA, DDC and DDE, to which SE produkterna DDA, DDC och DDE, som omfattas
this declaration relates, are in conformity with these av denna försäkran, är i överensstämmelse med
Council directives on the approximation of the laws rådets direktiv om inbördes närmande till EU-
of the EC member states: medlemsstaternas lagstiftning, avseende:

Wir, Grundfos, erklären in alleiniger Verantwortung, Me, Grundfos, vakuutamme omalla vastuullamme,
DE dass die Produkte DDA, DDC und DDE, auf die FI että tuotteet DDA, DDC ja DDE, joita tämä vakuutus
sich diese Erklärung bezieht, mit den folgenden koskee, ovat EY:n jäsenvaltioiden lainsäädännön
Richtlinien des Rates zur Angleichung der yhdenmukaistamiseen tähtäävien Euroopan
Rechtsvorschriften der EU-Mitgliedsstaaten neuvoston direktiivien vaatimusten mukaisia
übereinstimmen: seuraavasti:

Nous, Grundfos, déclarons sous notre seule Vi, Grundfos, erklærer under ansvar at produkterne
FR responsabilité, que les produits DDA, DDC et DK DDA, DDC og DDE som denne erklæring
DDE, auxquels se réfère cette déclaration, sont omhandler, er i overensstemmelse med disse af
conformes aux Directives du Conseil concernant le Rådets direktiver om indbyrdes tilnærmelse til EF-
rapprochement des législations des Etats membres medlemsstaternes lovgivning:
CE relatives aux normes énoncées ci-dessous :
My, Grundfos, oświadczamy z pełną
Grundfos dichiara sotto la sua esclusiva PL odpowiedzialnością, że nasze wyroby DDA, DDC
IT responsabilità che i prodotti DDA, DDC e DDE, ai oraz DDE, których deklaracja niniejsza dotyczy,
quali si riferisce questa dichiarazione, sono conformi są zgodne z następującymi wytycznymi Rady
alle seguenti direttive del Consiglio riguardanti il d/s ujednolicenia przepisów prawnych krajów
riavvicinamento delle legislazioni degli Stati membri członkowskich WE:
CE:
Мы, компания Grundfos, со всей
Nosotros, Grundfos, declaramos bajo nuestra RU ответственностью заявляем, что изделия DDA,
ES entera responsabilidad que los productos DDC и DDE, к которым относится настоящая
DDA, DDC y DDE, a los cuales se refiere esta декларация, соответствуют следующим
declaración, están conformes con las Directivas Директивам Совета Евросоюза об унификации
del Consejo en la aproximación de las leyes de las законодательных предписаний стран-членов ЕС:
Estados Miembros del EM:
Mi, a Grundfos, egyedüli felelősséggel kijelentjük,
A Grundfos declara sob sua única responsabilidade HU hogy a DDA, DDC és DDE termékek, amelyekre
PT que os produtos DDA, DDC e DDE, aos quais diz jelen nyilatkozik vonatkozik, megfelelnek az Európai
respeito esta declaração, estão em conformidade Unió tagállamainak jogi irányelveit összehangoló
com as seguintes Directivas do Conselho sobre a tanács alábbi előírásainak:
aproximação das legislações dos Estados Membros
da CE: V Grundfosu s polno odgovornostjo izjavljamo, da
SI so naši izdelki DDA, DDC in DDE, na katere se ta
Εμείς, η Grundfos, δηλώνουμε με αποκλειστικά izjava nanaša, v skladu z naslednjimi direktivami
GR δική μας ευθύνη ότι τα προϊόντα DDA, DDC Sveta o približevanju zakonodaje za izenačevanje
και DDE στα οποία αναφέρεται η παρούσα pravnih predpisov držav članic ES:
δήλωση, συμμορφώνονται με τις εξής Οδηγίες του
Συμβουλίου περί προσέγγισης των νομοθεσιών των Mi, Grundfos, izjavljujemo pod vlastitom odgovornošću
κρατών μελών της ΕΕ: HR da je proizvod DDA, DDC i DDE, na koji se ova
izjava odnosi, u skladu s direktivama ovog Vijeća o
Wij, Grundfos, verklaren geheel onder eigen usklađivanju zakona država članica EU:
NL verantwoordelijkheid dat de producten DDA, DDC
en DDE waarop deze verklaring betrekking heeft, Mi, Grundfos, izjavljujemo pod vlastitom
in overeenstemming zijn met de Richtlijnen van RS odgovornošću da je proizvod DDA, DDC i DDE, na
de Raad in zake de onderlinge aanpassing van de koji se ova izjava odnosi, u skladu sa direktivama
wetgeving van de EG Lidstaten betreffende: Saveta za usklađivanje zakona država članica EU:
26

EC declaration of conformity

Noi, Grundfos, declarăm pe propria răspundere Компанія Grundfos заявляє про свою виключну
RO că produsele DDA, DDC şi DDE, la care se referă UA відповідальність за те, що продукти DDA, DDC
această declaraţie, sunt în conformitate cu aceste та DDE, на які поширюється дана декларація,
Directive de Consiliu asupra armonizării legilor відповідають таким рекомендаціям Ради з
Statelor Membre CE: уніфікації правових норм країн - членів ЄС:

Ние, фирма Grundfos, заявяваме с пълна 我们格兰富在我们的全权责任下声明，产品 DDA,

BG отговорност, че продуктите DDA, DDC и DDE, CN DDC 和 DDE，即该合格证所指之产品，符合欧共体
за които се отнася настоящата декларация, 使其成员国法律趋于一致的以下欧共理事会指令：
отговарят на следните указания на Съвета
за уеднаквяване на правните разпоредби на Grundfos は、その責任の下に、DDA, DDC 製品お
държавите членки на ЕС: JP よび DDE 製品が EC 加盟諸国の法規に関連する、
以下の評議会指令に適合していることを宣言しま
My firma Grundfos prohlašujeme na svou plnou す：
CZ odpovědnost, že výrobky DDA, DDC a DDE, na
něž se toto prohlášení vztahuje, jsou v souladu s Grundfos 에서는 자사의 단독 책임에 따라 이
ustanoveními směrnice Rady pro sblížení právních KO 선언과 관련된 DDA, DDC 및 DDE 제품이 EC
předpisů členských států Evropského společenství v 회원국 법률에 기반한 다음 이사회 지침을 준수함을
oblastech: 선언합니다:

My firma Grundfos prehlasujeme na svoju plnú

SK zodpovednost’, že výrobky DDA, DDC a DDE, na – Machinery Directive (2006/42/EC).
ktoré sa toto prehlásenie vzt’ahuje, sú v súlade Standards used: EN 809: 1998,
s ustanovením smernice Rady pre zblíženie EN ISO 12100-1+A1: 2009,
právnych predpisov členských štátov Európskeho EN ISO 12100-2+A1: 2009.
spoločenstva v oblastiach:
– Low Voltage Directive (2006/95/EC).*
Grundfos olarak bu beyannameye konu olan Standard used: EN 61010-1: 2001 (second edition).
TR DDA, DDC ve DDE ürünlerinin, AB Üyesi Ülkelerin
kanunlarını birbirine yaklaştırma üzerine Konsey – EMC Directive (2004/108/EC).
Direktifleriyle uyumlu olduğunun yalnızca bizim Standards used: EN 61326-1: 2006,
sorumluluğumuz altında olduğunu beyan ederiz: EN 61000-3-2: 2006+A1: 2009+A2: 2009,
EN 61000-3-3: 2008.
Meie, Grundfos, deklareerime enda ainuvastutusel,
EE et tooted DDA, DDC ja DDE, mille kohta käesolev * Only for products with operating voltage
juhend käib, on vastavuses EÜ Nõukogu > 50 VAC or > 75 VDC.
direktiividega EMÜ liikmesriikide seaduste ühitamise
kohta, mis käsitlevad: Pfinztal, 1 June 2011

Mes, Grundfos, su visa atsakomybe pareiškiame,

LT kad gaminiai DDA, DDC ir DDE, kuriems skirta ši
deklaracija, atitinka šias Tarybos Direktyvas dėl
Europos Ekonominės Bendrijos šalių narių įstatymų
suderinimo: Ulrich Stemick
Technical Director
Sabiedrība GRUNDFOS ar pilnu atbildību dara Grundfos Water Treatment GmbH
LV zināmu, ka produkti DDA, DDC un DDE, uz kuriem Reetzstr. 85, D-76327 Pfinztal, Germany
attiecas šis paziņojums, atbilst šādām Padomes
direktīvām par tuvināšanos EK dalībvalstu Person authorised to compile technical file and
likumdošanas normām: empowered to sign the EC declaration of conformity.

This EC declaration of conformity is only valid when published

as part of the Grundfos Quick Guide 95725551 0412.
27
95725551 0412
99
HOUSING:
SIZE: 4” DIA x 20”HT
ELEMENT:
WATERTEK
SIZE: 4”DIA x 20”LONG
 BIG BLUE® & BIG CLEAR
FILTER HOUSINGS
#20 Big Clear

#20 Big Blue®

BIG BLUE® & BIG CLEAR FILTER HOUSINGS

• Large capacity housing suitable for high flow applications
• 10" and 20" lengths available in opaque and clear
#10 Big Blue® #10 Big Clear
• Pressure relief/bleed on inlet side of cap
• Accepts 41⁄2" diameter cartridges

Big Blue® Filter Housings offer the Big Blue® housings are compatible
versatility to meet all of your large- with a broad range of chemicals
capacity filtration needs, including and are available with or without
high-flow and heavy-sediment a pressure relief button. They
applications. The extra large accept a wide variety of 4½"
housing allows for greater cartridge diameter cartridges.
capacity, reducing the number of
vessels required for high flow-rate Big Clear Filter Housings offer
applications. Sumps are constructed on-site examination of flow,
of durable reinforced polypropylene performance, and cartridge life
and are available in both 10" and and are ideal for a variety of
20" lengths. applications. The blue polypropylene
caps are available with an optional
The high-flow polypropylene pressure-relief button on the inlet
(HFPP) cap is available with 3/4", side to relieve pressure inside
1" or 1½" NPT inlet and outlet the housing when changing
ports. The 1¼" internal port allows filter cartridges.
a greater volume of liquid to pass
through the HFPP cap more rapidly.
BIG BLUE®/BIG CLEAR
Filter Housings
��
������
�����������������������������������������

�� �
��
��

��
������

� ��
� ��

�
��
���

��
��
��

��
�� �

�
��
��
�� �

������
��
��
� ��

��

The 150233, 150234, 150235, 150236, 150237,

� 150238, 150239, 150240, 150467, 150468, 150469,
������ and 150470 Tested and Certified by NSF International
to NSF/ANSI Standard 42 for material and structural
integrity requirements.

� NOTE: The Big Clear Series of housings are not NSF component listed.
� �� �� �� �� �� �� ��
������ ������ ������� ������� ������� ������� �������
���������������������

Housing Specifications and Performance Data

Model Maximum Dimensions Initial ∆P (psi) @ Flow Rate (gpm)

#10 Big Blue®–3/4" 131⁄8" x 71⁄4" (333 mm x 184 mm) 2 psi @ 15 gpm (0.1 bar @ 57 Lpm)
#10 Big Blue®–1" 131⁄8" x 71⁄4" (333 mm x 184 mm) 1 psi @ 15 gpm (0.1 bar @ 57 Lpm)
#10 Big Blue –1 ⁄2" ® 1
13 ⁄8" x 7 ⁄4" (346 mm x 184 mm)
5 1
1 psi @ 20 gpm (0.1 bar @ 76 Lpm)
#20 Big Blue®–3/4" 233⁄8" x 71⁄4" (594 mm x 184 mm) 2 psi @ 15 gpm (0.1 bar @ 57 Lpm)
#20 Big Blue –1" ®
23 ⁄8" x 7 ⁄4" (594 mm x 184 mm)
3 1
1 psi @ 15 gpm (0.1 bar @ 57 Lpm)
#20 Big Blue –1 ⁄2" ® 1
23 ⁄8" x 7 ⁄4" (606 mm x 184 mm)
7 1
1 psi @ 20 gpm (0.1 bar @ 76 Lpm)
#10 Big Clear–1"* 13½" x 71⁄8" (343 mm x 181 mm) 1 psi @ 15 gpm (0.1 bar @ 57 Lpm)
#20 Big Clear–1"* 23 ¾" x 7 ⁄8" (603 mm x 181 mm)
1
1 psi @ 15 gpm (0.1 bar @ 57 Lpm)

* Not Performance Tested or Certified by NSF.

Materials of Construction BIG BLUE® BIG CLEAR

Housing Polypropylene Lexan (#10), Polycarbonate (#20)
Cap Polypropylene (HFPP) Polypropylene (HFPP)
300-series Stainless Steel, EPDM, 300-series Stainless Steel, EPDM,
Button Assembly
and Polypropylene and Polypropylene
O-Ring Buna-N Buna-N
Maximum Temperature 100ºF (37.8ºC) 100ºF (37.8ºC)
#10 Big Blue® – 100 psi (6.9 bar) #10 Big Clear – 100 psi (6.9 bar)
Maximum Pressure
#20 Big Blue® – 90 psi (6.2 bar) #20 Big Clear – 90 psi (6.2 bar)
CAUTION: Protect against freezing to prevent cracking of the filter and water leakage.

502 Indiana Avenue • P.O. Box 1047 • Sheboygan, Wisconsin 53082-1047

Customer Service: 800.645.0267 • Fax: 888.203.7361 • supportspecialist@pentekfi[Link]
International: 920.457.9435 • Fax: 920.457.2417 • international@pentekfi[Link]
©2006 Pentair Filtration, Inc. [Link]fi[Link] Printed in USA MR06 310053
CAT W/ WEG MOTOR
MODEL: 7CP‐6171
3PH, 5.5KW, 380‐415V, 50HZ
 7CP Stainless Steel
Plunger Pump
Direct-Drive 7CP6111
Standard and Flushed 7CP6111C
Belt-Drive 7CP6171
Standard and Flushed 7CP6171C
Model 7CP6171 Shown

FEATURES
(Rails and shaft protector sold separately)
Gearbox Model 7CP6111G1
316SS head with optional FPM and EPDM elastomers offer
l
SPECIFICATIONS U.S. Measure Metric Measure
compatilbility with a wide range of liquids.
MODEL 7CP6111, 7CP6111C
l Flexible coupling/bell housing, gearbox and belt drive options Flow................................................................................ 10.5 gpm (40 l/m)
provide flexibility with a compact footprint. Pressure Range................................................100 to 2000 psi (7 to 140 bar)
Pump RPM...................................................................1750 rpm (1750 rpm)
l Rugged continuous-duty triplex design provides long life and Stroke....................................................................................0.854” (21.7 mm)
low maintenance. MODEL 7CP6171, 7CP6171C
l Special flushed manifold with 7CP6111C and 7CP6171C permits Flow................................................................................ 10.5 gpm (40 l/m)
Pressure Range................................................100 to 2000 psi (7 to 140 bar)
external flush for added cooling with high temperature liquids
Pump RPM...................................................................1450 rpm (1450 rpm)
and lubrication with low lubricity liquids. Stroke....................................................................................1.024” (26 mm)

COMMON SPECIFICATIONS MODEL 7CP6111G1

Flow................................................................................ 10.0 gpm (38 l/m)
Inlet Pressure Range..................................Flooded to 70 psi (Flooded to 4.9 bar)
Pressure Range................................................100 to 2000 psi (7 to 140 bar)
Bore.......................................................................................0.866” (22 mm)
Pump RPM...................................................................1667 rpm (1667 rpm)
Crankcase Capacity...........................................................38 oz. (1.15 l) Engine RPM.................................................................3400 rpm (3400 rpm)
Maximum Liquid Temperature ...................................140°F (60°C) Stroke....................................................................................0.854” (21.7 mm)
Above 130°F call Cat Pumps for inlet conditions and elastomer recommendations.
Inlet Ports (2).............................................................. 3/4” NPTF (3/4” NPTF)
ELECTRIC HORSEPOWER REQUIREMENTS
Discharge Ports (2)................................................... 1/2” NPTF (1/2” NPTF)
Flushing Ports (2) (7CP6111C, 7CP6171C)....... 1/8” NPTF (1/8” NPTF) MODELS FLOW PRESSURE MOTOR PULLEY SIZE
Shaft Diameter..................................................................0.945” (24 mm) Using 1725 rpm Motor &
psi psi psi Std. 9.75” Pump Pulley
Weight (7CP6111, 7CP6171).....................................29.1 lbs. (13.2 kg)
1500 1800 2000
Weight (7CP6111G1)...................................................38.6 lbs. (17.5 kg) U.S. bar bar bar rpm Pulley
Dimensions......................................................13.45 x 9.26 x 6.89” (342 x 235 x 175 mm) gpm lpm 105 125 140 O.D.
Dimensions w/Gearbox............................13.45 x 12.89 x 8.19” (342 x 327 x 208 mm) 7CP6111
10.5 40.0 10.8 12.9 14.4 1750 Direct-Drive
7CP6111C
7CP6171 10.5 40.0 10.8 12.9 14.4 1450 8.4
All High Pressure Systems require a primary pressure regulating device (i.e. regulator, 7CP6171C 10.0 38.0 10.3 12.4 13.7 1318 7.6
unloader) and a secondary pressure relief device (i.e. pop-off valve, relief valve). Failure
to install such relief devices could result in personal injury or damage to pump or 7CP6111G1 10.0 38.0 Consult Eng. Mfg. 1667 Gearbox
property. CAT PUMPS does not assume any liability or responsibility for the operation
of a customer’s high pressure system. DETERMINING Rated gpm = “Desired” gpm
Read all CAUTIONS and WARNINGS before commencing service or operation of any THE PUMP RPM Rated rpm “Desired” rpm
high pressure system. The CAUTIONS and WARNINGS are included in each service
manual and with each Accessory Data sheet. CAUTIONS and WARNINGS can also be
DETERMINING gpm x psi = Electric Brake
viewed online at [Link]/cautions-warnings or can be requested directly THE REQUIRED H.P. 1460 H. P. Required
from CAT PUMPS.
DETERMINING Motor Pulley O.D. = Pump Pulley O.D.
MOTOR PULLEY SIZE Pump rpm Motor rpm
See complete Drive Packages [Inclds: Pulleys, Belts, Hubs, Key] Tech Bulletin 003.
Refer to pump Service Manual for repair procedure and additional technical information.
 PARTS LIST
ITEM P/N MATL DESCRIPTION QTY
2 30067 STL Key (M8x7.5x25) 1
5 49651 S Screw, HHC Sems (M8x20) 8
8 49501 AL Cover, Bearing 1
9 49503 FBR Shim, Split, 2-Pc, Outer 0-2
10 12393 NBR O-Ring, Bearing Cover - 70D 2
11 49190 NBR Seal, Oil Crankshaft - 70D 1/2
12 49504 S Shim, Split, 2-Pc, Inner 0-2
15 63479 STL Bearing, Roller 2
20 48727 TNM Rod, Connecting Assy [2/03] 3
25 49498 FCM Crankshaft, Single-End (M21.7) (7CP6111, 7CP6111C, 7CP6111G1) 1
49649 FCM Crankshaft, Single-End (M26) (7CP6171, 7CP6171C) 1
30 48527 AL Cover, Blind Bearing 1
31 828710 PE Protector, Oil Cap w/Foam Gasket 1
32 43211 ABS Cap, Oil Filler 1
33 14177 NBR O-Ring, Oil Filler Cap - 70D 1
36 129343 RBR Gasket, Flat 1
37 92241 — Gauge, Oil, Bubble w/Gasket - 80D 1
38 44428 NBR Gasket, Flat, Oil Gauge - 80D 1
39 49948 ABS Stick, Dip 1
40 92538 S Screw, HHC Sems (M6x16) 4
48 25625 STCP Plug, Drain (1/4”x19BSP) 1
49 23170 NBR O-Ring, Drain Plug - 70D 1
50 46959 AL Cover, Rear 1
51 14030 NBR O-Ring, Rear Cover - 70D 1
53 48577 AL Crankcase 1
64 46969 CM Pin, Crosshead 3
65 49637 SS Rod, Plunger 3
70 48281 NBR Seal, Oil Crankcase - 70D 3
75 43328 S Slinger, Barrier 3
90 48559 CC Plunger, Ceramic (M22x55) 3
95 49639 SS Stud, Plunger Retainer (M6x50) 3
96 43235 PTFE Back-up-Ring, Plunger Retainer 3
97 17399 NBR O-Ring, Plunger Retainer - 80D 3
14160 FPM O-Ring, Plunger Retainer - 80D 3
u 46204 EPDM O-Ring, Plunger Retainer - 70D 3
98 44041 SS Gasket 3
99 44031 SS Retainer, Plunger (M6) 3
100 46964 NY Retainer, Seal 3
106 49644 NBR Seal, LPS w/SS-Spg 3
49704 FPM Seal, LPS w/SS-Spg 3
u 48650 EPDM Seal, LPS w/SS-Spg 3
120 49643 SS Case, Seal 3
121 13984 NBR O-Ring, Seal Case - 70D 3
14333 FPM O-Ring,Seal Case 3
u 48649 EPDM O-Ring, Seal Case 3
127 48278 STG* V-Packing 6
128 49646 SS Adapter, Male 6
162 43248 PTFE Back-up-Ring, Seat 6
163 43249 NBR O-Ring, Seat - 80D 6
44383 FPM O-Ring, Seat - 70D 3
u 46206 EPDM O-Ring, Seat - 70D 6
164 44037 SS Seat 6
166 44038 SS Valve 6
167 44039 SS Spring 6
168 44564 PVDF Retainer, Spring 6
172 17617 NBR O-Ring, Valve Plug - 90D 6
11691 FPM O-Ring, Valve Plug - 90D 6
u 46207 EPDM O-Ring, Valve Plug - 70D 6
174 49293 SS Plug, Valve 6
185 49641 SS Head, Manifold 1
49972 SS Head, Manifold Flushed (1/8” Flushed Port) 1
188 49647 S Screw, HSH (M8x70) 8
260 30613 STZP R Mount, Rail, Assy 1
269 30206 F Pulley (10”) [See Tech Bulletin 003] 1
274 33000 STL Hub, “H”, M24 (Keyway M8) [See Tech Bulletin 003] 1
277 31570 AL Bell Housing Assy, (184TC, 213-215TC, 20 Hp) 1
278 8370 STL Flexible Coupling Assy (M24 x 1-1/8”) (184TC) 1
8375 STL Flexible Coupling Assy (M24 x 1-3/8”) (213-215T) 1
8380 STL Flexible Coupling Assy (M24 x 1-5/8”) 254T) 1
 EXPLODED VIEW

Models
Direct-Drive
Standard and Flushed
7CP6111, 7CP611C
Belt-Drive
Standard and Flushed
7CP6171, 7CP6171C
Gearbox - 7CP6111GI
February 2013

ITEM P/N MATL DESCRIPTION QTY

283 34334 — Kit, Oil Drain (3/8”x24) 1
299 818456 SS Head, Complete 1
300 76933 NBR* Kit, Seal (Inclds: 97, 106, 121, 127) 1
76950 FPM* Kit, Seal (Inclds: 97, 106, 121, 127) 7CP6111.0110, 7CP6111GI.0110 1
u 31936 EPDM* Kit, Seal (Inclds: 97, 106, 121, 127) 7CP6111.0220 1
310 76387 NBR Kit, Valve Pre-Assembled (Inclds: 162, 163, 164, 166, 167, 168, 172) 2
76940 FPM Kit, Valve Pre-Assembled (Inclds: 162, 163, 164, 166, 167, 168, 172) 7CP6111.0110, 7CP6111GI.0110 2
u 76258 EPDM Kit, Valve Pre-Assembled (Inclds: 162, 163, 164, 166, 167, 168, 172) 7CP6111.0220 2
500 8081 — Gearbox (See Individual Data Sheet) 1
— 6119 — Lubricant, Antiseize (2 oz.) [See Tech Bulletin 095] 1
— 6107 — Oil, Bottle (21 oz.) ISO 68 Hydralic (Fill to specified crankcase capacity prior to start-up) 1-2

Bold print part numbers are unique to a particular pump model. Italics are optional items. [ ] Date of latest production change.u Silicone oil/grease required.
R Components comply with RoHS Directive. *Review individual parts in each kit for material code identification.
View Tech Bulletins 002, 003, 024, 036, 043, 053, 064, 074, 077, 083 and 095 for additional information.
*MATERIAL CODES (Not Part of Part Number): ABS=ABS Plastic AL=Aluminum CC=Ceramic CM-Chrome-moly
EPDM=Ethylene Propylene Diene Monamer F=Cast Iron FBR=Fiber FCM=Forged Chrome-moly NBR=Medium Nitrile (Buna-N) NY= Nylon PE=Polyethlene
PTFE=Pure Polytetrafluoroethylene PVDF=Polyvinylidene Fluoride RBR= Rubber S=304SS SS=316SS STG=Special Blend PTFE White STL=Steel
STCP=Steel/Chrome Plated STZP=Steel/Zinc Plated TNM=Special High Strength
 9.26 (235) 13.45 (342)
5.52 (140) 2 – 1/2" NPTF 8.22 (209)
DISCHARGE 7.16 (182)

1.55 (39)

.945 1.73 (44)

(24)
6.89
(175)
1.79 (45.5)
.31
(8) 3.54
(90)
5.73
(146)
2 – 3/4" NPTF
INLET .59 (15)
3.46 (88) 4 – M10 x 1.5 1.38 (35)
.44 (11) 18 DEEP

2.05 (52)
6.69 (170)
4.17 (106) 2 SLOTS
6.58 (167) 1.07 (27)
6.07 (154)
11.87 (301)

Models 7CP6111 and 7CP6171

1
5

4
6

2
7
3

1 Dipstick offers optional top access in 4 100% wet seal design adds to ser- 7 Press-in style seal case offers alignment
addition to rear bubble oil gauge for vice life by allowing pumped liquids and support for seals and “no tools”
easy oil level check. to cool and lubricate on both sides. servicing.
2 Special concentric, high-density, pol- 5 316 Stainless steel valve and seats are 8 Special flushed manifold permits
ished, solid ceramic plungers provide with hardened and polished for ulti- external flush for added cooling
a true wear surface and extended seal mate seating and extended life. with high temperature liquids and
life. 6 E xc l u s i ve s p e c i a l l y f o r m u l a te d lubrication with low lubricity liquids.
3 Manifold is a high tensile strength V-Packings offer unmatched perfor- (Not Shown)
316 stainless steel for strength and mance and seal life.
corrosion-resistance.

CAT PUMPS
1681 - 94TH LANE N.E. MINNEAPOLIS, MN 55449-4324
PHONE (763) 780-5440 — FAX (763) 780-2958
e-mail: techsupport@[Link]
[Link]

For International Inquiries go to [Link] and navigate to the “Contact Us” link. PN 993444 Rev C 2/13 13091
PENTAIR ‐ CODELINE
MODEL: 40E100‐1
4.6” DIA X 56.6” LONG
1000 PSI
CODELINE® - 40E100
4 INCH END ENTRY MEMBRANE HOUSING FOR RO APPLICATIONS
user guide

ARTICLE CODE: 526005

advanced filtration user guide

Content Page No.
Danger High Pressure Devise 2
Important Safety Precautions 2
General Information 2
Installation 3
Opening the vessel 4-5
Opening the vessel: Contamination Removal 4
Opening the vessel: Removing the Head 4
Opening the vessel: Removing Head Assembly 5
Replacing Elements 6-7
Replacing Elements: Removing Elements 6
Replacing Elements: Inserting Elements 6-7
Head Disassembly 8-9
Head Assembly 10
Refurbishing Parts 11
Refurbishing Parts : Refurbishing_Shell 11
Refurbishing Parts : Refurbishing other parts 11
Refurbishing Parts : Remaking Pipe Connections to 11
End Plug
Refurbishing Parts : Part Replacement 11
Disclaimer 12

1
DANGER – HIGH PRESSURE DEVICE
This vessel may cause loss of life, severe bodily harm, or property damage if not correctly installed,
operated and maintained. Read and understand all guidelines given in this bulleting before attempting to
open, operate or service this vessel. Failure to follow these guidelines and observe every precaution will
result in malfunction and could result in catastrophic failure. Misuse, incorrect assembly, or use of
damaged or corroded components can result in high-velocity release of the end closure. We recommend
that only a qualified technician experienced in servicing high-pressure hydraulic systems open, close and
service this vessel.

Important Safety Precautions

Do’s Don’ts
 Read, understand and follow every guideline in  Operate vessel at pressures and temperatures
this bulletin. Failure to take every precaution in excess of their specific rating.
may void warranty and could result in  Service any component until you verify that
catastrophic failure. pressure is fully relieved from the vessel.
 Install in an area where a vessel or piping  Use corroded components. Use of such
malfunction that result in water leakage would components may result in catastrophic failure.
not damage sensitive or expensive equipment,  Pressurize vessel until after visually inspecting
such as electronic components. to ensure that the spiral retaining rings is
 Verify that head locking components are correctly installed.
properly placed and secured.  Tolerate leaks or allow end closures to be
 Inspect end closures regularly, replace routinely wetted in any way.
deteriorated components and correct causes  Use excessive silicone lubricant.
of corrosion.  Pressurize vessel without element in place
 Follow membrane element manufacturer’s unless permeate ports are plugged internally.
recommendations for loading elements into  Overtighten fittings in ports.
the vessel (see Replacing Elements).  Use petroleum products on Noryl components.
 Allow petroleum or silicone based products to
come in contact with membrane elements
during installation or maintenance.
 Use the vessel at negative pressure.
 Stand or climb on the pressure vessels, or the
feed / concentrate or permeate ports.

General Information
The 40E100 Series of RO Pressure Vessel Housings are designed to be used in water desalination systems
at operating pressures of up to 1000 psi. Each model is available in lengths to house from one to seven
40-inch long elements. Any make of 4-inch nominal diameter spiral wound element may be used. The
40E100 is designed and built in accordance with the engineering standards of the Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code of the American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME Code). The vessels utilize a fiberglass
reinforced plastic shell for superior corrosion resistance. The information and guidelines incorporated in
this User’s Guide are intended only as a supplement to good industrial practice. Full responsibility for
correct operation and maintenance of vessel remains with the user. This guide should be used in
conjunction with drawing number 518015. When properly installed and maintained, 40E100 vessels can
be expected to provide safe operation over a long service life.

2
Installation
Regardless of when or by whom your vessel may have been installed, there are a few quick checks
you should make before use. Check that each vessel is:
 Mounted with compliant material (Polyurethane saddle) between the fiberglass shell and any rigid
frame.
 Free to expand under pressure - shell not clamped rigidly in place, no rigid piping connections to port
fittings.
 Not used in any way to support other components such as piping, manifolds hanging from ports.
Section through end closure

Dwg Ref Qty Per Item # Description Materials

Shell
1 1 Shell Filament Wound epoxy/ glass composite.
Head locking grooves internally wound in
place. Shell exterior coated with white high
gloss polyurethane paint.
Head
2 2 47471 Bearing Plate 6061-T6 hard anodiz ed Alum. Alloy
3 2 50481 Seal Plate PVC Thermoplastic (gray) - 120 F Max
4 2 45317 Plug Seal Ethylene polypropylene O-ring
5 2 47469 Permeate Port PVC Thermoplastic (gray)
6 2 45299 Permeate Port Seal Ethylene polypropylene O-ring
7 2 45244 Port Retainer Stainless Steel
8 2 47472 Feed/Conc. Port UNS S 32750 As per ASME AS-790
9 2 50489 Port Retainer Set CF8M - Two piece set
10 2 45294 Adapter Seal Ethylene polypropylene O-ring
Head Interlock
11 2 45260 Retaining Ring 316L Stainless steel
Element Interface
15 2 As required Adapter Engineering Thermoplastic
16 2 As required PWT Seal Ethylene polypropylene O-ring
Vessel Support
17* 2 45058 Saddle Engineering Thermoplastic
18* 2 47459 Strap Assembly 304 Stainless Steel – Thermoplastic cushion
19* 4 97821 Strap screw 5/16 UNC ,18-8 Stainles steel
*Item no 17, 18, & 19 not shown in the above exploded view

3
Opening the Vessel
WARNING: Relieve pressure from vessel CAUTION: DO NOT tap on fittings as this
before beginning this procedure. could damage the ports.

With the removal tool the retaining ring can

Contamination Removal be lifted upward by simply rotating the tool
Metal oxidation products and mineral deposits
counterclockwise after inserting it over the
can interfere with vessel disassembly. Remove
tab on the retaining ring (use the smaller
all foreign matter from both ends of vessel as
hole). Hold the tool flat against the end
follows:
margin and parallel to the vessel bore. It is
1. Remove contaminants using a small wire
then possible to pull the end of the retaining
brush or suitable abrasive (such as medium-
ring straight out. The retaining ring may
grade ScotchBriteTM).
snap back into the groove if this alignment is
2. Flush away loosened deposits with clean
not closely adhered to. If the retaining ring is
water.
difficult to remove, try soaking with a
release agent such as LPSTM or WD40TM,
being careful to avoid any contamination of
a membrane element.

Retaining ring removal tool

Cleaning inside the vessel

Removing the Head

Remove head as follows:

When using screwdriver and pliers, pry the
1. Disconnect permeate piping as required at
tabbed end of the retaining ring out of the
nearest convenient joint, being careful not
stainless steel groove with the tip of the
to place undue stress on the threaded
screwdriver. Once the end of the retaining
connections of the plastic permeate port.
ring is clear of the groove, grab the tab with
the pliers and pull towards the end of the
Remove the Retaining Ring from the groove.
vessel until the end of the ring is resting in
1. Lift the tabbed end of the retaining ring up
the end margin of the shell.
and out of the stainless steel groove in the
shell and then away from the head so that it
2. Remove the 4” retaining ring from the
rests in the end margin of the vessel. This is
stainless steel groove in the shell by rotating
best accomplished by using CodeLine
your finger behind the ring as it continues to
Removal Tool, part number 50303, which
exit the groove.
is available from your supplier. This can also
be accomplished using a screwdriver and a
pair of pliers if the tool is not readily
available.

4
 3. Repeat above procedures for opposite end
of the vessel.
4. As soon as possible after removal,
disassemble and check all head components,
as described in Rebuilding the Head and
Refurbishing Parts.

Removal of retaining ring

3. Once the retaining ring has been removed,

examine the area for burrs or dings which
could damage the head or membrane. If
necessary, use ScotchBriteTM or 600 grade
sandpaper to smooth the area.

Removing Head Assembly

1. Grasp the feed/concentrate port and pull
the necessary head assembly straight out. It
may be required to give a sharp forceful tug
or to rock the head from side to side in
order to move the head. Take care to avoid
damaging the permeate port. It is made of
PVC or other engineering thermoplastic
(occasionally stainless steel or other metal)
and is not designed to withstand
mistreatment.

Removal of head assembly

2. Remove and discard plug seal, taking care

not to scratch or otherwise damage the
sealing surfaces.

5
 3. Install adapter if required into one end plug.
At downstream end of vessel, orient end
plug ports into desired position and push
Replacing Elements
plug fully into vessel. A sharp, forceful thrust
The following procedures are provided for
information only. Elements should be installed may be needed to enter plug seal into the
in accordance with the element manufacturer’s vessel bore.
recommendations. Where conflicts exist,
contact the element manufacturer or Pentair
Water for clarification.

Removing Elements
1. Remove heads from both ends of vessels
as described in Opening the Vessel.

NOTE: Always remove and install element in

the direction of feed flow. The feed end
(upstream end) is the end plumbed most
directly to the pump.

1. Push element(s) out of vessel from the

upstream end.
Installation of the End Plug Assembly into the vessel
2. For multi-element vessels, remove the
interconnectors and retain for reinstallation.
CAUTION: If vessel is to be pressurized
above 125 psi without elements installed,
Inserting Elements the central permeate port should be plugged
1. Ensure that heads are available in clean, as- from the inside. Solid adapters are available
new condition before proceeding. (If in for this purpose.
doubt as to head condition see section on
inspecting parts at pg. 11). 4. Carefully insert retaining ring into its groove.
2. Check that all required elements are ready This is done by inserting the lead end of the
for assembly, with no dings or other damage spiral retaining ring (end without bent tab)
which could scratch the inside of the vessel. into the stainless steel retaining ring groove
3. Check that the interior of the vessel is clean located in the shell, and slowly pushing the
and free of burrs, sharp edges or other remaining turns into the shell.
damage. Remove any residual lubricant from
the vessel bore and work a fresh, thin film of
Parker-Super-O-LubeTM silicon lubricant into
the lead-in chamfer and an area
approximately ½ inch from the chamfer.

CAUTION: When lubricating the vessel

chamfer, wear protective gloves or finger
cots to prevent cuts or penetration of
fiberglass.

6
 9. Push each element downstream into the
shell as it is installed until the element is
fully engaged with the downstream head. If
the elements are hard to push, make sure
the brine seal is properly installed and you
are pushing from the upstream end. When
Inserting Retaining Ring into the groove all the elements are fully inserted into the
vessel, install the upstream head with
5. Check that the spiral retaining ring is fully adapter fitted if required.
seated in the groove. If it is not, remove and 10. Reconnect piping to vessel as described in
check for foreign material that is causing the Remaking Pipe Connection to Eng Plug.
spiral ring not to sit into the groove. 11. Pressurize the vessel. Inspect for leaks at
connections to the vessel and all around the
vessel itself. If any leaks occur, release
pressure from the vessel and tighten the
fittings as necessary. Then pressurize
vessel and check for leaks again.

CAUTION: DO NOT tolerate any leaks.

Leaks can result in corrosion and eventual
catastrophic vessel failure.

Retaining ring seated in the groove

6. Lubricate element seals sparingly with the
element manufacturers recommended
lubricant or with glycerine.
7. Insert each element with the brine seal
(typically a U-cup seat) installed on the
upstream end with its lip facing upstream.

CAUTION: System malfunctions and element

damage may result if elements are installed
in the wrong direction.

8. Install the interconnectors between multiple

elements as each succeeding element is
installed.

NOTE: On some systems it may be easier to

install the piping connections before the
head is installed. If so, please proceed with
steps
. 10 &11.

7
Head Disassembly
NOTE: Head Rebuilding should be performed
in a clean work area. Dust or dirt on O-rings
or other parts can scratch inner surfaces,
with subsequent leakage

1. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool

remove the Plug Seal. However do not
damage the sealing surface in any way as it
may lead to leakage. Removal of the Permeate port from the End Plug Assembly

CAUTION: During the next step, one or both

Port Retainer halves may fall out.
4. Rotate sealing plate relative to bearing plate
and separate the two.

Removal of the Plug Seal

2. Remove circlip from its groove in the
Permeate port. Take care not to scratch the
hard-anodized surface of the bearing plate.

Separate the Sealing plate and the Bearing plate

5. Push Feed/Concentrate Port further into the
bearing plate, remove the two Port Retainer
segments, then pull Feed/Concentrate Port
out of the Bearing Plate.

Removal of the Circlip

3. Pull permeate port out of the Head
Assembly.

Removal of F/C Port from the Bearing Plate

8
6. Check all head components as shown in the
picture Head Component Identification -
40E100.

9
 5. Holding the port in place, install the Port
Head Assembly Retainer set into the groove in the machined
1. Use only head components in as-new end of the port. Pull port back until retaining
condition. Use new O-rings each time the ring set bottoms in the Bearing Plate recess.
head is assembled.
2. Cover O-rings with a this even layer of
Parker Super O-LubeTM silicon lubricant or
the lubricant recommended by your
element supplier.

Installing of F/C Port & Port Retainer set

NOTE: The 1/8” blind hole in one surface of

the Sealing Plate must be on the side facing
away from the Bearing Plate.
Lubricating Plug seals and O-rings
6. Holding the Bearing Plate and
NOTE: Glycerine is a commercially Feed/Concentrate Port firmly together,
available lubricant that will not foul press the Sealing Plate on to the machined
elements. However, silicon lubricant is end of the Feed/Concentrate Port so that
recommended for this application. the two pairs of holes line up.
7. Assemble the Permeate Port through the
center hole in the Sealing Plate, align the
3. Assemble one Port Seal into the groove in
Permeate port pin with the Sealing Plate
the Sealing Plate and the other into the
alignment hole and press fully into position.
groove on the small end of the Permeate
Port. Insert Adapter seal into the groove at
the large end of the Permeate Port.

Installing Permeate Port into the Sealing plate

8. Snap the Retaining ring into the groove in
the Permeate Port, up against the face of
Inserting Permeate Port seal
the Bearing Plate.
4. Hold Bearing Plate with the 3 ½” diameter 9. Examine the assembly to ensure that the
stepped surface facing towards you. From mating faces of the Sealing and Bearing
this side, insert the smaller machined end of Plate are in complete contact. If they are
the stainless steel Feed/ Concentrate Port not, disassemble the head and start over.
through the larger outer hole.

10
  Retaining Ring - chipped, scratched,
corroded or bent
 Port Retainer - bent or damaged

Refurbishing Shell
1. Using a fine wire brush, remove any large
deposits from Retaining Ring groove in the
vessel.
2. Using a medium or finer grade of
ScotchBriteTM and mild soap solution, clean
Installing the Bearing Plate and Sealing Plate
the inside of the vessel at least 4 inches in
from each end.
10. When head is correctly assembled, insert 3. Use clean water to rinse away all loosened
the Plug Seal O-ring into the groove on the deposits and soap residue.
outside diameter of the Seal Plate. 4. Examine inside of the vessel for scratches,
11. Protect heads from contamination until gouges or other imperfections that could
ready to assemble into the vessel(s). prevent proper sealing. If such areas exist
and leaks are observed when the vessel is
placed back in service, the shell may need to
Refurbishing Parts be replaced.
Plastic parts: examine for cracking, softening or
discoloring. This may indicate chemical attack of Refurbishing Other Parts
1. Remove any large deposits from metal parts
the material. Defective parts must be replaced.
using a wire brush.
Alternate materials may be required. Contact 2. Scrub the entire surface with medium grade
your supplier or Pentair Water for assistance ScotchBriteTM until all contaminants are
Metal parts: check for corrosion, scratches, removed.
dents, cracks or other damage to insert ring and 3. Rinse parts clean with fresh water and dry.
4. Inspect all parts for serviceability as
spiral retaining ring.
specified above.
NOTE: Minor dings or scratches on hard
anodized aluminum surfaces may be Remaking Pipe Connections to End
temporarily protected with epoxy paint. Plug
However, since catastrophic failure can result 1. Use a wire brush to remove all foreign
if corrosion occurs, damaged parts should be matter from threads on pipe fittings.
replaced with new ones as soon as possible. 2. Scrub the entire surface with medium grade
ScotchBriteTM until all contaminants are
Carefully inspect each component for any
removed.
damage that could affect structural strength or
3. Rinse parts clean with fresh water and dry.
sealing properties. The following examples show
4. Inspect all parts for serviceability as
some of the situations in which parts should be
specified above.
replaced.
 Bearing Plate - hard-anodized surface NOTE: If the head has to be reoriented to
removed at any point or corroded attain suitable port positions, head will have
 Sealing Plate - cracked, softened or distorted to be removed and reinstalled as described in
 Feed/Concentrate Port - bent or distorted Head Assembly section.
 Permeate Port - cracked, softened or thread
damaged

11
Part Replacement
Replace all parts that cannot be restored to as-
new condition. Replace any parts showing signs
of structural damage or corrosion.

CAUTION: Use of components that are

damaged by corrosion can result in
catastrophic failure.

Seals should be replaced necessarily, each time

the vessels are serviced. Any parts that need to
be replaced are available from your supplier or
from Pentair.

Codeline®
PENTAIR WATER INDIA PVT. LTD. L / 52 – 55, VERNA INDUSTRIAL ESTATE, VERNA, GOA, INDIA – 403 722 [Link]

Note: The information and data contained in this document are based on our general experience and are believed to be correct. They are
given in good faith and are intended to provide a guideline for the selection and use of our products. Since the conditions under which our
products may be used are beyond our control, this information does not imply any guarantee of final product performance and we cannot
accept any liability with respect to the use of our products. The quality of our products is guaranteed under our conditions of sale. Existing
industrial property rights must be observed.

UG CODELINE 40E100 EN 4215 @2015 PENTAIR. All Rights Reserved.

12
HYDRANAUTICS
MODEL: SWC5‐LD4040
4” DIA X 40” LONG
PUMP:
DAVEY
MODEL: XF 192S
1PH, 1.15KW, 230V, 50HZ
TANK:
MODEL: FDA 100
CAPACITY: 100 LITERS, PE
XF92S, XF171S, XF221S & XF192S
Model Numbers: 71401S, 71101S,
71201S & 71301S

TRANSFER PUMPS

PRODUCT
DESCRIPTION
Robust, & compact, 1 or 2 stage
centrifugal pumps with silicon carbide
seals, corrosion resistant componentry and
driven by a TEFC motor. Designed for total
head duties to 33m and flows to 225 lpm.
All models are fitted with “Thermotection”
for closed head pump protection.

A P P L I C AT I O N S
Ideal for pumping slightly aggressive,
non-volatile liquids without fibres or
solids in such applications as:–
• Sea water
• Aquaculture
• Mild acid solutions
• Washing systems
Also available in 110 or 220 volt 60Hz single phase. • Hydroponics
• Desalinated water

D E S I G N F E AT U R E S O P E R AT I N G L I M I T S

PUMP XF92S XF171S XF221S XF192S

1 or 2 stage (single or twin impeller)
Capacities to 98 lpm 175 lpm 225 lpm 190 lpm
Closed vane impellers
Stainless Steel pump shaft Max. total head 28m 17m 20m 33m
Corrosion resistant casing Max. suction head 7.0m 7.5m 7.5m 7.5m
Silicon Carbide Mechanical shaft seal
Oring casing seal Max. water temperature 85 C
o

Min. water temperature 1oC

MOTOR
Inlet size 1”BSP(F)
Davey manufactured
TEFC with IP55 enclosure Outlet size 1”BSP(F) 1”BSP(M) 1”BSP(M) 1”BSP(F)
Class F insulation Max. casing pressure (kPa) 400 250 250 400
Permanently split capacitor design
Double contact C3-HTG sealed bearings
Inbuilt thermal overload protection
Plastic feet on motor shell BENEFITS
THERMOTECTION
• Manufactured from quality corrosion resistant materials.
Thermotection will automatically stop
the pump should the water in the • TEFC motor corrosion resistant and excludes dust and dirt.
casing reach 85oC. This condition may • Motor and pump designed for frequent starts.
occur when a fully primed pump is
H/O & MFG SCORESBY

• Quick and easy installation.

operated without being allowed to
discharge water (i.e. closed head • Low maintenance.
operation). Thermotection control will • Easy to service if required.
automatically restart the pump when • Protected against pump damage from closed head operation.
the water temperature drops below
65oC±5oC.
 T E C H N I C A L S P E C I F I C AT I O N S

M AT E R I A L S O F C O N S T R U C T I O N HYDRAULIC PERFORMANCE

ft m TOTAL HEAD
PA R T M AT E R I A L 35

100 30
Impellers Glass filled polycarbonate
Lock nut Glass filled nylon
Pump casing Glass filled noryl (XF171S&XF221S) 80 25
316 stainless steel (XF92S&XF192S)
Clamp band 304 stainless steel 20
Pump shaft 304 stainless steel 60
Suction cover Glass filled noryl 15
Seal ring (stationary) Silicon carbide 40
Seal ring (rotating) Aluminium oxide 10
Seal spring 316 stainless steel
Orings Nitrile rubber 20 XF171S XF221S
5
Diffusers Glass filled noryl
Blanking ring (XF92S & XF192S) Glass filled noryl XF92S XF192S
0 0
Spacer Glass filled nylon
Priming plug Glass filled noryl l/min 0 50 100 150 200 250
Motor shell Marine grade aluminium g/hr 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000
Shell finish Baked polyester
FLOW

E L E C T R I C A L D ATA DIMENSIONS

XF92S XF171S XF221S XF192S

Supply voltage 220-250V
Supply frequency 50Hz
A
Full load current 3.7A 2.8A 4.5A 5.2A
F
Locked rotor current 12.0A 12.0A 18.0A 18.0A
Input power (P1) 0.84kW 0.78kW 1.05kW 1.15kW
Output power (P2) 0.58kW 0.53kW 0.70kW 0.80kW
Enclosure class IP55 B
Insulation class Class F
D
Starting P.S.C.

E C

I N S TA L L AT I O N & P R I M I N G
Net
Mounting Inlet Outlet Weight
• Installations with suction lift require a good MODEL A B C D E F Holes Dia. B.S.P. B.S.P. (kg)
quality foot valve to avoid loss of prime XF92S 325 220 195 100 125 100
10
1”F 1”F 7.2
• To prime, fill pump body and suction line XF171S 325 215 193 100 126 100 1”F 1”M 6.7
@ 140
XF221S 350 215 193 100 126 100 centres 1”F 1”M 8.3
through priming plug hole located above XF192S 350 220 195 100 125 100 1”F 1”F 8.8
suction inlet and replace plug
All dimensions in mm unless otherwise stated.

This literature is not a complete guide to product usage. Further information is available from your Davey dealer, Davey Customer Service Centre and
from the relevant product Installation and Operating Instructions. This data sheet must be read in conjunction with the relevant product Installation
and Operating Instructions and all applicable statutory requirements. Product specifications may change without notice.
® Davey is a registered trademark of Davey Products Pty Ltd. © Davey Products Pty Ltd 2000.

Davey Products Pty Ltd International

6 Lakeview Drive,
New Zealand
2 Rothwell Avenue,
Member of the GUD Group
ABN 18 066 327 517 Scoresby, Australia 3179 North Harbour, Auckland 1330
Head Office and Manufacturing Ph: +61 3 9730 9121 Ph: +64 9 914 3680
6 Lakeview Drive, Fax: +61 3 9753 4248 Fax: +64 9 914 3685
Scoresby, Australia 3179 E-mail: export@[Link] Website: [Link]
Ph: +61 3 9730 9222 E-mail: sales@[Link]
Fax: +61 3 9753 4100
Website: [Link] Germany USA - Davey Pumps Inc.
Customer Service Centre Kantstrasse 47, 1005 N. Commons Drive
Ph: 1300 367 866 04275 Leipzig Aurora, Illinois 60504
Fax: 1300 369 119 Ph: +49 341 301 0412 Ph: +1 630 898 6976
E-mail: sales@[Link] Fax: +49 341 301 0413 Fax: +1 630 851 7744
Interstate Offices E-mail: akrenz@[Link] Website: [Link]
Sydney • Brisbane • Adelaide E-mail: sales@[Link]
Perth • Townsville
D854-2/2K/0407/SC supersedes D854-1/3K/1102/GPW
 5. Internal motor fault.
4. Motor not free to turn e.g. a blocked impeller.
3. Overload tripped.
2. Supply voltage too low.
1. Power not connected.
MOTOR NOT RUNNING:
6. Valve on suction or delivery lines closed.
5. No water at source or water level too low.

4. Air trapped in suction lines (also possible with flooded suction) due to
3. Air leaks in suction lines or suction pipe not under water.
2. Leaking foot valve.
1. Suction line and pump body not filled with water.
MOTOR OPERATING BUT NOT PUMPING:
Trouble Shooting Check List
uneven rise in piping (eliminate humps and hollows).
any hot water in the pump to cool before attempting to dismantle.
pressure by opening a tap on the discharge side of the pump and allow
avoid possible injury from hot pressurised water. Unplug pump, relieve
Care should also be taken when servicing or disassembling pump to

(above 50°C) in pump enclosure.

indicates a problem e.g. low voltage at pump, excessive temperature
automatic reset thermal overload, constant tripping of this overload
*NOTE: For protection, the Davey pump motor is fitted with an
serviced only by qualified persons.
is switched off and lead unplugged. Electrical connections should be
WARNING: When servicing or attending pump, always ensure power
sprays around the electrical components of this pump.
WARNING: Do not use hydrocarbon based or hydrocarbon propelled

components or seal components.

(e.g. Oils, Kerosene, Turpentine, Thinners, etc) on the plastic pump
IMPORTANT: DO NOT USE petroleum based fluids or solvents

electrical supply before maintenance or repairs.

restart without warning. Always disconnect the pump motor from the
WARNING: Automatic reset thermal overloads will allow the pump to

Davey Repair or Replacement Guarantee

In the unlikely event in Australia or New Zealand that this Davey product develops any malfunction within two years of the date of original purchase due to
faulty materials or manufacture, Davey will at our option repair or replace it for you free of charge, subject to the conditions below.

Should you experience any difficulties with your Davey product, we suggest in the first instance that you contact the Davey Dealer from which you
purchased the Davey product. Alternatively you can phone our Customer Service line on 1300 367 866 in Australia, or 0800 654 333 in New Zealand, or
send a written letter to Davey at the address listed below. On receipt of your claim, Davey will seek to resolve your difficulties or, if the product is faulty or
defective, advise you on how to have your Davey product repaired, obtain a replacement or a refund.

Your Davey Two Year Guarantee naturally does not cover normal wear or tear, replacement of product consumables (i.e. mechanical seals, bearings or
capacitors), loss or damage resulting from misuse or negligent handling, improper use for which the product was not designed or advertised, failure to

Installation and
properly follow the provided installation and operating instructions, failure to carry out maintenance, corrosive or abrasive water or other liquid, lightning
or high voltage spikes, or unauthorized persons attempting repairs. Where applicable, your Davey product must only be connected to the voltage shown
on the nameplate.

Your Davey Two Year Guarantee does not cover freight or any other costs incurred in making a claim. Please retain your receipt as proof of purchase; you
MUST provide evidence of the date of original purchase when claiming under the Davey Two Year Guarantee.
Operating Instructions
for Davey
Davey shall not be liable for any loss of profits or any consequential, indirect or special loss, damage or injury of any kind whatsoever arising directly
or indirectly from Davey products. This limitation does not apply to any liability of Davey for failure to comply with a consumer guarantee applicable to
your Davey product under the Australian or New Zealand legislation and does not affect any rights or remedies that may be available to you under the

XF Series Electric Pumps

Australian or New Zealand Consumer Legislation.

In Australia, you are entitled to a replacement or refund for a major failure and for compensation for any other reasonably foreseeable loss or damage. You
are also entitled to have the goods repaired or replaced if the goods fail to be of acceptable quality and the failure does not amount to a major failure.

Should your Davey product require repair or service after the guarantee period; contact your nearest Davey Dealer or phone the Davey Customer Service
Centre on the number listed below.

For a complete list of Davey Dealers visit our website ([Link]) or call:

AUSTRALIA NEW ZEALAND

Customer Service Centre Customer Service Centre
6 Lakeview Drive, 7 Rockridge Avenue,
Scoresby, Australia 3179 Penrose, Auckland 1061
Ph: 1300 232 839 Ph: 0800 654 333
Davey Water Products Pty Ltd
Fax: 1300 369 119 Fax: 0800 654 334
Member of the GUD Group
ABN 18 066 327 517
Email: sales@[Link] Email: sales@[Link]
Website: [Link] Website: [Link]
NOTE: Prior to installation remove the red transport plugs from
® Davey is a registered trademark of Davey Water Products Pty Ltd. © Davey Water Products Pty Ltd 2017.
P/N 48095-13 the suction and/or discharge.
* Installation and operating instructions are included with the product when purchased new.
They may also be found on our website. Please pass these instructions on to the operator of this equipment.
Prior to using this pump you must ensure that: Pipe Connections Priming and Operation
• The pump is installed in a safe and dry environment For best performance use P.V.C. or polythene
• The pump enclosure has adequate drainage in the event of leakage pipe at least the same diameter as the pump’s 1. Ensure outlet nearest to 3. Switch on.
• Any transport plugs are removed inlet. Larger diameter pipe may be used to pump is open.
• The pipe-work is correctly sealed and supported minimise resistance to flow when pumping
• The pump is primed correctly longer distances.
• The power supply is correctly connected
• All steps have been taken for safe operation
Use unions at pipe connections to enable easy
Appropriate details for all of these items are contained in the following removal and servicing. Use sufficient tape to
Installation and Operating Instructions. Read these in their entirety before ensure airtight seal and hand tighten only, do not
switching on this pump. If you are uncertain as to any of these Installation and screw connections all the way into suction port.
Operating Instructions please contact your Davey dealer or the appropriate To prevent strain on pump thread always support 2. Fill pump body and suction line
Davey office as listed on the back of this document. heavy inlet and outlet pipes. through priming plug hole located
Lay suction pipe at a constant gradient to avoid above suction inlet and replace
Before installing your new pump, please read all instructions carefully as air pockets which may reduce pump efficiency. plug.
failures caused by incorrect installation or operation are not covered by the 4. Prime should establish almost
guarantee. Your XF Electric Pump is designed to handle clean water. The immediately with a strong flow
system should not be used for any other purpose without specific referral to of water, however, in some
Davey. The use of the pump to pump flammable, corrosive and other materials NOTE: Suction leaks are the largest
of a hazardous nature is specifically excluded. cause of poor pump performance installations it may be
and are difficult to detect. Ensure all necessary to repeat
connections are completely sealed the above operation to
using thread tape only. Do not use remove all air from the
sealing compounds or pipe dope.
system.
Choosing a Site
Choose a site with a firm base as close to the water
source as possible with correct power supply. Make
WARNING:
sure your pump is always connected to an adequate,
DO NOT RUN DRY.
reliable source of clean water. DO NOT RUN WITH LOSS OF PRIME.
DO NOT PUMP WATER CONTAINING ABRASIVE MATERIALS.

Housing your Davey Pump

To protect your pump from the weather, make Special Models
sure the pump house is both water proof, frost XF models fitted with “THERMOTECTION”
free and has adequate ventilation. XF92F, XF171F, XF221F, XF192F, XF92S, XF171S, XF221S AND XF192S
Special models of XF pumps are supplied with a unique device
The pump should be mounted on a firm base (Thermotection) to automatically stop the pump should the water in the casing
allowing for drainage, to avoid damage to
Where to use Check Valves reach 85°C. This condition may occur when a fully primed pump is operated
flooring etc., that over time may occur from and Foot Valves without being allowed to discharge water (i.e. closed head operation). Twin
leaking pipe joints or pump seals. impeller models also have high grade 316 stainless steel casings.
Installations with a suction lift require a good quality foot valve to avoid loss of
Do not mount the pump vertically. prime. CAUTION:
Thermotection will automatically restart the pump when the water tem-
perature drops below 65° ± C 5°C.
WARNING: Some insects, such as small ants, find electrical devices Installations with flooded suction require a
attractive for various reasons. If your pump enclosure is susceptible gate valve so water supply can be turned off
to insect infestation you should implement a suitable pest control plan. for pump removal and servicing. XF models fitted with Silicon Carbide Seals
XF92B, XF171B, XF221B and XF192B
XF92S, XF171S, XF221S and XF192S
These models are fitted with special hard face silicon carbide mechanical
seals to allow them to better handle corrosive and abrasive water. Twin
impeller models also have high grade 316 stainless steel casings.
Power Connection
DO NOT RUN DRY
In accordance with AS 3350.2.41 we are obliged to inform you that this WARNING: If these models are operated without water the mechanical
pump is not to be used by children or infirm persons and must not be seals will emit a high pitched noise. Continued operation without
used as a toy by children. water may result in damage to the seal chamber.

The electrical connections and checks must be made by a qualified XF model with Chemical Resistant Pump End
electrician and comply with applicable local standards. XF171D
This model is fitted with pump components made from a special plastic. This
model is better suited to pump certain chemical solutions such as those used
Connect lead to power supply designated on pump label, do not use in “dog spa’s”. For more information on acceptable chemicals contact your
long extension leads as they cause substantial voltage drop, poor
pump performance and may cause motor overload. Installations with overhead tanks and pipe work require a one-way check valve Davey dealer or the Davey Customer Service Centre.
to avoid water draining back past the pump while not in operation and causing
possible pump damage.
BLUE‐WHITE
MODEL: F550

RANGE: 0.5‐5.0 GPM

LOCATION: RO PRODUCT OUTLET

RANGE: 1‐10GPM
LOCATION: RO REJECT OUTLET
 Exploded View and Parts List Installation Instructions
Standard Meters F-550
Option: x = L (liquid) or G (gas) F-55005L
F-55375x
ITEM DESCRIPTION F-55250x
F-55376x
F-55500x F-55750L F-55100L
F-55200L
QTY Specifications
1 Cap 76001-080 91001-032 91001-032 91001-033 91001-160 1
2 O-ring (cap) 90003-072 90003-081 90003-081 90003-082 90003-079 1 Meter Body: Acrylic, clear
3 Guide wire 76000-039 90007-534 90007-534 90007-535 76000-046 1
90007-547 76001-170 Floats: #316 Stainless Steel
*4 Float 76000-129 90007-522 90007-563 90007-565 1
1 90007-564
76000-147 Adapters: Polypropylene
5 Float stop bottom 76000-024 76000-024 76000-024 76000-093 76000-517 1
2
*6 Body 76100-117 76100-119 76100-119 76100-121 76100-123 1
6 7 O-ring (adapter) 90003-072 90003-034 90003-034 90003-081 90003-110 2 O-Rings: Viton
8 Adapter 76001-079 91001-141 91001-142 91001-143 91001-144 2
7 9 Lock nut 91001-153 91001-153 91001-154 91001-171 91001-172 2 Lock Nut: Polypropylene
8
3 * item not sold separately
9 Scale: Permanent Silkscreen
Max. Pressure: See Temperature vs.
Pressure chart*
4 7
8 Max. Temperature: See Temperature vs.
5 9
Pressure chart*
Standard Adjustable
Meter Meter
Adjustable Meters Option: x = L (liquid) or G (gas) ®
F-55375xA
F-55005LA Your Blue-White F-550 Series Panel Mount Flowmeter
ITEM DESCRIPTION F-55250xA F-55500xA F-55750LA F-55100LA QTY
F-55376xA
F-55200LA Your Blue-White® flowmeter was designed to be easy to install.
1 Cap 76001-080 91001-032 91001-032 91001-033 91001-160 1
2 O-ring cap 90003-072 90003-081 90003-081 90003-082 90003-079 1 Please read the Instruction Guideline on the next page before installing your
3 Guide wire 76001-108 76001-109 76001-109 76001-110 76000-111 1
76001-170 flowmeter.
90007-547
*4 Float 76000-129 90007-522 90007-563 90007-656 1
90007-564 76000-147 This flowmeter is an instrument, and special care should be taken when installing.
5 Float stop bottom 76001-085 76001-091 76001-091 76001-096 76001-107 1
*6 Body 76100-118 76100-120 76100-120 76100-122 76100-124 1
1 7
8
O-ring adapter
Adapter
90003-072
76001-079
90003-034
91001-141
90003-034
91001-142
90003-081
91001-143
90003-110
91001-144
1
1
Dimensional Drawing
2
9 Lock nut 91001-153 91001-153 91001-154 91001-171 91001-172 2 English System
10 Inlet Adapter 76001-153 91001-173 91001-174 91001-175 91001-176 1
3 Dimension W L K D C Maximum Recommended
11 O-ring, inlet adapter 90003-034 90003-081 90003-081 90003-110 90003-082 1 Panel Thickness Panel Cutout
12 O-ring, valve stem 90003-004 90003-010 90003-010 90003-072 90003-113 1 Meters Inches Inches Inches Inches Inches T-max (inches) hole (inches)
13 Valve stem 76001-082 76001-088 76001-088 76001-094 76001-104 1
F-55250xx 1-1/16 6-7/8 2-1/2 1-1/4 5-5/8 1/2 11/16
6 14 O-ring, valve body 90003-114 90003-081 90003-081 90003-017 90003-021 1
15 Valve body 76001-081 76001-086 76001-086 76001-093 76001-103 1 F-55375xx 1-11/32 8 2-3/4 1-1/2 6-1/2 1/2 11/16
7 16 Retainer cap 76001-084 76001-090 76001-090 76001-095 76001-106 1 F-55376xx 1-11/32 8 2-3/4 1-1/2 6-1/2 1/2 11/16
18
4 17 Knob valve 76001-083 76001-089 76001-089 76001-097 76001-105 1
F-55500xx 1-11/32 8 2-3/4 1-1/2 6-1/2 1/2 27/32
18 Set screw 90011-056 90011-116 90011-116 90011-116 90011-116 1 W

K
D
5
* item not sold separately F-55750xx 1-1/2 8-5/8 3-3/4 1-3/4 6-1/2 13/16 1-21/64
F-55100xx 1-3/4 10-1/4 4 2 8 13/16 1-21/64
F-55200xx 1-3/4 10-1/4 4 2 8 13/16 1-21/64
8
17 15
16 14
9 Metric System
Dimension W L K D C Maximum Recommended
13 Panel Thickness Panel Cutout
12 L Meters mm mm mm mm mm T-max (mm) hole (mm)
11
10 F-55250xx 27.0 174.5 63.5 32.0 143.0 13.0 18.0
9 F-55375xx 34.3 203.0 70.0 38.0 165.0 13.0 18.0
C
F-55376xx 34.3 203.0 70.0 38.0 165.0 13.0 18.0
F-55500xx 34.3 203.0 70.0 38.0 165.0 13.0 22.0
F-55750xx 38.1 219.0 95.0 44.5 165.0 21.0 34.0
Website: [Link] F-55100xx 44.5 260.5 101.5 51.0 203.0 21.0 34.0
E-mail: Sales@[Link] | Techsupport@[Link] F-55200xx 44.5 260.5 101.5 51.0 203.0 21.0 34.0
Phone: 714-893-8529 | Fax: 714-894-0149
Blue-White Blue-White
R R

5300 Business Drive

Industries, Ltd. Huntington Beach, CA 92649 Industries, Ltd.

80000-349 9/25/2003
 Installation Guideline Cleaning: The flowmeter body and all other parts can be cleaned by washing in
Please use the following steps to guide you F-550 Lock Nut (x 2)
a mild soap and water solution. A soft bristle bottle brush will simplify cleaning
Panel
through the installation. Cap
F-550 Adapter (x 2) inside the meter body. Note the floats up position for re-assembly.
Caution: Follow these tips to avoid failure
Outlet Pipe
Danger: Wear eye protection when installing Temperature vs. Pressure
Temperature
or removing flowmeter.
F-550 200°F / 93.3°C
STEP 1. Unpack the flowmeter. Meter 190°F / 87.8°C
! Check for damage while unpacking 180°F / 82.2°C

the flowmeter. 170°F / 76.7°C

! Be sure the meter is suitable for your 160°F / 71.1°C

application. 150°F / 65.6°C

UP 140°F / 60°C
! The maximum temperature and
130°F / 54.4°C
pressure is shown on the following
120°F / 48.9°C
page.
110°F / 43.3°C
! Although the meter may be suitable
Inlet Pipe 100°F / 37.8°C
for other chemicals, Blue-White®
90°F / 32.2°C
meters are tested with water and air
80°F / 26.7°C
only. If you are unsure of the meters
70°F / 21.1°C
compatibility with your chemical, 0/0 50 / 3.5 100 / 6.9 150 / 10.3 200 / 13.8 250 / 17.2
consult the factory. Panel PSIg / BAR
! Blue-White® guarantees the meter is
suitable with air and water only.
T-max, see Dimensional
Drawing on first page for
Pressure and Temperature
maximum panel thickness
STEP 2. Choose a suitable location for the flowmeter. Pressure and temperature limits are inversely proportional. At the maximum
! Never allow the flowmeter to support the weight of related pipe or suggested pressure the temperature should approach 70°F / 21.1°C; at the
tubing. maximum suggested temperature the pressure should approach zero psi. We
! Flowmeter must be installed in plumbing which is free of vibration. cannot guarantee our flowmeters will not be damaged either at or below the
! Flowmeter must be installed in an exact vertical plane to ensure suggested limits simply because of many factors which influence meter integrity;
accuracy. stress resulting from meter misalignment, damage due to excessive vibration
! Valves - Avoid a system that will impose a sudden burst of flow (water and/or deterioration caused by contact with certain chemicals as well as direct
hammer) to the meter. Such a burst will cause the float to impact the sunlight. These situations and others tend to reduce the strength of the materials
float stop with destructive force. Magnetic, solenoid, ball, or other quick from which the meters are manufactured.
opening valves cannot be used unless the meter is protected against
sudden bursts of flow. Flowmeters are tested and calibrated for water or air only.
! Do not exceed maximum working pressure (see Temperature vs. Although meters may be suitable for other chemicals, Blue-White cannot
Pressure chart on next page). guarantee their suitability.
STEP 3. Connecting the flowmeter to the plumbing.
! Use an appropriate amount of Teflon® (or similar) tape on external pipe
threads before making connections.
! Acrylic and other exotic plastics cannot tolerate PVC Glue and/or pipe
dope. Even fumes can cause crazing. If you are installing your
flowmeter to a glued pipe configuration, install flowmeter after all glued
fittings are dried and lines are purged of all fumes.
! Install the meter to the panel using the panel lock nuts. Do not over-
tighten.
! The meter adapters are provided with wrench flats. Prevent the meter
Blue-White
R

adapters from rotating while attaching the inlet and outlet plumbing. Be
careful not to damage the plastic threads. Industries, Ltd.
ASCHROFT
MODEL: 1009SW
RANGE: 0‐6BAR/0‐85PSI (PG‐1/2/3/5),
0‐100BAR/0‐1400PSI (PG‐4)
LOCATION: MMF INLET & OUTLET, OUTLET OF
1MICRON FILTER, ACROSS RO SYSTEM & CIP PUMP
DISCHARGE
 Type 1009SW Stainless Case Gauge
with Stainless Steel System
FEATURES PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
Ashcroft
• Patented PowerFlex™ movement Type No.: 1009SW
• All stainless steel welded construction Sizes: 21⁄2˝, 31⁄2˝
• True Zero™ pointer indication Case: 304SS
• NEW ventable plug Ring: 304SS polished bayonet
• NEW patent pending through-dial Window: Polycarbonate
calibration Dial: Black figures on white background,
• NEW MSL helium leak tested to aluminum
1X10 -6 ATM -cc/sec Pointer: Friction adjust, black, aluminum
• Meets ASME B40.100 standard Bourdon Tube: 316L stainless steel
C-Shaped (Vacuum-600 psi
• RoHS Compliant and compound)
• CRN Approved Helical (1000-15,000 psi)

• 5 year limited warranty Socket: 316L Stainless Steel

Movement: 300 series stainless steel,
Ashcroft is pleased to reintroduce the PowerFlex™, polyester segment,
overload/underload stops
1009SW Duralife® pressure gauge. This
gauge has been upgraded with many new Connections: 1
⁄8 and 1⁄4 NPT, lower or lower back,
1
⁄2 NPT lower (31⁄2˝) only.
features outlined above while maintaining
the tried and true performance and quality Ranges: Vac-15,000 psi and compound
you have come to expect. Accuracy: 1% full scale. ASME Grade 1A(1)
Duralife 1009SW gauges provide signif- Fill Plug: Ventable
icant features and benefits. New features
Protection: Nema 4X / IP65 plug sealed
include a ventable plug that can be sealed Nema 3 / IP54 plug vented
or vented depending on your environment
Ambient –40°F to 200°F dry
and a patent pending through-dial recali- Temperature +20°F to 150°F glycerin filled
bration that reduces recalibration time. Limitations: –40°F to 150°F silicone filled
The combination of features including (based on standard polycarbonate window)
the patented PowerFlex™ movement and OPTIONAL FEATURES
optional PLUS!™ Performance dampening Liquid fill: Glycerin, Silicone, Halocarbon
system in the 1009SW is the finest gauge (includes throttle plug)
technology for vibration, shock and pulsa- Dampening: PLUS!™ Performance (LL)
tion applications. Available in pressure (includes throttle plug)
ranges from vacuum to 15,000 psi, includ- Window: Safety Glass (SG)
ing compound and metric ranges. Pointer: Micrometer (MP)
Connections: Metric and SAE on request
Mounting: U-clamp (UC), Front flange (FF),
Back flange (FW)
Dials: Receiver ranges, refrigerant
ranges. Custom dials
(1)
When these gauges are liquid filled the total gauge
accuracy may be as much as 1.5%

HOW TO ORDER (Typical example)

35 1009 SW (L) 02L XXX 100#
Dial Size: 21⁄2˝ (25), 31⁄2˝ (35)
Case Type: 1009
Tube and Socket Material: 316L SS
Liquid Filled: (glycerin) leave blank if dry
Connection Size: 1⁄8 (01), 1⁄4 (02), 1⁄2 (04) 31⁄2˝ only
Connection Location: Lower (L), Lower Back (B)
Options:
Range: 0/100 psi

All specifications are subject to change without notice. Ashcroft Inc., 250 East Main Street, Stratford, CT 06614 USA
All sales subject to standard terms and conditions. Tel: 203-378-8281 • Fax: 203-385-0408
BULLETIN GS-3 © Ashcroft Inc. 2009 11/09 email: info@[Link] • [Link]
Type 1009SW Stainless Case Gauge
with Stainless Steel System
DIMENSIONS
31⁄2˝ 1009 Lower
(9.1)
and Back Connect .36
21⁄2˝ 1009 Lower
and Back Connect (31.7) (31.7)
1.25 (29.4) 1.25 (98.8)
(29.4) (9.1) 1.16 Ø 3.89
1.16 (69.9)
.36
Ø 2.75

(62.3) (91.3)
Ø 2.45 Ø 3.59
(60.6)
(11) 2.39 (75)
.44 (21.3) 2.95
(21.3) (11)
.84 FLATS .84 .44
FLATS
(10.4)
.41
(10.4)
.41

31⁄2˝ 1009 Back Connect (XUC) (9.1)

21⁄2˝ 1009 Back Connect (XUC) (48) .36
(48) 1.89
1.89 (106.3) (33.3)
(33.3) 1.31
4.18
1.31 (22.6)
(73.3) (22.6) (61.1) .89
.89 (9.1)
2.88 2.41 (29.4)
.36 1.16
(29.4) #8-32 STUDS
1.16
(49.2) & 3/8 HEX NUT
#8-32 STUDS
1.94 & 3/8 HEX NUT

(69.9) (91.3) (98.8)

Ø 2.75 Ø 3.59 Ø 3.89
(62.3)
Ø 2.45

(28.4) (6.4) (21.3)

.84 (6.4)
1.12 .25 .25 (21.3)
.44 (11) .84
FLATS .44 (11)
PANEL (26.4) FLATS
PANEL CUTOUT 1.04 PANEL CUTOUT PANEL
2.53(64) ±.03(1) 1/16 (2) TO 1/4 (6)
3.66 (93) ±.03(1) 1/16 (2) TO 1/4 (6)

31⁄2˝ 1009 Back

Connect (XFF) (116)
21⁄2˝ 1009 Back (31.7) (5.6)
(79.5) Ø 4.57
Connect (XFF) (29.4) (31.7) Ø 3.13 (4.1) PANEL CUTOUT 1.25
BOLT CIRCLE Ø .22
Ø .16 Ø 3.78 (96) MIN (29.4)
1.16 1.25 BOLT CIRCLE
PANEL CUTOUT Ø 3.86 (98) MAX
1.16
Ø 2.53 (64) MIN
Ø 2.59 (66) MAX (98.8)
(69.9) Ø 3.89
Ø 2.75
(62.3)
Ø 2.45
(91.3)
Ø 3.59

(21.3)
.84 (10.6)
.44 (11) (93.7)
.42 (21.3) (132)
FLATS Ø 3.69 .84 Ø 5.20
.44 (11) (16.2)
FLATS .64

31⁄2˝ 1009 Lower and

21⁄2˝ 1009 Lower and Back Connect (XFW)
(41.6) (5.6)
Back Connect (XFW) (116) Ø .22
1.64
(39.1) (4.1) (19.5) Ø 4.57
(132)
1.54 (69.9) Ø.16 .77 BOLT
(22) Ø 5.20
Ø 2.75 (100.6) CIRCLE
.87
Ø 3.96
(79.5) (98.8)
Ø 3.13 Ø 3.89
BOLT
CIRCLE

(60.6)
(11) 2.39 (75)
(21.3) .44 2.95
FLATS (21.3) (11)
.84
.84 .44
(17.7) FLATS
.70

(20.3)
.80
 PRESSURE GAUGE
INSTALLATION,
OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE

I&M008-10098-5/02 (250-1353-L) Rev. 12/15

1
2
 CONTENTS
1.0 Selection and Application Page
1.1 Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
1.2 Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
1.3 Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
1.4 Oxidizing media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
1.5 Pulsation/Vibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
1.6 Gauge fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
1.7 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
2.0 Temperature
2.1 Ambient Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
2.2 Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
2.3 Steam service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
2.4 Hot or very cold media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
2.5 Diaphragm seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
2.6 Autoclaving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
3.0 Installation
3.1 Installation Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
3.2 Gauge reuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
3.3 Tightening of gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
3.4 Process isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
3.5 Surface mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
3.6 Flush mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
4.0 Operation
4.1 Frequency of inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
4.2 In-service inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
4.3 When to check accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
4.4 When to recalibrate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
4.5 Other considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
4.6 Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
5.0 Gauge Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
6.0 Accuracy: Procedures/Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
6.1 Calibration - Rotary movement gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
7.0 Diaphragm Seals
7.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
7.2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
7.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
7.4 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
7.5 Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
8.0 Dampening Devices
8.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
8.2 Throttle Screws & Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
8.3 Ashcroft Pulsation Dampener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
8.4 Ashcroft Pressure Snubber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
8.5 Ashcroft Needle Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
8.6 Chemiquip® Pressure Limiting Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
9.0 Test Equipment & Tool Kits
9.1 Pressure Instrument Testing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
9.2 Tools & Tool Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
9.3 Kits to Convert a Dry Gauge to a Liquid Filled or . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Weather Proof Case Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
9.4 21⁄2 & 31⁄2 1009 Duralife® Gauge Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
Appendix
Type 1188 Bellows Gauge Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Type 1009 Calibration Procedure (Vacuum-Previous Style) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Type 1009 Calibration Procedure (Pressure-Previous Style) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Type 1009 Calibration Procedure (Pressure & Vacuum-Current Style) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Type 1279 & 1379 I&M Liquid Fill Conversion Instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-16
Type 1082 Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-18

Cover photo courtesy of Johnson/Yokogawa Co.

Chemiquip® is a registered trademark of Chemiquip Products Co. Inc.

3
 Glycerin satisfies most applications. While being the least
1.0 SELECTION & APPLICATION expensive fill, its usable temperature range is 20/180°F.
Users should become familiar with ASME B40.100 (Gauges Silicone filled gauges have a broader service range: –
– Pressure Indicating Dial Type – Elastic Element) before 40/250°F. Oxidizing media require the use of Halocarbon,
specifying pressure measuring gauges. That document – with a service range of –40/250°F. Pointer motion will be
containing valuable information regarding gauge construction, slowed at the low end of the low end of these temperature
accuracy, safety, selection and testing – may be ordered from: ranges.
ASME International 1.7 Mounting – Users should predetermine how the gauge
Three Park Avenue will be mounted in service: stem (pipe), wall (surface) or panel
New York, N.Y. 10016-5990 (flush). Ashcroft wall or panel mounting kits should be ordered
800-843-2763 (US/Canada) with the gauge. See Section 3.
001-800-843-2763 (Mexico)
973-882-1170 outside North America 2.0 TEMPERATURE
email: infocentral@[Link]
[Link]
2.1 Ambient Temperature – To ensure long life and accura-
cy, pressure gauges should preferably be used at an ambi-
WARNING: To prevent misapplication, pressure gauges ent temperature between –20 and +150°F (–30 to +65°C).
should be selected considering media and ambient operating At very low temperatures, standard gauges may exhibit slow
conditions. Improper application can be detrimental to the pointer response. Above 150°F, the accuracy will be affected
gauge, causing failure and possible personal injury, property by approximately 1.5% per 100°F. Other than discoloration of
damage or death. The information contained in this manual is the dial and hardening of the gasketing and degradation of
offered as a guide in making the proper selection of a pressure accuracy, non-liquid filled Type 1279 (phenolic case) and
gauge. Additional information is available from Ashcroft Inc. 1379 (aluminum case) Duragauge® gauge, with standard
glass windows, can withstand continuous operating tempera-
The following is a highlight of some of the more important con-
tures up to 250°F. Unigauge models 21⁄2˝ and 31⁄2˝ 1009 and
siderations:
1008S liquid filled gauges can withstand 200°F but glycerin
1.1 Range – The range of the instrument should be approxi- fill and the acrylic window of Duragauge® gauges will tend to
mately twice the maximum operating pressure. Too low a yellow. Silicone fill will have much less tendency to yellow.
range may result in (a) low fatigue life of the elastic element Low pressure, liquid filled Types 1008 and 1009 gauges may
due to high operating stress and (b) susceptibility to over- have some downscale errors caused by liquid fill expansion.
pressure set due to pressure transients that exceed the nor- This can be alleviated by venting the gauge at the top plug
mal operating pressure. Too high a range may yield insuffi- (pullout the blue plug insert). To do this the gauge must be
cient resolution for the application. installed in the vertical position.
1.2 Temperature – Refer to Section 2 of this manual for Although the gauge may be destroyed and calibration lost,
important information concerning temperature related limita- gauges can withstand short times at the following tempera-
tions of pressure gauges, both dry and liquid filled. tures: gauges with all welded pressure boundary joints, 750°F
1.3 Media – The material of the process sensing element must (400°C); gauges with silver brazed joints, 450°F (232°C) and
be compatible with the process media. Use of a diaphragm seal gauges with soft soldered joints, 250°F (121°C). For expected
with the gauge is recommended for process media that (a) is long term service below –20°F (–30°C) Duragauge® and 41⁄ 2˝
corrosive to the process sensing element; (b) contain heavy 1009 gauges should be hermetically sealed and specially
particulates (slurries) or (c) are very viscous including those lubricated; add “H” to the product code for hermetic sealing.
that harden at room temperature. Add variation XVY for special lubricant. Standard Duralife®
1.4 Oxidizing media – Gauges for direct use on oxidizing gauges may be used to –50°F (–45°C) without modification.
media should be specially cleaned. Gauges for oxygen ser- 2.2 Accuracy – Heat and cold affect accuracy of indication.
vice should be ordered to variation X6B and will carry the A general rule of thumb for dry gauges is 0.5% of full scale
ASME required dial marking “USE NO OIL” in red letters. change for every 40°F change from 75°F. Double that al-
Gauges for direct use on other oxidizing media may be lowance for gauges with hermetically sealed or liquid filled
ordered to variation X6W. They will be cleaned but carry no cases, except for Duragauge® gauges where no extra
dial marking. PLUS!™ Performance gauges or Halocarbon allowance is required due to the elastomeric, compensating
filled gauge or diaphragm fill is required for use with oxidiz- back. Above 250°F there may exist very significant errors in
ing media; order variation XCF. indication.
1.5 Pulsation/Vibration – Pressure pulsation can be damp- 2.3 Steam service – In order to prevent live steam from
ened by several mechanisms; the patented PLUS! Perfor- entering the Bourdon tube, a siphon filled with water should
mance gauge will handle the vast majority of applications. be installed between the gauge and the process line.
One exception to this is high frequency pulsation which is Siphons can be supplied with ratings up to 4,000 psi. If
difficult to detect. The only indication may be an upscale zero freezing of the condensate in the loop of the siphon is a pos-
shift due to movement wear. These applications should be sibility, a diaphragm seal should be used to isolate the
addressed with a liquid filled gauge, or in extreme cases, a gauge from the process steam. Siphons should also be used
remotely mounted liquid filled gauge connected with a length whenever condensing, hot vapors (not just steam) are pre-
of capillary line. The small diameter of the capillary provides sent. Super heated steam should have enough piping or
excellent dampening, but can be plugged. The Ashcroft 1106 capillary line ahead of the siphon to maintain liquid water in
pulsation dampener and 1112 snubber are auxiliary devices the siphon loop.
which dampen pulsation with less tendency to plug. 2.4 Hot or very cold media – A five foot capillary line assem-
1.6 Gauge fills. – Once it has been determined that a liquid bly will bring most hot or cold process media within the recom-
filled gauge is in order, the next step is selecting the type of fill. mended gauge ambient temperature range. For media above

4
750°F (400°C) the customers should use their own small
diameter piping to avoid possible corrosion of the stainless steel. 4.0 OPERATION
The five foot capillary will protect the gauges used on the com- 4.1 Frequency of inspection – This is quite subjective and
mon cryogenic (less than –300°F (200°C) gases, liquid argon, depends upon the severity of the service and how critical the
nitrogen, and oxygen.) The capillary and gauge must be accuracy of the indicated pressure is. For example, a month-
cleaned for oxygen service. The media must not be corrosive to ly inspection frequency may be in order for critical, severe
stainless steel, and must not plug the small bore of the capillary. service applications. Annual inspections, or even less fre-
2.5 Diaphragm seals – A diaphragm seal should be used to quent schedules, are often employed in non-critical applica-
protect gauges from corrosive media, or media that will plug tions.
the instrument. Diaphragm seals are offered in a wide variety 4.2 In-service inspection – If the accuracy of the gauge
of designs and corrosion resistant materials to accommo- cannot be checked in place, the user can at least look for (a)
date almost any application and most connections. Visit erratic or random pointer motion; (b) readings that are sus-
[Link] for details. pect – especially indications of pressure when the user
2.6 Autoclaving – Sanitary gauges with clamp type connec- believes the true pressure is 0 psig. Any gauge which is
tions are frequently steam sterilized in an autoclave. Gauges obviously not working or indicating erroneously, should be
equipped with polysulfone windows will withstand more auto- immediately valved-off or removed from service to avoid a
clave cycles than those equipped with polycarbonate win- possible pressure boundary failure.
dows. Gauges equipped with plain glass or laminated safety 4.3 When to check accuracy – Any suspicious behavior of
glass should not be autoclaved. Gauge cases should be the gauge pointer warrants that a full accuracy check be per-
vented to atmosphere (removing the rubber fill/safety plug if formed. Even if the gauge is not showing any symptoms of
necessary) before autoclaving to prevent the plastic window abnormal performance, the user may want to establish a fre-
from cracking or excessively distorting. If the gauge is liquid quency of bench type inspection.
filled, the fill should be drained from the case and the front 4.4 When to recalibrate – This depends on the criticality of
ring loosened before autoclaving. the application. If the accuracy of a 3-2-3% commercial type
gauge is only 0.5% beyond specification, the user must
3.0 INSTALLATION decide whether it’s worth the time and expense to bring the
3.1 Location – Whenever possible, gauges should be locat- gauge back into specification. Conversely if the accuracy of
ed to minimize the effects of vibration, extreme ambient tem- a 0.25% test gauge is found to be 0.1% out of specification
peratures and moisture. Dry locations away from very high then the gauge should be recalibrated.
thermal sources (ovens, boilers etc.) are preferred. If the 4.5 Other considerations – These include (a) bent or unat-
mechanical vibration level is extreme, the gauge should be tached pointers due to extreme pressure pulsation; (b) bro-
remotely located (usually on a wall) and connected to the ken windows which should be replaced to keep dirt out of
pressure source via flexible tubing. the internals; (c) leakage of gauge fill; (d) case damage –
3.2 Gauge reuse – ASME B40.100 recommends that dents and/or cracks; (e) any signs of service media leakage
gauges not be moved indiscriminately from one application through the gauge including its connection; (f) discoloration
to another. The cumulative number of pressure cycles on an of gauge fill that impedes readability.
in-service or previously used gauge is generally unknown, so 4.6 Spare parts – As a general rule it is recommended
it is generally safer to install a new gauge whenever and that the user maintain in inventory one complete Ashcroft®
wherever possible. This will also minimize the possibility of a instrument for every ten (or fraction thereof) of that
reaction with previous media. instrument type in service.
3.3 Tightening of gauge – Torque should never be applied
to the gauge case. Instead, an open end or adjustable 5.0 GAUGE REPLACEMENT
wrench should always be used on the wrench flats of the It is recommended that the user stock one complete
gauge socket to tighten the gauge into the fitting or pipe. Ashcroft® instrument for every ten (or fraction thereof) of that
NPT threads require the use of a suitable thread sealant, instrument type in service. With regard to gauges having a
such as pipe dope or teflon tape, and must be tightened very service history, consideration should be given to discarding
securely to ensure a leak tight seal. rather than repairing them. Gauges in this category include
CAUTION: Torque applied to a diaphragm seal or its the following:
attached gauge, that tends to loosen one relative to the a. Gauges that exhibit a span shift greater than 10%. It is
other, can cause loss of fill and subsequent inaccurate read- possible the Bourdon tube has suffered thinning of its
ings. Always apply torque only to the wrench flats on the walls by corrosion.
lower seal housing when installing filled, diaphragm seal b. Gauges that exhibit a zero shift greater than 25%. It is
assemblies or removing same from process lines. likely the Bourdon tube has seen significant overpres-
3.4 Process isolation – A shut-off valve should be installed sure leaving residual stresses that may be detrimental
between the gauge and the process in order to be able to to the application.
isolate the gauge for inspection or replacement without shut- c. Gauges which have accumulated over 1,000,000 pres-
ting down the process. sure cycles with significant pointer excursion.
3.5 Surface mounting – Also known as wall mounting. d. Gauges showing any signs of corrosion and/or leakage
Gauges should be kept free of piping strains. The gauge case of the pressure system.
mounting feet, if applicable, will ensure clearance between the
e. Gauges which have been exposed to high temperature
pressure relieving back and the mounting surface.
or exhibit signs of having been exposed to high temper-
3.6 Flush mounting – Also known as panel mounting. The ature – specifically 250°F or greater for soft soldered
applicable panel mounting cutout dimensions can be found systems; 450°F or greater for brazed systems; and
at [Link] 750°F or greater for welded systems.

5
f. Gauges showing significant friction error and/or wear of Method – ASME B40.100 recommends that known pres-
the movement and linkage. sure (based on the reading from the pressure standard used)
g. Gauges having damaged sockets, especially damaged be applied to the gauge under test. Readings including any
threads. error from the nominal input pressure, are then taken from the
h. Liquid filled gauges showing loss of case fill. gauge under test. The practice of aligning the pointer of the
gauge under test with a dial graduation and then reading the
NOTE: ASME B40.100 does not recommend moving gauges
error from the master gauge (“reverse reading”) can result in
from one application to another. This policy is prudent in that
inconsistent and misleading data and should NOT be used.
it encourages the user to procure a new gauge, properly tai-
lored by specification, to each application that arises. Calibration chart – After recording all of the readings it is
necessary to calculate the errors associated with each test
6.0 ACCURACY: PROCEDURES/DEFINITIONS point using the following formula: ERROR in percent = 100
Accuracy inspection – Readings at approximately five times (TRUE VALUE minus READING) ÷ RANGE. Plotting
points equally spaced over the dial should be taken, both the individual errors (Figure 1) makes it possible to visualize
upscale and downscale, before and after lightly rapping the the total gauge characteristic. The plot should contain all four
gauge to remove friction. A pressure standard with accuracy curves: upscale – before rap; upscale – after rap; downscale
at least four times greater than the accuracy of the gauge – before rap; downscale – after rap. “Rap” means lightly tap-
being tested is recommended. ping the gauge before reading to remove friction as
described in ASME B40.100.
Equipment – A finely regulated pressure supply will be required.
It is critical that the piping system associated with the test setup Referring to Figure 1, several classes of error may be seen:
be leaktight. The gauge under test should be positioned as it will Zero – An error which is approximately equal over the entire
be in service to eliminate positional errors due to gravity. scale. This error can be manifested when either the gauge is

FIG. 1 TYPICAL CALIBRATION CHART

INDICATED VALUE (PSI)
True Value – Increasing – Increasing – Decreasing – Decreasing –
PSI Without RAP With RAP Without RAP With RAP
0 –.4 0 –.4 0
40 +.8 +1.0 +1.4 +1.1
80 +.4 +.5 +1.2 +1.0
120 –.4 –1.0 +.8 +.6
160 –.8 –.5 +.6 +.4
200 +.4 +.8 +.4 +.4
ERROR (% OF FULL SCALE)
True Value – Increasing – Increasing – Decreasing – Decreasing –
% of Range Without RAP With RAP Without RAP With RAP
0 –.20 0 –.20 0
20 +.40 +.50 +.70 +.55
40 +.20 +.25 +.60 +.50
60 –.20 –.05 +.40 +.30
80 –.40 –.25 +.30 +.20
100 +.20 +.40 +.20 +.20
1.0

◆
◆
■
0.5 ● ■
▲ ◆ ●
Error (% of Full Scale)

■ ◆
●
▲ ■ ▲

0.0 ● ●

▲ ▲
●

▲
▲ ▲ upscale – without rap
–0.5
● ● upscale – with rap
◆ ◆ downscale – without rap
■ ■ downscale – with rap

–1.0
0 20 40 60 80 100
% of Range

6
dropped or overpressured and the Bourdon tube takes a FIG. 2A ASHCROFT TYPE 1259 SYSTEM ASSEMBLY
permanent set. This error may often be corrected by simply
repositioning the pointer. Except for test gauges, it is recom-
TIP
mended that the pointer be set at midscale pressure to “split” BOURDEN TUBE
the errors.
Span – A span error exists when the error at full scale pres- HAIRSPRING
sure is different from the error at zero pressure. This error is LINK
often proportional to the applied pressure. Most Ashcroft
gauges are equipped with an internal, adjusting mechanism
MOVEMENT
with which the user can correct any span errors which have
developed in service.
Linearity – A gauge that has been properly spanned can
still be out of specification at intermediate points if the
response of the gauge as seen in Figure 1 (Typical
Calibration Chart) is not linear. The Ashcroft Duragauge® BACKPLATE
pressure gauge is equipped with a rotary movement feature
SOCKET
which permits the user to minimize this class of error. Other
Ashcroft gauge designs (e.g., 1009 Duralife®) require that
the dial be moved left or right prior to tightening the dial
screws. Figure 2A for link configuration of Type 1259 gauge.
Hysteresis – Some Bourdon tubes have a material property d. Adjust the micrometer pointer so that it rests at the true
known as hysteresis. This material characteristic results in zero position. For open front gauges the pointer and dial
differences between the upscale and downscale curves. This must also be disassembled and the pointer should then
class of error can not be eliminated by adjusting the gauge be lightly pressed onto the pinion at the 9:00 o’clock
movement or dial position. position.
Friction – This error is defined as the difference in readings e. Apply full scale pressure and note the magnitude of the
before and after lightly tapping the gauge case at a check span error. With open front gauges, ideal span (270
point. Possible causes of friction are burrs or foreign material degrees) will exist when at full scale pressure the pointer
in the movement gearing, “bound” linkages between the rests exactly at the 6:00 o’clock position.
movement and the bourdon tube, or an improperly tensioned f. If the span has shifted significantly (span error greater
hairspring. If correcting these potential causes of friction than 10%), the gauge should be replaced because there
does not eliminate excessive friction error, the movement may be some partial corrosion inside the Bourdon tube
should be replaced. which could lead to ultimate failure. If the span error
6.1 Calibration – Rotary Movement Gauges and Type exceeds 0.25%, loosen the lower link screw and move
1259 Gauges – Inspect gauge for accuracy. Many times the lower end of the link toward the movement to
gauges are simply “off zero” and a simple pointer adjustment increase span or away to decrease span. An adjustment
using the micrometer pointer is adequate. If inspection shows of 0.004 inch will change the span by approximately 1%.
the gauge warrants recalibration to correct span and/or linearity This is a repetitive procedure which often requires more
errors, proceed as follows: than one adjustment of the link position and the subsequent
rechecking of the errors at zero and full scale pressure.
a. Remove ring, window and, if solid front case, the rear
closure assembly. g. Apply midscale pressure and note error in reading. Even
though the gauge is accurate at zero and full scale, it
b. Pressurize the gauge once to full scale and back to zero.
may be inaccurate at the midpoint. This is called linearity
c. Refer to Figure 2 (Ashcroft System Assembly w/Rotary error. For corrections to linearity with the Type 1259
Gear Movement) for a view of a typical Ashcroft rotary
system assembly with component parts identified. Refer to FIG. 2B LINEARITY ADJUSTMENT & LINK CONFIGURATION FOR
ASHCROFT TYPE 1259
FIG. 2 ASHCROFT SYSTEM ASSEMBLY W/ROTARY GEAR MOVEMENT To increase pointer indication
at mid-scale, use a pliers to
SEGMENT BOURDON TUBE
open the link.

TIP HAIRSPRING To decrease pointer indication

at mid-scale, use a pliers to
close the link.
LINK PINION

gauges refer to Figure 2B. For rotary movement gauges,

note the following: if the error is positive, the movement
ROTARY MOVEMENT
BACKPLATE should be rotated counter clockwise. Rotating the move-
ment one degree will change this error by approximately
0.25%. Rotating the movement often affects span and it
should be subsequently rechecked and readjusted if nec-
SOCKET essary according to step 6.1e and 6.1f.
h. While recalibrating the gauge, the friction error – differ-
ence in readings taken with and without rap – should be

7
 noted. This error should not exceed the basic accuracy 7.5 Failures – Diaphragm failures are generally caused by
of the gauge. If the friction error is excessive, the move- either corrosion, high temperatures or fill leakage. Process
ment should be replaced. One possible cause of exces- media build-up on the process side of the diaphragm can
sive friction is improper adjustment of the hairspring. The also require seal cleaning or replacement. Consult Customer
hairspring torque,or tension, must be adequate without Service, Stratford CT for advice on seal failures and/or
being excessive. The hairspring should also be level, unwind replacement.
evenly (no turns rubbing) and it should never tangle. WARNING: All seal components should be selected
NOTES: considering process and ambient operating conditions to
1 For operation of test gauge external zero prevent misapplication. Improper application could result in
reset, refer to page 17. failure, possible personal injury, property damage or death.
2 For test gauge calibration procedure,
refer to Figure 2 on page 18. 8.0 DAMPENING DEVICES
8.1 General – Some type of dampening device should be
7.0 DIAPHRAGM SEALS used whenever the pressure gauge may be exposed to
repetitive pressure fluctuations that are fairly rapid, high in
7.1 General – A diaphragm seal (isolator) is a device which is magnitude and especially when transitory pressure spikes
attached to the inlet connection of a pressure instrument to exceeding the gauge range are present (as with starting and
isolate its measuring element from the process media. The stopping action of valves and pumps). A restricted orifice of
space between the diaphragm and the instrument’s pressure some kind is employed through which pressure fluctuations
sensing element is solidly filled with a suitable liquid. must pass before they reach the Bourdon tube. The damp-
Displacement of the liquid fill in the pressure element, through ener reduces the magnitude of the pressure pulse thus
movement of the diaphragm, transmits process pressure extending the life of the Bourdon tube and movement. This
changes directly to a gauge, switch or any other pressure reduction of the pressure pulsation as “seen” by the pressure
instrument. When diaphragm seals are used with pressure gauge is generally evidenced by a reduction in the pointer
gauges, an additional 0.5% tolerance must be added to the travel. If the orifice is very small the pointer may indicate the
gauge accuracy because of the diaphragm spring rate. average service pressure, with little or no indication of the
Used in a variety of process applications where corrosives, time varying component of the process pressure.
slurries or viscous fluids may be encountered, the diaphragm Commonly encountered media (e.g. – water and hydraulic
seal affords protection to the instrument where: oil) often carry impurities which can plug the orifice over time
• The process fluid being measured would normally clog thus rendering the gauge inoperative until the dampener is
the pressure element. cleaned or replaced.
• Pressure element materials capable of withstanding cor- Highly viscous media and media that tend to periodically
rosive effects of certain fluids are not available. harden (e.g., asphalt) require a diaphragm seal be fitted to
• The process fluid might freeze due to changes in ambient the gauge. The seal contains an internal orifice which damp-
temperature and damage the element. ens the pressure fluctuation within the fill fluid.
7.2 Installation – Refer to bulletin OH-1 for information 8.2 Throttle Screws & Plugs – These accessories provide
regarding (a) seal configurations; (b) filling fluids; (c) temper- dampening for the least cost. They have the advantage of fit-
ature range of filling fluids; (d) diaphragm material pressure ting completely within the gauge socket and come in three
and temperature limits; (e) bottom housing material pressure types: (a) a screwed-in type which permits easy removal for
and temperature limits; (f) pressure rating of seal assembly; cleaning or replacement; (b) a pressed in, non-threaded
(g) accuracy/temperature errors of seal assembly; (h) design and (c) a pressed in, threaded design which provides
diaphragm seal displacement. The volumetric displacement a highly restrictive, helical flow path. Not all styles are avail-
of the diaphragm must at least equal the volumetric dis- able on all gauge types.
placement of the measuring element in the pressure instru- 8.3 Ashcroft Pulsation Dampener – Type 1106 Ashcroft
ment to which the seal is to be attached. pulsation dampener is a moving pin type in which the
It is imperative that the pressure instrument/diaphragm seal restricted orifice is the clearance between the pin and any
assembly be properly filled prior to being placed in service. one of five preselected hole diameters. Unlike a simple throt-
Ashcroft diaphragm seal assemblies should only be filled by tle screw/plug, this device has a self-cleaning action in that
a seal assembler certified by Ashcroft Inc. Refer to section the pin moves up and down under the influence of pressure
3.3 for a cautionary note about not applying torque on either fluctuations.
the instrument or seal relative to the other. 8.4 Ashcroft Pressure Snubber – The heart of the Type
7.3 Operation – All Ashcroft® diaphragm seals, with the 1112 pressure snubber is a thick porous metal filter disc. The
exception of Type 310 mini-seals, are continuous duty. disc is available in four standard porosity grades.
Should the pressure instrument fail, or be removed acciden- 8.5 Ashcroft Needle Valves – Type 7001 thru 7004 steel
tally or deliberately, the diaphragm will seat against a match- needle valves provide varying degrees of dampening. These
ing surface preventing damage to the diaphragm or leakage devices, in the event of plugging, can easily be opened to
of the process fluid. allow the pressure fluid to clear away the obstruction.
7.4 Maintenance – Clamp type diaphragm seals – Types 8.6 Chemiquip® Pressure Limiting Valves – Model PLV-
100, 200 and 300 – allow for replacement of the diaphragm 255, PLV-2550, PLV-5460, PLV-5500 and PLV-6430, avail-
or diaphragm capsule, if that ever becomes necessary. The able with and without built-in snubbers, automatically “shut
Type 200 top housing must also be replaced with the dia- off” at adjustable preset values of pressure to protect the
phragm. With all three types the clamping arrangement allows gauge from damage to overpressure. They are especially
field disassembly to permit cleaning of the seal interior. useful on hydraulic systems wherein hydraulic transients

8
(spikes) are common.

9.0 TEST EQUIPMENT & TOOL KITS

See our website [Link] for more details
9.1 Pressure Instrument Testing Equipment
Type 1305D Deadweight Tester
Type 1327D Pressure Gauge Comparator
Type 1327CM “Precision” Gauge Comparator
9.2 Tools & Tool Kits For Recalibration of 41⁄2˝ and
Larger Gauges
Type 2505 universal carrying case for 1082 test gauge
Type 266A132-01 span wrench for 1082 test gauge
Type 1281 socket O-Ring kit for 1279/1379 lower connect
Type 1285 41⁄2˝ ring wrench for 1279/1379 lower & back
connect
Type 1286 6˝ ring wrench for 1379 lower & back connect
Type 3220 pointer puller (all gauges except 1009
Duralife®)
Type 3530 pinion back-up tool for 1009 Duralife®
Type 3220 Handjack set
Type 1105 Tool Kit
9.3 Kits to Convert a Dry Gauge to a Liquid Filled or
Weather Proof Case Gauge
Type 1280 conversion kit for 41⁄2˝ lower connect
1279/1379
Type 1283 conversion kit for 41⁄2˝ back connect
1279/1379
Type 1284 conversion kit for 6˝ lower & back connect

TYPE 1105
TOOL KIT

TYPE 3220
HAND JACK SET

9
9.4 21⁄2 & 31⁄2 1009 Duralife® Gauge Tools

Description Part No.

Pointer Puller Screw/Pin(2)(3)(4) 112A381-01
Pointer Puller Body(2)(3)(4) 292A133-01
Pointer Staker (2)(4) 188A101-01
Span Wrench(2)(5) (to adjust span) 266A137-01
Ring Wrench 31⁄2˝(1)(5) (for ring removal) (35 1009) 266B134-01
Ring Wrench 21⁄2˝(1)(5) (for ring removal) (25 1009) 266B135-01
Nest 21⁄2˝ & 31⁄2˝(1)(5) (to hold gauge for ring removal) (25/35 1009) 266B136-01
Ring Removal Tool (6) (25 1009) 101B221-02
Ring Removal Tool(6) (35 1009) 101B221-01
Nest 21⁄2˝(6) (to hold gauge for ring removal) (25 1009) 101B220-02
Nest 31⁄2˝(6) (to hold gauge for ring removal) (35 1009) 101B220-01
Type 1230 throttle plug insertion (1⁄4 NPT) for 1009 Duralife®) 1230
Type 1231 throttle plug insertion ( ⁄2 NPT) for 1009 Duralife (body only)
1 ® 1231
Tool to open orifice on push-in throttle plug 101A206-01

(1) Formerly 1206T Tool Kit.

(2) Formerly some parts in 1205T Tool Kit.
(3) Both parts must be purchased together.
(4) Previous and current design.
(5) Previous design only.
(6) Current design only.

RING WRENCH
266B134-01

RING REMOVAL TOOL

101B221-01
RING REMOVAL TOOL
NEST 101B221-02
101B220-02

NEST POINTER STAKER

266B136-01 188A101-01

POINTER PULLER
SCREW/PIN 112A381-01

and

POINTER PULLER BODY

RING NEST 292A133-01
WRENCH 101B220-01
266B135-01 SPAN WRENCH
266A137-01

10
 ASHCROFT® Type 1188 Bellows Gauge
Calibration Procedure

CALIBRATION & TROUBLE

CORRECTION DIAGRAM

RANGE SPAN ADJUSTMENT POINTER JUMPING

RANGE TOO SHORT RANGE TOO LONG STICKY PARTS LOOSE HAIRSPRING COUNTER BALANCE
Adjust slide “S” inward Adjust slide “S” outward Clean all bearings Remove backlash by RUBBING
and gear teeth disengaging pinion & Bend if necessary to
rotate to tighten clear socket in travel

NOTE: After adjusting range span, set both movement stops.

SLUGGISH MOVEMENT
Set the underload stop so that the pointer will stop at
zero. Set the overload stop so that the pointer will pass
the maximum range approximately 5˝.
TIGHT HAIRSPRING
NOTE: After adjusting span re-zero pointer by removing from
pinion and re-assembling at the proper dial mark. Loosen by disengaging pinion & rotate

NON LINEAR

NON LINEAR NON LINEAR

FIRST 3RD. LAST 3RD.

ADJ. ANGLE OF PULL ADJ. ANGLE OF PULL

BY INCREASING ANGLE “A” BY DECREASING ANGLE “A”

NOTE: To increase or decrease angle “A,“ bend tip inward or outward as

required. Doing this may run the movement segment off the pin-
ion. This can be corrected by cutting off one end off the link “E”
decreasing its length, or makin a new length from .032 dia. phos.
bronze wire.
Caution: When reproducing link end, follow figure 44 very closely.
this will prevent too much play, or, binding in operation.

OVERLOAD
REF: Replacing System Bellows STOP
After assembling bellows to the gauge socket securely, subject sys-
tem to 30 psi for five minutes, allowing bellows to travel approxi- UNDERLOAD
mately 1/8˝ against the overload stop. After this, heat treat system for STOP
15 hours at 250°F, this procedure is necssary to prevent gauge drift.

SLIDE AND LINK (angle “A”)

Enlarged view of slide and link

60°

E (LINK)

.020 R 1/8

S (SLIDE)

STOP LOCKING
SCREWS

© Ashcroft Inc., 250 E. Main St., Stratford, CT 06614-5145, Tel: 203-378-8281, Fax: 203-385-0499, [Link]
All sales subject to standard terms and conditions of sale. I&M008-10173-3/10 (1188)

11
 ASHCROFT® Previous Type 1009 Duralife®
Calibration Procedure – Vacuum Range

1. Remove ring, window and gasket pointer. 15. recheck accuracy at 15 and 25˝ Hg vac. (Figure 2).
2. Using a pencil, refer to dial and mark the 0 and 16. Reassemble window, gasket and ring.
25˝ Hg positions on the case flange.
3. Remove dial. Figure 2 –

4. Apply 25˝ Hg vac.

5. Lightly press pointer onto pinion carefully aligning it
with the 25˝ Hg vac. mark on the flange.
15
6. Release vacuum fully.
7. Note agreement of pointer to zero mark on flange.
8. If span is high or low, turn span block as shown in
Figure 1.
25
Figure 1 – Pencil Marks on Case Flange

25 Notes: See page 10 for any tools required to calibrate.

Span Block
For models produced prior to
0 September 2008 for 21⁄2˝ version and
December 2008 for 31⁄2˝ version.
Increase Decrease Back of gauge will have a date code sticker.
7/64 Open
End Wrench

9. Repeat steps 4 through 8 until span is correct.

10. Remove pointer.
11. With 25˝ Hg vac applied, reassemble dial, dial screws
(finger tight) and point.
12. Apply 15˝ Hg vac. and note accuracy of indication.
If required, slide dial left or right to reduce error to 1%
maximum.
13. Firmly tighten dial screws.
14. Firmly tap pointer onto pinion.

© 2010 Ashcroft Inc., 250 East Main Street, Stratford, CT 06614-5145, USA, Tel: 203-378-8281, Fax: 203-385-0499, [Link]
All sales subject to standard terms and conditions of sale. I&M008-10077 9/01 AMR 05/10

12
 ASHCROFT® Previous Type 1009 Duralife®
Calibration Procedure – Pressure Range

Step 1. With the dial off, install pointer at 9 o’clock “lightly,” Step 5. Install pointer centered in zero box, Figure 4.
Figure 3.
Step 6. Go to full scale pressure…check that pointer is
within 1% of full scale mark. If not, remove pointer
Figure 3 – and dial and return to step 1, Figure 4.
Start Point
Step 7. Go to mid-scale pressure…rotate dial until mid-
scale mark is aligned with pointer, Figure 4.
Step 8. Tighten dials screws and stake on pointer.
Step 9. Check zero and full scale. Reassemble window,
gasket and ring.
Notes: See page 10 for any tools required to calibrate.

For models produced prior to

September 2008 for 21⁄2˝ version and
December 2008 for 31⁄2˝ version.
Back of gauge will have a date code sticker.
Span Block

Span
Decrease Increase

Step 2. Go to full scale pressure…rotate span block with

tool until pointer rests at 6 o’clock.
Step 3. Go to zero pressure (9 o’clock)…if pointer has not
moved away from start point, go to Step 4. If pointer
has moved, repeat Step 1 until span is correct.
Step 4. Install dial with screws snug.

Mid Scale Mark Figure 4 –

Full Scale Mark

Dial Screws
Zero Box

© 2010 Ashcroft Inc., 250 East Main Street, Stratford, CT 06614-5145, USA, Tel: 203-378-8281, Fax: 203-385-0499, [Link]
All sales subject to standard terms and conditions of sale. I&M008-10077 9/01 AMR 05/10

13
 ASHCROFT® Current Type 1009 Duralife®
Calibration Procedure – Pressure and
Vacuum Range

Calibration – 1009 Duralife® Gauge –

VACUUM
Inspect gauge for accuracy. At times gauges are simply
“off zero” and opening the ventable plug at the top of the
gauge will relieve internal gauge pressure and correct the 15
offset. If this is not adequate and inspection shows that
the gauge warrants recalibration to correct zero, span
and/or linearity errors, proceed as follows:
Remove ring, window, and gasket using Ashcroft Ring
Removal Tools P/N 101B220-02 and 101B221-02 for 2½” 25
gauges and 101B220-01 and 101B221-01 for 3½” gauges.
0
PRESSURE
Mid-scale mark

Zero adjust Zero box

50 Dial screw

3. Vent to 0 pressure and check pointer position in the

zero box. If error exceeds 1% rotate the black span
adjustment device with a #0 square drive bit.
Clockwise rotation moves pointer clockwise, counter-
clockwise rotation moves the pointer counterclockwise.
0 0 4. Repeat step 1 and 2 until 0 and 25 inches of Hg are
10
within gauge tolerance.
Full scale mark 5. Apply 15 inches Hg vacuum. If gauge is within 1%,
Zero box Span adjust calibration is complete. If not loosen the dial screw
and rotate dial left or right to adjust midpoint.
Dial screw
Retighten dial screw.
6. If an adjustment was made in step 4, recheck the
Positive Pressure Ranges – gauge at zero and 25 inches of Hg vacuum, adjust
1. Adjust pointer with a slotted screwdriver until it is in the accordingly until zero, 15 and 25 inches Hg are in tol-
center of the zero box. This is often all that is required erance.
it correct calibration issues. 7. Continue below.
2. Apply full scale pressure. If error exceeds 1% rotate Re-assemble window and ring to gauge:
the black span adjustment device with a #0 square
drive bit. Clockwise increases span, counterclockwise a. If plastic window is used, push window back into front
decrease span. of gauge, ensure the o-ring does not roll out of win-
dow groove (lubricate if necessary). Align the tabs of
3. Fully exhaust pressure and check that pointer still is the window with the tabs of the case front. Once win-
still in the zero box. If not, repeat step 1 and 2 dow is in place, install ring and tighten with tools refer-
4. Once 0 and full scale are within tolerance, pressurize enced above and shown on page 10.
gauge to mid-scale. b If safety glass is used, reinstall window, gasket, and
5. If gauge is within 1%, calibration is complete. If not ring. Ensure that the gasket is seated properly under
loosen the dial screw and rotate dial left or right to all four tabs of the ring and does not wrinkle when ring
adjust midpoint. Retighten dial screw. is tightened.
6. If an adjustment was made in step 5, recheck the Note: Tighten ring: Apply 120-200inlb of torque. Rotate
gauge at zero and full scale, adjust accordingly until ring clockwise to tighten. Warning: over tightening of safe-
zero, mid and full scale points are in tolerance. ty glass may induce cracking.
Vacuum Range –
1. Adjust pointer with a slotted screwdriver until it is in Notes: See page 10 for any tools required to calibrate.
the center of the zero box. This is often all that is
required it correct calibration issues.
2. Apply 25 inches Hg vacuum. If the error exceeds 1% For models produced after
adjust pointer with a slotted screwdriver until gauge is September 2008 for 21⁄2˝ version and
within tolerance. December 2008 for 31⁄2˝ version.
Back of gauge will have a date code sticker.

© 2010 Ashcroft Inc., 250 East Main Street, Stratford, CT 06614-5145, USA, Tel: 203-378-8281, Fax: 203-385-0499, [Link]
All sales subject to standard terms and conditions of sale. I&M008-10081-05/10 AMR 05/10

14
TYPE 1279 & 1379 SOLID FRONT DURAGAUGE®
PRESSURE GAUGE CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS TO:
• Convert A Standard Dry Gauge To A Liquid Filled Gauge
• Convert A Standard Dry Gauge To A Dry, Weatherproof
IP66 Gauge
TYPICAL 45-1279_S-04L-100* GAUGE front cavity of the case. Pour in fill liquid to
SHOWN WITH KIT 101A202-01 within about 1⁄16 inch of rear seal lip. When
bubbles stop rising, front cavity is filled.
Remove 3⁄8 inch block and pour in liquid
until level is about 1⁄16 inch below rear seal-
ing lip.
Note: An alternative method of filling is to
fill the front dial cavity, adding the front
window, etc., as in Step No. 3. Then fill the
rear of the gauge. This method eliminates
the need to tip the gauge.
b. Vacuum Pump Fill Procedure: (This pro-
cedure is recommended when filling a
large number of gauges.) Place gauge face
down and insert a 1⁄8 inch diameter tube,
connected to a vacuum pump, through the
Elastomeric Diaphragm 12 o’clock position hole in the rear, solid
“O” Ring Acrylic Window Threaded Ring with Integral “O” Ring Rear Cover front portion of the case (see Fig. 5).
Evacuate the air from the front dial cavity
1279 1379 while pouring in the fill fluid through the
41⁄2˝ LOWER 41⁄2˝ BACK 41⁄2˝ LOWER 41⁄2˝ BACK 6˝ LOWER & BACK case back. The vacuum will displace the air
with fluid. When the dial cavity is solidly
KIT PART NO. 101A202-01 101A203-01 1280 1283 1284
filled, remove the tubing and continue to
QUANTITY INCLUDED pour the fill fluid to within 1⁄16 inch BELOW
ACRYLIC WINDOW 1 1 1 1 1 the O-ring channel lip.
FRONT O-RING 1 1 1 1 1 Pre-measuring fill amount is not necessary
DIAPHRAGM(1) 1 1 1 1 2(1-LC:1-BC)
with above methods. For reference,
amount of fill is approximately
REAR COVER 1 1 1 1 2(1-LC:1-BC) 400 ml. or 14 fluid oz. (41⁄2˝ GA.) and 455
COVER SCREWS 4 4 - - - ml. or 16 fluid oz. (6˝ GA.).
THROTTLE SCREWS 2 2 2 2 2 c. Note: The liquid fill level should be 3⁄8˝
(±1⁄8) as measured from the inside of the
GARTER SPRING – 1 1 1 1
ring at the 12:00 o’clock position.
FILL IDENTIFICATION 1 1 1 1 1 6. On lower connection gauges, assemble rear
THREADED RING – – 1 1 1 seal diaphragm to case.
TOP FILL PLUG – – 1 1 – For back connection gauges see instructions
1. When Halocarbon fill is a requirement, rear case diaphragm bladder material is Viton instead of on reverse side. (Fig. 2/4).
the standard Buna diaphragm bladder. Consult factory for part number. 7. For 1279:
Assemble rear cover and six self tapping
TEMPERATURE LIMITS1 60 psi and Under screws in a criss-cross pattern and torque to
Down Scale Zero
Ambient Process Storage Shift Required 12 in lbs. (±2 in lbs.)
Dry –20/200°F –20/250°F(1) –40/250°F For 1379:
NONE
(IP66) (–29/93°C) (–29/121°C) (–40/121°C) - Thread rear ring and torque to 200 in lbs
LF 20/150°F 20/200°F 0/150°F - Install stainless steel back cover using
NONE
(glycerin) (7/66°C) (7/93°C) (–18/66°C) two screws. Torque screws to 14 in lbs.
(silicone)
–40/150°F –40/200°F –40/150°F
.12 psi (±2 in lbs.)
(–40/66°C) (–40/93°C) (–40/66°C)
8. Assemble throttle screw to threaded hole in
–40/150°F –40/200°F –40/150°F
(halocarbon)
(–40/66°C) (–40/93°C) (–40/66°C) .12 psi socket.
Note: Other than discoloration of the dial and hardening of the gasketing that may occur
Note: If system is monel (socket wrench
as ambient or process temperatures exceeds 150°F, non-liquid-filled gauges with standard flat stamped “PHS” or “PH”) use monel throt-
glass windows, can withstand continuous operating temperatures up to 250°F (121°C). tle screw.
Liquid-filled gauges can withstand 200°F (93°C) but glycerin fill and acrylic window will
tend to yellow. Accuracy at temperatures above or below the reference ambient tempera- 9. Check appropriate box on fill identification
ture of 68°F will be affected by approximately .4% per 25°F. Gauges with welded joints label, and peel off label back, and attach fill
will withstand 750°F (450°F (232°C) with silver brazed joints) for short times without rup-
ture, although other parts of the gauge will be destroyed and calibration will be lost. For label to gauge case.
continuous use and for process or ambient temperatures above 250°F (121°C), a
diaphragm seal or capillary or siphon is recommended.
10. If gauge is to be repackaged:
(1) Available for temperature below –20°F, see Production Information page ASH-PI-21B a. Include enclosed instruction sheet inside
for details carton.
1. Unscrew front threaded ring (turn CCW). It is important to hold gauge rigidly, other- b. Change type number on carton label to:
Remove and discard glass window. For range wise ring lugs may be damaged during (1) Hermetically Sealed – 1279(*)SH.
spans 60 psi and under, shift pointer down removal or assembly process. (2) Liquid Filled – 1279(*)SL.
scale by the amount shown in the table. With 4. From rear of gauge, remove and discard these *Bourdon Tube System Code
either the glass or plastic window, replace the parts: rear cover and cover gaskets from case. Glycerin or silicone should not be used in applica-
O-ring with one furnished in the kit. Note: Disregard Step Nos. 5a and 5b if convert- tions involving Oxygen, Chlorine, Nitric Acid,
2. Remove protective paper from acrylic plastic ing to hermetically sealed version. Hydrogen Peroxide or other strong oxidizing
window taking care not to scratch window. When converting a 45-1379 with the top fill agents, because of danger of spontaneous chemi-
Assemble window in gauge. hole configuration, p/n 256A176-01 fill plug is cal reaction, ignition or explosion. Halocarbon
3. Moisten face of threaded ring with silicone oil required and must be ordered separately. should be specified. Products with this fill can be
or silicone grease where ring bears up against 5. Filling Procedures: ordered from factory.
window. Replace front threaded ring and tight- a. Manual Filling Procedure: Place gauge The use of fluids other than those listed in the table
en firmly hand tight. See instructions on face down on bench and tip gauge by above (for example, Hydrocarbon-based oils) may
reverse side for applying proper torque to ring blocking up front with a 3⁄8 inch block at the result in leakage caused by a reaction between the
to establish desired squeeze on O-ring seal. 12 o’clock dial position. Tipping of the fluid and the elastomeric seals. Consult the factory
(Fig. 4). gauge is necessary so fluid will flow into before filling with any other fluid.

© 2015 Ashcroft Inc., 250 East Main Street, Stratford, CT 06614 USA, Tel: 203-378-8281, Fax 203-385-0402 [Link]
All sales subject to standard terms and conditions of sale. All rights reserved. I&M008-10090 (84B276) Rev 10/15

15
TYPE 1279 & 1379 SOLID FRONT DURAGAUGE®
PRESSURE GAUGE CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS TO:
• Convert A Standard Dry Gauge To A Liquid Filled Gauge
• Convert A Standard Dry Gauge To A Dry, Weatherproof
IP66 Gauge

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USING CONE BACK CONNECTION ASSEMBLED GAUGE

TOOL AND RING WRENCH
Fig. 2
Garter Spring & Diaphragm Assembly REAR COVER
(Back Connection Gauge Only) DIAPHRAGM

A. Place cone tool over socket shank as shown.

B. Moisten lip of socket and outer O-ring surface
with silicone oil or grease.
C. Place diaphragm with rib side facing upward over
cone into case grove.
Diaphragm O-ring must be completely in socket-
shank grove.
D. Place garter spring over cone as shown and slide
onto diaphragm in socket grove GARTER SPRING

E. Assemble rear cover with screws per step 7. CASE

Fig. 3
Fig. 3
Front Ring Assembly (All Gauges) Fig. 4
A. Assemble ring to case by hand to start.
B. Place ring on wrench as shown
C. Use 1⁄2˝ drive extension and torque ring to 200 in. lb

Alternate Method
A. Tighten ring snugly by hand
B. Mark case and ring.
C. Turn ring another 100 to 120 degrees (slightly
less than 1⁄2 turn) using the ring wrench and 1⁄2˝
drive socket wrench or place the blunt end of a
wooden or plastic dowel against a ring lug and
tap with a hammer.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR LIQUID FILLING Fig. 5

ASHCROFT® TYPE 1279 AND 1379
SOLID FRONT DURAGAUGE®
PRESSURE GAUGES USING A
VACUUM PUMP
A. Insert a length of 1⁄8 ˝ diameter tubing through the
12 o’clock position hole in the rear, solid front
portion of the case, as shown.
B. Evacuate the air from the front dial cavity while
pouring in the fill fluid through the case back.
The vacuum will displace the air with fluid.*
C. When the dial cavity is solidly filled, remove the
tubing and continue to pour the fill fluid to within
1
⁄16 ˝ below the o-ring channel lip, as shown.
D. When converting a 45-1379 with the top fill hole
configuration, p/n 256A176-01 fill plug is VACUUM VACUUM
required and must be ordered separately. TRAP PUMP
*To prevent breakage, reduce vacuum to 15 in.
Hg for plain glass and safety glass.

Ø 1⁄8 TUBING

DIAL

© 2015 Ashcroft Inc., 250 East Main Street, Stratford, CT 06614 USA, Tel: 203-378-8281, Fax 203-385-0402 [Link]
All sales subject to standard terms and conditions of sale. All rights reserved. I&M008-10090 (84B276) Rev 10/15

16
 ASHCROFT® Type 1082 Test Gauge
Calibration Procedure – Pressure Range

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE OF EXTERNAL

EASY ZERO™ ADJUST FEATURE*

Fig. 1

A B RING
1. LOOSEN RING-LOCKING SCREW A.
2. OBTAIN REQUIRED ADJUSTMENT BY
ROTATING KNOB B CLOCKWISE OR
COUNTER-CLOCKWISE.
3. TIGHTEN SCREW A DOWN ON KNOB B.
*Applicable only for test gauge with hinged
ring design.

ADDITIONAL
CALIBRATION INSTRUCTIONS

1) “Standards shall have nominal errors no greater than

1
⁄4 of these permitted for the gauge being tested.”
(Ref: ASME B40=100-1998)
2) The instrument used as the calibration standard
should have a maximum range no greater than 2x
that of the gauge being tested. (i.e. Do not use a
400psi standard to test a 15psi gauge.)
3) “Known pressure shall be applied at each test point
on increasing pressure (or vacuum) from one end to
the other end of the scale. At each test point the
gauge shall be . . .
lightly tapped, and then read . . .”
(Ref: ASME B40.1 ¶ [Link])
4) To read gauge indication, move eye over red pointer
tip at OD of printed dial until red reflection in mirror
band is no longer visible, and then read the pointer
position in reference to the dial.

© Ashcroft Inc., 250 E. Main St., Stratford, CT 06614-5145, Tel: 203-378-8281, Fax: 203-385-0499, [Link]
All sales subject to standard terms and conditions of sale. I&M008-10082 11/01 RevB (250-2917-4) AMR 10/07

17
 Installation and Maintenance Instructions for
ASHCROFT® Type 1082 Test Gauge
Calibration Procedure – Pressure Range

Fig. 2 THIS TEST GAUGE IS PROVIDED WITH A MICROSPAN™ ADJUSTMENT

TO SIMPLIFY CALIBRATION. THE FLOW CHART BELOW OUTLINES THE
RECOMMENDED CALIBRATION PROCEDURE

CENTER DIAL
OVER PINION

SET POINTER
AT 0%

GO TO
100%

CHECK
>0.2 <1.5% ACCURACY >1.5%
MICROMETER COARSE
SPAN SPAN
<0.2%

MICRO COARSE
SPAN SPAN

SET POINTER GO TO SET POINTER

AT 100% 0% AT 100%

MICRO GO TO GO TO COARSE
SPAN 0% 0% SPAN

CHECK CHECK
>0.2% ACCURACY <0.2% <0.2% >1.5%
ACCURACY
>0.2<1.5%

COARSE
LINEARITY SET POINTER
AT 0%
ROTATE MOVEMENT
COUNTER-CLOCKWISE
TO REDUCE READING
AT MIDSCALE GO TO GO TO
0% 50%

NOTE
ROTATE >1.5% CHECK
MOVEMENT ACCURACY
<0.2%

GO TO
100%

CHECK
>0.2<1.5% ACCURACY >1.5%

<0.2%
COARSE SPAN
ADJUSTMENT
–LOOSEN TWO SCREWS
–MOVE SLIDE INWARD
TO INCREASE SPAN
(.004 IN. – APPROX. 1%)
–TIGHTEN TWO SCREWS

TEMPERATURE
COMPENSATOR
< – LESS THAN
MICROSPAN > – GREATER THAN
ADJUSTMENT
–TIGHTEN SCREW TO
INCREASE SPAN CHECK
1 TURN – APPROX. 1⁄2% ACCURACY
AT 0-25-50-75-100%
1.5mm hex
Ball end wrench or
screwdriver required.

© Ashcroft Inc., 250 E. Main St., Stratford, CT 06614-5145, Tel: 203-378-8281, Fax: 203-385-0499, [Link]
All sales subject to standard terms and conditions of sale. I&M008-10082 11/01 Rev C (250-2917-4) 12/15

18
19
 Ashcroft Inc.,
250 East Main Street
Stratford, CT 06614-5145
U.S.A.
Tel: 203-378-8281
Fax: 203-385-0408 (Domestic)
Fax: 203-385-0357 (International)
email: info@[Link]
[Link]
I&M008-10098-5/02 (250-1353-L) Rev. 12/15

Visit our web site [Link]

20
ASCHROFT
MODEL: EI SERIES
RANGE: 0‐50 DEG C
LOCATION: INLET OF 05M CARTRIDGE FILTER
HOUSING
 EI Series Bimetal Thermometers

FEATURES SPECIFICATIONS
• 1% full span accuracy ASME B40.200 (ASME Ashcroft®
Series: EI
B40.3 Grade A)
Dial Sizes: 2,˝ 3,˝ 5˝
• Maximum ambient temp. is 200°F (94°C) Stem Length: 21⁄2˝—24˝ (1)
• Hermetically sealed case to prevent entry Case & Stem: 304 stainless steel, hermetically
of moisture, interior corrosion and coil sealed
Stem Dia: .250˝
freeze-up.
Window: Heavy-duty glass, plastic or shatter-
• External adjustment permits zero reset from proof glass optional
outside the case. Dial: Maxivision®, black figures on white
background
• Maxivison® dial allows readability from any
Pointer: Black
angle without parallax error. Connection: Plain, pointed plain, 1⁄4 NPT, 1⁄2 NPT,
• Silicone coil dampening (up to 400°F) 1
⁄2 NPT union
provides vibration dampening and improves Connection
response time. Location: Everyangle, Lower, Rear
Ranges: -80/120°F — 200/1000°F
• All-welded stainless steel construction -50/50°C — 100/500°C
• Heavy-Duty glass lens Options: Code Description
C4 Individual calibration cert.
• Protection IP 65
XCS Dual scale(2)
• Five year limited warranty XDM Dial marking
XNH Stainless steel tag
XNN Paper tag
XPD Plastic window
XSG Shatter proof glass
X3B 3⁄8˝ stem dia. with 1⁄2 NPT
X02 1⁄4 NPT when 1⁄2 NPT is standard
XS1 Silicone free
(1) Special or longer length available, consult factory
(2) Dual scale avilable with 3˝ and 5˝ case only
(3) Only available on rear connection

Thermowells must be used on all pressure or

velocity applications, to protect the stem of
thermometer from corrosion and physical
damage, and to facilitate removal of the
thermometer without disturbing the process.
Maximum ambient temperature is 200°F (95°C).

HOW TO ORDER
30 EI 60 R 040 0/250°F XNH

Dial Size: 3˝ Code 30

Case Style: EI
Stem Connection: 1⁄2 NPT Code 60
Stem Location: Rear Code R
Stem Length: 4˝ Code 040
Range: Code 0/250°F
Options: Stainless steel tag

All specifications are subject to change without notice. Ashcroft Inc., 250 East Main Street, Stratford, CT 06614 USA
All sales subject to standard terms and conditions. Tel: 203-378-8281 • Fax: 203-385-0408
BULLETIN BM-EI © Ashcroft Inc. 2013 02/2014 email: info@[Link] • [Link]
 EI Series Bimetal Thermometers

EI Series selection table EI Series dual scale ranges

Case Size Stem Stem Lengths Temperature Range Dual scales are available in 3˝ and 5˝
Available dial sizes in the following ranges:
“S”
Dial Code Style Conn. Code Location Code Length Code °F* °/ Div. Fig. °C °/ Div. Fig. Inner Outer
Code (inches) Fahrenheit Inter. Celsius Inter. –80/120°F and –60/50°C
Plain 40 –80/120 2 20 –50/50 1 10
2˝ 20 Pointed 50 Rear R –20/120†† –20/120 2 20 –40/120°F and –40/50°C
1
⁄4 NPT 60 21⁄2 025 30/130†† 1 10 0/50†† 1 5 –40/160°F and –40/70°C
1
12
⁄2 NPT 4 040 0/200 0/100 1 10 –20/120°F and –30/50°C††
Union 42 Everyangle
Union E 6 060
20
3˝ 3030 2 0/200°F and –20/90°C
EI 1⁄⁄22 NPT
NPT 60
60
1
3˝ Rear R 9 090 0/250 10/150 2 20
Rear R 50
1
⁄2 NPT 60 Lower L 12 120 50/300 0/200 0/250°F and –20/120°C
Lower L
1⁄2 NPT 15 150 50/400 0/300††
1
⁄2 NPT 42 30/130°F and 0/55°C††
Union
Union 42 Everyangle
Everyangle EE 18 180 50/550 5 50 50/450**† 5 50
5˝ 50 11
⁄22 NPT 60 24 240 200/700† 100/500**† 50/300°F and 10/150°C
Rear R 100/800† 50/400°F and 10/200°C
1
⁄2 NPT 60
Lower L 200/1000**† 10 100 50/550°F and 10/290°C
100/800°F and 50/400°C†
EI Dimensions
200/700°F and 100/370°C†
Weight in
ounces(3) 200/1000°F and 100/550°C**†
Case Dial Connection
Series Size Location A B C D E G H S NPT Hex S – 2 ⁄2˝1
Overtemperature limits
EI 2˝ Rear 23⁄32 3
⁄8 3
⁄8 – – – – –(2) – 11
⁄16 41⁄2
(Plain) (53) (10) (8) Top of Range °F Maximum
EI 2˝ Rear (Plain, 23⁄32 3
⁄8 5
⁄16 – – – – –(2) – ⁄16
11
41⁄2 Over Temperature
pointed stem) (53) (10) (8) up to 250 100% of span
EI 2˝ Rear 23⁄32 3
⁄8 3
⁄8 – – – – –(2) ⁄4
1
⁄16
11
41⁄2 251/550 50% of span
(Threaded) (53) (10) (8) 551/1000 800°F **
EI 3˝ Rear 35⁄32 19
⁄32 3
⁄8 – – – – –(2) ⁄2
1
⁄8
7
7
(80) (15) (8) *Dual scale ranges available for all standard °F ranges (3˝ and 5˝
EI 3˝ Lower 35⁄32 127⁄32 – 25⁄8 ⁄4
1
– – –(2) ⁄2
1
⁄8
7
11 case only)
(80) (47) (67) (6) **Satisfactory for continuous service up to 800°F or 425°C. Can be
used for intermittent service from 800 to 1000°F, or 425 to 500°C.
EI 3˝ Everyangle 35⁄32 19
⁄32 – – – 121⁄32 31⁄32 –(2) ⁄2
1
⁄8
7
10 Use Ashcroft Duratemp® thermometers for ranges above and below
(80) (15) (42) (89) those listed above.
EI 5˝ Rear 51⁄32 23
⁄32 3
⁄8 – – – – –(2) ⁄2
1
⁄8
7
16 †Minimum stem length for these ranges is 4˝.
††Minimum stem length for lower connection and Everyangle is 4˝.
(128) (18) (8)
EI 5˝ Lower 51⁄32 115⁄16 – 35⁄8 1
⁄4 – – –(2) ⁄2
1
⁄8
7
26
(128) (49) (92) (6)
EI 5˝ Everyangle 51⁄16 23
⁄32 – – – 17⁄8 321⁄32 –(2) ⁄2
1
⁄8
7
25
(128) (18) (48) (93)
NOTES:
1. Figures in parenthesis ( ) are in millimeters. All other dimensions are in inches.
2. Standard “S” dimensions are 21⁄2, 4, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18 and 24 inches. Standard stem diameter is 1⁄4 inch.
3. Add 1 oz. for every 2 inches of stem length.

DIMENSIONS
G
G
B
B
S
B
A A
H

A A H D

1.00"

S S
C
B S
30EI60E 30EI42E
50EI60E E
50EI42E
50EL60E 50EL42E

All specifications are subject to change without notice. Ashcroft Inc., 250 East Main Street, Stratford, CT 06614 USA
All sales subject to standard terms and conditions. Tel: 203-378-8281 • Fax: 203-385-0408
BULLETIN BM-EI © Ashcroft Inc. 2013 02/2014 email: info@[Link] • [Link]
I&M008-10187_layout 1/28/14 8:24 AM Page 1

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE

INSTRUCTIONS FOR ALL ASHCROFT®
BIMETAL DIAL THERMOMETERS

GENERAL CAUTION:
In removing the thermometer out of the packing box, Thermowells should be used on all pressurized appli-
handle it by the case or case outlet. Avoid handling it by cations, to protect the thermometer from corrosion or
the stem. physical damage, and to facilitate removal of the ther-
mometer without disturbing the process.
INSTALLATION OF THERMOMETERS
The thermometer should be mounted at any convenient
TESTING
location where it will be subjected to the average tem- Ashcroft Bimetal Dial Thermometers are carefully cali-
perature variations to be indicated. brated at the factory and under most operating condi-
tions will retain their accuracy indefinitely. However, as
For an EVERYANGLE CONNECTION PLEASE REFER in the case of all instruments, it is well to make periodic
TO THE REVERSE SIDE OF THIS DOCUMENT checks for accuracy against known standards.
before beginning the installation.
Avoid bending the stem as this will cause misalignment
ADJUSTMENT
of the internal parts, resulting in undue frictional errors. If it is necessary to make an adjustment to the ther-
mometer proceed as follows:
To tighten the thermometer to the apparatus, use a
wrench applied to the hexagon head of the threaded On thermometers fitted with an “External Adjustment”
connection located just outside of the case. – Use a small wrench, small screwdriver or a coin to
turn the slotted hexagon head in the back of the case
INSTALLATION until the pointer indicates the proper temperature on
Locate the stem so that at least two inches will be sub- the dial.
jected to the average temperature to be measured.
MAINTENANCE OF
Exposing the stem to a temperature in excess of the DIAL THERMOMETERS
highest dial reading should be avoided. Aside from occasional testing, little or no maintenance
The thermometer is normally provided with a threaded is required.
connection. To tighten the thermometer to the appara- Be sure that the gasketed glass cover is on the case at
tus or into the well, use an open-end wrench applied to all times, as moisture and dirt inside the case will even-
the hexagon head of the threaded [Link] until tually cause the thermometer to lose its accuracy. (See
reasonably tight, then tighten still further in the same caution note below.)
manner as a pipe elbow or similar pipe fitting until the
If the thermometer is used for measuring the tempera-
scale is in the desired position for reading. DO NOT
ture of a material that may harden and build up an
TIGHTEN BY TURNING THE THERMOMETER CASE.
insulating layer on the stem, the thermometer should
Install the dry type thermometer so that the maximum
be removed from the apparatus occasionally, and the
case temperature is kept below 200°F at all times.
stem cleaned. Observe this precaution to ensure the
Install the liquid filled type thermometer so that the
sensitivity of the instrument.
maximum case temperature is kept below 150°F at all
times.
CAUTION:
When a thermometer is equipped with a well, the well Bimetal Thermometers operating below freezing must
should be installed onto the apparatus first. The stem of have a perfectly tight case to prevent entrance of moisture
the thermometer should then be coated with a heat which eventually will condense and freeze inside the stem.
conducting medium (a mixture of glycerin and graphite This condition shows up as a failure of the thermometer to
or vaseline or any other heavy lubricant may be used), read accurately below 32°F or 0°C. For this reason it is
after which the thermometer stem is inserted, and tight- important to avoid damage to the glass front while the
ened into the well. stem temperature is at freezing or below. All thermometers
are hermetically sealed in a dry atmosphere at the factory
and require no further maintenance.

© 2011 Ashcroft Inc., 250 East. Main Street, Stratford, CT 06614-5145, USA Tel: 203-378-8281, Fax: 203-385-0499, [Link]
All sales subject to standard terms and conditions of sale. I&M008-10187 Rev 01/14
I&M008-10187_layout 1/28/14 8:24 AM Page 2

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE

INSTRUCTIONS FOR ASHCROFT® BIMETAL
THERMOMETERS WITH EVERYANGLE™ CONN.

This thermometer was designed to be positioned to face the direction of easiest reading.

CAUTION: To assure longest life, the “EVERY- ANGLE”

joint should be operated only when necessary during
installation or removal of the thermometer.

A Harness
POSITIONING THE STEM
Before installation, the stem should be set to the
Stem desired angle as follows:
Figure 1: Loosen the four screws labeled “A” and “B” in
Figure 1, until the harness revolves freely without twist-
2˝ ing the flexible housing.
Sensitive
Portion Figure 2: While holding the case, revolve the harness
clockwise or counterclockwise, as indicated by arrows
B in Figure 2, to place the harness in a position that will
permit flexing the stem in the desired direction with
Reset Figure 1 respect to the case. Then lock the two screws labeled “A.”
Figure 3: Flex the stem to the desired angle with
respect to the face of the thermometer, as shown in
Figure 3, then lock the two screws labeled “B.”
INSTALLATION
The lower 2˝ of the stem is the sensitive portion. Be
sure this part of the stem is exposed to the temperature
to be measured.
Tighten the thermometer to the apparatus or into the
thermometer well, using an open-end wrench applied to
the hexagon head of the connection bushing. Turn until
reasonably tight, then tighten further (in the same man-
ner as a pipe fitting) until the scale is in the desired
position for reading.

DO NOT TIGHTEN BY TURNING THE THERMOME-

A TER CASE OR THE HARNESS. INSTALL THE DRY
Figure 2
TYPE EVERYANGLE THERMOMETER SO THAT
THE MAXIMUM CASE TEMPERATURE IS KEPT
BELOW 200°F. INSTALL THE LIQUID-FILLED TYPE
EVERYANGLE THERMOMETER, SO THAT THE
MAXIMUM CASE TEMPERATURE IS KEPT BELOW
150°F.
B
THERMOMETER WELLS
When the thermometer is equipped with a well, the well
should first be removed from the thermometer and
screwed into the apparatus.

Stem

Figure 3

© 2011 Ashcroft Inc., 250 East. Main Street, Stratford, CT 06614-5145, USA Tel: 203-378-8281, Fax: 203-385-0499, [Link]
All sales subject to standard terms and conditions of sale. I&M008-10187 Rev 01/14
JUMO
MODEL: dTRANS CR 02
LOCATION: SENSOR (PRODUCT LINE), METER
(MOUNTED ON WET PANEL)
 JUMO dTRANS CR 02
Transmitter/controller for conductivity, TDS,
resistance, temperature and standard signals
Type 202552

B 202552.0
Operating instructions

2014-01-21/00541516
WARNING:
A sudden malfunction of the instrument, or one of the sensors connected to it,
could potentially result in dangerous overdosing! Suitable preventive measures
must be in place to prevent this from happening.

Note:
Please read these Operating Instructions before placing the instrument in
operation. Keep the manual in a place which is accessible to all users at all times.

Resetting the brightness of the LC display:

If the brightness setting has been adjusted so that the display text is no longer
legible, the basic setting can be restored as follows:
✱ Switch off the voltage supply.
✱ Switch on the voltage supply and immediately press and hold the and
keys simultaneously.
Operator language selection:
✱ Press the EXIT key for longer than 3 seconds.
✱ Select the appropriate language with the and keys.
✱ Briefly press the PGM key.

Reset to factory settings:

To get to the Administrator level, proceed as follows:
✱ Press the PGM key for longer than 2 seconds.
✱ Use the or keys to select "ADMINISTR. LEVEL".
✱ Use the and keys to enter the password 8192.
Confirm the PGM key.
WARNING:
Customer-specific settings will be lost!
 Contents
1 Typographical conventions ...................................................... 7
1.1 Warning signs ..............................................................................................7
1.2 Reference signs ...........................................................................................7
2 Description ................................................................................ 8
3 Identifying the device version ................................................ 10
3.1 Nameplate ..................................................................................................10
3.2 Order details ...............................................................................................10
3.3 Accessories (included in delivery) ..............................................................12
3.4 Accessories (optional) ................................................................................12
4 Mounting .................................................................................. 13
4.1 General information ....................................................................................13
4.2 Dimensions ................................................................................................13
5 Installation ............................................................................... 14
5.1 Installation instructions ..............................................................................14
5.2 Electrical isolation ......................................................................................15
5.3 Connection .................................................................................................16
5.3.1 Terminal assignment ..................................................................................16
5.3.2 Optional board (row 1, slot a, b or c) .........................................................16
5.3.3 Main board (row 2) .....................................................................................18
5.3.4 PSU board (row 3) ......................................................................................19
6 Operation ................................................................................. 20
6.1 Controls ......................................................................................................20
6.2 Display .......................................................................................................21
6.2.1 Measuring mode (normal display) ..............................................................21
6.3 Principle of operation .................................................................................22
6.3.1 Operation in levels .....................................................................................22
6.4 Measuring mode ........................................................................................25
6.4.1 Normal display ...........................................................................................25
6.5 Input/output information ............................................................................26
6.5.1 User data ....................................................................................................27
6.5.2 Min/max values of the main input ..............................................................27
6.5.3 Min/max values of the optional inputs .......................................................28
6.5.4 Output level ................................................................................................28
6.5.5 Current values of the main entries .............................................................28
6.5.6 Curgent values of the optional entries .......................................................29
6.5.7 Current values of the math channels .........................................................29
6.5.8 States of the binary inputs and outputs .....................................................29
Contents
6.5.9 Manual mode overview ..............................................................................30
6.5.10 Hardware info .............................................................................................30
6.5.11 Device info .................................................................................................31
6.6 User level ...................................................................................................31
6.6.1 Parameters of the User level ......................................................................32
6.7 Administrator level .....................................................................................32
6.7.1 Parameter level ..........................................................................................32
6.7.2 Release level ..............................................................................................32
6.7.3 Basic setting ..............................................................................................32
6.7.4 Calibration level ..........................................................................................35
6.7.5 Calibration release .....................................................................................35
6.7.6 Delete min/max values ...............................................................................35
6.7.7 Delete logbook ...........................................................................................35
6.7.8 Delete daily batch ......................................................................................35
6.7.9 Delete total batch .......................................................................................35
6.8 MANUAL mode/Simulation mode ..............................................................36
6.8.1 MANUAL mode only via "higher order" controller functions .....................36
6.8.2 Simulation of binary outputs ......................................................................37
6.8.3 Simulation of analog outputs via MANUAL mode .....................................38
6.9 HOLD mode ...............................................................................................38
7 Commissioning ....................................................................... 40
7.1 Getting started ...........................................................................................40
7.2 Setting examples .......................................................................................41
7.2.1 Conductivity measurement, temperature compensated ...........................41
7.2.2 Measurement of ultra-pure water with 2-electrode measuring sensor ......43
7.2.3 Measurement of ultra-pure water with 2-electrode measuring sensor ......45
8 Calibrating a conductivity sensor .......................................... 47
8.1 Notes ..........................................................................................................47
8.2 General information ....................................................................................47
8.2.1 Requirements .............................................................................................47
8.2.2 Ways to start the calibration ......................................................................48
8.2.3 Calibration options .....................................................................................48
8.3 Calibration of the temperature coefficient of the sample medium .............48
8.4 Calibrating the relative cell constant ..........................................................51
8.4.1 Entering the cell constant manually ...........................................................52
8.4.2 Cell constants ............................................................................................52
9 Calibrating a sensor with a standard signal ......................... 53
9.1 General information ....................................................................................53
9.1.1 Operating modes .......................................................................................53
 Contents
9.1.2 Calibration options .....................................................................................54
9.1.3 Ways to start the calibration ......................................................................54
9.2 Linear operating mode ...............................................................................55
9.2.1 1-point calibration ......................................................................................55
9.2.2 2-point calibration ......................................................................................56
9.2.3 Calibration limit point .................................................................................58
9.3 pH operating mode ....................................................................................59
9.3.1 Zero-point (1-point) calibration ..................................................................59
9.3.2 2-point calibration ......................................................................................61
9.4 Conductivity operating mode .....................................................................63
9.4.1 Calibration of the relative cell constant ......................................................63
9.4.2 Calibration of the temperature coefficient .................................................65
9.5 Concentration operating mode ..................................................................69
9.5.1 Calibration of the relative cell constant ......................................................69
9.6 Chlorine measurement operating mode,
pH-compensated .......................................................................................71
9.6.1 Final value calibration ................................................................................71
10 Calibration logbook ................................................................ 73
10.1 General information ....................................................................................73
11 Controller ................................................................................. 74
11.1 General information ....................................................................................74
11.2 Controller functions ....................................................................................74
11.2.1 Simple switching functions ........................................................................74
11.2.2 Higher order switching functions (PID) ......................................................74
11.2.3 Typical operator level parameters ..............................................................75
11.3 Software controllers and outputs ...............................................................75
11.4 Configuration of higher order controllers ...................................................77
11.4.1 Structure ....................................................................................................77
11.5 Parameter sets ...........................................................................................77
11.6 Sample configurations ...............................................................................78
11.6.1 Simple limit monitoring ..............................................................................78
11.6.2 Limit monitoring to USP .............................................................................78
11.6.3 Controller with limit value function .............................................................79
12 Setup program ........................................................................ 80
12.1 Configurable parameters ...........................................................................80
12.2 Documenting the instrument configuration ................................................81
12.3 Special features for "Datalogger" ..............................................................82
13 Eliminating faults and malfunctions ...................................... 84
Contents
14 Technical data ......................................................................... 86
15 Retrofitting optional boards ................................................... 90
16 Appendix .................................................................................. 93
16.1 Glossary .....................................................................................................93
16.2 Parameters of the User level ....................................................................105
17 Index ....................................................................................... 116
 1 Typographical conventions
1.1 Warning signs
Danger
This symbol is used when there may be danger to personnel if the
instructions are ignored or not followed correctly!

Caution
This sign indicates that components could be destroyed by electrostatic di-
scharge(ESD=Electro Static Discharge), if the respective cautionary measures
are not [Link] use the ESD packages intended for this purpose to return de-
vice inserts, assemblygroups or assembly components.

Caution
This symbol is used when there may be damage to equipment or data if the
instructions are ignored or not followed correctly!

Read documentation!
This symbol – placed on the device – indicates that the associated device
documentation has to be observed. This is necessary to recognize the kind
of the potential hazards as well as to take the measures to avoid them.

1.2 Reference signs

Note
This symbol is used to draw your special attention to a remark.

✱ Instruction
This symbol indicates the description of an action to be performed.
The individual steps are marked by this asterisk.
Example:
✱ Briefly press the key.

7
2 Description
Inputs/outputs In addition to the main input (conductivity, TDS, resistance) and the secondary
input (temperature compensation), the basic instrument alone has two binary
inputs, two relays, one voltage supply for external sensors and a setup
interface.
Input signals can be shown as numbers or as a bar graph on the graphic
display. Parameters are displayed in plain text for easily comprehensible and
reliable operation.

Optional Three further slots can be fitted with extensive additional configurable inputs
and outputs and interfaces.

1 Main input Setup interface

(conductivity, TDS and resistance)

1 Analog input
(compensation)
2 Relay (changeover)
2 Binary inputs

Power supply Power supply

for a 2-wire transmitter

Optional board 1

Optional board 2

Optional board 3

Application The instrument is suitable, for example, for displaying, measuring and
controlling:
- Conductivity, TDS and resistance.
- Free chlorine, chlorine dioxide, ozone, hydrogen peroxide and peracetic
acid, in combination with sensors as per data sheet 202630.
- (Hydrostatic) liquid levels with 2-wire transmitters (level probes) as per data
sheet 402090 or data sheet 404390.
- Flow rate in conjunction with transmitters as per data sheet 406010 or
406020.
- Two temperature measuring points.
- Most sensors and transmitters that output standard signals (0 to 10 V or
0(4) to 20 mA).
Because temperature measurement is integrated, temperature compensation
takes place quickly and precisely, which is particularly important for many
analytical measurements.

8
 2 Description
Special features - Display: mS/cm, µS/cm, MOhm × cm, mg/l, pH, mV, etc.
Special settings are also possible with the setup program
- Configurable display text (operator level)
- A choice of display visualizations: large numbers, bar graph or tendency
(trend) display
- Four limit controllers
- Integrated calibration routines: with 1, 2 and 3 points
- Math and logic module (optional)
- Calibration logbook
- Three optional slots
- Selectable languages: English, German, French, etc.
- Setup program provides: convenient programming, system documentation
- RS422/485 interface (optional)
- PROFIBUS-DP interface (optional)

9
3 Identifying the device version
3.1 Nameplate
on the transmitter

The date of manufacture is encoded in the "F No." (serial number):

1251 means year of manufacture 2012, calendar week 51

3.2 Order details

(1) Basic type
202552 JUMO dTRANS CR 02 - Transmitter/controller
(2) Basic type extension
01 In the panel enclosure
05 In the surface-mounted enclosure
(3) Version
8 Standard with factory setting
9 Programming to customer specification
(4) Operating languagea
01 German
02 English
03 French
04 Dutch
05 Russian
06 Italian
07 Hungarian
08 Czech
09 Swedish
10 Polish
13 Portuguese
14 Spanish
16 Rumanian

10
 3 Identifying the device version
(5) Optional slot 1
0 Not used
1 Analog input (universal)
2 Relay (1× changeover)
3 Relay (2× normally open)
4 Analog output
5 2 PhotoMOS® relaysb
6 Solid state relay 1 A
8 Voltage supply output DC 12 V (e.g. for inductive proximity switch)
(6) Optional slot 2
0 Not used
1 Analog input (universal)
2 Relay (1× changeover)
4 Analog output
5 2 PhotoMOS® relays
6 Solid state relay 1 A
8 Voltage supply output DC 12 V (e.g. for inductive proximity switch)
(7) Optional slot 3
00 Not used
01 Analog input (universal)
02 Relay (1× changeover)
03 Relay (2× normally open)
04 Analog output
05 2 PhotoMOS® relays
06 Solid state relay 1 A
08 Voltage supply output DC 12 V (e.g. for inductive proximity switch)
10 RS485 interface
11 Datalogger with interface RS485c
12 PROFIBUS-DP interface
(8) Voltage supply
23 AC 110 to 230 V, +10/-15 %, 48 to 63 Hz
25 AC/DC 20 to 30 V, 48 to 63 Hz
(9) Extra codes
0 None
a All languages are available on the instrument and can be changed by the customer at any time.
Factory default setting to a language (other than "German") is available for a charge.
b
PhotoMOS® is a registered trademark of Panasonic Corporation.
c The only way to read files is with the PC setup software!
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9)
Order code / - - - - - - /
Order example 202552 / 01 - 8 - 01 - 2 - 2 - 04 - 23 / 000

11
3 Identifying the device version
3.3 Accessories (included in delivery)
4× fastening elements, completea
3× CON plug-in linka
3× jumper wireb
1× seal for panela
1× fastening elements, completeb
- 1× DIN rail fastening left
- 1× DIN rail fastening right
- 3× wall mount
- 3× fastening screw
a
For basic type extension 01 only (in the panel enclosure)
b For basic type extension 05 only (in the surface-mounted enclosure)

3.4 Accessories (optional)

Type Part no.
Holder for C rail 00375749
Dummy cover 96 mm × 48 mm 00069680
Pipe mounting set 00398162
Weather protection roof complete for basic type extension 05 00401174
PC setup software 00560380
PC interface cable including USB/TTL converter and two adapters 00456352
(USB connecting cable)

Optional board Code Part no.

Analog input (universal) 1 00442785
Relay (1× changeover) 2 00442786
Relay (2× NO) 3 00442787
Analog output 4 00442788
2 PhotoMOS® relays 5 00566677
Solid state relay 1 A 6 00442790
Voltage supply output DC ±5 V (e.g. for ISFET) 7 00566681
Voltage supply output DC 12 V (e.g. for inductive proximity switch) 8 00566682
Interface - RS422/485 10 00442782
Datalogger with RS485 interface 11 00566678
PROFIBUS-DP interface 12 00566679

12
 4 Mounting
4.1 General information
Mounting Find a location that ensures easy accessibility for the later calibration.
location The fastening must be secure and must ensure low vibration for the
instrument.
Avoid direct sunlight!
Permissible ambient temperature at the installation location: -10 to +55 °C
with max. 95 % rel. humidity, no condensation.
Installation The instrument can be mounted in any position.
position

4.2 Dimensions

Close mounting
Minimum spacing of panel cutouts Horizontal Vertical
Without setup connector: 30 mm 11 mm
With setup connector (see arrow): 65 mm 11 mm

13
5 Installation
5.1 Installation instructions
The electrical connection must only be performed by
qualified personnel!

❏ The choice of cable, the installation and the electrical connection must
conform to the requirements of VDE 0100 “Regulations on the Installation
of Power Circuits with Nominal Voltages below 1000 V” and the relevant
local regulations.
❏ At maximum load, the cable must be heat resistant up to at least 80 °C.
❏ The device is intended to be installed in electrical cabinets. It shall be
operated by mains protected with a branch circuitry overcurrent protection
device not more than 20 Amps.
For servicing/repairing a Disconnecting Device shall be provided to
disconnect all conductors.
❏ The load circuits must be fused for the maximum load currents in each case
to prevent the relay contacts from becoming welded in the event of a short
circuit.
❏ Electromagnetic compatibility meets the requirements of EN 61326.
❏ Lay the input, output, and supply lines so they are physically separated
from each other and are not parallel.
❏ Use twisted and shielded probe cables. If possible, do not lay these cables
close to components or cables through which current is flowing. Ground
the shielding at one end.
❏ The probe cables must have an uninterrupted run (do not route them via
terminal blocks or similar arrangements).
❏ No other consumers can be connected to the power terminals of the
instrument.
❏ The instrument is not suitable for installation in areas with an explosion
hazard.
❏ Apart from faulty installation, incorrect settings on the instrument may also
affect the proper functioning of the subsequent process or lead to damage.
You should therefore always provide safety equipment that is independent
of the instrument and it should only be possible for qualified personnel to
make settings.

Mounting information for conductor cross-sections and ferrules

Ferrule Conductor cross-section Minimum length of ferrule or

Minimum Maximum stripping

Without ferrule 0.34 mm2 2.5 mm2 10 mm (stripping)

Without collar 0.25 mm2 2.5 mm2 10 mm
With collar up to 1.5 mm2 0.25 mm2 1.5 mm2 10 mm
Twin, with collar 0.25 mm2 1.5 mm2 12 mm

14
 5 Installation
5.2 Electrical isolation

3700 V AC

Solid state relay

Setup interface
Triac

Binary inputs
3700 V AC

Relay outputs Main input cond. conductivity

30 V AC Secondary input (Pt100/Pt1000)

50 V DC
Power supply
Continuous outputs
for a 2-wire transmitter

30 V AC
30 V AC
50 V DC
50 V DC
PhotoMOS® relay
Input 2 (option)
Extra-low voltage

1500 V AC
30 V AC
50 V DC
Interface
RS422/485 Power supply
PROFIBUS-DP for ISFET sensor
Datalogger

3700 V AC

Power supply

15
5 Installation
5.3 Connection
5.3.1 Terminal assignment

(c) (b) (a)

12
11
10
9

8
7
6
5

4
3
2
1
(1)

10
14
15

13
12
11

9
8
7
6

4
3
2
1
(2)

(3)

N(L-)
L1(L+)
17
16
15

13
12
11

9
8

6
5
4
(1) Row 1 (a) Option 1 (b) Option 2 (c) Option 3
(2) Row 2 Main input board
(conductivity/resistance/temperature/standard signal)
(3) Row 3 PSU board
(voltage supply/2× relays)

5.3.2 Optional board (row 1, slot a, b or c)

Function Symbol Terminal Terminal Terminal
for slot (a) for slot (b) for slot (c)
Analog input
Temperature sensor 2 6 10
in a two-wire circuit J 4 8 12
Pt100 or Pt1000
Temperature sensor 2 6 10
J
in a three-wire circuit 3 7 11
Pt100 or Pt1000 8 12
4
Resistance transmitter 2 6 10
E
3 7 11
S 4 8 12
A
Electrical current + 3 7 11
- 4 8 12

16
 5 Installation
Function Symbol Terminal Terminal Terminal
for slot (a) for slot (b) for slot (c)
Voltage + 1 5 9
0(2) to 10 V -
2 6 10
Voltage + 2 6 10
0 to 1 V -
3 7 11
Continuous output
Current or voltage + 2 6 10
- 3 7 11
Modbus interface
RS422 RxD+ 9
RxD-
10
11
TxD+ 12
TxD-
RS485 RxD/TxD+ 11
RxD/TxD-
12
PROFIBUS-DP interface
VP(+5V) 9
RxD/TxD-P(B) 10
RxD/TxD-N(A)
11
12
DGND

Datalogger interface
RS485 RxD/TxD+ 10
RxD/TxD- 11
Relay (1× changeover)
O K3 1 K4 5 K5 9
P 2 6 10
S 3 7 11
Relay (2× NO, common pin)
S K3 1 K5 9
P 2 10
S K6 3 K8 11
Triac (1 A)
K3 2 K4 6 K5 10
3 7 11

PhotoMOS® relay (0.2 A)

K3 1 K4 5 K5 9
2 6 10

K6 3 K7 7 K8 11
4 8 12

17
5 Installation
5.3.3 Main board (row 2)
Function Symbol Terminal
Standard signal input for electrical current + 3
0(4) to 20 mA - 4
Standard signal input + 1
for voltage - 4
0(2) to 10 V or 10 to 0(2) V
Temperature sensor 2
in a two-wire circuit J 3
Pt100 or Pt1000 4
Temperature sensor J
2
in a three-wire circuit 3
Pt100 or Pt1000 4
Resistance transmitter E
4
S
3
2
A

Conductivity sensor
Conductivity sensor (2-electrode system) 6
Terminals 6+7 and 8+9 can be bridged on the instrument; 7
2-wire cable routing up to the head of the conductivity sensor. 8
9
For concentric cells, terminal 6 must be connected with the outer
electrode.
Conductivity sensor (2-electrode system) 6
Wiring for highest accuracy; 7
4-wire cable routing to the head of the conductivity sensor. 8
For concentric cells, terminal 6 must be connected with the outer 9
electrode.
Conductivity sensor (4-electrode system) 6
6 - Outer electrode 1 7
7 - Inner electrode 1 8
8 - Inner electrode 2 9
9 - Outer electrode 2
Shield connection
Conductivity sensor 10 GND

Binary inputs
Binary input 1 12+
14
Binary input 2 13+
14

18
 5 Installation
5.3.4 PSU board (row 3)
Function Symbol Terminal
Voltage supply for JUMO dTRANS 02
Voltage supply: 1 L1 (L+)
AC 110 to 240 V 2 N (L-)
Voltage supply:
AC/DC 20 to 30 V
n.c. 4
5
6
Voltage supply for external 2-wire transmitter
DC 24 V (+20/-15 %) 8 L+
9 L-
Relay 1
Switching output K1 O 11
(floating) P
12
13
S
Relay 2
Switching output K2 O 15
(floating) P
16
17
S

19
6 Operation

Operation via the instrument keypad is described below.

Instrument operation via the optional set-up program, see chapter 12 "Setup
program", page 80.

6.1 Controls

(5)
(4)
(6)
(3)
(7)
(2)
(8)
(1)

(1) Measurement unit

(2) Temperature
(3) Operating mode
(4) Measured value
(5) key Increase numerical value/Forward selection
(6) key Decrease numerical value/Forward selection
(7) PGM key Change level/Forward selection/Confirm selection
(8) EXIT key Cancel entry/Exit level

20
 6 Operation
6.2 Display
6.2.1 Measuring mode (normal display)
Example

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

(9)
(7)

(8)

(1) Binary output (relay) K1 is active

(2) Binary output (relay) K2 is active
(3) Binary input is active
(4) Keypad is locked
(5) Instrument status
ALARM (flashing): Broken sensor or overrange, etc.
AL R1: Controller monitoring alarm from controller channel 1
AL R2: Controller monitoring alarm from controller channel 2
CALIB: Calibration mode active
CALIB (flashing): Calibration timer elapsed
(6) Output mode
MAN.: Manual mode and/or simulation mode active
HOLD: Hold mode active
(7) Top display
Measured value and unit of the variable set by parameter "Top display"
(8) Bottom display
Measured value and unit of the variable set by parameter "Bottom
display"
(9) Operating mode
MEASURING: Standard measuring mode is active

To return to Measuring mode (MEASURING):

Press the EXIT key or wait for a "timeout".

21
6 Operation
6.3 Principle of operation
6.3.1 Operation in levels
See page
Measurement mode
Normal display 25
Min/max values of the main input 27
Min/max values of the optional inputs 28
Output display 28
Current values of the main input 28
Current values of the optional inputs 29
Current values of the math channels 29
States of the binary inputs and outputs 29
Manual mode overview 30
Hardware information 30
Instrument information 31
User data 81
Calibration (depending on the basic setting) 47, 53
Manual mode/simulation 36
Hold mode 38
Main menu
User level 31
Conductivity input 105
Temperature input 106
Optional inputs 106
Analog input 1, 2, 3
Binary inputs 108
Binary input 1, 2
Controllers 108
Controller 1
Parameter set 1, 2
Configuration
Controller 2
Parameter set 1, 2
Configuration
Controller special functions 110
Limit value control 110
Limit value 1, 2, 3
Binary outputs 108
Binary output 1, 2, 3, ... 8
Analog outputs 112
Analog output 1, 2, 3
Interface 113
Wash timer 113
Datalogger 113

22
 6 Operation
Display 114
Administrator level (password) 32
Parameter level 32
Parameters as above for "User level"
Release level 32
Parameters as above for "User level"
Basic setting 32
Calibration level 35
Main input (depending on the basic setting)
Temperature coefficient, linear
Relative cell constant
Optional input 1, 2, 3
Temperature coefficient, linear
Temperature coefficient, curve
Relative cell constant
Zero point
Limit point
2-point
Calibration release 35
Main input (depending on the basic setting)
Temperature coefficient, linear
Temperature coefficient, curve
Relative cell constant
Zero point
Limit point
2-point
3-point
K factor
Optional input 1, 2, 3
Temperature coefficient, linear
Temperature coefficient, curve
Relative cell constant
Zero point
Limit point
2-point
3-point
Delete min/max values 35
Main input
Optional input 1, 2, 3
Delete logbook 35
Main input
Optional input 1, 2, 3
Delete daily batch 35
Delete total batch 35

23
6 Operation
Calibration level 47
Main input
Temperature coefficient, linear
Temperature coefficient, curve
Optional input 1, 2, 3 106
Temperature coefficient, linear
Temperature coefficient, curve
Relative cell constant
Zero point
Limit point
2-point
Calibration logbook 73
Main input
Optional input 1, 2, 3
Instrument information 31

24
 6 Operation
6.4 Measuring mode
Different display types can be configured, see "Display of measured values
STANDARD", page 93.
To return to Measuring mode:
press the EXIT key or wait for a "timeout".
Measurements with "out of range" are ignored.
The min./max. value memory can be reset:
Administrator level/Delete min/max.
When the basic setting is changed, the min and max values are deleted.

6.4.1 Normal display

Visualization
The following are displayed in Measuring mode:
- Analog input signal
- Unit (for example pH)
- Temperature of the sample medium

(1)
(3)
(2)

(1) MEASURING -> Measuring mode

(2) 21.6 °C -> Temperature of the sample medium
(3) 2032 µS/cm -> the measured value calculated from the standard signal
at the input

25
6 Operation
6.5 Input/output information
Measuring mode (normal display)

PGM > 3 s PGM <2s + <2s

or timeout or timeout
2 EXIT
User
EXIT (adjustable) User data Main variable (adjustable)

level Temperature input

EXIT

or timeout
(adjustable)

2 or timeout
or timeout Can only be activated with EXIT
Administrator EXIT (adjustable) setup program Optional input 1 (adjustable)

level Optional input 2

Optional input 3

or timeout
or timeout EXIT
Calibration EXIT (adjustable)
Math 1 (adjustable)

level Math 2

or timeout
or timeout EXIT
EXIT output (adjustable)
Calibration (adjustable)

logbook Controller 1
Controller 2

or timeout
EXIT
Binary signal (adjustable)
Instrument information overview
EXIT

or timeout
(adjustable)

or timeout
EXIT (adjustable)
Min/Max V alues
Main input

or timeout
EXIT
Min/Max V alues (adjustable)

Option input

or timeout
EXIT
Manual overview (adjustable)
Binary outputs

Manual overview
Analog outputs
EXIT

or timeout
(adjustable)

26
 6 Operation

Measuring mode (normal display)

EXIT + <2s EXIT + >3s EXIT + >3s PGM +

1 1
Manual mode Hold mode Calibration Hardware information
(controller)
EXIT EXIT EXIT

or timeout or timeout or timeout Keys

(adjustable) (adjustable) (adjustable) release

1
Only if released

6.5.1 User data

Up to 8 parameters that are frequently changed by the user can be combined

in the user level under "User data" (via setup program only).
Activating the display
The instrument is in Measuring mode (normal display)
✱ Briefly press the PGM key.
✱ Select the required "quick setting" with the and keys.
Editing
✱ Briefly press the PGM key.
✱ Edit the setting with the and keys.

6.5.2 Min/max values of the main input

Activating the display

The instrument is in Measuring mode (normal display)
✱ Briefly press the or key (several times if necessary).

27
6 Operation
Minimum and maximum values of the main value "1:" (mS/cm, µS/cm,
MOhm x cm, mV, %, ppm) and the temperature "T:" are displayed.
The extreme values of the main measurement variable and the temperature are
not mutually assigned (e.g. not 813 µS/cm at 24.3 °C).

6.5.3 Min/max values of the optional inputs

Activating the display

The instrument is in Measuring mode (normal display)
✱ Briefly press the or key (several times if necessary).
Minimum and maximum values of the optional inputs (1, 2 and 3) are
displayed

6.5.4 Output level

Activating the display

The instrument is in Measuring mode (normal display)
✱ Briefly press the or key (several times if necessary).
The current output levels of the controller outputs.

6.5.5 Current values of the main entries

Activating the display

The instrument is in Measuring mode (normal display)
✱ Briefly press the or key (several times if necessary).
The current values of the main output are displayed.

28
 6 Operation
6.5.6 Curgent values of the optional entries

Activating the display

The instrument is in Measuring mode (normal display)
✱ Briefly press the or key (several times if necessary).
The current values of the optional inputs (1, 2 and 3) are displayed

6.5.7 Current values of the math channels

Activating the display

The instrument is in Measuring mode (normal display)
✱ Briefly press the or key (several times if necessary).
The current values of the main output are displayed.

6.5.8 States of the binary inputs and outputs

Activating the display

The instrument is in Measuring mode (normal display)
✱ Briefly press the or key (several times if necessary.
The states of binary inputs E1 and E2 and of relays K1 through K8 are
displayed. In the example shown here, relay K1 is active.

29
6 Operation
6.5.9 Manual mode overview
Analog outputs (optional boards)
In this example, analog outputs 2 and 3 are working normally.

Switching outputs (PSU board and optional boards)

In this example relay output 2 is in Manual mode.

The instrument is in "normal display" mode

✱ Briefly press the or key (several times if necessary).

Manual mode can only be displayed if at least one output is in Manual mode.
For example Administrator level/Parameter level/Binary outputs/Binary output
1/Manual mode "Active" or "Simulation".
To return to Measuring mode:
press the EXIT key or wait for a "timeout".

6.5.10 Hardware info

These displays are required for phone support.

The instrument is in Measuring mode (normal display)

✱ Press and hold the PGM and keys.

Alternating display

30
 6 Operation

6.5.11 Device info

These displays provide an overview of fitted hardware options and the settings
of inputs (helpful for troubleshooting, etc.).

✱ Press the PGM key for longer than 3 seconds.

✱ Briefly press the or key (several times if necessary).
✱ Select Device info

✱ Press the PGM keys.

✱ Briefly press the or key (several times if necessary).

For further information about the inputs, press the or keys.

6.6 User level

All the parameters that the Administrator (see chapter 6.7 "Administrator
level", page 32) has released can be edited at this level. All the other
parameters (marked by a key ) are read only.
✱ Press the PGM key for longer than 2 seconds.

31
6 Operation
✱ Select "USER LEVEL".

All possible parameters are accessed below. Depending on the configuration

of a specific instrument, some of these parameters may not appear.

6.6.1 Parameters of the User level

See chapter 16.2 "Parameters of the User level", page 105.

6.7 Administrator level

- All the parameters can be edited at this level.
- At this level, it is also possible to define which parameters can be edited by
a "normal" user (operator) and which calibrations can be performed.
To get to the Administrator level, proceed as follows:
✱ Press the PGM key for longer than 2 seconds.
✱ Use the or keys to select "ADMINISTR.-LEVEL".
✱ Use the and keys to enter the password 300 (factory setting).
✱ Confirm the PGM key.

6.7.1 Parameter level

The settings that can be made here are the same as those at the User level,
see "User level", page 31. As the operator (user) has administrator rights here,
the parameters that are locked in the User level can now also be modified.

6.7.2 Release level

All parameters can be released (modification possible) or locked (no
modification possible) for editing at the User level.

6.7.3 Basic setting

The JUMO dTRANS 02 CR has a basic setting wizard, to make it easier for the
user to configure the extensive setting options of the instrument and to avoid
configuration conflicts.
The basic settings are reached via ADMINISTR.-LEVEL/PASSWORD/BASIC
SETTING.
All the important settings are systematically polled here. At the end, once a
request for conformation has been acknowledged, the instrument is initialized
with the new settings. Dependent parameters are checked and adjusted.

32
 6 Operation
Basic setting wizard

Cell type

2-wire 4-wire

Cell constant Cell constant

0.01 / 0.1 / 0.5 /
1.0 / 3.0 / 10.0 0.5 /1.0

Pollution recogn.

Off / On

Sens. break recog.

Off / On

Operating mode

Conductivity TDS customer-specific factor Table

Temp. comp. Temp. coefficient Input variable Input variable

None
Nat. waters µS/cm / mS/cm / µS/cm / mS/cm /
ASTM D1125 neutral Linear 0.0 - 2.20- 8.0%/K kOhm*cm / MOhm*cm kOhm*cm / MOhm*cm
ASTM D1125 acidic
ASTM D1125 alkal. Temp. comp.
Temp. comp.
None None
Nat. waters Nat. waters
ASTM D1125 neutral Linear ASTM D1125 neutral Linear
ASTM D1125 acidic ASTM D1125 acidic
ASTM D1125 alkal. ASTM D1125 alkal.

Temperature compensation source

(manual temperature, Temperature input, optional input 1, 2, 3)

33
6 Operation

Temperature compensation source

(manual temperature, Temperature input, optional input 1, 2, 3)

Temp. coefficient
Temp. coefficient Temp. coefficient Temp. coefficient

0.0 - 2.20- 8.0%/K 0.0 - 2.20- 8.0%/K 0.0 - 2.20- 8.0%/K 0.0 - 2.20- 8.0%/K

TDS factor Unit

Unit MB1 TDS factor 1
Cust. specs. / ppm /
µS/cm / mS/cm / µS/cm / mS/cm /
kOhm*cm / MOhm*cm 0.01 - 0.67- 2.00 0.01 - 0.67- 99.99 kOhm*cm / MOhm*cm

Unit Display format

Display format MB1 Unit 1
Cust. specs. / ppm /
XXXX / XXX.x / µS/cm / mS/cm / XXXX / XXX.x /
[Link] / [Link] Cust. specs. / ppm kOhm*cm / MOhm*cm [Link] / [Link]

2nd measuring range Display format Display format

XXXX / XXX.x / XXXX / XXX.x /
Off Manual Auto. [Link] / [Link] [Link] / [Link]

Unit MB 2 Unit MB 2

µS/cm / mS/cm /
kWcm / MWcm µS/cm / mS/cm

Display format
MB 2
XXXX / XXX.x /
[Link] / [Link]

Temp. comp.
None
Nat. waters
ASTM D1125 neutral Linear
ASTM D1125 acidic
ASTM D1125 alkal.

Temp. coefficient

0.0 - 2.20- 8.0%/K

Supply frequency
- 50 Hz
- 60 Hz

Reinitialize device
No Yes

No change Initialize all

to parameters dependent parameters

34
 6 Operation
6.7.4 Calibration level
Depending on which operating mode has been configured (in the Basic setting
menu), one or more of the following calibration options will be available:
- Cell constant
- Temperature coefficient

6.7.5 Calibration release

Which calibration procedure may be performed directly and which may not
can be configured here, see chapter 8.2.2 "Ways to start the calibration", page
48.

6.7.6 Delete min/max values

If required, the values can be deleted once a request for confirmation has been
acknowledged,
see chapter 6.5.2 "Min/max values of the main input", page 27 or
see chapter 6.5.3 "Min/max values of the optional inputs", page 28.

6.7.7 Delete logbook

The last five calibration processes for each input are archived in the calibration
logbook. If a "Datalogger" optional board is fitted, the date and time are also
archived.
If necessary the logbook can be deleted after a confirmation prompt.

6.7.8 Delete daily batch

If required, the counter can be deleted once a request for confirmation has
been acknowledged.

6.7.9 Delete total batch

If required, the counter can be deleted once a request for confirmation has
been acknowledged.

35
6 Operation
6.8 MANUAL mode/Simulation mode
These functions can be used to set the switching outputs and analog outputs
of the instrument manually to a defined state. This facilitates dry startup,
troubleshooting and customer service, etc. .

MANUAL mode Simulation mode

"Higher order"
controller

Analog outputs Binary outputs

Simulation mode accesses the analog outputs and binary outputs directly.
When simulation mode has been selected, MANUAL mode is not possible!
In MANUAL mode the settings for "higher order controllers" are taken into
consideration.

6.8.1 MANUAL mode only via "higher order" controller functions

Select Manual mode

In the factory setting of the instrument the MANUAL mode parameter is locked
and can only be activated by the administrator!
This parameter must first be released for other users, see "Release level",
page 32.

✱ Set ADMINISTR.-LEVEL/PARAMETER LEVEL/CONTROLLER/[Link].

FUNCT./MANUAL MODE "Locked, Coding or Switching.
Locked = No Manual mode, control is via device.
Coding = The outputs are active as long as the or key is pressed.
Switching = the outputs are active if the or key is pressed. If the
corresponding key is pressed again, the output becomes inactive
again.

36
 6 Operation
Activate Manual mode
The instrument is in Display mode
✱ Press the EXIT and keys for less than 2 seconds.
The word MANUAL appears in the status line of the display.

If the EXIT keys (alone) are pressed for longer than 3 seconds, the instrument
switches to language selection.
If the EXIT and keys are pressed for longer than 3 seconds, the instrument
goes into HOLD mode.
Then the outputs of the instrument respond according to the default settings.
To exit HOLD mode, press the EXIT and keys for longer than 3 seconds.

Control is not longer via the instrument. The output level of the controllers
is 0%.
Controller 1 is activated by the key. In this case the output level of
controller 1 is 100%.
Controller 2 is activated by the key. In this case the output level of
controller 2 is 100%.

Deactivation
✱ Press the EXIT key.
Control is once again through the outputs of the instrument.
The word MANUAL appears in the status line of the display.

6.8.2 Simulation of binary outputs

Activate simulation

In the factory setting of the instrument the MANUAL mode parameter is set to
"No simulation" and can only be activated by the administrator!
This parameter must first be released for other users, see "Release level",
page 32.
If a higher order switching function has been assigned to an output, Simulation
mode is not possible for that output.

✱ Set ADMINISTR. LEVEL/PARAMETER LEVEL/BINARY OUTPUTS/BINARY

OUTPUT1 ( ... 8) "Manual mode no simulation, Inactive or Active".
No simulation = No Manual mode, control is via device.
Inactive = Relay K1 or K2 is de-energized;the word MANUAL
appears in the status line of the display
Active = Relay K1 or K2 is energized;the word MANUAL appears
in the status line of the display

37
6 Operation
Deactivate Manual mode
No simulation = No Manual mode, control is via device.
When the instrument is in display mode, the word MANUAL disappears from
the status line of the display.

6.8.3 Simulation of analog outputs via MANUAL mode

Release and activation
✱ Select activation of simulation of the actual value output:
ADMINISTR.-LEVEL/PARAMETER LEVEL/ANALOG OUTPUTS/ANALOG
OUTPUT 1 (2, 3)/SIMULATION/ON.
With "On" the output takes on the value of the "Simulation value" parameter.
When the instrument is in display mode, the word MANUAL appears in the
status line of the display.

Deactivation
✱ ADMINISTR.-LEVEL/PARAMETER LEVEL/ANALOG OUTPUTS/ANALOG
OUTPUT 1 (2, 3)/SIMULATION/OFF.
The corresponding output of the instrument works again.
When the instrument is in display mode, the word MANUAL disappears from
the status line of the display.

6.9 HOLD mode

In HOLD status the outputs take on the states programmed in the relevant
parameter (controller channel, switching output or analog output).
This function can be used to "freeze" switching outputs and the analog
outputs of the instrument. This means the current status of the output will be
retained even when the measured value changes. Control is not via the
instrument.

If MANUAL mode is activated while HOLD mode is activated, MANUAL mode

takes precedence and MANUAL then appears in the status line of the display!
MANUAL mode can be terminated by pressing the EXIT key.
If HOLD mode is still activated (by the binary input or by keyboard), the
instrument then returns to HOLD mode!

HOLD mode can be activated by pressing the key or by the binary input.

Activation by pressing key

✱ Press and hold the EXIT and keys longer than 3 seconds.
Then the outputs of the instrument respond according to the default
settings.
The word HOLD appears in the status line of the display.

38
 6 Operation

If the EXIT and keys are pressed for less than 3 seconds, the instrument
goes into Manual mode.
Then the outputs of the instrument respond according to the default settings.

Pressing a key to deactivate HOLD mode

✱ Press the EXIT and keys for longer than 3 seconds.

If the EXIT and keys are pressed for less than 3 seconds, the instrument
goes into Manual mode.
Then the outputs of the instrument respond according to the default settings.

Control is through the outputs of the instrument again. The word MANUAL
disappears from the status line of the display.

39
7 Commissioning
7.1 Getting started
Some suggestions follow for configuring the instrument reliably in little time.

✱ Mount the instrument, see chapter 4 "Mounting", page 13.

✱ Install the instrument, see chapter 5 "Installation", page 14 ff.
✱ Call up Administrator level (ADMINISTR. LEVEL).
✱ Enter password 0300 (factory setting).
✱ Call up PARAMETER LEVEL/DISPLAY/OPERAT. TIMEOUT.
✱ Set OPERAT. TIMEOUT to 0 minutes (no timeout).
✱ Leave the Display level with "EXIT"
✱ Leave the Parameter level with "EXIT"
✱ Select BASIC SETTING and work through all the menu items, see chapter
6.7.3 "Basic setting", page 32.
✱ Answer "YES" to the "Reinitialize device" query
✱ Configure the required additional parameters.
✱ Calibrate the instrument to the conductivity sensor and sample medium,
see chapter 8 "Calibrating a conductivity sensor", page 47 or
see chapter 9 "Calibrating a sensor with a standard signal", page 53.

40
 7 Commissioning
7.2 Setting examples
7.2.1 Conductivity measurement, temperature compensated
Measurement of drinking water.

Layout

(3)

(1)
(2)

Data sheet
(1) Transmitter/controller type 202552 202552
(2) Conductivity sensor on the main board 202925
(3) Conductivity cable 202990

Electrical connection
See chapter 5 "Installation", page 14.

Task
Measurement range: 0 to 1.00 mS/cm
Cell constant K: 1.0 1/cm
Output signal: 4 to 20 mA
Temperature measurement Pt100
Limit monitoring: Limit function
Limit value 1: 0.80 mS/cm

41
7 Commissioning
Basic setting

Start the basic settings, see chapter 6.7.3 "Basic setting", page 32
Diagrammatic overview, see "Basic setting wizard", page 33.

Cell type 2-wire

Cell constant 1.0
Broken sensor detection Off
Operating mode Conductivity
Temperature compensation Linear
Temperature compensation source Temperature input
Temperature coefficient 2.20 (factory setting)
Unit mS/cm
Display format [Link]
2nd measuring range Off
Supply frequency 50 Hz

Reinitialize device Yes

Temperature input
Administrator level/Password/Parameter level/Temperature input
Temperature sensor Pt100

Analog output
Administrator level/Password/Parameter level/Analog outputs/Analog output 1
Signal source Main variable
Signal type 4 to 20 mA
Start of scaling 0.00 mS/cm
End of scaling 1.00 mS/cm

Controller settings
See chapter 11.6.3 "Controller with limit value function", page 79.

42
 7 Commissioning
7.2.2 Measurement of ultra-pure water with 2-electrode measuring
sensor
USP limit monitoring

Layout

(3)

(1)

(2)

Data sheet
(1) Transmitter/controller type 202552 202552
(2) Conductivity sensor on the main board 202924
(3) Conductivity cable 202990

Electrical connection
See chapter 5 "Installation", page 14.

Task
Measurement range: 0 to 2.00 µS/cm
Cell constant K: 0.01 1/cm
Output signal: 4 to 20 mA
Temperature measurement Pt100
Limit monitoring: Limit value function
Limit value 1: USP

43
7 Commissioning
Basic setting

Start the basic settings, see chapter 6.7.3 "Basic setting", page 32
Diagrammatic overview, see chapter "Basic setting wizard", page 33.

Cell type 2-wire

Cell constant 0.01
Broken sensor detection Off
Operating mode Conductivity
Temperature compensation None
Temperature compensation source Temperature input
Unit µS/cm
Display format [Link]
2nd measuring range Off
Supply frequency 50 Hz

Reinitialize device Yes

Temperature input
Administrator level/Password/Parameter level/Temperature input
Temperature sensor Pt100

Analog output
Administrator level/Password/Parameter level/Analog outputs/Analog output 1
Signal source Main variable
Signal type 4 to 20 mA
Start of scaling 0.00 µS/cm
End of scaling 2.00 µS/cm

Controller settings
See chapter 11.6.2 "Limit monitoring to USP", page 78.

44
 7 Commissioning
7.2.3 Measurement of ultra-pure water with 2-electrode measuring
sensor
Display in MOhm × cm.

Layout

(3)

(1)

(2)

Data sheet
(1) Transmitter/controller type 202552 202552
(2) Conductivity sensor on the main board 202924
(3) Conductivity cable 202990

Electrical connection
See chapter 5 "Installation", page 14.

Task
Measurement range: 0 to 20.00 MOhm × cm
Cell constant K: 0.01 1/cm
Output signal: 4 to 20 mA
Temperature measurement Pt100
Limit monitoring: Limit value function
Limit value 1: 10.00 MOhm × cm

45
7 Commissioning
Basic setting

Start the basic settings, see chapter 6.7.3 "Basic setting", page 32
Diagrammatic overview, see chapter "Basic setting wizard", page 33.

Cell type 2-wire

Cell constant 0.01
Broken sensor detection Off
Operating mode Conductivity
Temperature compensation None
Temperature compensation source Temperature input
Unit MOhm × cm
Display format [Link]
2nd measuring range Off
Supply frequency 50 Hz

Reinitialize device Yes

Temperature input
Administrator level/Password/Parameter level/Temperature input
Temperature sensor Pt100

Analog output
Administrator level/Password/Parameter level/Analog outputs/Analog output 1
Signal source Main variable
Signal type 4 to 20 mA
Start of scaling 0.00 MOhm × cm
End of scaling 20.00 MOhm × cm

Controller settings
See chapter 11.6.1 "Simple limit monitoring", page 78.

46
 8 Calibrating a conductivity sensor
8.1 Notes
During calibration, relays and analog output signals adopt their configured
states!

When is calibration required?

- The temperature coefficient of the sample medium must be determined
once.
- The cell constant must be calibrated at regular intervals (depending on the
sample medium and requirements).
Every successfully completed calibration is documented in the calibration
logbook, see chapter 10 "Calibration logbook", page 73.

8.2 General information

The electrical properties of all sensors vary slightly from instance to instance
and also change during operation (due to deposits or wear, etc.). This changes
the output signal of the sensor.

8.2.1 Requirements
- The instrument must be supplied with voltage, see chapter 5 "Installation",
page 14 ff.
- A conductivity sensor must be connected to the transmitter.

For a configuration example see chapter 7.2.1 "Conductivity measurement,

temperature compensated", page 41.
A conductivity sensor be
- connected directly to the main input or
- connected to the "Analog input (universal)" optional board via a transmitter.

- "Conductivity" must be configured as operating mode in the basic setting.

- The instrument is in Measuring mode.

47
8 Calibrating a conductivity sensor
8.2.2 Ways to start the calibration
Select the input to which the conductivity sensor is connected.

If Calibration level is not released

Press the PGM key for longer than 3 seconds/ADMINISTR.-LEVEL/
PASSWORD/CALIBR.-LEVEL/MAIN INPUT or ANALOG INPUT.

If Calibration level is released

Press the PGM and keys simultaneously/MAIN INPUT or
ANALOG INPUT.

If Calibration level is released

Press the PGM key for longer than 3 seconds/CALIBR.-LEVEL/MAIN INPUT or
ANALOG INPUT.

8.2.3 Calibration options

The instrument provides two calibration options for adjusting the JUMO
dTRANS 02 CR to the measuring point:

Calibration of the temperature coefficient

See chapter 8.4 "Calibrating the relative cell constant", page 51.

Calibration of the cell constant

See chapter 8.4 "Calibrating the relative cell constant", page 51.

8.3 Calibration of the temperature coefficient of the sample

medium
✱ Make preparations, see chapter 8.2 "General information", page 47.
✱ Start calibration, see chapter 8.2.2 "Ways to start the calibration", page 48.
✱ Select "[Link]. LIN.".

48
 8 Calibrating a conductivity sensor

Now the source of temperature acquisition can be selected (manually, or using

the temperature input of the PSU board, or the temperature input via the
optional board). This source will be active for the duration of the calibration.
An example follows: automatic temperature acquisition using the temperature
sensor integrated into the conductivity sensor.

The current sensor temperature appears in the display (+ flashing) (1).

(1)

✱ Enter the required working temperature and confirm your entry with the PGM

key.

The working temperature must be at least 5 °C above or below the reference

temperature (25.0 °C).

The conductivity (399 µS/cm) at the current temperature (24.3 °C) now
appears on the right of the LC display.
The temperatures T1 (25 °C) and T2 (70.0 °C) that have yet to be triggered are
shown on the left.
✱ Heat the sample medium until the working temperature is reached.

During calibration, the rate of temperature change in the measurement

solution must not exceed 10 °C/min.

49
8 Calibrating a conductivity sensor

Calibration is also possible in the cooling process (with a falling temperature).

It starts above the working temperature and ends below the working
temperature.

As soon as the temperature of the sample medium exceeds T1 (25 °C), this is
hidden on the display. The uncompensated conductivity at the current
temperature is displayed on the right.

If the temperature of the medium exceeded T2 (73.0 °C), the instrument

determines the temperature coefficient.
The LC display now shows the determined temperature coefficient as %/K.

✱ Use the PGM key to accept the temperature coefficient or

the EXIT key to reject it.
The transmitter is in "measuring mode" and displays the compensated
conductivity of the solution.

The currently measured conductivity can be coerced manually by pressing the

PGM
key. This may be useful if the reference or working temperature cannot be
reached precisely.
However, the calibration result incorporates a certain amount of inaccuracy!

50
 8 Calibrating a conductivity sensor
8.4 Calibrating the relative cell constant
✱ Make preparations, see chapter 8.2 "General information", page 47.
✱ Start calibration, see chapter 8.2.2 "Ways to start the calibration", page 48.
✱ Select the relative cell constant.

✱ Immerse the conductivity sensor in a reference solution with a known

conductivity.

The measurement solution must maintain a constant temperature during

calibration! The conductivity sensor must be kept at a distance of at least
20 mm from the container wall during the calibration and must not be moved!

The current measurement value and the temperature are displayed.

✱ When the measurement value is steady, press the PGM key;

the conductivity measurement flashes in the display.
✱ Set the value to the actual conductivity.
✱ Press the PGM key. The relative cell constant determined by the instrument
is displayed (as a %).

✱ Use the PGM

key to accept the value or the EXIT key to reject it.
✱ The current measurement value and the temperature are displayed.

51
8 Calibrating a conductivity sensor
8.4.1 Entering the cell constant manually
If the exact cell constant is known (for example a conductivity sensor with the
ASTM test report), the value can be entered directly.

ADMINISTR.-LEVEL/PARAMETER LEVEL/INPUT CONDUCT./

REL. CELL CONST.

8.4.2 Cell constants

Two-electrode systems

Cell constant Setting range of the Resulting

[1/cm] relative cell constant usable range [1/cm]
0.01 0.002 to 0.05
0.1 0.02 to 0.5
1.0 20 - 500 % 0.2 to 5
3.0 0.6 to 15
10.0 2.0 to 50

Four-electrode systems

Cell constant Setting range of the Resulting

[1/cm] relative cell constant usable range [1/cm]
0.5 0.1 to 0.75
20 - 150 %
1.0 0.2 to 1.5

52
 9 Calibrating a sensor with a standard signal
9.1 General information
During calibration, relays and analog output signals adopt their configured
states!

Sensors with a standard signal output can only be connected to an "Analog

input (universal)" optional board!
The sensors connected to the instrument should be cleaned and the
instrument itself calibrated, at regular intervals (subject to the sample
medium).
Every successfully completed calibration is documented in the calibration
logbook, see chapter 10 "Calibration logbook", page 73.

9.1.1 Operating modes

The operating mode selection depends on which sensor (transmitter) is
connected.

Linear operating mode

For example sensor for free chlorine, redox, pressure, liquid level or humidity

pH operating mode
For example pH sensor

Conductivity operating mode

For example sensor for conductivity, concentration

Customer specs.
For sensors with non-linear characteristics.
Up to xx interpolation points can be defined in an instrument table.
This allows for an excellent approximation of a non-linear characteristic.

Chlorine, pH and temperature-compensated

Combination of chlorine sensor and pH sensor and temperature sensor.
The measured value for chlorine often depends to a great extent on the pH
value of the solution.
The chlorine measurement is compensated depending on the pH value in this
operating mode. The pH measurement is temperature-compensated

53
9 Calibrating a sensor with a standard signal
9.1.2 Calibration options
Different calibration options are available depending on the operating mode.
Operating mode Calibration options Page
1-point 2-point Limit point Rel. Temp.
cell const. coeffic.
Linear X X X - - 55
pH X X - - - 59
Conductivity - - - X X 63
Concentration - - - X 69
Customer specs. Due to the table with interpolation points, no calibration is required
Chlorine, - - X - - 71
pH-compensated

- With one-point (offset) calibration, the zero point of the sensor is

calibrated.
- With two-point calibration, the zero point and slope of the sensor are
calibrated. This is the recommended calibration for most sensors.
- With one-point final value calibration, the slope of the sensor
is calibrated. This is the recommended calibration for chlorine sensors, for
example.
- Calibration of relative cell constant
With conductivity sensors only.
- Calibration of the temperature coefficient
With conductivity sensors only.

9.1.3 Ways to start the calibration

Select the input to which the sensor is connected.

If Calibration level is not released

Press the PGM key for longer than 3 seconds/ADMINISTR.-LEVEL/
PASSWORD/CALIBR.-LEVEL/OPTION INPUT.

If Calibration level is released

Press the PGM
and keys simultaneously/OPTION INPUT.

If Calibration level is released

Press the PGM key for longer than 3 seconds/CALIBR.-LEVEL/
OPTION INPUT.

54
 9 Calibrating a sensor with a standard signal
9.2 Linear operating mode
9.2.1 1-point calibration
This example is based on a liquid level measurement (as a %).
The input signal is provided by a pressure transmitter.

The transmitter is in "Measuring mode".

✱ Now bring the system to a defined state (e.g. when measuring liquid level,
empty the container).
✱ Start the calibration, see "Ways to start the calibration", page 54.
✱ Select the zero point calibration with the PGM key.

✱ Wait until the display value has stabilized; then press PGM to continue.

Set the displayed value to the required value (usually 0%) with the and
keys; then press PGM to continue.

The zero point determined by the instrument is displayed.

Use the PGM key to accept the value or
the EXIT key to reject it.

55
9 Calibrating a sensor with a standard signal
The instrument returns to Measuring mode.

Calibration is complete
After rinsing, the sensor can again be used to take measurements.

9.2.2 2-point calibration

The values determined during calibration (zero point and slope) work out as
follows:
Input value
Display = + Zero point
Slope
This example is based on a liquid level measurement. The input signal is
provided by a pressure transmitter.

The transmitter is in "Measuring mode".

✱ Now bring the system to a defined state (e.g. when measuring liquid level,
empty the container).
✱ Start the calibration, see "Ways to start the calibration", page 54.
✱ Select the 2-point calibration with the PGM
key.

✱ Wait until the display value has stabilized; then press PGM

to continue.

56
9 Calibrating a sensor with a standard signal

✱ Set the displayed value to the required value (usually 0) with the and
keys; then press PGM to continue.

✱ Now bring the system to a second defined state (e.g. when measuring
liquid level, container full).
Wait until the display value has stabilized; then press PGM to
continue

✱ Set the displayed value to "Maximum" (usually 100%) with the and
keys; then press PGM to continue.

The zero point and slope determined by the instrument are displayed.
✱ Use the PGM key to accept the calibrated values or
reject them with the EXIT key.

✱ The instrument returns to Measuring mode.

57
9 Calibrating a sensor with a standard signal
Calibration is complete
After rinsing, the sensor can again be used to take measurements.

9.2.3 Calibration limit point

This example is based on a measurement of free chlorine. The input signal is
provided by a corresponding transmitter.

The transmitter is in "Measuring mode".

✱ The process must now be brought to the state that is as relevant as

possible to the final value (e.g. when measuring chlorine, the required
concentration).
✱ Start the calibration, see "Ways to start the calibration", page 54.
✱ Select the limit point calibration with the PGM key.

✱ Wait until the display value has stabilized; then press PGM to continue.

Set the displayed value to the measured reference value with the or
keys; then press PGM to continue.

The slope determined by the instrument is displayed.

58
 9 Calibrating a sensor with a standard signal
✱ Use the PGM key to accept the value or the EXIT
key to reject it.

✱ The instrument returns to Measuring mode.

Calibration is complete
After rinsing, the sensor can again be used to take measurements.

9.3 pH operating mode

9.3.1 Zero-point (1-point) calibration
This example is based on a glass combination electrode with a connected
two-wire transmitter.

The transmitter is in "Measuring mode".

✱ Perform calibration as follows.

Zero point (1-point) calibration

✱ Make preparations, see chapter 8.2 "General information", page 47 .
✱ Start calibration, see chapter 8.2.2 "Ways to start the calibration", page 48.

59
9 Calibrating a sensor with a standard signal
✱ Select zero point calibration.

✱ Immerse the combination electrode in a buffer solution with a known pH

value.
✱ Start the zero point calibration with the PGM key.

Now the source of temperature acquisition can be selected (manually, or using

the temperature input of the PSU board, or the temperature input via the
optional board). This source will be active for the duration of the calibration.
An example follows: manual temperature entry.

✱ To enter the temperature manually, use the and keys to set the
calibration solution temperature and confirm your entry with the PGM key.

✱ Wait until the display value has stabilized; then press PGM to continue.

✱ Set the displayed value to the buffer solution value with the or keys;
then press PGM to continue.

60
 9 Calibrating a sensor with a standard signal
✱ Use the PGM key to accept the zero point or the EXIT key to reject it.

The instrument returns to Measuring mode.

9.3.2 2-point calibration

This example is based on a glass combination electrode with a connected
two-wire transmitter.

The transmitter is in "Measuring mode".

✱ Perform calibration as follows:

2-point calibration

The buffer solutions (reference solutions) used for calibration must differ by at
least 2 pH!
During the calibration, the temperature of the two buffer solutions must be
identical and remain constant!

✱ Make preparations, see chapter 8.2 "General information", page 47 .

✱ Start calibration, see chapter 8.2.2 "Ways to start the calibration", page 48.
✱ Select 2-point calibration.

61
9 Calibrating a sensor with a standard signal
✱ Immerse the combination electrode in the first buffer solution with the
known pH value.
✱ Start the two-point calibration with the PGM key.

Now the source of temperature acquisition can be selected (manually, or using

the temperature input of the PSU board, or the temperature input via the
optional board). This source will be active for the duration of the calibration.
An example follows: manual temperature entry.

✱ To enter the temperature manually, use the and keys to set the
calibration solution temperature and confirm your entry with the PGM key.

✱ Wait until the display value has stabilized; then press PGM to continue.

✱ Set the displayed value to the value of the first buffer solution with the
and keys; then press PGM to continue.

✱ Rinse and dry the pH combination electrode.

✱ Immerse the pH combination electrode in the second buffer solution.
✱ Wait until the display value has stabilized; then press PGM to continue.

62
 9 Calibrating a sensor with a standard signal

✱ Set the displayed value to the second buffer solution value with the or
keys; then press PGM to continue.

The zero point and slope determined by the instrument are displayed.
✱ Use the PGM key to accept the calibrated values or
reject them with the EXIT key.

The instrument returns to Measuring mode.

9.4 Conductivity operating mode

9.4.1 Calibration of the relative cell constant
This example is based on a conductivity sensor with a connected two-wire
transmitter.

The transmitter is in "Measuring mode".

✱ Immerse the conductivity sensor in a reference solution with a known

63
9 Calibrating a sensor with a standard signal
conductivity.
✱ Start the calibration, see "Ways to start the calibration", page 54.
✱ Select REL. CELL CONST.
✱ Press the PGM key.

✱ When the measured value is stable, press the PGM key

✱ The measured conductivity value flashes on the display.

✱ Use the or keys to set the value to the actual conductivity.

✱ Press the PGM key;
the relative cell constant determined by the instrument is displayed (as a
%).

✱ Use the PGM key to accept the temperature coefficient or

the EXIT key to reject it.

The current measurement value and the temperature are displayed.

64
 9 Calibrating a sensor with a standard signal
Calibration is complete
After rinsing, the sensor can again be used to take measurements.

9.4.2 Calibration of the temperature coefficient

Linear temperature coefficient

This example is based on a conductivity sensor with a connected two-wire

transmitter.

The transmitter is in "Measuring mode".

✱ Immerse the conductivity sensor in the sample medium.

Start the calibration, see "Ways to start the calibration", page 54.
✱ Select "LINEAR TEMP. COEF.".

The current sensor temperature flashes in the display (1).

(1)

The working temperature must be at least 5 °C above or below the reference

temperature (25.0 °C).

✱ Enter the required working temperature and confirm your entry.

65
9 Calibrating a sensor with a standard signal
The LC display now shows the selected working temperature (flashing) (2).

(2)

✱ Press the PGM key.

The conductivity (399 µS/cm) at the current temperature (24.3 °C) now
appears on the right of the LC display.
The temperatures T1 (25 °C) and T2 (70.0 °C) that have yet to be
triggered are shown on the left.
✱ Press the PGM key.
✱ Heat the sample medium until the working temperature is reached.

During calibration, the rate of temperature change in the measurement

solution must not exceed 10 °C/min.
Calibration is also possible in the cooling process (with a falling temperature).
It starts above the working temperature and ends below the working
temperature.

As soon as the temperature of the sample medium exceeds T1 (25 °C), this is
hidden on the display. The uncompensated conductivity at the current
temperature is displayed on the right.

If the temperature of the medium exceeded T2 (73.0 °C), the instrument

determines the temperature coefficient.
The LC display now shows the determined temperature coefficient as %/K.

✱ Use the PGM key to accept the temperature coefficient or

the EXIT key to reject it.

66
 9 Calibrating a sensor with a standard signal

The transmitter is in "Measuring mode" and displays the compensated

conductivity of the solution.

Calibration is complete
After rinsing, the sensor can again be used to take measurements.

With non-linear temperature coefficient (TEMP. COEFF. CURVE)

This example is based on a conductivity sensor with a connected two-wire

transmitter.
The non-linear temperature coefficient can only be calibrated with a rising
temperature!
The start temperature must be below the configured reference temperature
(usually 25 °C)!
The "[Link]. CURVE" menu item is only displayed if a temperature
sensor is connected and "[Link]. CURVE" is configured as the type of
temperature compensation.

The transmitter is in "Measuring mode".

✱ Immerse the conductivity sensor in the sample medium.

Start the calibration, see "Ways to start the calibration", page 54.
✱ Select "TEMP. COEFF. CURVE " and press the PGM key.

✱ Enter the required start temperature (1) for the temp. coef. curve.

67
9 Calibrating a sensor with a standard signal

(1)

✱ Enter the required end temperature (2) for the temp. coef. curve.

(2)

✱ Heat the sample medium continuously

(3) the current uncompensated conductivity
(4) the current temperature of the sample medium
(5) the first target temperature

(3)

(4)

(5)

During calibration, the rate of temperature change in the measurement

solution must not exceed 10 °C/min.

During the calibration process, the instrument displays values for the following
five temperature interpolation points.

The end temperature has been reached

Use the PGM key to accept the temperature coefficients or
the EXIT key to reject the calibration result.

The LC display now shows the determined temperature coefficients as %/K.

✱ Use the PGM key to accept the temperature coefficients or

68
 9 Calibrating a sensor with a standard signal
the EXIT key to reject the values.

The transmitter is in "Measuring mode" and displays the compensated

conductivity of the solution.

Calibration is complete
After rinsing, the sensor can again be used to take measurements.

9.5 Concentration operating mode

9.5.1 Calibration of the relative cell constant
This example is based on a conductivity sensor with a connected two-wire
transmitter.
The conductivity of a caustic solution is converted into a concentration value
[%] by the instrument.

The transmitter is in "Measuring mode".

✱ Immerse the conductivity sensor in a sample medium with a known

conductivity.
✱ Start the calibration, see "Ways to start the calibration", page 54.
✱ Press the PGM key.

The measured conductivity value is displayed.

✱ Wait until the measurement value has stabilized.

69
9 Calibrating a sensor with a standard signal
✱ Press the PGM key.

✱ Use the and keys to set the value to the actual conductivity.

✱ Press the PGM key; the relative cell constant determined by the instrument is
displayed (as a %).

✱ Use the PGM key to accept the relative cell constant or

the EXIT key to reject the values.

The transmitter is in "Measuring mode" and displays the compensated

conductivity of the solution.

Calibration is complete
After rinsing, the sensor can again be used to take measurements.

70
 9 Calibrating a sensor with a standard signal
9.6 Chlorine measurement operating mode,
pH-compensated
9.6.1 Final value calibration

The pH signal and temperature signal are supplied via the main input, the
chlorine signal (standard signal) via the optional input.

The transmitter is in "Measuring mode".

Calibrate pH sensor
✱ Perform calibration, see "pH operating mode", page 59.

Calibrate chlorine sensor

✱ The process must now be brought to the state that is as relevant as
possible to the final value (e.g. when measuring chlorine, the required
concentration).
✱ Start the calibration, see "Ways to start the calibration", page 54.
✱ Select the limit point calibration with the PGM key.

✱ Wait until the display value has stabilized; then press PGM to continue.

Set the displayed value to the measured reference value with the or
keys; then press PGM to continue.

71
9 Calibrating a sensor with a standard signal

The slope determined by the instrument is displayed.

✱ Use the PGM key to accept the value or the EXIT
key to reject it.

The instrument returns to Measuring mode.

Calibration is complete
After rinsing, the sensor can again be used to take measurements.

72
 10 Calibration logbook
10.1 General information
The characteristic data for the last 5 successful calibration processed are
documented in the calibration logbook.

Calling up
The instrument is in Measuring mode.
✱ Press the PGM key for longer than 3 seconds.

Select input
Briefly press the PGM
key.

Most recent successful calibration

The "time stamp" in the following screen printouts (top left, for example 11-
06-06 12:02) only appears if optional slot 3 is fitted with the "Datalogger with
interface RS485"!

✱ Briefly press the key.

Next most recent successful calibration

✱ Briefly press the key.

73
11 Controller
11.1 General information
Apart from faulty installation, incorrect settings on the instrument may also
affect the proper functioning of the subsequent process or lead to damage.
You should therefore always provide safety equipment that is independent of
the instrument and it should only be possible for qualified personnel to make
settings.

11.2 Controller functions

"Software" control functions are assigned to "Hardware" outputs for this
instrument.

(1) (3)
L
d

(2) H (4)
a
1 Software controller for "simple" switching functions (e.g. alarm control)
2 Software controller for "higher order" switching functions (e.g. PID
controller)
3 "Switching" hardware output (e.g. relay)
3 "Continuous" hardware output (analog output)

11.2.1 Simple switching functions

Up to four switching functions can be set (limit value 1, 2, 3, 4)
ADMINISTR.-LEVEL/PARAMETER LEVEL/LIMIT VALUE CONTR./
LIMIT VALUE x.

11.2.2 Higher order switching functions (PID)

Higher order switching functions are configured at the parameter level via the
parameters of "Controller 1 or 2".
ADMINISTR.-LEVEL/PARAMETER LEVEL/CONTROLLER/CONTROLLER 1(2)/
CONFIGURATION/CONTROLLER TYPE/e.g. PULSE LENGTHS

74
 11 Controller
11.2.3 Typical operator level parameters
Binary outputs Explanation
Signal source
No signal No switching function desired
Limit control
"Simple" switching functions
1 to 4
Alarm function (AF1)
Alarm function (AF2)
Alarm function (AF7)
Alarm function (AF8)

Controller 1(2) "Higher order" switching functions

Limit value
Pulse width
Pulse frequency
Steady
Modulating

11.3 Software controllers and outputs

Simple controller functions

L
d
(1)
H
a

d d d

(2)
a a a

1 Main board
2 Optional board
L Simple controller
H Higher order controller
d Digital output
a Analog output

75
11 Controller

If "Simple controller functions" have been configured, only the digital outputs
can be controlled!
The operator must configure which of the digital outputs will be controlled -
the main board or optional board 1, 2 or 3

Higher order controller functions

L
d
(1)
H
a

d d d

(2)
a a a

1 Main board
2 Optional board
L Simple controller
H Higher order controller
d Digital output
a Analog output

If "higher order controller functions" have been configured, both the digital
outputs and the analog outputs can be controlled.
The operator must configure which of the outputs will be controlled - the main
board or optional board 1, 2 or 3

Additional explanations, see chapter 16.1 "Glossary", page 93.

76
 11 Controller
11.4 Configuration of higher order controllers
11.4.1 Structure

Controllers

Controller special functions

(if necessary)

Software
Controller 1 Controller 2

Configuration Configuration

Parameter set 1 Parameter set 2 Parameter set 1 Parameter set 2

Hardware
Controller 1 Controller 1 Controller 2 Controller 2
Output 1 Output 2 Output 1 Output 2

11.5 Parameter sets

Different process steps may require different controller settings. The
instrument offers the option of creating two parameter sets and then switching
between them by means of a binary input.

Defining a parameter set

ADMINISTR.-LEVEL/PARAMETER LEVEL/CONTROLLER 1(2)/
PARAMETER SET 1(2)
see "Controller", page 108.

Configuring parameter set switchover

ADMINISTR.-LEVEL/PARAMETER LEVEL/BINARY INPUTS/
BINARY INPUT 1(2)/PARAMET. SWITCHOVER
see "Binary inputs", page 108.

77
11 Controller
11.6 Sample configurations
11.6.1 Simple limit monitoring
Configuration
Limit monitoring
Limit value 1
Signal source: Main value
Switching function: Alarm function (AF8)
Switching point: 10.00 MOhm × cm
Hysteresis: 0.50 MOhm × cm

Configuration of binary output, e.g. relay)

Binary outputs
Binary output 1
Signal source: Limit monitoring 1
At calibration: Standard operation
Error: Inactive
HOLD mode: Frozen
Turn-on delay: 0 seconds
Turn-off delay: 0 seconds
Wiper time: 0 seconds
Manual mode: No simulation

11.6.2 Limit monitoring to USP

Configuration
Limit monitoring
Limit value 1
Signal source: Main value
Switching function: USP
Switching point: derived automatically from table, see "Excerpt
from USP <645>", page 100
Hysteresis 0.50 µS/cm

Configuration of binary output, e.g. relay)

Binary outputs
Binary output 1
Signal source: Limit monitoring 1
At calibration: Standard operation

78
 11 Controller
Error: Inactive
HOLD mode: Frozen
Turn-on delay: 0 seconds
Turn-off delay: 0 seconds
Wiper time: 0 seconds
Manual mode: No simulation

11.6.3 Controller with limit value function

Configuration of software controllers
Controller 1
Configuration
Controller type: Pulse value
1
Controller actual value : Main variable
Stroke retransmission1 : No signal
Additive disturbance1: No signal
1
Multiplicative disturbance : No signal
Min./max. contact: Max. contact
Inactive/active contact: Active contact
HOLD mode 0%
HOLD output: 0%
Error: 0%
Alarm control: Off
Parameter set 1
Min. setpoint: As required
Max. setpoint: As required
Setpoint: 0.80 mS/cm
Hysteresis: As required
On-delay: As required
Delayed release: As required
Alarm delay: As required

Configuration of binary output, e.g. relay)

Binary outputs
Binary output 1
Signal source: Controller 1 output 1

1 This parameter only appears if "Separate controllers" has been configured in

special controller functions.

79
12 Setup program
12.1 Configurable parameters
Both the setup program (00560380) and the PC interface cable with USB/TTL
converter (00456352) are available as options and provide a convenient way to
adapt the transmitter to meet requirements:
- Setting the measuring range.
- Setting the behavior of outputs when the measuring range is exceeded.
- Setting the functions of switching outputs K1 to K8.
- Setting the functions of the binary inputs.
- Setting a customized characteristic
- etc.

Data can only be transferred from or to the transmitter if it is supplied with

voltage, see chapter 5 "Installation", page 14ff.

Connection
(3)

(1)

(2)

(1) JUMO dTRANS 02 CR

(2) PC interface cable with USB/TTL converter,
Part no. 00456352
(3) PC or notebook

80
 12 Setup program
12.2 Documenting the instrument configuration
✱ Start the setup program
✱ Establish the connection to the instrument (1).
Read the instrument configuration (2).

(2) (1)

81
12 Setup program
12.3 Special features for "Datalogger"
✱ Start the setup program
✱ Establish the connection to the instrument (1).
✱ Read the instrument configuration (2).

(1) (2)

✱ Read data from datalogger (for example table view)

- Mark datalogger icon (3)
- Read values from the instrument (4)

(3)

(4)

82
 12 Setup program

✱ Export data (for processing in an external program).

83
13 Eliminating faults and malfunctions

Problem Possible cause Action

No measurement display There is no voltage supply Check the voltage supply
or
current output
Measurement display Sensor not immersed in Top up the container
0000 or medium;
current output 4 mA level in container too low
Flow-through fitting is blocked Clean the flow-through fitting
Sensor faulty Replace the sensor
Incorrect or Sensor faulty Replace the sensor
fluctuating Sensor positioning incorrect Choose another installation
measurement display location
Air bubbles Optimize assembly
Measurement overrange

Measurement underrange

Choose a suitable measuring

Main input: range
Measurement range "out of range"

Compensation range has been

left

Measurement overrange

Measurement underrange
Choose a suitable measuring
range

Temperature input:
Measurement range "out of range"

Compensation range has been

left
Choose a suitable measuring
Temperature input: range
Measurement range "out of range"

Coating
Clean electrodes.
Replace conductivity sensor.

84
 13 Eliminating faults and malfunctions
Configuration change OK

Configuration change OK

Inhibit via binary contact Check configuration and unlock if

necessary

Do not release If appropriate release in the

release level

Test

Inhibit via binary contact Check configuration and unlock if

necessary

Cancel in basic setting OK

Check hardware

Check fitting, adjust if necessary

Instrument had no voltage supply Establish voltage supply

for a very long time Set the datalogger time

85
14 Technical data
Inputs (main board)
Main input Measuring range/ Accuracy Effect of temperature
control range
µS/cm 0.000 to 9.999 ≤ 0.6 % of range + 0.3 µS × cell 0.2 %/10 K
00.00 to 99.99 constant (K)
000.0 to 999.9
0000 to 9999
mS/cm 0.000 to 9.999 ≤ 0.6 % of range + 0.3 µS × cell 0.2 %/10 K
00.00 to 99.99 constant (K)
000.0 to 999.9
0000 to 9999a
kΩ × cm 0.000 to 9.999 ≤ 0.6 % of range + 0.3 µS × cell 0.2 %/10 K
00.00 to 99.99 constant (K)
000.0 to 999.9
0000 to 9999
MΩ × cm 0.000 to 9.999 ≤ 0.6 % of range + 0.3 µS × cell 0.2 %/10 K
00.00 to 99.99 constant (K)
000.0 to 999.9
0000 to 9999
Secondary input
Temperature Pt100/1000 -50 to +250 °Cb ≤ 0.25% of range 0.2 %/10 K
Temperature NTC/PTC 0.1 to 30 kΩ ≤ 1.5 % of range 0.2 %/10 K
Entry via table with 20 value pairs
Standard signal 0(4) to 20 mA or 0 to 10 V 0.25 % of range 0.2 %/10 K
Resistance transmitter Minimum: 100 Ω ±5 Ω 0.1 %/10 K
Maximum: 3 kΩ
a
In the range between 1 to 10 S the accuracy is 1 % of the measuring range.
b
Selectable in °F

Resistance thermometer inputs (optional board)

Designation Connection type Measuring range Measuring accuracy Effect of ambient
3-wire/4-wire 2-wire temperature
Pt100 DIN EN 60751 2-wire/3-wire/ -200 to +850 °C ≤ 0.05 % ≤ 0.4 % 50 ppm/K
(factory-set) 4-wire
Pt1000 DIN EN 60751 2-wire/3-wire/ -200 to +850 °C ≤ 0.1 % ≤ 0.2 % 50 ppm/K
(factory-set) 4-wire
Sensor lead resistance Maximum 30 Ω per line with three- and four-wire circuit
Measurement current Approx. 250 µA
Lead compensation Not required for three- and four-wire circuit. With a 2-wire circuit, lead resistance can be
compensated in the software by correcting the process value.

Standard signals inputs (optional board)

Designation Measuring range Measuring accuracy Ambient temperature
effect
Voltage 0(2) to 10 V ≤ 0.05 % 100 ppm/K
0 to 1 V
Input resistanceE > 100 kΩ
Electrical current 0(4) to 20 mA, ≤ 0.05 % 100 ppm/K
voltage drop ≤ 1.5 V
Resistance transmitter Minimum: 100 Ω ±4 Ω 100 ppm/K
Maximum: 4 kΩ

86
 14 Technical data
Temperature compensation
Type of compensation Rangea
Linear 0 to 8 %/K -10 to +160 °C
ASTM D1125 - 95 (ultra-pure water) 0 to 100 °C
Natural waters (ISO 7888) 0 to 36 °C
Reference temperature
Adjustable from 15 to 30 °C;
preset to 25 °C (default)
a
Note the sensor operating temperature range!

Measuring circuit monitoring

Inputs Underrange/overrange Short circuit Broken lead
Conductivity Yes Depends on measuring range Depends on measuring range
Temperature Yes Yes Yes
Voltage 2 to 10 V Yes Yes Yes
0 to 10 V Yes No No
Current 4 to 20 mA Yes Yes Yes
0 to 20 mA Yes No No
Resistance transmitter No No Yes

Two-electrode systems
Cell constant Setting range of the Resulting usable range
[1/cm] relative cell constant [1/cm]
0.01 0.002 to 0.05
0.1 0.02 to 0.5
1.0 20 to 500 % 0.2 to 5
3.0 0.6 to 15
10.0 2.0 to 50

Four-electrode systems
Cell constant Setting range of the Resulting usable range
[1/cm] relative cell constant [1/cm]
0.5 0.1 to 0.75
20 to 150 %
1.0 0.2 to 1.5

Binary input
Activation Floating contact is open: function is not active
Floating contact is closed: function is active
Function Key lock, manual mode, HOLD, HOLD inverse, alarm suppression, freeze measured value,
level lock, reset partial quantity, reset total quantity, parameter set switchover

Controller
Controller type Limit comparators, limit controllers, pulse length controllers, pulse frequency
controllers, modulating controllers, continuous controllers
Controller structure P/PI/PD/PID

87
14 Technical data
Outputs
Relay (changeover) PSU board
Contact rating 5 A at AC 240 V resistive load
Contact service life 350,000 operations at nominal load/750,000 operations at 1 A
Voltage supply for PSU board Electrically isolated, non-controlled
2-wire transmitter DC 17 V at 20 mA, open-circuit voltage approx. DC 25 V
Voltage supply for Optional board DC 12 V; 10 mA
inductive proximity switch
Relay (changeover) Optional board
Contact rating 8 A at AC 240 V resistive load
Contact service life 100,000 operations at nominal load/350,000 operations at 3 A
Relay SPST (normally open) Optional board
Contact rating 3 A at AC 240 V resistive load
Contact service life 350,000 operations at nominal load/900,000 operations at 1 A
Solid state relay Optional board
Contact rating 1 A at 240 V
Protective circuit Varistor
PhotoMOS® relay Optional board U ≤ AC/DC 50 V
I ≤ 200 mA
Voltage Optional board
Output signals 0 to 10 V or 2 to 10 V
Load resistance Rload ≥ 500 Ω
Accuracy ≤ 0.5 %
Electrical current Optional board
Output signals 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA
Load resistance Rload ≤ 500 Ω
Accuracy ≤ 0.5 %

Display
Type LC graphic display, blue with background lighting, 122 × 32 pixels

Electrical data
Voltage supply (switch-mode PSU) AC 110 to 240 V +10/-15 %; 48 to 63 Hz or
AC/DC 20 to 30 V; 48 to 63 Hz
Electrical safety To DIN EN 61010, Part 1
Overvoltage category II, pollution degree 2
Power draw Approx. 14 VA (20 A fuse max.)
Data backup EEPROM
Electrical connection On the back via screw terminals,
conductor cross-section up to max. 2.5 mm2
Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC) DIN EN 61326-1
Interference emission Class A
Interference immunity To industrial requirements

Enclosure
Enclosure type Plastic enclosure for panel mounting to DIN IEC 61554 (indoor use)
Depth behind panel 90 mm
Ambient temperature -5 to +55 °C
Storage temperature -30 to +70 °C
Climatic rating Rel. humidity ≤ 90 % annual mean, no condensation
Site altitude Up to 2000 m above sea level
Operating position Horizontal
Enclosure protection To DIN EN 60529
In the panel enclosure Front IP65, rear IP20
In the surface-mounted enclosure IP65
Weight (fully fitted) About 380 g

88
 14 Technical data
Interface
Modbus
Interface type RS422/RS485
Protocol Modbus, Modbus Integer
Baud rate 9600, 19200, 38400
Device address 0 to 255
Max. number of nodes 32
PROFIBUS-DP
Device address 0 to 255

Approvals/marks of conformity
Mark of Testing laboratory Certificates/certification Test basis valid for
conformity numbers
c UL us Underwriters Laboratories E 201387 UL 61010-1 Type 202552/01...
CAN/CSA-C22.2
No. 61010-1

89
15 Retrofitting optional boards

Caution:
The instrument must be de-energized on the input and output sides!
Optional boards must only be retrofitted by qualified specialists.

ESD:
Optional boards can be damaged be electrostatic discharge. You must therefore
prevent electrostatic charges from accumulating during installation and removal.
Optional boards should be retrofitted at a grounded workstation.

15.1 Identifying an optional board

The packaging of the optional board is identified by a sales number.

Optional board Code Part no. Board view

Analog input (universal) 1 00442785

Relay (1× changeover) 2 00442786

Relay (2× NO) 3 00442787

This board must only be
inserted in
optional slot 1 or 3!

Analog output 4 00442788

2 PhotoMOS® relays 5 00566677

90
 15 Retrofitting optional boards
Optional board Code Part no. Board view
Solid state relay 1 A 6 00442790

Voltage supply output 7 00566681

DC ±5 V (e.g. for ISFET)

Voltage supply output 8 00566682

DC 12 V (e.g. for inductive
proximity switch)

Interface - RS422/485 10 00442782

This board must only be
inserted in optional slot 3!

Datalogger with interface 11 00566678

RS422/485 and
real-time clock
This board must only be
inserted in optional slot 3!
PROFIBUS-DP interface 12 00566679
This circuit board must only
be inserted into option slot 3!

Note:
The optional boards detected by the instrument are displayed in "Device
information" (see section 6.5.11 "Device info", page 31).

91
15 Retrofitting optional boards
15.2 Removing a plug-in module

(1) Squeeze the front panel together by the left and right sides and remove
the plug-in module.

15.3 Inserting a plug-in module

Caution:
No "3" relays (2× SPST/normally open) may be inserted in slot 2!

1
2
3

(1) Slot 1 for optional board

(2) Slot 2 for optional board
(3) Slot 3 for optional board

(1) Push the optional board into the slot until it locks in place.
(2) Push the device plug-in into the enclosure until it locks in place.

92
 16 Appendix
16.1 Glossary
Display of measured values STANDARD
The measurement value, measurement variable and temperature of the
measuring material are shown in standard display.

(1)
(3)
(2)

(1) Operating mode

(2) Display bottom (temperature input)
(3) Display top (analog input measurement value)

Display of measured values TENDENCY

The operator can quickly see the direction in which the measurement is
changing.

Rising Falling
Steady
Greatly Moderately Slightly Slightly Moderately Greatly

The measurement tendency (trend) is calculated over the last 10 measurement

values.
So with a sampling interval of 500 ms, the last 5 seconds are considered.

93
16 Appendix
Display of measured values BARGRAPH
Values of the main inputs, input options or math channels (signal source) can
be represented as a variable bar (a bar graph).

Scaling the bar

✱ Activate "BARGRAPH" as the display of measured values.
✱ Select "SCALE START" with .
✱ Confirm the selection with PGM .
✱ Use and to enter the lower limit of the range to be displayed.
✱ Confirm the selection with PGM .
✱ Select "SCALE END" with .
✱ Use or to enter the upper limit of the range to be displayed.
✱ Confirm the selection with PGM .

To return to Measuring mode:

Press the EXIT key repeatedly or wait for a "timeout".

Display of measured values TREND CHART

Values of the main inputs, input options or math channels (signal source) can
be represented as a graph.
The current values appear to the right on the screen.

Scaling the display

✱ Activate "TREND CHART" as the display of measured values.
✱ Select "SCALE START" with .
✱ Confirm the selection with PGM .
✱ Use and to enter the lower limit of the range to be displayed.

94
 16 Appendix
✱ Confirm the selection with PGM .
✱ Select "SCALE END" with .
✱ Use or to enter the upper limit of the range to be displayed.
✱ Confirm the selection with PGM .

To return to Measuring mode:

Press the EXIT key repeatedly or wait for a "timeout".

Display of measured values LARGE DISPLAY

Values of the main inputs, input options or math channels (signal source) can
be displayed in large format.

Display of measured values 3 MEAS. VALUES

Three values of the main inputs, input options or math channels (signal source)
can be displayed simultaneously.
The position of the value to be displayed can be set to "Top", "Center" or
"Bottom".

Relative cell constant

Mechanical or chemical effects can change the electrical properties of a
conductivity sensor. This will result in a measurement error. This deviation (and
thus the measurement error as well) can be compensated for by adjusting the
relative cell constant in the transmitter. The relative cell constant defines the
deviation of the actual cell constant of the conductivity sensor from its nominal
value.

95
16 Appendix
Zero point (1-point) calibration

mV B

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
pH

With one-point offset calibration, the zero point of the pH

combination electrode is calculated, see chapter 8.4 "Calibrating the relative
cell constant", page 51.
Recommended only for special applications, such as ultra-pure water.
2-point calibration

mV B

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
pH

With two-point calibration, the zero point and slope of the combination
electrode are calibrated.
This is the recommended calibration for most sensors.

Temperature compensation (conductivity or resistance)

The conductivity of a measurement solution is temperature-dependent (the
conductivity of a solution rises as the temperature increases). The dependency
of conductivity and temperature describes the temperature coefficient of the
measurement solution. As conductivity is not always measured for the
reference temperature, automatic temperature compensation is integrated in
this instrument. The transmitter uses the temperature coefficient to calculate

96
 16 Appendix
the conductivity that would exist for a reference temperature from the current
conductivity and the current temperature. This is then displayed. This process
is called temperature compensation. Modern transmitters offer different ways
to perform this temperature compensation.
- Linear compensation (constant temperature coefficient).
This type of compensation can be applied to many kinds of normal water,
with acceptable accuracy. The temperature coefficient used is then approx.
2.2 %/°C
- Natural water (EN27888 or ISO 7888).
In this case, so-called non-linear temperature compensation is used.
According to the standard cited above, the relevant type of compensation
can be applied to natural groundwater, spring water and surface water.
The definition range for the water temperature is as follows:
0 °C ≤ T < 36 °C
Conductivity of the water is compensated in the range from 0 °C to 36 °C.
- ASTM1125-95.
This type of temperature compensation is used in measurements of ultra-
pure water. The highly non-linear nature of the temperature dependency for
neutral, acidic and alkaline impurities is taken into consideration in
accordance with the standard.
The definition range for the water temperature is as follows:
0 °C < T < 100 °C.
Conductivity of the water is compensated in the range from 0 °C to 100 °C.
Temperature compensation (pH or ammonia)
The pH value of a measurement solution depends on the temperature. Since
the pH value is not always measured at the reference temperature, the
instrument is able to perform a temperature compensation.
The sensor signal for the ammonia measurement is temperature-dependent.
The instrument can perform temperature compensation.

The redox potential of a measurement solution is not temperature-dependent!

Temperature compensation is not required.

97
16 Appendix
Limit value (alarm) function of the binary outputs

HySt

AF1
0
x
AF
w

HySt

AF2
0
x
AF
w

HySt

AF7

0
x
w

HySt

AF8
0
x
w

Pulse length controller (output active with x > w and P control structure)

10%
100% 90%
90%
Output level y

Switching period

50% 50%
50%
tOn tOff
10%
90%
10%
0%
Proportional band XP Process value X
0 X-W 1
XP
Setpoint W

If actual value x exceeds setpoint W, the P controller will control in proportion

98
 16 Appendix
to the control deviation. When the proportional range is exceeded, the
controller operates with an output level of 100 % (100 % clock ratio).
Pulse frequency controller (output active with x > w and P control structure)

100%
Output level y Maximum pulse frequency

50%
50% of pulse frequency

0%
Proportional band XP No pulses Process value X
0 X-W 1
XP
Setpoint W

If actual value x exceeds setpoint W, the P controller will control in proportion

to the control deviation. When the proportional range is exceeded, the
controller operates with an output level of 100 % (maximum switching
frequency).

Special controller functions: Separate controllers

This function is normally deactivated (factory setting or select "No").
In the deactivated state, the software prevents the two controller outputs from
being able to work "against each other". So, for example, it is not possible to
dose acid and lye at the same time.
If the controllers are separate ("Yes" selection), each controller can be freely
configured.
Switch-off of the I-component
This function is normally deactivated (factory setting or select "No").
In the deactivated state, the controller works in accordance with general
controller theory.
When I-component switch-off is activated ("Yes" selection), the part of the
output level that can be traced back to the I-component is set to zero when
the setpoint is reached.
This can be useful with mutual neutralization (acid and lye dosing both
possible) in one treatment tank.

Calibration timer
The calibration timer indicates (on request) a required routine calibration. The
calibration timer is activated by entering the number of days that must expire
before there is a scheduled re-calibration (specified by the system or the
operator).
Wash timer
The wash timer can be used to implement automated sensor cleaning. To do
this, the function is assigned to a switching output.

99
16 Appendix
The cycle time (cleaning interval) can be adjusted in the range from 0.0 to
240.0 hours.
A cycle time of "0.0" means the wash timer is deactivated.
The wash time (cleaning duration) is adjustable from 1 to 1800 seconds.
During the wash time the controller goes into the HOLD state, which is
maintained for 10 seconds after completion of the wash time. A sensor
calibration within the cycle time restarts the wash timer.
USP contact (for ultra-pure water)
The USP contact makes it possible to monitor the quality of ultra-pure water
according to the requirements of USP <645>. USP <645> contains a table that
assigns a limit value for conductivity depending on the temperature. If the
conductivity stays below this limit value, the ultra-pure water meets the
requirements of USP <645>.
If the conductivity of the water is greater than what is specified in the USP
table for a given temperature, the USP contact switches the instrument.
Limit values are defined in levels. For example, a value of 5 °C is used at 8 °C.
Note:
During monitoring, temperature compensation must be turned off
(temperature coefficient = 0)!
To do this, select Administrator Level/Basic Setting/
Temperature Compensation/None.

Excerpt from USP <645>

Temperature Max. conductivity Temperature Max. conductivity
°C µS/cm (uncompensated) °C µS/cm (uncompensated)
0 0.6 55 2.1
5 0.8 60 2.2
10 0.9 65 2.4
15 1.0 70 2.5
20 1.1 75 2.7
25 1.3 80 2.7
30 1.4 85 2.7
35 1.5 90 2.7
40 1.7 95 2.9
45 1.8 100 3.1
50 1.9

If the conductivity is exceeded at the relevant temperature, the configured

contact switches.
USP warning alarm
The USP warning alarm switches before the water quality reaches the set limit
value.
This parameter (0 to 100) is used to set the distance as a percentage (relative
to the active limit value) to be maintained from the USP limit.

100
 16 Appendix
Ultra-pure water per Ph. Eur.
The limit comparators of the instrument switch, depending on the
corresponding configuration, according to the limit valued of the European
Pharmacopeia (Ph. Eur.) for purified water.
Temperature Max. conductivity
°C µS/cm
0 0.6
10 0.9
15 1.0
20 1.1
25 1.3
30 1.4
35 1.5
40 1.7
45 1.8
50 1.9

Ph. Eur. warning alarm

The Ph. Eur. warning alarm switches before the water quality reaches the set
limit value.
This parameter (0 to 100) is used to set the distance as a percentage (relative
to the active limit value) to be maintained from the USP limit.
TDS
Display/control with the unit ppm.
The specific TDS factor can also be entered in this mode.
TDS (Total Dissolved Solids, also commonly referred to in Germany as
filtrate dry residue (Filtrattrockenrückstand).
This value is important in areas such as groundwater analysis and power
plants.
The value is also used in evaluating drinking water quality (for example in the
USA, Arab and Asian countries).
Various organizations have published limit values on this topic.
- WHO (World Health Organization) <1000mg/l
- USEPA (United States Environmental Protection Agency) <500mg/l
Standardized determination is performed gravimetrically, i.e.:
- Filter sample
- Evaporate filtrate
- Weigh residue
A conductivity measurement is used for the online measurement. A single time
is sufficient to determine the conversion factor. It corresponds to the ratio of
the conductivity value of the water to the value of the gravimetrically
determined filtrate dry residue (TDS). The factor moves within the range from
0.55 to 1.0. A typical value for drinking water is about 0.67.
With modern instruments, this factor can be entered individually to achieve the
most accurate measurement possible.

101
16 Appendix
Customer specs. table
In this mode, the input value can be displayed based on a table (max. 20 value
pairs). This function is used to display and linearize non-linear input variables.
Values can only be entered in the table using the optional setup program.
Cust. specs. characteristic
In this mode, the instrument can model a monotonically increasing input
variable to any output value.

The optional setup program is used to enter the requisite value table.

102
 16 Appendix
Min./max. value memory
This storage records the minimum and maximum input quantities that have
occurred. This information can be used, for example, to assess whether the
design of the connected sensor is suitable for the values that actually occur.
The max./min. value memory can be reset,
see chapter 6.7.6 "Delete min/max values", page 35:

Datalogger
Recording duration = about 10 hours with a storage interval of 1 second
Recording duration = about 150 days with a storage interval of 300 seconds
Range switchover
In some processes it is advantageous to have two measurement ranges
available, for example in rinsing and regeneration processes.
Normally in these processes a low conductivity must be recorded. In the case
of rinsing/regeneration, however, the conductivity is significantly higher, which
would result in measurement overrange (error). This situation is not only
unsatisfactory, it could also be dangerous.

When range switchover is activated, the parameter set is switched as well!

When range switchover is activated, two copies of the following parameters

are present:
- Relative cell constant
- Offset
- Temperature compensation
- Temperature coefficient

- Autorange
The Autorange function can be used to define two measurement ranges
between which the instrument switches in a defined manner.
- Manual
Switching is initiated in this function mode by a binary input.

103
16 Appendix

Autorange is only configurable for units mS/cm and µS/cm.

Measurement range 1 must be smaller than measurement range 2.
Control only occurs in measurement range 1.
The actual value output in measurement range 2 is scaled to the full display
scope.
Switching from measurement range 1 to measurement range 2 occurs when
display range 1 is exceeded. The display jumps back when the actual value
falls below 90 % of display range 1.
A binary output can indicate switching from one measurement range to the
other.

Parameter set switchover

In some processes (different process steps) is is advantageous to have two
complete parameter sets available.
Define the parameter sets see chapter 11.5 "Parameter sets", page 77.
The predefined parameter sets are activated by a binary input.
Deposit detection
Deposit detection can be activated for four-electrode cells.
It may happen during normal operation that a coating forms on the electrodes.
Because of this, the conductivity that is displayed is lower than the actual
conductivity. When the "Deposit detection" function is activated, cell
maintenance is required.

104
 16 Appendix
16.2 Parameters of the User level
When there are numerous instrument parameters to configure, it is advisable
to make a note in the table below of all the parameters to be changed and to
work through these parameters in the given order.
The following list shows the maximum number of parameters that
can be modified.
Some of these parameters will not be visible (and therefore not
editable) for your particular instrument, depending on the
configuration.

Parameter Selection/value range New setting

Factory setting
Conductivity input
Cell constant 0.01/0.1/0.5/1.0/3.0/10.0
Relative cell constant 20.0 to 100.0 to 500.0
and
Relative cell constant MB 2
Offset -20.00 to 0.00 to 20.00 % of the display range
and
offset MB 2
Temperature None
compensation Linear
and Natural waters
temperature compensation ASTM 1125 neutral
MB 2 ASTM 1125 acidic
ASTM 1125 alkaline
Temperature Temperature input
compensation source Option input 1
Option input 2
Option input 3
Manual temperature input
Temperature coefficient 0.00 to 2.20 to 8.00 %/K
and
temperature coefficient
MB 2
Reference temperature 15.0 to 25.0 to 35.0 °C
Pollution recognition Off
On
Broken sensor detection Off
On
Filter time constant 0.0 to 2.0 to 25.0 seconds
Calibration interval 0 to 99 days (0 = timer not active)
Differential measurement Off
Main input - (minus) Option input 1
Main input - (minus) Option input 2
Main input - (minus) Option input 3
Option input 1 - (minus) Main input
Option input 2 - (minus) Main input
Option input 3 - (minus) Main input

105
16 Appendix
Parameter Selection/value range New setting
Factory setting
Supply frequency 50 Hz
60 Hz
Temperature input
Temperature sensor No sensor
Pt100
Pt1000
Cust. specs.
0 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
0 to 10 V
2 to 10 V
Resistance transmitter
Unit °C/°F
%
Without unit
Cust. specs.
Scaling start -100.0 to 0.0 to 499.9 °C
Scaling end -99.9 to 100.0 to 500.0 °C
Filter time constant 0.0 to 2.0 to 25.0 seconds
Manual temperature -99.9 to 25.0 to +99.9 °C
Offset -99.9 to 0.0 to +99.9 °C
Optional inputs
Analog inputs 1 to 3
Operating mode Off
Linear
Temperature
pH measurement
Conductivity
Concentration
Cust. specs.
Stroke feedback
Chlorine, pH-compensated
Signal type 0 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
0 to 10 V
2 to 10 V
0 to 1 V
Pt100
Pt1000
Cust. specs.
Connection type 2-wire
3-wire
4-wire
Display format XXXX
XXX.x
[Link]
[Link]

106
 16 Appendix
Parameter Selection/value range New setting
Factory setting
Unit µS/cm
mS/cm
kΩ∗cm
MΩ∗cm
None
Cust. specs.
mV
pH
%
ppm
mg/l
Scaling start -9999 to +9998
Scaling end -9998 to +9999
Temperature Temperature input
compensation source Option input 1
Option input 2
Option input 3
Manual temperature
pH compensation source Main input
Option input 1
Option input 2
Option input 3
Temperature None
compensation Linear
TC graph
Natural waters
ASTM D1125 neutral
ASTM D1125 acidic
ASTM D1125 alkaline
NaOH 0 to 12 %
NaOH 25 to 50 %
HNO3 0 to 25 %
HNO3 36 to 82 %
H2SO4 0 to 28 %
H2SO4 36 to 85 %
H2SO4 92 to 99 %
HCl 0 to 18 %
HCl 22 to 44 %
Reference temperature 15.0 to 25.0 to 30.0 °C
Filter time constant 0.0 to 2.0 to 25.0 seconds
Relative cell constant 20.0 to 100.0 to 500.0 1/cm
Temperature coefficient 0.00 to 2.20 to 8.00 1/cm
Zero point -9999 to 0 to +9999
Slope -999.9 to 100.0 to +999.9 %

107
16 Appendix
Parameter Selection/value range New setting
Factory setting
Binary inputs
Binary input 1 or 2
Function No function
Manual mode
Hold mode
Hold mode inverse
Alarm stop
Freeze measured value
Key lock
Lock levels
Flow rate measurement
Reset day counter
Reset total counter
Range switchover
Controller
Controller 1 or 2
Parameter set 1 or 2
Min. setpoint 0 to 9999
Max. setpoint 0 to 9999
Setpoint 0 to 9999
Setpoint 2 0 to 9999
Proportional range 0 to 9999
Reset time 0.00 to 9999 s
Derivative time 0.00 to 9999 s
Period time 2.00 to 60.0 to 999.9 s
Hysteresis 0 - 200 to 9999
On-delay 0.00 to 999.5 s
Delayed release 0.00 to- 999.5 s
Output limit 0 to 100to%
Min. turn-on time 0.20 to 0.50 to 99.50 s
Actuator time 10 to 60 to 3000 s
Max. pulse frequency 1 to 60 to 80 1/s
Alarm tolerance 0.00 to 1.00 to 16.00
Alarm delay 0.00 to 9999 s
Configuration
Controller type Off
Limit value
Pulse lengths
Pulse frequency
Continuous
Modulating

108
 16 Appendix
Parameter Selection/value range New setting
Factory setting
Controller actual value Main value
Not comp. Main value
Temperature
Option input 1
Option input 1 not compensated
Option input 2
Option input 2 not compensated
Option input 3
Option input 3 not compensated
Math 1
Math 2
Differential signal
Stroke retransmission No signal
Main value
Not comp. Main value
Temperature
Option input 1
Option input 1 not compensated
Option input 2
Option input 2 not compensated
Option input 3
Option input 3 not compensated
Math 1
Math 2
Additive disturbance No signal
Main value
Not comp. Main value
Temperature
Option input 1
Option input 1 not compensated
Option input 2
Option input 2 not compensated
Option input 3
Option input 3 not compensated
Math 1
Math 2
Multiplicative disturbance No signal
Main value
Not comp. Main value
Temperature
Option input 1
Option input 1 not compensated
Option input 2
Option input 2 not compensated
Option input 3
Option input 3 not compensated
Math 1
Math 2
Min/max contact Min contact
Max contact

109
16 Appendix
Parameter Selection/value range New setting
Factory setting
Make/break contact Make contact
Break contact
Hold mode 0%
100 %
Frozen
Hold output
Hold reg. ratio 0 to 100 %
Error 0%
100 %
Frozen
Hold output
Alarm control Off
On
Controller special functions
I-switch-off Inactive (the controller is working normally)
Active (special behavior)
Separate controllers No
Yes
Manual mode Locked
Coding
Switching
Limit value control
Limit values 1 to 4
Signal source No signal
Main value
Not comp. Main value
Temperature
Option input 1
Option input 1 not compensated
Option input 2
Option input 2 not compensated
Option input 3
Option input 3 not compensated
Math 1
Math 2
Differential signal
Flow rate
Partial quantity
Total quantity
Output controller 1
Output controller 2
Setpoint 1 controller 1
Setpoint 2 controller 1
Setpoint 1 controller 2
Setpoint 2 controller 2

110
 16 Appendix
Parameter Selection/value range New setting
Factory setting
Switching function Alarm function (AF1)
Alarm function (AF2)
Alarm function (AF7)
Alarm function (AF8)

Switching point 0 to 9999

Hysteresis 0 to 9999
Binary outputs
Binary outputs 1 to 8
Signal source No signal
Limit value control 1
Limit value control 2
Limit value control 3
Limit value control 4
Controller 1 output 1
Controller 1 output 2
Controller 2 output 1
Controller 2 output 2
Controller alarm 1
Controller alarm 2
Controller alarm
Sensor warnings
Sensor error
Warnings and errors
Calibration timer
Wash timer
Logic 1
Logic 2
Autorange
At calibration Standard operation
Inactive
Active
Frozen
Error Inactive
Active
Frozen
Hold mode Inactive
Active
Frozen
Standard operation
Switch-on delay 0.0 to 3600 s
Switch-off delay 0.0 to 3600 s
Pulse timea 0.0 to 3600 s
Manual mode No simulation
Inactive
Active

111
16 Appendix
Parameter Selection/value range New setting
Factory setting
Analog outputs
Analog outputs 1 to 3
Signal source No signal
Main value
Not comp. Main value
Temperature
Option input 1
Option input 1 not compensated
Option input 2
Option input 2 not compensated
Option input 3
Option input 3 not compensated
Math 1
Math 2
Differential signal
Flow rate
Partial quantity
Total quantity
Output controller 1
Output controller 2
Setpoint 1 controller 1
Setpoint 2 controller 1
Setpoint 1 controller 2
Setpoint 2 controller 2
Signal type 0 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
20 to 0 mA
20 to 4 mA
0 to 10 V
10 to 0 V
Scaling start 0 to 9999
Scaling end 0 to 9999
At calibration Moving
Frozen
Safe value
In case of error 0/4 mA/0 V
(output signal, of the 20 mA/10 V
controller in case of error) Frozen
Safety value
Hold mode Frozen
(output signal, of the Safety value
controller in Hold mode) Standard mode
0/4 mA/0 V
20 mA/10 V
Safety value 0.0 to 20.0 mA
Simulation Off
On
Simulation value Off
0.0 to 20.0 mA

112
 16 Appendix
Parameter Selection/value range New setting
Factory setting
Interface
Modbus address 1 to 254
Baud rate 9600
19200
38400
Parity None
Even
Odd
Stop bits 1
2
PROFIBUS address 0 to 99
EEPROM marking Off
On
Wash timer
Cycle time 0.0 to 240.0 hours
(0.0 = Wash contact is not active
Wash time 1 to 60 to 1800 seconds
Datalogger
Storage interval 1 to 60 to 300 seconds
Channels 1 to 4 No signal
Main value (standard for channel 1)
Not comp. Main value
Temperature (standard for channel 2)
Option input 1
Option input 1 not compensated
Option input 2
Option input 2 not compensated
Option input 3
Option input 3 not compensated
Math 1
Math 2
Differential signal
Flow rate
Partial quantity
Total quantity
Output controller 1 (standard for channel 3)
Output controller 2 (standard for channel 4)
Setpoint 1 controller 1
Setpoint 2 controller 1
Setpoint 1 controller 2
Setpoint 2 controller 2
Date year 20xx
Date month 1 to 12
Date day 1 to 31
Time hour 0 to 24
Time minute 0 to 59
Time second 0 to 59

113
16 Appendix
Parameter Selection/value range New setting
Factory setting
Display
Lighting On
With operation
Display of measured value Standard
Tendency
Bargraph
Trend chart
Large display
3 measured values
Time
Display Top/Center/ No signal
Bottom Main value (standard for "Top")
Not comp. Main value
Temperature(standard for "Center" and
"Bottom")
Option input 1
Option input 1 not compensated
Option input 2
Option input 2 not compensated
Option input 3
Option input 3 not compensated
Math 1
Math 2
Differential signal
Flow rate
Partial quantity
Total quantity
Output controller 1
Output controller 2
Setpoint 1 controller 1
Setpoint 2 controller 1
Setpoint 1 controller 2
Setpoint 2 controller 2
Operating timeout 0 to 1 to 10 minutes
(0 = operating timeout is turned off)
Scaling start 0 to 9999
Scaling end 0 to 9999

114
 16 Appendix
Parameter Selection/value range New setting
Factory setting
Signal source Main value
Not comp. Main value
Temperature
Option input 1
Option input 1 not compensated
Option input 2
Option input 2 not compensated
Option input 3
Option input 3 not compensated
Math 1
Math 2
Differential signal
Flow rate
Partial quantity
Total quantity
Temperature unit °C
°F
LCD inverse Off
On
Contrast 0 to 10 to 20
a Delayed release is automatically deactivated when wiper times are greater than 0 seconds.

115
17 Index
Index H
1-point calibration - pH 59 HOLD mode 38
2-point calibration 96
2-point calibration - pH 61 I
Info
A Hardware 30
Accessories 12 Instrument 31
Administrator 32 Installation position 13

B K
Basic setting 32 Key combinations 26
Binary inputs and outputs
States 29 L
Language selection 2
C Limit functions 98
Calibration
Logbook 73 M
pH, 2-point 61 Manual 30
Standard signal 53 MANUAL mode 36
Standard signal, options 54 Analog outputs 38
Calibration release 35 Binary outputs 37
Cell constant 51–52 Controller 36
Configurable parameters 80 Deactivation 39
Controller Switching outputs 36
"Higher order" switching functions 74 Manual mode overview 30
"Simple" switching functions 74 Menu
Configuration of "higher order" controllers Customer specs. 27
77 Min/max values 27–28
General information 74 Mounting location 13
Parameter sets 77
Setting example, limit monitoring 78 O
Controller functions 74 Optional inputs
Customer settings 105 Current values 29
Output 28
D Output display 28
Datalogger
Special features 82 P
Date of manufacture 10 Parameter overview 105
Delete 35 Password 2, 32
Display 21 Ph. Eur. 101
Principle 22
E Principle of operation 26
Electrical isolation 15 Purified water 101

F R
Factory settings 105 Rapid access 26
Reference signs 7
G Reset 2
Getting started 40 Reset display brightness 2

116
 17 Index
S
Setting the operator language 2
Setup program 80
Simulation mode 36
Simulation of binary outputs 37
States 29
Sunlight 13

T
TDS measurement 101
Temperature compensation 96–97

U
Ultra-pure water 100
User 31
User data 27
USP 100

W
Warning signs 7
Wash timer 99
Washing contact 99

Z
Zero point calibration 96

117
JUMO GmbH & Co. KG JUMO Instrument Co. Ltd. JUMO Process Control, Inc.
Street address: JUMO House 6733 Myers Road
Moritz-Juchheim-Straße 1 Temple Bank, Riverway East Syracuse, NY 13057, USA
36039 Fulda, Germany Harlow - Essex CM20 2DY, UK Phone: 315-437-5866
Delivery address: Phone: +44 1279 63 55 33 1-800-554-5866
Mackenrodtstraße 14 Fax: +44 1279 63 52 62 Fax: 315-437-5860
36039 Fulda, Germany E-mail: sales@[Link] E-mail: [Link]@[Link]
Postal address: Internet: [Link] Internet: [Link]
36035 Fulda, Germany
Phone: +49 661 6003-0
Fax: +49 661 6003-607
E-mail: mail@[Link]
Internet: [Link]
Conductive conductivity/ultra-pure water sensors
with a 2-electrode system,
types 202922, 202923, 202924, 202925
Glass conductivity sensors, type 202922/30
Diaphragm tubes, type 201083
Compensation thermometer, type 201085
N cable socket, type 202990

B202900.01
Operating Manual

V3.00/EN/00550313
Warning
A sudden sensor malfunction could potentially result in
dangerous and imprecise dosing! Suitable preventive
measures must be in place to prevent this from
happening.

Note
Please read these operating instructions before putting
the instrument into operation. Keep the manual in a
place which is accessible to all users at all times.
All the necessary settings are described in these
operating instructions. If any difficulties should
nevertheless arise during startup, please do not tamper
with the instrument in any way. By doing so, you could
endanger your rights under the instrument warranty!
Please contact your supplier.

Note
Conductive conductivity sensors are not authorized for
use in highly adherent, oily or glutinous media – we
recommend using our inductive conductivity measuring
instruments here!

Note
A flat-rate charge of EUR 35 will be made if we receive
instruments without a description of their fault. This fee
will be added to the possible cost of repair.
 Content
1 Conductive conductivity/ultra-pure water sensors with a
2-electrode system,
types 202922, 202923, 202924, 202925 .............................. 5
1.1 Application ......................................................................................... 5
1.2 Principle of measurement .................................................................. 5
1.3 Measuring cells for laboratory and industrial use .............................. 5
1.4 Measuring ranges .............................................................................. 6
1.5 Electrical connection ......................................................................... 7
1.6 Installation .......................................................................................... 8
1.7 Maintenance/cleaning ........................................................................ 9
1.8 Troubleshooting ............................................................................... 10
1.9 Screwing the conductivity sensor into the fitting ............................. 11

2 Glass conductivity sensors,

type 202922/30 .................................................................. 12
2.1 Application ....................................................................................... 12
2.2 Technical data .................................................................................. 12
2.3 Mounting .......................................................................................... 13
2.4 Maintenance .................................................................................... 13
2.5 Storage ............................................................................................ 13

3 Diaphragm tubes,
type 201083 ........................................................................ 14
3.1 Application ....................................................................................... 14
3.2 Technical data .................................................................................. 14
3.3 Mounting .......................................................................................... 15
3.4 Maintenance .................................................................................... 16

4 Compensation thermometers,
type 201085 ........................................................................ 17
4.1 Application ....................................................................................... 17
4.2 Technical data .................................................................................. 17
4.3 Mounting .......................................................................................... 18

5 N cable socket,
type 201090 ........................................................................ 21
5.1 Application ....................................................................................... 21
5.2 Mounting .......................................................................................... 22
Content
1 Conductive conductivity/ultra-pure water
sensors with a 2-electrode system,
types 202922, 202923, 202924, 202925

1.1 Application
Conductive conductivity sensors are used in conjunction with
suitable transmitters in industrial analysis measurement technology
to determine the electrolytic conductivity of liquid media (or the
resistance, in the case of ultra-pure water).
T

1.2 Principle of measurement

Two conductive electrodes of a defined area are immersed in the
sample medium, a specific distance apart. An AC voltage of a
specific measurement frequency (subject to the measuring range),
is supplied to the electrodes by a separate transmitter. The
conductive components (ions, salts) contained in the sample
medium cause an alternating current to appear between the
electrodes, which the transmitter uses to determine and display the
conductivity, and convert it to a standard signal.

1.3 Measuring cells for laboratory and industrial use

Conductivity cells consists of a plastic or stainless steel flow-
through, immersion or screw-in body and the embedded
electrodes. Depending on the type, application and measuring
range, the two electrodes are made from materials such as stainless
steel, titanium, platinum or special-purpose graphite.
The conductivity sensors come from the manufacturer with a fixed
cell constant, K [1/cm].
Typical cell constants include: K = 0.01/0.1 or 1.0. Intermediate
values are possible for customized versions.
The downstream transmitter must be set to the cell constant of the
measuring cell. Additional temperature sensors can be installed in
the measuring cells, subject to the particular application.

5
1.4 Measuring ranges
The measuring range of conductive conductivity sensors is
physically restricted to max. 15 mS/cm.
The measuring ranges are roughly divided up according to cell
constants, in the table below.
Note
The actual measuring range limits will vary, depending
on the electrode material, the design and the
downstream transmitter!

Cell constant K [1/cm] Max. measuring range

0.01 up to 5 µS/cm or 20 MΩcm
0.01 up to 10 µS/cm
0.1 up to 3000 µS/cm
1.0 up to 15 mS/cm

6
1.5 Electrical connection
The measuring cells come with an attached cable or with a
detachable plug connector, depending on the version.
Caution
The connecting cable must not be routed via the
terminal blocks, but must run directly to the transmitter.
Use shielded cables only, and if possible, those that are
recommended/supplied by the manufacturer.
Follow the instructions in the transmitter operating
manual for electrical connection!

Connection for Angled Attached M12

connector cable connector
Outer electrode white 1

Inner electrode 2 brown 2

Temperature 1 yellow 3
compensation 3 green 4
3-wire circuit - - 5
Shield - -

7
1.6 Installation
Caution
Please heed the technical data for your sensor (see
data sheets 202922, 202923, 202924 and 202925). The
sensor must be suitable for the temperature, pressure
and medium conditions specified for the system
(including chemical resistance).
Do not make any mechanical modifications to the
sensor (electrodes shortened, drilled, bent or
scratched). This can result in the loss of proper
functionality, as well as the rights under the instrument
warranty.

Do not use a metal seal!

Note
Basically any installation position is possible. However,
you must ensure that sufficient sample medium flows
through and around the sensor (that is, the conductive
sensor electrodes must always be completely
surrounded by the medium). Structural measures must
be taken to prevent flow separation or gas bubbles.

8
1.7 Maintenance/cleaning
The conductive conductivity sensor electrodes are in direct contact
with the sample medium. Regular cleaning must therefore be
performed, relative to the susceptibility of the medium to
contamination!
All suitable, common household cleaning chemicals can be used
for cleaning. Abrasive cleaners have limited suitability! The
measurement electrodes must not be damaged mechanically!
Dilute hydrochloric acid, or cleaning in ultrasonic baths, can be
helpful to prevent various accumulations, for example.

9
1.8 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting must always consider all the components of the
conductivity measurement chain!
The transmitter and the connecting cable must be checked, as well
as the sensor.
Error Possible cause Remedy
Measurement Sensor is dirty Section 1.7 „Main-
value is too high tenance/cleaning“,
or too low Seite 9
No conductivity Broken lead, Carefully check the
measurement incorrect terminal electrical connection
(e.g. display shows assignment again!
"0") Sensor exposed Check the sensor
to air (not fully installation location: is
immersed) liquid medium present?
No temperature Broken lead, Carefully check the
measurement incorrect electrical electrical connection
(sensors with connection again!
integrated
temperature
sensor)
Display value Malfunction caused Check the cable
unstable, by incorrectly/ connection and routing
fluctuating insufficiently shielded
connecting cable
Malfunction caused Check the installation
by gas bubbles location and position of
the sensor and modify
where necessary

Note
The sensor can also be checked for short-circuits or
internal contact problems. You need a continuity tester
(such as the diode tester of a multimeter) to do this.

10
1.9 Screwing the conductivity sensor into the fitting
✱ Loosen the cable gland (1).
✱ Run the connecting cable (3) of the conductivity sensor (4)
through the fitting (2).
✱ Screw the conductivity cell (4) into the fitting (2).
Tightening torque approx. 2.5 Nm.
✱ Tighten the cable gland (1).
Tightening torque approx. 2 Nm.
Caution
When removing the conductivity sensor from the fitting:
First loosen the cable gland (1)!

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

11
2 Glass conductivity sensors,
type 202922/30

2.1 Application
With type 202922/30 glass conductivity sensors, the conductivity of
liquids can be determined in conjunction with a conductivity
transmitter.
The parts of the sensor that come into contact with the sample
medium are composed of glass and platinum. This ensures
extensive resistance to aggressive media. The active component
(the platinum electrode) can be platinized for use at higher
conductivities.
The connections must be kept perfectly clean and dry, to avoid
creep currents. During assembly work with coaxial cables, make
sure that the black, semi-conducting layer between the braided
shield and the inner insulation is removed.
All instruments and components are carefully checked before
leaving the factory. Should you nevertheless have cause for
complaint, please send the device back to us, free of harmful
contamination. Checking returned goods is extremely complicated.
It is therefore essential for you to provide more detailed information
about the fault.

2.2 Technical data

Active component Platinum

Measuring range, unplatinized up to 1 mS/cm
Measuring range, platinized up to 100 mS/cm
Cell constant k = 1 ±10 %
Permissible medium temperature -10 to +160 °C
Stem length 120 mm
Stem diameter 12 mm
Permissible pressure 0 to 6 bar
at 25 °C
Connection

12
• Type 202922/30-0100-xx-xxx-21-x-xxx/xxx N plug cap
• Type 202922/30-0100-xx-xxx-22-x-xxx/xxx N screw plug cap
Pg 13,5
• Type 202922/30-0100-xx-xxx-83-x-xxx/xxx M12 connector
Temperature compensation Pt100

2.3 Mounting
Glass conductivity sensors are protected by a protective cap during
delivery. This protective cap must be removed before it can be
used.
Please follow the selection table for conductivity sensors.

2.4 Maintenance
Dirty platinum electrodes can be cleaned by rinsing them in lye.
Carefully remove stubborn deposits with a soft brush.
To minimize polarization errors at high conductivities, platinized
conductivity sensors (recognizable by their blackened platinum
surfaces) can be re-platinized. Re-platinizing takes place
galvanically.

2.5 Storage
The platinum-plated sensors are vulnerable to drying out and
mechanical damage. They should therefore be kept in a watering
cap filled with distilled water.

13
3 Diaphragm tubes,
type 201083
Note
Diaphragm tubes come with three replacement
diaphragms.

3.1 Application
Diaphragm tubes are used in conjunction with reference electrodes
in a KCl storage vessel, as a reference system, whenever an
increased electrolyte flow rate into the sample medium is required,
e.g. in emulsions, varnishes and paints.
An electrolyte bridge can be formed in conjunction with a KCl
storage vessel, which is connected to the diaphragm tube by a
hose. Electrolyte bridges are used if the sample medium poisons
the reference system, e.g. media containing sulphides and
photographic chemicals.

3.2 Technical data

Material, Sales no. 00084582 PP
permis. medium temperature -10 to +95 °C
permis. pressure 0 to 10 bar t 25 °C
(with KCl storage vessel)
Diaphragm PTFE, Ø 5 mm
Stem length 120 mm
Stem diamter 12 mm
Connection Crimp connection for
PU plastic hose
8 mm × 6 mm Ø
(pressure-resistant)

14
3.3 Mounting
3.3.1 Screw in the diaphragm tube
The diaphragm tube can be screwed into a Pg 13.5 receiving
thread; max. tightening torque 10 Nm.

(1) Plastic screw-connection R 1/8“ (2) Set screw

(3) O-ring 10 × 3.5 FPM (4) Diaphragm tube
(5) PTFE diaphragm

15
3.4 Maintenance
The flow rate can be reduced by compressing the PTFE diaphragm.
The set screw is tightened to achieve this.
If a greater flow rate is subsequently required, the compressed
diaphragm must be replaced with a new one. Three replacement
diaphragms are included with a new diaphragm tube.
Before cleaning the diaphragm, you must check the material
compatibility of the cleaning method.

Set screw

PTFE diaphragm

16
4 Compensation thermometers,
type 201085

4.1 Application
Compensation thermometers are used in conjunction with a
relevant transmitter for temperature measurement and for
automatic temperature compensation during electrochemical
measurements (pH, conductivity, etc.).

4.2 Technical data

Material Glass
permis. medium temperature -20 to +150 °C
permis. pressure 0 to 10 bar at 25 °C
Stem length 120 mm
Stem diameter 12 mm
Active component Pt100
Basuc values as defined
by DIN 43760,
Class A
Time constant
• T05 0.8 s
• T09 4s
Connection
• Type 201085/89-1003-21-120 N plug cap
• Type 201085/89-1003-22-120 N screw plug cap Pg 13,5

17
4.3 Mounting
4.3.1 Type 201085/89-1003-21-120 – plug-in
The compensation thermometer can be plugged into a 12 mm Ø
+0.5 mm/-0 mm receiving hole. A PVDF M12 nut, AF19, is used as a
seal.

Type 201085/89-xxxx-21-120
(1) S7 plug cap (2) Glass shaft
(3) 1× Pt100 or Pt1000

18
4.3.2 Type 201085/89-1003-22-120 and
Type 201085/89-1003-70-120 – screw-in
The compensation thermometer can be screwed into a Pg 13.5
receiving thread; max. tightening torque 3 Nm.

Type 201085/89-xxxx-22-120
(1) Pg13.5 screw head (2) Ring PSU
(3) O-ring 10 × 3,5 FPM (4) Glass shaft
(5) 1× Pt100 or Pt1000

19
Type 201085/89-xxxx-70-120
(1) 4-pin flange connector, (2) Pg13.5 screw head
series 713
(3) Ring PSU (4) O-ring 10 × 3,5 FPM
(5) Glass shaft (6) 1× Pt100 or Pt1000

20
5 N cable socket,
type 201090

5.1 Application
The N cable socket is intended for subsequent assembly and is not
included in the standard scope of delivery!
The sales no. for the N cable socket is 00057350.

(1) Clamping piece (2) Spacer sleeve

(3) Set screw (4) Cap
(5) Cable guide

21
5.2 Mounting
✱ Push the cap (4), cable guide (5) and spacer sleeve (2) onto the
cable.
✱ Strip the cable as shown in the diagram.
Warning: Remove the black, semiconducting layer!
Do not damage the cable core when stripping the cable!
✱ Slide the clamping piece (1) over the braiding (shield) of the
coaxial cable and apply pressure. Soft-solder the cable core with
L-Sn 60 Pb Cu2 as defined by DIN 1707.
Warning: Do not use solder paste!
✱ Slide the spacer sleeve (2) over the clamping piece (1), push the
cable guide (5) up to the end of the spacer sleeve (2), pull the
cap (4) over it and screw it firmly into the cap (4) with the
set screw (3).
✱ Check the complete coaxial cable for continuity and short-cir-
cuits.

22
DANFOSS
MODEL: KPS33
SETTING: 1.7 BAR (25PSI)
LOCATION: SYSTEM PUMP LOW SUCTION

MODEL: MBC 5100

SETTING: 62 BAR (900 PSI)
LOCATION: SYSTEM PUMP DISCHARGE
 Data sheet

Pressure switch and Thermostat

KPS

The KPS Series consists of a series of pressure and

temperature controlled switches. In this series,
special attention has been given to meeting
demands for a high level of enclosure, robust and
compact construction, and resistance to shock
and vibration.

For KPS pressure switches the position of the

contacts depends on the pressure in the inlet
connection and the set scale value.

For KPS thermostats the position of the contacts

depends on the temperature of the sensor and
the set scale value.

The series covers most outdoor as well as indoor

application requirements and is suitable for
use in monitoring alarm and control systems
in factories, diesel plants, compressors, power
stations and on board ships.

Features • A high level of enclosure • Robust and compact construction

• Adjustable differential • Resistance to shock and vibration
• Available with all major marine approvals

Approvals CE-marked in accordance with: Underwriters Laboratories Inc., US-UL (excluding

– LVD 2014/35/EU KPS 39)
(EN 60947-1, EN 60947-4-1, EN 60947-5-1) China Compulsory Certificate, CCC

Ship approvals American Bureau of Shipping, ABS Nippon Kaiji Kyokai, NKK (KPS 31, KPS 33, KPS 35,
Det Norske Veritas, DNV KPS 37, KPS 39, KPS 43, KPS 45, KPS 47)
Germanischer Lloyd, GL China Classification Society, CCS
Registro Italiano Navale, RINA (KPS 43, KPS 45, Bureau Veritas, BV
KPS 47, KPS 76, KPS 77, KPS 79, KPS 80, KPS 81, KPS 83) Korean Register of Shipping, KR (KPS 35, KPS 37,
Maritime Register of Shipping, RMRS KPS 39, KPS 43, KPS 45, KPS 47)
Lloyds Register of Shipping, LR

© Danfoss | DCS (jmn) | 2017.03 [Link].P10.I6.02 | 520B7855 | 1

Data sheet | Pressure switch and Thermostat, KPS

Overview 1. Standard pressure switches

[bar] Range Pe
Further
Type
-1 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 [bar] information page

0 – 2.5 KPS 31 3
0 – 3.5 KPS 33 3
0–8 KPS 35 3
6 – 18 KPS 37 3
10 – 35 KPS 39 3

2. Pressure switches for high pressure and strongly pulsating media

[bar] Range Pe
Further
Type
-1 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 [bar] information page

1 – 10 KPS 43 3
4 – 40 KPS 45 3
6 – 60 KPS 47 3

3. Thermostats

[°C] Range Pe
Further
Type
-50 0 50 100 150 200 200 [°C] information page

-10 – 30 KPS 76 11
20 – 60 KPS 77 11
50 – 100 KPS 79 11
70 – 120 KPS 80 11
60 – 150 KPS 81 11
100 – 200 KPS 83 11

2 | 520B7855 | [Link].P10.I6.02 © Danfoss | DCS (jmn) | 2017.03

Data sheet | Pressure switch and Thermostat, KPS

PRESSURE SWITCH
Technical data and ordering 1. Pressure switches
Type Setting Adjustable/ Permissible Max. test Pressure Code no.
range Pe fixed operating pressure connection
differetial pressure Pe
[bar] [bar] [bar] [bar]
KPS 31 0 – 2.5 0.1 6 6 G 1/4 060-311066
KPS 31 0 – 2.5 0.1 6 6 G 3/8 A 060-310966
KPS 33 0 – 3.5 0.2 10 10 G 1/4 060-310466
KPS 31, KPS 33 KPS 33 0 – 3.5 0.2 10 10 G 3/8 A 060-310366
KPS 35 0–8 0.4 – 1.5 12 12 G /4
1
060-310566
KPS 35 0–8 0.4 – 1.5 12 12 G 3/8 A 060-310066
KPS 35 0–8 0.4 12 12 G 1/4 060-310866
KPS 37 6 – 18 0.85 – 2.5 22 27 G 1/4 060-310666
KPS 37 6 – 18 0.85 – 2.5 22 27 G 3/8 A 060-310166
KPS 39 10 – 35 2.0 – 6 45 53 G 1/4 060-310766
KPS 35, KPS 37, KPS 39
KPS 39 10 – 35 2.0 – 6 45 53 G 3/8 A 060-310266

2. Pressure switches for high pressure and strongly pulsating media

Type Setting Adjustable Permissible Max. test Min. burst Pressure Code no.
range Pe diff. see overpressure pressure pressure connection
also figs. 1,
2, and 3

[bar] [bar] [bar] [bar] [bar]

KPS 43 1 – 10 0.7 – 2.8 120 180 240 G 1/4 060-312066
KPS 43, KPS 45, KPS 47 KPS 45 4 – 40 2.2 – 11 120 180 240 G 1/4 060-312166
KPS 47 6 – 60 3.5 – 17 120 180 240 G /4 1
060-312266
When ordering, please state
type and code number

Terminology Range setting Max. test pressure

The pressure range within which the unit will The highest pressure the unit may be subjected
give a signal (contact changeover). to when, for example, testing the system for
leakage. Therefore, this pressure must not occur
Differential as a recurring system pressure.
The difference between make pressure and
break pressure (see also fig. 5 & 6, page 6). Min. bursting pressure
The pressure which the pressure-sensitive
Permissible overpressure element will withstand without leaking.
The highest permanent or recuiring pressure the
unit can be loaded with.

© Danfoss | DCS (jmn) | 2017.03 [Link].P10.I6.02 | 520B7855 | 3

Data sheet | Pressure switch and Thermostat, KPS

Technical data Switch Single pole changeover (SPDT) Contact material: Gold-plated silver contact
and ordering
(continued) Ohmic 10 A, 440 V, AC-1
6 A, 440 V, AC-3
Contact load Alternating current Inductive
(when Au surface 4 A, 440 V, AC-15
is burnt away)
Starting current max. 50 A (locked rotor)
Direct current 12 W, 220 V, DC-13, see curve, fig. 4, page 5
KPS 31 – 39 -40 – 70 °C
Ambient temperature
KPS 43 – 47 -25 – 70 °C
KPS 31 – 39 -40 – 100 °C
Temperature of medium 1)
KPS 43 – 47 -25 – 100 °C
Vibration resistance Vibration-stable in the range 2 – 30 Hz, amplitude 1.1 mm og 30 – 300 Hz, 4 g.

IP67 (including IPX6) according to EN 60529.

The pressure switch housing is enamelled pressure die cast aluminium (GD-AlSi 12).
Enclosure
The cover is fastened by four screws which are anchored to prevent loss.
The enclosure can be sealed with wire.

Cable entry Pg 13.5 for cable diameters from 5 – 14 mm.

Identification The type designation and code no. of the unit is stamped in the side of the housing.
1)
For water and seawater, max. 80 °C.

Types Scale accuracy Mean value of snap point variation after

400 000 operations
[bar] [bar]
KPS 31 ±0.2 ±0.1
KPS 33 ±0.3 ±0.2
KPS 35 ±0.5 ±0.3
KPS 37 ±1.0 ±0.4
KPS 39 ±3.0 ±0.7
KPS 43 ±1.0 ±0.2
KPS 45 ±4.0 ±1.0
KPS 47 ±6.0 ±1.5

Materials in contact with the medium

Type Materials
Bellows capsule Deep-drawn plate, material no. 1.0524 (DIN 1624)
KPS 31, KPS 33 Bellows Stainless steel, material no. 1.4306 (DIN 17440)
Pressure connection Steel C20, material no. 1.0420 (DIN 1652)
Bellows Stainless steel, material no. 1.4306 (DIN 17440)
KPS 35, KPS 37, KPS 39
Pressure connection Brass, W. no. 2.0401 (DIN 17660)
Diaphragm capsule Nickel-plated brass, DIN 50 968 Cu/Ni 5 (DIN 1756)
KPS 43, KPS 45, KPS 47
Diaphragm Nitrile-Butadien rubber

4 | 520B7855 | [Link].P10.I6.02 © Danfoss | DCS (jmn) | 2017.03

Data sheet | Pressure switch and Thermostat, KPS

Technical data KPS 43 KPS 45

and ordering
(continued)
[bar] [bar] [bar] [bar]

A B C A B C

60-501.12.20

60-502.12.20
Danfoss

Danfoss
Fig. 1 Fig. 2

KPS 47

[bar] [bar]

A B C
60-503.12.20
Danfoss

A: Range setting
B: Differential scale
C: Obtained differential Fig. 3

Direct current (DC) -load

[mA]

12 A
W

[V]
Curve A:
gives the maximum load

Hatched area B:
Fig. 4 Acceptable load for the gold plating of the contact

© Danfoss | DCS (jmn) | 2017.03 [Link].P10.I6.02 | 520B7855 | 5

Data sheet | Pressure switch and Thermostat, KPS

Function 1. KPS 31
Contacts 1-2 make and contacts 1-4 break when
the pressure falls under the set range value.
The contacts changeover to their initial position
when the pressure again rises to the set range
value plus the differential (see fig. 5).

[bar]

I. Alarm for falling pressure [s]

given at the set range value
II. Alarm for rising pressure Scale setting
given at the set range value
Fig. 5 Mechanical differential
plus the differential.

2. All other KPS pressure SWITCHES

Contacts 1-4 make and contacts 1-2 break when
the pressure rises above the set range value.
The contacts changeover to their initial position
when the pressure again fails to the range value
minus the differential (see fig. 6).

[bar]

I. Alarm for rising pressure

[s]
given at the set range value
II. Alarm for falling pressure Scale setting
given at the set range value
Fig. 6 Mechanical differential
minus the differential

6 | 520B7855 | [Link].P10.I6.02 © Danfoss | DCS (jmn) | 2017.03

Data sheet | Pressure switch and Thermostat, KPS

Function KPS 45
(continued) Example 2
An alarm must be given by a bell when the
[bar] [bar] pressure in a boiler rises to 10 bar. The normal
operating pressure is 9 bar.
Choose a KPS 37 (range 6 – 18 bar).
The range value of the pressure switch must be
set at 10 bar, the differential at 1 bar.
The bell must be connected to terminals 1 and 4.
A B C
Example 3
The pressure in a start air reservoir must be
regulated with a compressor controlled by a KPS
pressure switch so that it lies between 30 and

60-502.12.20
36 bar.

Danfoss
Choose a KPS 45 (range 4 – 40 bar).
The range value must be set at 36 bar.
Fig. 7 The differential of 6 bar must be set in
accordance with the nomogram, fig. 7,
Example 1 at approx. 2 on the differential scale.
An alarm must be given when the lubricating oil The required start function is obtained by
pressure in an engine falls below 0.8 bar. The connection to terminals 1 and 2 in the
alarm is in the form of a lamp. pressure switch.
Choose a KPS 31 (range 0 – 2.5 bar).
The minimum permissible lubricating oil
pressure of 0.8 bar must be set on the
range spindle.
The differential is fixed at 0.1 bar, i.e. the alarm
will not cut out before the pressure rises to
0.9 bar. The lamp must be connected to
terminals 1 and 2 in the pressure switch.

© Danfoss | DCS (jmn) | 2017.03 [Link].P10.I6.02 | 520B7855 | 7

Data sheet | Pressure switch and Thermostat, KPS

Dimensions [mm]
and weights [kg]

Net weight:
KPS 31 – 39 approx. 1.0 kg
KPS 43 – 47 approx. 1.3 kg

KPS 31, KPS 33 KPS 35, KPS 37, KPS 39 KPS 43, KPS 45, KPS 47

8 | 520B7855 | [Link].P10.I6.02 © Danfoss | DCS (jmn) | 2017.03

Data sheet | Pressure switch and Thermostat, KPS

Accessories
Part Description Code no.

G 3/8 connector, nipple and washer (10 mm

Connector with nipple 017-436866
o.d. × 6.5 mm i.d.) for brazing

G 3/8 connector, nipple and washer (10 mm

Connector with nipple 017-422966
o.d. × 6.5 mm i.d.) for welding

Danfoss
17.9051
G 3/8 × 7/16 – 20 UNF (1/4 flare) reduction with
Reducer 017-420566
washer

Adapter G 3/8 × 1/8 – 27 NPT with washer 060-333466

Nipple G 3/8 o.d × 7/16 – 20 UNF (1/4 flare) 060-324066

Nipple G 3/8 A – 1/4 NPT with washer 060-333566

Adapter G 3/8 × 1/4 – 18 NPT with washer 060-333666

G 1/4 A × G 3/8 A 060-333266

Nipple
G /4 A x o.d. M10 × 1 with washer
1
060-333866
Danfoss
60.9003

Damping coil with 1/4 flare connectors and

1 m copper capillary tube. Damping coils
used for applications with 3/8 RG connector
Damping coil 060-017166
requires the use of reducer.
For informations about capillary tube
lengths, please contact Danfoss.
Danfoss
60.9030

Damping coil with G 3/8 connectors and 1.5

Damping coil 060-104766
m copper capillary tube

Damping coil with G 3/8 connectors and 1 m

Armoured damping coil armoured copper capillary tube. Standard 060-333366
washers included.

© Danfoss | DCS (jmn) | 2017.03 [Link].P10.I6.02 | 520B7855 | 9

Data sheet | Pressure switch and Thermostat, KPS

Installation

Fig. 9

1. Range spindle
2. Range scale
3. Differential spindle
4. Differential scale
Fig. 8 5. Locking screw

Installation Setting
KPS pressure switches are fitted with a 3 mm When the pressure switch cover is removed, and
steel mounting plate. The units should not be the locking screw (5) is loosened, the range can
allowed to hang from the pressure connection. be set with the spindle (1) while at the same time
the scale (2) is being read. In units having an
Pressure connection adjustable differential, the spindle (3) must be
When fitting or removing pressure lines, the used to make the adjustment. The differential
spanner flats on the pressure connection should obtained can be read direct on the scale (4) or,
be used to apply counter-torque. with types KPS 43, KPS 45, KPS 47, can be
determined by reading the scale value and using
Steam plant the nomograms in figs. 1, 2, 3 (page 5). The
To protect the pressure element from excessive working line for determining the differential
heat, the insertion of a water-filled loop is must not intersect the shaded areas in the
recommended. The loop can, for example, be nomograms.
made of 10 mm copper tube as shown in fig. 8.
Selection of differential
Water systems To ensure that the plant functions properly,
Water in the pressure element is not harmful, but a suitable differential pressure is necessary. Too
if frost is likely to occur a water-filled pressure small a differential will give rise to short running
element may burst. To prevent this happening, periods with a risk of hunting. Too high
the pressure control can be allowed to operate a differential will result in large pressure
on an air cushion. oscillations.

Media-resistance Electrical connection

See table of materials in contact with the KPS pressure switches are fitted with a Pg 13.5
medium, page 4. If seawater is involved, types screwed cable entry that is suitable for cable
KPS 43, KPS 45, KPS 47 are recommended. diameters from 5 – 14 mm.
Contact function is shown in fig. 10.
Pulsations
If the pressure medium is superimposed with
severe pulsations, which occur in automatic
sprinkler systems (fire protection), fuel systems
for diesel motors (priming lines), and hydraulic
systems (e.g. propeller systems), etc., types
KPS 43, KPS 45, KPS 47 are recommended. The
maximum permissible pulsation level for these
types is 120 bar.
Fig. 10

10 | 520B7855 | [Link].P10.I6.02 © Danfoss | DCS (jmn) | 2017.03

 Installation guide

Pressure switch
KPS 31 – KPS 47
060R9302

060R9302
p
120 bar
p

bar

t
KPS 43, KPS 45, KPS 47 KPS 31 – 47

T1 min. T2 max. T2 max. T2 max.

Type
[°C] [°C] [°C] [°C]
KPS 31, KPS 33, KPS 35, KPS 37, KPS 39 -40 -40
70 100
KPS 43, KPS 45, KPS 47 -25 -25
T2 max. for water and seawater is 80 °C

P
Type
[bar]
KPS 31 6
KPS 33 10
KPS 35 12
KPS 37 27
KPS 39 53
KPS 43 180 10(6) A, 440 V AC L.R. 50A
220V, 12 W DC PILOT
KPS 45 180
KPS 47 180

© Danfoss | DCS (jmn) | 2016.02 [Link].P10.O3.00 | 520B7158 | 1

 KPS 31

60-638.13
Danfoss
CAUTION:
Diff.
Type Disconnect power supply before wiring connections are made or service
[bar]
to avoid possible electrical shock or damage to equipment.
KPS 31 0.1 Do never touch live parts with your fingers or with any tool.

© Danfoss | DCS (jmn) | 2016.02 [Link].P10.O3.00 | 520B7158 | 2

 KPS 33 – KPS 47

Diff.
Type (code no.)
[bar]
KPS 33 0.2
KPS 35 (060-310866) 0.4

© Danfoss | DCS (jmn) | 2016.02 [Link].P10.O3.00 | 520B7158 | 3

 Data sheet

Heavy duty pressure switch

MBC 5000 and MBC 5100

MBC pressure switches are used in industrial and

marine applications where space and reliability
are the most important features.

MBCs are compact pressure switches, designed

according to our block design to survive in the
harsh conditions known from machine rooms
onboard ships.

MBCs have high vibration resistance and

MBC 5100 features all common marine approvals.
The fixed, but low differential guarantees
accurate monitoring of critical pressures.

MBV test valves can be delivered as standard

option for MBC.

Features • Designed for use in severe industrial, • MBC 5100 with all major ship approvals,
environments, • High repeatability,
• High vibration stability • Optimal compact design for machine
• Part of the Danfoss block system, consisting building purposes
of MBC pressure controls, MBS pressure • Intended for alarm indication, shut down,
transmitters and MBV test valves control and diagnostics in many
applications - motors, gears, thrusters,
pumps, filters, compressors etc.

Approvals EN 60947-1 China Compulsory Certificate, CCC

EN 60947-4-1
EN 60947-5-1

Ship approvals, Lloyd’s Register, LR Bureau Veritas, BV

Type MBC 5100 Germanischer Lloyd, GL American Bureau of Shipping, ABS
Registro Italiano Navale, RINA Korean Register of Shipping, KR
Nippon Kaiji Kyokai, NKK Russian Maritime Register of Shipping, RMRS
Det Norske Veritas, DNV China Classification Society, CCS

© Danfoss | DCS (az) | 2018.01 [Link].P10.3A.02 | 1

Data sheet | Heavy duty pressure switch, type MBC 5000 and MBC 5100

Technical data Performance

± 0.2 % FS (typ.)
Bellows versions
± 0.5 % FS (max.)
± 0.5 % FS (typ.)
Repeatability Diaphragm versions
± 1.0 % FS (max.)
± 1.0 % FS (typ.)
Piston versions
± 1.0 % FS (max.)
Max. switch frequency 10/min (0.16 Hz)
Differential See page 4
Permissible operating pressure See page 4
Burst pressure See page 4
Mechanical for diaphragm and bellows > 400,000 cycles
Life time Mechanical for piston type >1 million cycles
Electrical at max. contact load > 100,000 cycles

Electrical specifications
Switch SPDT
AC 15 0.5 A, 250 V
Contact load
DC 13 12 W, 125 V

Environmental conditions
Bellows versions -40 – 85 °C
Operation Diaphragm versions -10 – 85 °C
Piston versions -40 – 85 °C
Temperature
Bellows versions -50 – 85 °C
Transport Diaphragm versions -50 – 85 °C
Piston versions -40 – 85 °C
Enclosure IP65, EN 60529
20 g, 25 – 2 kHz EN 60068-2-6
Vibration stability Sinusoidal Piston type 4.4 g,
IEC 60068-2-27
25 – 200 Hz

Mechanical characteristics
Standard G 1/4 female (ISO 228-1) or flange
Pressure connection
Option See specification form, page 4
Electrical connection Plug DIN 43650, Pg 9 / Pg 11 / Pg 13.5
Housing Anodized AIMgSi1, AW-6082T6

Bellows Stainless steel 1.4306 (18/8),

acc. to EN10088-2
Diaphragm FKM
Stainless steel 1.4028 (3H13),
Wetted parts material Piston
acc. to EN10088-2
O-ring NBR
Hole plug Nickel plated brass or zinc plated
(flange version) steel
Seal (piston version) Turcon T05
Housing Anodized AIMgSi1, AW-6082T6
Enclosure material
Plug fixture Glass filled polyamid, PA 6.6
Contact system Silver (AG) microprofile
Net weight 0.25 kg

© Danfoss | DCS (az) | 2018.01 [Link].P10.3A.02 | 2

Data sheet | Heavy duty pressure switch, type MBC 5000 and MBC 5100

Electrical connection

93Z19.11
Danfoss
In In

Input
Input
Normally closed
Normally closed(NC)
(NC)
Normally open
Normally open(NO)
(NO)
Connected to enclosure of pressure control
Out NO Out NO Connected to enclosure
of pressure control
Out NC Out NC

Adjustment

Mechanical difference

One full turn (360°) of MBC setting screw is approx. equal to 7% of the setting range

Mechanical connection Thread Flange connection on MBV 5000 Test Valve

Not applicable for piston type

How to choose To achieve the best operating conditions for MBC

pressure controls, it is recommended to apply the
following rules of thumb.

Choose:
• The MBC type/types which meet the demands • A diaphragm type, if pressure peaks and
for the operating pressure pulsations occur in the system (if possible)
• The MBC version with the lowest possible • Bellows type, if low differential is needed
setting range • Piston type for high pressure

© Danfoss | DCS (az) | 2018.01 [Link].P10.3A.02 | 3

Data sheet | Heavy duty pressure switch, type MBC 5000 and MBC 5100

Ordering Type: Setting Diff. at Diff. at Permissible Min. burst Type MBC 5100
standard types LP range min. max. operating pressure designation Ship
Low pressure / range 1) range 1) pressure MBC 5000-/ approved
HP MBC 5100-
High Pressure Pe Pe Pe Pe Pe
[bar] [bar] [bar] [bar] [bar] Code no.
LP bellows -0.20 – 1.00 0.30 0.45 15 30 1011-1DB04 061B000566
LP bellows -0.20 – 4.00 0.30 0.45 15 30 1211-1DB04 061B000466 2)
LP bellows -0.20 – 10.00 0.40 0.60 15 30 1411-1DB04 061B000266 2)
LP bellows -0.20 – 10.00 0.40 0.60 15 30 1411-1CB04 061B000066
LP bellows 0.50 – 3.00 0.25 0.30 15 30 2011-1DB04 061B002966
LP bellows 1.00 – 6.00 0.30 0.45 15 30 2211-1DB04 061B000766
HP bellows 5.00 – 30.00 0.90 2.00 45 90 3421-1DB04 061B000366 2)
LP diaphragm 0.50 – 3.00 0.50 0.80 150 300 2031-1DB04 061B101766
LP diaphragm 1.00 – 6.00 1.00 2.50 150 300 2231-1DB04 061B100966
LP diaphragm 1.00 – 10.00 1.00 2.50 150 300 2431-1DB04 061B100466 2)
LP diaphragm 5.00 – 20.00 1.00 2.50 150 300 3231-1DB04 061B100266 2)
LP diaphragm 5.00 – 25.00 1.00 2.50 150 300 3331-1DB04 061B102466
HP diaphragm 5.00 – 40.00 2.00 7.00 150 300 3641-1DB04 061B100566 2)
HP diaphragm 10.00 – 100.00 4.00 12.00 150 300 4241-1DB04 061B100366 2)
HP piston 16.00 – 160.00 15.00 30.00 600 1200 5251-1CB04 061B510066
HP piston 25.00 – 250.00 20.00 40.00 600 1200 5451-1CB04 061B510166
HP piston 40.00 – 400.00 20.00 50.00 600 1200 5651-1CB04 061B510266
1) Max value, all values lower or equal are correct
2) Preferred versions

Ordering
customized types
MBC 5000-

MBC 5100-
  
Pressure connection
Setting range C A 0 5 ........... M10x1 female
-0.2 – 1 bar.......................................... 1 0 C B 0 4 ........... G 1/4 female
-0.2 – 4 bar.......................................... 1 2 D A 0 5 ........... M10x1 female with flange connection
-0.2 – 10 bar........................................ 1 4 D B 0 4 ........... G 1/4 female with flange connection
0.5 – 3 bar............................................ 2 0 x x x x ........... Others
1 – 6 bar............................................... 2 2
1 – 10 bar............................................. 2 4 Electrical connection
2 – 6 bar............................................... 2 6 0 ................................................................... No plug (DIN 43650 A)
5 – 0 bar............................................... 3 2 1 ................................................................... Pg 11 plug (DIN 43650 A)
5 – 25 bar............................................. 3 3 2 ................................................................... Pg 13.5 plug (DIN 43650 A)
5 – 30 bar............................................. 3 4 3 ................................................................... Pg 9 plug (DIN 43650 A)
5 – 40 bar............................................. 3 6 x ................................................................... Others
10 – 100 bar........................................ 4 2
16 – 160 bar........................................ 5 2 Microswitch
25 – 250 bar........................................ 5 4 1 ...................................................................................... 0.5 A, 250 V (AC 15)
40 – 400 bar........................................ 5 6 12 W, 125 V (DC 13)
Others................................................... x x x ...................................................................................... Others

Type
Low pressure bellows (-0.2 – 10 bar)........................ 1
High pressure bellows (2 – 30 bar)............................ 2
Low pressure diaphragm (0.5 – 25 bar)................... 3
High pressure diaphragm (5 – 100 bar)................... 4
High pressure piston (40 – 400 bar).......................... 5

© Danfoss | DCS (az) | 2018.01 [Link].P10.3A.02 | 4

Data sheet | Heavy duty pressure switch, type MBC 5000 and MBC 5100

Dimensions [mm]
and weights [kg]

93Z05.15
Danfoss
93

Net weight: 0.25 kg

93Z14.18
Danfoss
93

Net weight: 0.25 kg

© Danfoss | DCS (az) | 2018.01 [Link].P10.3A.02 | 5

Accessories Part Description Code number:
Pulse snubber

61B42.10
Danfoss
Male, G1/4A, length 20 mm 061B400166

Pulse snubber

61B41.10
Danfoss
Male, G1/4A, length 34 mm 061B400266

Pulse snubber
61B40.10
Danfoss

For flange connection 061B722166

© Danfoss | DCS (az) | 2018.01 [Link].P10.3A.02 | 6

 Installation guide
Heavy duty pressure switch
Types MBC 5000 and MBC 5100
061R9302

061R9302
AC 15: 0.5A 250V
DC 13: 12W 125V

1 2 3

Electrical Connected to enclosure Attention:

en Input Normally closed (NC) Normally open (NO)
connection of pressure switch Use only the accompanying plug, also when replacing.

Tilsluttet pressostatens Vigtigt: Anvend kun det medleverede stik, også ved
da EL-tilslutning Indgang Normalt lukket (NC) Normalt åben (NO)
kapsling udskiftning.

Elektrischer Öffner (Kontakt); Schließer (Kontakt); Anschluss an das Gehäuse Achtung: Nur mitgelieferten Stecker verwenden, auch
de Eingang
Anschluss stromlos geschlossen stromlos geöffnet der Druckregelung im Austausch.

Raccordement Raccordé à la protection Attention: Utiliser exclusivement la prise fournie,

fr Entrée Normalement fermé (NC) Normalement ouvert (NO)
électrique du pressostat même en cas de remplacement.
93Z05.15
Danfoss

93Z14.18
Danfoss
93

93

Mounting and pressure connection: In environments that have

excessive vibrations such as fast running engines, gears and similar,
Danfoss recommends that the product is mounted on a heavy solid
en
base, like the engine frame. It is also strongly recommended that the
inlet pressure tube is secured to the same solid base in order to avoid
inlet tube vibrations.

Montage og tryktilslutning I omgivelser med kraftige vibrationer,

som hurtigt gående motorer, drev eller lignende, anbefa-ler Danfoss, at
da produktet monteres på en kraftig, solid sokkel såsom maskinstativet.
Det anbefales også eftertrykkeligt, at indgangstrykrøret er sikret til
den samme solide sokkel for at forhindre vibration af indgangsrøret.

Montage und Druckanschluss In Umgebungen mit starken

Erschütterungen wie z. B. in der Nähe von laufenden Maschinen,
Getrieben oder ähnlichem, empfiehlt Danfoss, das Produkt auf einem
de schweren, soliden Sockel wie dem Maschinenrahmen zu montieren.
Es wird ebenfalls dringend empfohlen, das Druckrohr für das
zuströmende Medium am selben soliden Sockel zu befestigen, um
Vibrationen des Druckrohres zu vermeiden.

Installation et raccordement de pression Dans des environnements

en Thread Flange ou les vibrations sont très importantes, comme sur des moteurs
rapides, des transmissions ou autres, Danfoss recommande de monter
da Gevind Flange
fr les produits sur un support très robuste comme le cadre moteur. Il est
de Gewinde Flansch aussi fermement recommandé de fixer l’alimentation en pression sur
le même support solide, afin de limiter les vibrations sur cette tubulure
fr Filetage Bride d’entrée.

© Danfoss A/S (AC-MCI / jmn), 2013-11 [Link].P10.A3.52 / 520B5849 1

 1.5 0.5 Nm
93Z194.12
Danfoss

93Z44.10
Danfoss

-40 °C – 85 °C -10 °C – 85 °C

Operation One full turn (360°) of the MBC setting screw is approx. equal to 7% of
en Bellows and piston version Diaphragm version
temperature: the full setting range.

Fuld omdrejning (360°) af MBC indstillingsskrue er ca. 7% af fuld

da Driftstemperatur: Bælg- og stempeludførelse Membranudførelse
indstillingsområde.

Wellrohr- und Mechanische Differenz: Eine Umdrehung (360°) der Einstellschraube

de Betriebstemperatur: Membranen-Ausführung
Kolbenausführung entspricht etwa 7% des kompletten Einstellbereiches.

Température de Un tour complet (360°) de la vis de réglage sur le MBC équivaut à

fr Modèle à soufflet et piston Modèle à membrane
fonction-nement: approximativement 7% de la pleine échelle de réglage.

en Mechanical differential

da Mekanisk differens

de Mechanische Differenz

fr Différentiel mécanique

Danfoss block
en
components

Danfoss blok-
da
komponenter

Danfoss
de
Komponente

Danfoss
MBC 5000, MBC 5100 MBC 5080, MBC 5180 MBS 5100, MBS 5150 MBV 5000
fr versions com-
pactes

2 [Link].P10.A3.52 / 520B5849 © Danfoss A/S (AC-MCI / jmn), 2013-11

REVALCO
MODEL: 4RK30
LOCATION: MOUNTED ON CONTROL PANEL
 AS BUILT BILL OF MATERIALS
PROJECT: P18013/001/03/2019
CLIENT: ATLANTIC SHIP MANAGEMENT LTD " VESSEL TF VICTORIA"
Tag
ItemCode Item Specification Quantity Unit
Number
A. MAJOR COMPONENTS
Vertical Centrifugal PJE Coupling, SS 316 , 0.55 kW, 3 x
P-1 504CRN-069 Feed Pump 1 Each
380/415V, 50Hz, Model: CRN3-7, Grundfos
507CMV-001 FRP, 4"T , Model: 1865, Structural Vessel 1 Each
507TBF-024 Tank Adaptor 1 1/2" In/out" 1 Each
507TBF-061 Bottom distribution Set 1 Each
520MCP-079 Top Hub PVC For MMF Vessel 1 Each
508FFM-001 Filter media 0.5-1.0mm Sand 75 Kgs
MMF-1 Multimedia Filter Vessel
508FFM-002 Filter media 1.5-2.5mm Gravel 50 Kgs
508FFM-003 Filter media 3.15-5.6mm Gravel 25 Kgs
508FFM-004 Filter media 5.0-8.0mm Gravel 50 Kgs
508FFM-005 Filter media 0.8-1.6mm Anthracite 35 Kgs
508FFM-006 Filter media 0.2-0.63mm Sand 50 Kgs
Diaphragm, PP (Head), 0.019kW, 230V, 50Hz, Model:
511GDP-017 1 Each
DP-1 Antiscalant Dosing Pump DDE 6-10, Grundfos-Alldos
511GDP-002 Installation kit for DDE 6-10, Grundfos-Alldos 1 Each
DT-1 511JDT-006 Antiscalant Dosing Tank Vertical Cylindrical, PE, 75 Liters, Model: FD-A75 1 Each
05M Cartridge Filter
510CFH-010 20"L x 4"D -1" in/out, PP 1 Each
Housing
CF-1
05M Cartridge Filter Filter Cartridge, 05M, 20" L x 4.5"D, Advanced
604P05-002 1 Each
Element Watertek
01M Cartridge Filter
510CFH-010 20"L x 4"D -1" in/out, PP 1 Each
Housing
CF-2
01M Cartridge Filter Filter Cartridge, 01M, 20" L x 4.5"D, Advanced
604P01-002 1 Each
Element Watertek
RO System Pump w/ Plunger Pump, SS, 5.5kW, 3x380-415V, 50Hz, Model:
P-2 501CPM-018 1 Each
Motor 7CP6171, CAT w/ WEG Motor
- 501CSP-059 Pulsation Dampner SS (Housing), NBR (Bladder), Model: 6031.800, CAT 1 Each
RO System Pump Suction
- 520HOS-035 3/4", 315 psi, Length: 1150mm FTF 1 Each
Hose
RO System Pump Wire Braided Rubber Hose Assy, 3/4", 1525 PSI,
- 521HPF-127 1 Each
Discharge Hose Length: 1300 mm FTF
4040, 1000 psi, Filament Wound Epoxy / Glass
PV-1 to 8 512PVH-001 RO Pressure Vessel 8 Each
composites, Model: 40E100-1, Codeline
Sea Water membrane elemen, 4" dia x 40" long
- 513SWH-004 RO Membrane 8 Each
Model: SWC5-LD-4040, Hydranautics
Horizontal Centrifugal, SS316 (Housing), GFP
Chemical Cleaning /
P-3 503FPD-008 (Impeller) , 1.15 kW, 1x230V, 50Hz, Model: XF192S, 1 Each
Flushing Pump
Davey
TK-1 511JDT-007 Chemical Cleaning Tank Vertical Cylindrical, PE, 100 Liters, Model: FD-A 100 1 Each
B. ELECTRICAL & INSTRUMENTS

Pressure Gauge SS 2.5" Dial, dual scale, 6Bar(85 PSI),

PG-1/2/3 515PKA-025 Pressure Gauge 3 Each
1/4" NPT, Back Connection, Model: 1009SW, Ashcroft
Pressure Gauge SS 2.5" Dial, dual scale 0-100
PG-4 515PKA-027 Pressure Gauge BAR(1400PSI), 1/4" NPT Back Connection, Model: 1 Each
1009SW, Ashcroft
Pressure Gauge SS 2.5" Dial, Dual Scale 6bar(85Psi)),
PG-5 515PTA-020 Pressure Gauge 1/4" NPT Lower Connection, Model: 1009SW, 1 Each
Ashcroft
 AS BUILT BILL OF MATERIALS
PROJECT: P18013/001/03/2019
CLIENT: ATLANTIC SHIP MANAGEMENT LTD " VESSEL TF VICTORIA"
Tag
ItemCode Item Specification Quantity Unit
Number

Temperature Gauge SS 3" Dial, 0-50 deg. C, 1/2 NPT

TG-1 515TMA-002 Temperature Gauge 1 Each
Back Connection, Model: EI Series, Ashcroft

Flow Meter float:SS, Body: Acrylic, 1/2" MNPT F550

FM-1 516PMB-003 Product Flowmeter 1 Each
Panel Mount (0.5-5 GPM) Blue-White
Flow Meter float:SS, Body: Acrylic, 3/4" MNPT F550
FM-2 516PMB-004 Reject Flowmeter 1 Each
Panel Mount (01-10 GPM) Blue-White
TDS Transmitter/Controller, Model: dTRANS CR,
517PMM-037 Conductivity Meter 1 Each
JUMO
conductivity cell, K = 1.0 electrode material Ti
CM-1 517PMM-016 Conductivity Sensor 1 Each
(titanium) K = 1.0, 0.1 - 5000 µS/cm, JUMO
Conductivity Sensor
517PMM-029 TDS electrode connecting cable 10 meter, JUMO 1 Each
Connecting Cable
LPS-1 519PCS-010 Low Pressure Switch Range: 0-3.5 Bar, Model: KPS-33, Danfoss 1 Each
HPS-1 519PCS-006 High Pressure Switch Range: 10 to 100 bar, Model: MBC 5100, Danfoss 1 Each

Enclosure: 530x430x200 MM (HXWXD), Polyester

reinforced with fibreglass, Schneider
UCP - RO Control panel 1 Each
Components: ABB/Revalco/Elemex/Equivalent
Please refer Drawing No. P18013-E-001 for details
C. VALVES
METALLIC
NV-1 514NDV-014 Needle Valve 1/2" / NPT, 6000 WOG, SS316 1 Each
BV-2 514SBV-041 Ball Valve 1/2" / NPT, 2000 WOG, ASTM A351 CF8M 1 Each
- 521FTK-002 Pre/Post Valve 1/4" 3-Way Valve, SS316 1 Each
PVC
BV-1 520FPH-008 Ball Valve 1 1/2", PVC-u, solvent socket ends ASTM PN16 1 ECH
BV-5, BV-6,
BV-7, M1 to 520FPH-084 Ball Valve 1", PVC-u, solvent socket ends ASTM PN16 7 ECH
M4
BV-3, BV-4,
520FPH-086 Ball Valve 1/2", PVC-u, solvent socket ends ASTM PN16 3 ECH
SV-1
NRV-1, NRV-
520FPH-020 Non Return Valve 1", PVC-u, solvent socket ends ASTM PN16 2 ECH
2
NRV-4 520FPH-019 Non Return Valve 3/4", PVC-u, solvent socket ends ASTM PN16 1 ECH
NRV-3 520FPH-018 Non Return Valve 1/2", PVC-u, solvent socket ends ASTM PN16 1 ECH
STR-1 520FPH-026 Line Strainer 1 1/2", PVC transparent 1 ECH
NOTE: ITEM CODE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT PRIOR NOTICE. PLEASE MENTION WATERTEK PROJECT NO WHEN SENDING
THE ENQUIRY.
STANDARD SPARE PARTS LIST AWS 840-20, 50 Hz

Equipment Description : SEA WATER REVERSE OSMOSIS (SWRO) Manufacturer : ADVANCED WATERTEK INDUSTRIES LLC
DESALINATION SYSTEM Ras Al Khor Rd, Al Aweer
Client : ATLANTIC SHIP MANAGEMENT LTD P.O. Box 24647
Project/Ref: : TF VICTORIA Dubai, United Arab Emirates
PO Number : sales@[Link]
AWT Job Number : P18013

RECOMMENDED
DESCRIPTION/ UNIT OF
SN AWT PART NUMBER SPARE PART QUANTITY FOR 1-YEAR
MATERIAL SPECIFICATION MEASURE
OPERATION

1 504GSP-010 Shaft Seal Kit FOR Feed Pump, Grundfos, CRN 3 1 Ech

2 510FHS-005 O-ring FOR CF Filter Housing (5&1 Micron), Big Blue, 4.5" x 20" 2 Ech

3 512PVS-056 Membrane Adapter Kit Codeline, 4" 4 Ech

2.5" Dial, dual scale 0-100 BAR(1400PSI), 1/4" NPT Back Connection,
4 515PKA-027 Pressure Gauge 1 Ech
Model: 1009SW, Ashcroft

5 519PCS‐010 High Pressure Switch Range: 10 to 100 bar, Model: MBC 5100, Danfoss 1 Ech

6 520FPH-118 Mesh for Feed Line Strainer 1-1/2", PVC 1 Ech

7 521FTK-002 Pre-Post Valve 1/4" 3-Way Valve, SS316 1 Ech

8 520FPH-008 Manual Ball Valve 1 1/2", PVC-u, solvent socket ends ASTM PN16 1 Ech

9 520FPH-084 Manual Ball Valve 1", PVC-u, solvent socket ends ASTM PN16 1 Ech

10 520FPH-086 Manual Ball Valve 1/2", PVC-u, solvent socket ends ASTM PN16 1 Ech

11 520HOS-034 Low Pressure Hose 315 psi, Red Colour,1/2" 2 M

12 521SSK-069 High Pressure Ferrule Fitting Back Ferrule 1/4" 2 Ech

13 521SSK-070 High Pressure Ferrule Fitting Front Ferrule 1/4" 2 Ech

14 521SSK-068 High Pressure Ferrule Fitting Back Ferrule 1/2" 2 Ech

15 521SSK-067 High Pressure Ferrule Fitting Front Ferrule 1/2" 2 Ech

16 520FPH-032 Pipe Clip Type “B” PP black 20-23mm (1/2") 2 Ech

17 520FPH-033 Pipe Clip Type “B” PP black 25-28mm (3/4") 2 Ech

18 520FPH-034 Pipe Clip Type “B” PP black 31-35mm (1") 2 Ech

19 520FGF-023 Elbow 90D, PVC, 1" 3 Ech

20 520FGF-014 Elbow 90D, PVC, 1/2" 2 Ech

21 520FGF-027 Tee 90D, PVC, 1" 1 Ech

22 520FGF-146 Tee 90D, PVC, 1/2" 1 Ech

23 520FGF-158 Union PVC,1-1/2" 2 Ech

24 520FGF-164 Union PVC, 1" 2 Ech

25 520FGF-046 Adaptor Socket (FTA) uPVC/Rp 1/2" Female Threaded 1 Ech

26 520FGF-033 Adaptor Socket (FTA) uPVC/Rp 1" Female Threaded 1 Ech

27 520FGF-057 Adaptor Bush Equal (MTA) uPVC/R 1" solvent cement socket and taper male thread 1 Ech

28 519CTC-096 Contactor AF9-30-10-13 3 POLE,100-250V AC/DC 50/60 HZ 9A 1 Ech

29 519CTC-097 Contactor AF16-30-10-13 3 POLE, 100-250V AC/DC 50/60 HZ 16A 1 Ech

30 519PWC-011 Manual Motor Starter MS116-16.0 10-16A 1 Ech

STANDARD SPARE PARTS LIST AWS 840-20, 50 Hz

Equipment Description : SEA WATER REVERSE OSMOSIS (SWRO) Manufacturer : ADVANCED WATERTEK INDUSTRIES LLC
DESALINATION SYSTEM Ras Al Khor Rd, Al Aweer
Client : ATLANTIC SHIP MANAGEMENT LTD P.O. Box 24647
Project/Ref: : TF VICTORIA Dubai, United Arab Emirates
PO Number : sales@[Link]
AWT Job Number : P18013

31 519PWC-116 Manual Motor Starter MS116-1.6 1-1.6A 1 Ech

32 519CTC-020 Plug Inter Control Relay Pluggable Relay, 14 Pin, c/w socket 230V 2 Ech

33 519EFT-289 Indicator Lamp CL-523Y LED=Yellow 230VAC 1 Ech

34 519EFT-035 Indicator Lamp CL2-523G LED=Green 230VAC 1 Ech

35 519EFT-036 Indicator Lamp CL2-523R LED=Red 230VAC 1 Ech

36 519PWC-048 MCB S202-C6 2 pole 6 A 1 Ech

37 519EFT-437 Terminal Block 10mm (KUT10) w/o End plate, Din Mntg 2 Ech

38 519EFT-363 Earth Terminal Block 16mm ET16 Y/G Connector 2 Ech

39 519EFT-201 Terminal Block 4mm (KUT4) w/o End plate, Din Mntg 2 Ech

40 519EFT-361 Earth Terminal Block 4mm ET4 Y/G Connector 2 Ech

NOTE: ITEM CODE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT PRIOR NOTICE. PLEASE MENTION WATERTEK PROJECT NO WHEN SENDING THE ENQUIRY.
RO ANTISCALANT
 Disperso 370 Page 1 of 12

SAFETY DATA SHEET

DISPERSO - 370

Section 1. Identification
product identifier : DISPERSO 370
Chemical name : DISPERSO 370
Other means of identification : DISPERSO 370
Product type : liquid

Relevant identified uses of the substance or mixture and uses advised against
User advised against
Reason : The supplier has no experience on this use.

Supplier's details : Advanced Watertek Industries LLC

Ras Al Khor,Dubai
United Arab Emirates
Tel.: +971-4-3333100 Fax: +971-4-3332570
Emergency telephone number : +971-4-3333100

Section 2. Hazards identification

Classification of the substance or mixture : Not classified.

GHS label elements

Signal word : No signal word.

Hazard statements : No known significant effects or critical hazards.

Precautionary statements

General : Read label before use. Keep out of reach of

children’s medical advice is needed, have product
container or label at hand.
Prevention : Not applicable
Response : Not applicable.
Storage : Not applicable.
Disposal : Not applicable.
Other hazards which do not result : Not available.
in classification

Section 3. Composition/information on ingredients

Substance/mixture : Mixture
Chemical name : DISPERSO 370
Other means of identification : DISPERSO 370
CAS number/other identifiers

Version: 3.1 Date of issue/Date of revision: 22.10.2018 Date of previous issue: 03.12.2013
 Disperso 370 Page 2 of 12

Product code : 18978,18144,18274,18211,15881,18369

Ingredient name % CAS number
Ammonia, aqueous solutions >= 0 - <=0,2 1336-21-6

There are no additional ingredients present which, within the current knowledge of the supplier and in the
concentrations applicable, are classified as hazardous to health or the environment and hence require
reporting in this section.

Occupational exposure limits, if available, are listed in section 8.

Section 4. First aid measures

Description of necessary first aid measures

Eye contact : Immediately flush eyes with plenty of water, occasionally lifting
the upper and lower eyelids. Check for and remove any contact
lenses. Get medical attention if irritation occurs.

Inhalation : Remove victim to fresh air and keep at rest in a position comfortable
for breathing. Get medical attention if symptoms occur.

Skin contact : Flush contaminated skin with plenty of water. Remove contaminated clothing
and shoes. Get medical attention if symptoms occur.

Ingestion : Wash out mouth with water. Remove victim to fresh air and keep at
rest in a position comfortable for breathing. If material has been
swallowed and the exposed person is conscious, give small quantities
of water to drink. Do not induce vomiting unless directed to do so by
medical personnel. Get medical attention if symptoms occur.

Most important symptoms/effects, acute and delayed

Potential acute health effects
Eye Contact : No known significant effect or critical hazard.
Inhalation : Exposure to decomposition products may cause a
health. Serious effects may be delayed following exposure.
Skin contact : No know significant effect or critical hazards.
Ingestion : No known significant effects or critical hazards.

Over-exposure signs/symptoms

Eye Contact : No specific data.

Inhalation : No specific data.
Ingestion : No specific data.
Skin contact : No specific data.
Ingestion : No specific data.

Indication of immediate medical attention and special treatment needed, if necessary

Notes to physician : Treat symptomatically. Contact poison treatment specialist

Version: 3.1 Date of issue/Date of revision: 22.10.2018 Date of previous issue: 03.12.2013
 Disperso 370 Page 3 of 12

immediately if large quantities have been ingested or inhaled.

Specific treatment : No specific treatment.
Protection of first-aiders : No action shall be taken involving any personal risk or without
suitable training.

See toxicological information (section 11)

Section 5. Fire-fighting measures

Extinguishing media

Suitable extinguishing media : Use dry chemical, CO2, water spray (fog) or foam.
Unsuitable extinguishing media : None known.
Special hazards arising from the chemical : In a fire or if heated, a pressure increase will occur
and the container may burst.

Hazardous thermal decomposition products : Decomposition products may include the following materials.
carbon monoxide
carbon dioxide
nitrogen oxides
phosphorus oxides
Phosphine

Special protective actions for fire-fighters : Promptly isolate the scene by removing all persons
from the vicinity of the incident if there is a fire. No
action shall be taken involving any personal risk or
without suitable training.

Special protective equipment for fire-fighters : Fire-fighters should wear appropriate protective equipment
and self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) with a full
face-piece operated in positive pressure mode. Clothing for
fire-fighters (including helmets, protective boots and gloves)
conforming to European standard EN 469 will provide a basic
level of protection for chemical incidents.
Remark : Not applicable.

Section 6. Accidental release measures

Personal precautions, protective equipment and emergency procedures

For non-emergency personnel : No action shall be taken involving any personal risk
or Without suitable training. Evacuate surrounding areas. Keep
unnecessary and unprotected personnel from entering. Do not
touch or walk through spilled material. Put on appropriate
personal protective equipment.

For emergency responders : If specialized clothing is required to deal with the

spillage, take note of any information in Section 8
on suitable and unsuitable materials. See also the
information in "For non-emergency personnel".

Version: 3.1 Date of issue/Date of revision: 22.10.2018 Date of previous issue: 03.12.2013
 Disperso 370 Page 4 of 12

Environmental precautions : Avoid dispersal of spilled material and runoff and contact
with soil, waterways, drains and sewers. Inform the
relevant authorities if the product has caused
environmental pollution (sewers, waterways, soil or air).
May be harmful to the environment if released in large
quantities.

Methods and materials for containment and cleaning up

Small spill : Stop leak if without risk. Move containers from spill
area. Dilute with water and mop up if water-soluble.
Alternatively, or if water-insoluble, absorb with an inert dry
material and place in an appropriate waste disposal
container. Dispose of via a licensed waste disposal
contractor.

Large spill : Stop leak if without risk. Move containers from spill
area. Prevent entry into sewers, water courses, basements
or confined areas. Wash spillages into an effluent
treatment plant or proceed as follows. Contain and
collect spillage with non-combustible, absorbent material
e.g. sand, earth, vermiculite or diatomaceous earth and
place in container for disposal according to local
regulations. Dispose of via a licensed waste disposal
contractor.

Section 7. Handling and storage

Precaution for safe handling

Protective measures : Put on appropriate personal protective equipment
(see section 8).

Advice on general occupational hygiene : Eating, drinking and smoking should be prohibited in area
where this material is handled, stored and processed.
Workers should wash hands and face before eating,
drinking and smoking. Remove contaminated clothing
and protective equipment before entering eating areas.
See also Section 8 for additional information on hygiene
measures.
Conditions for safe storage, including
any incompatibilities : Store in accordance with local regulations. Store in
original container protected from direct sunlight in a dry,
cool and well-ventilated area, away from incompatible
materials (see section 10) and food and drink. Keep
container tightly closed and sealed until ready for use. Containers
that have been opened must be carefully resealed and kept
upright to prevent leakage. Do not store in unlabeled containers.
Use appropriate containment to avoid environmental
contamination.

Version: 3.1 Date of issue/Date of revision: 22.10.2018 Date of previous issue: 03.12.2013
 Disperso 370 Page 5 of 12

Section 8. Exposure controls/personal protection

Control parameters
Occupational exposure limits : None.

Appropriate engineering controls : No special ventilation requirements. Good general

ventilation should be sufficient to control worker exposure to
airborne contaminants. If this product contains ingredients with
exposure limits, use process enclosures, local exhaust ventilation
or other engineering controls to keep worker exposure below
any recommended or statutory limits.

Environmental exposure controls : Emissions from ventilation or work process equipment

should be checked to ensure they comply with the requirements
of environmental protection legislation. In some cases, fume
scrubbers, filters or engineering modifications to the process
equipment will be necessary to reduce emissions to acceptable
levels.
Individual protection measures

Hygiene measures : Wash hands, forearms and face thoroughly after handling
chemical products, before eating, smoking and using the lavatory
and at the end of the working period. Appropriate techniques
should be used to remove potentially contaminated clothing.
Wash contaminated clothing before reusing. Ensure that
eyewash stations and safety showers are close to the
workstation location.

Eye/face protection : Safety eyewear complying with approved standard should be

used when a risk assessment indicates this is necessary to avoid
exposure to liquid splashes, mists, gases or dusts.
Skin protection

Hand protection : Chemical -resistant, impervious gloves complying with an

approved standard should be worn at all times when handling
chemical products if a risk assessment indicates this is necessary.

Body protection : Personal protective equipment for the body should be

selected based on the task being performed and the risks
involved and should be approved by a specialist before handling
this product.

Other skin protection : Appropriate footwear and any additional skin protection
measures should be selected based on the task being performed
and the risks involved and should be approved by a specialist
before handling this product.

Respiratory protection : Use a properly fitted, air-purifying or air-fed respirator

complying with an approved standard if a risk assessment

Version: 3.1 Date of issue/Date of revision: 22.10.2018 Date of previous issue: 03.12.2013
 Disperso 370 Page 6 of 12

indicates this is necessary. Respirator selection must be based on

known or anticipated exposure levels, the hazards of the product
and the safe working limits of the selected respirator.

Section 9. Physical and chemical properties

Appearance
Physical state : liquid
Color : [Link].
Odor : Ammoniacal
Odor threshold : Not applicable
pH : 10 – 11 @ 25°C (77°F)
Melting point : Not applicable.
Boiling point : Not applicable.
Flash point : Not applicable.
Fire point : Not applicable.
Evaporation rate : Not applicable.
Flammability (solid, gas) : Non-Flammable
Lower and upper explosive : Lower: Not applicable.
(flammable) limits Upper : Upper: Not applicable.
Vapor pressure : Not applicable.
Vapor density : Not available.
Relative density : 1,35 @ 15.5°C (59.9°F)
Solubility : Miscible in water.
Partition coefficient: noctanol/water : -3,5 @ 20°C (68°F)
Auto-ignition temperature : Not applicable.
Decomposition temperature : Not available.
Viscosity : Dynamic: Not applicable.
: Kinematic: Not applicable.

Section 10. Stability and reactivity

Reactivity : No specific test data related to reactivity available
for this product or its ingredients.

Chemical stability : The product is stable.

Possibility of hazardous reactions : Under normal conditions of storage and use, hazardous reactions
will not occur.

Conditions to avoid : No specific data.

Incompatible materials : Reactive or incompatible with the following materials:
Metals
Acids
Oxidizing material

Version: 3.1 Date of issue/Date of revision: 22.10.2018 Date of previous issue: 03.12.2013
 Disperso 370 Page 7 of 12

Hazardous decomposition products : Under normal conditions of storage and use, hazardous
decomposition products should not be produced. May release
dangerous gases (PHOSPHINE) under certain conditions.

Section 11. Toxicological Information

Information on toxicological effects

Acute toxicity

Product/ingredient name Result Species Dose Exposure

DISPERSO 370
LD50 Oral Rat > 5.000 mg/kg -
LD50 Dermal Rabbit > 5.000 mg/kg -

Conclusion/Summary : Conclusive bot not sufficient for classification

Irritation/Corrosion

Conclusion/Summary
Skin : Non - irritating to the skin.
Eyes : Conclusive but not sufficient for classification.
Respiratory : Not available.

Sensitization

Product/ingredient name Route of exposure Species Results

Conclusion/Summary
Skin : Conclusive but not sufficient for classification.
Respiratory : Conclusive but not sufficient for classification.
Mutagenicity
Conclusion/Summary : Conclusive but not sufficient for classification.
Carcinogenicity
Conclusion/Summary : Conclusive but not sufficient for classification.
Reproductive toxicity
Conclusion/Summary : Conclusive but not sufficient for classification.
Teratogenicity
Conclusion/Summary : Conclusive but not sufficient for classification.
Specific target organ toxicity (single exposure)

Specific target organ toxicity (repeated exposure)

Aspiration hazard

Information on the likely routes of exposure : Not available.

Version: 3.1 Date of issue/Date of revision: 22.10.2018 Date of previous issue: 03.12.2013
 Disperso 370 Page 8 of 12

Potential acute health effects

Eye contact : No known significant effects or critical hazards.

Inhalation : Exposure to decomposition products may cause a health

hazard. Serious effects may be delayed following exposure.

Skin contact : No known significant effects or critical hazards.

Ingestion : No known significant effects or critical hazards.

Symptoms related to the physical, chemical and toxicological characteristic

Eye contact : No specific data.

Inhalation : No specific data.
Skin contact : No specific data.
Ingestion : No specific data.

Delayed and immediate effects and also chronic effects from short and long term exposure

Short term exposure

Potential immediate effects : Not Available.

Potential delayed effects : Conclusive but not sufficient for classification.

Long term exposure

Potential immediate effects : Not available

Potential delayed effects : No data available for this end-point, hence this classification is
not considered to be applicable.
Potential chronic health effects

Conclusion/Summary : Conclusive but not sufficient for classification.

General : No known significant effects or critical hazards.

Carcinogenicity : No known significant effects or critical hazards.
Mutagenicity : No known significant effects or critical hazards.
Teratogenicity : No known significant effects or critical hazards.
Developmental effects : No known significant effects or critical hazards.
Fertility effects : No known significant effects or critical hazards.

Numerical measures of toxicity

Acute toxicity estimates : Not available.

Other Information : Not applicable

Version: 3.1 Date of issue/Date of revision: 22.10.2018 Date of previous issue: 03.12.2013
 Disperso 370 Page 9 of 12

Section 12. Ecological information

Toxicity

Product/ingredient name Result Species Exposure

Ammonia, aqueous solution
Acute LC50 15 mg/l Fresh water Western mosquitofish 4d
Acute LC50 8.2 mg/l Fresh water Pimephales promeals 96 h
Acute LC50 0,66 mg/l Fresh water Daphnia 48 h
DISPERSO 370
Acute LC50 > 100 mg/l Fresh water Rainbow trout, Donaldson 96 h
Acute > 100 mg/l Fresh water trout
Daphnia magna 48 h
Remarks- Acute – Aquatic Conclusive but not sufficient for classification.
invertebrates
Conclusion/Summary : Conclusive but not sufficient for classification.

Persistence/degradability

Conclusion/Summary : No additional remarks

Conclusion/Summary : Conclusive but not sufficient for classification.

Bioaccumulative potential

Product/ingredient name LogPow BCF Potential

DISPERSO 370 -3,5 - low

Mobility in soil
Soil/water partition coefficient : Not available.
(KOC)
Other adverse effects : No known significant effects or critical hazards

Section 13. Disposal considerations

Disposal methods : The generation of waste should be avoided or wherever
possible. Significant quantities of waste product residues should
not be disposed of via the foul sewer but processed in a suitable
effluent treatment plant. Dispose of surplus and non-recyclable
products via a licensed waste disposal contractor. Disposal of
this product, solutions and any by-products should at all times
comply with the requirements of environmental protection and
waste disposal legislation and any regional local authority
requirements.

Version: 3.1 Date of issue/Date of revision: 22.10.2018 Date of previous issue: 03.12.2013
 Disperso 370 Page 10 of 12

Section 14. Transport information

UN IMDG IATA
UN number - - -
UN proper shipping name Not regulated Not regulated Not regulated
Transport hazard class(es) - - -
Packing group - - -
Environmental hazards No No No
Additional information Marine pollutant: No

Special precaution for user : Not applicable.

Transport in bulk according to Annex II of MARPOL 73/78 and the IBC Code

Proper shipping name : Not applicable

Section 15. Regulatory information

International regulations

Chemical Weapon Convention List Schedules I, II & III Chemicals

Chemical Weapons Convention List Schedule I Chemicals

None of the components are listed.

Chemical Weapons Convention List Schedule II Chemicals

None of the components are listed.

Chemical Weapons Convention List Schedule III Chemicals

None of the components are listed.

Montreal Protocol (Annexes A, B, C, E)

None of the components are listed.

Stockholm Convention on Persistent Organic Pollutants

Annex A - Elimination – Production

None of the components are listed.

Annex A - Elimination – Use

None of the components are listed.

Annex B - Restriction – Production

None of the components are listed.

Annex B - Restriction – Use

None of the components are listed.

Version: 3.1 Date of issue/Date of revision: 22.10.2018 Date of previous issue: 03.12.2013
 Disperso 370 Page 11 of 12

Annex C - Unintentional – Production

None of the components are listed.

Rotterdam Convention on Prior Inform Consent (PIC)

None of the components are listed.

UNECE Aarhus Protocol on POPs and Heavy Metals

Heavy metals - Annex 1

None of the components are listed.
POPs - Annex 1 - Production
None of the components are listed.

POPs - Annex 1 – Use

None of the components are listed.

POPs - Annex 2
None of the components are listed.

POPs - Annex 3
None of the components are listed.

Inventory list

Australia : All components are listed or exempted

Canada : All components are listed or exempted.
China : All components are listed or exempted
Europe : All components are listed or exempted
Japan : Japan inventory (ENCS): All components are listed or
exempted.
Japan inventory (ISHL): Not determined
Malaysia : Not determined.
New Zealand : All components are listed or exempted.
Philippines : All components are listed or exempted.
Republic of Korea : All components are listed or exempted.
Taiwan : All components are listed or exempted.
Turkey : Not determined.
United States : All components are listed or exempted.

Section 16. Other information

History
Date of printing : 19.11.2010
Date of issue/Date of revision : 22.10.2018
Date of previous issue : 03.12.2013
Version : 3.1

Key to abbreviations

Version: 3.1 Date of issue/Date of revision: 22.10.2018 Date of previous issue: 03.12.2013
 Disperso 370 Page 12 of 12

: ATE = Acute Toxicity Estimate

BCF = Bioconcentration Factor
GHS = Globall Harmonized System of
Classification and Labelling of Chemicals
IATA = International Air Transport Association
IBC = Intermediate Bulk Container
IMDG = International Maritime Dangerous Goods
LogPow = logarithm of the octanol/water partition coefficient
MARPOL 73/78 = International Convention for the Prevention of
Pollution From Ships, 1973 as modified by the Protocol of 1978.
("Marpol" = marine pollution)
UN = United Nations

Procedure used to derive the classification

Classification Justification
Not classified

References : Not available

Notice to reader
To the best of our knowledge, the information contained herein is accurate. However, neither the above-
named supplier, nor any of its subsidiaries, assumes any liability whatsoever for the accuracy or completeness
of the information contained herein. Final determination of suitability of any material is the sole responsibility
of the user. All materials may present unknown hazards and should be used with caution. Although certain
hazards are described herein, we cannot guarantee that these are the only hazards that exist.

Version: 3.1 Date of issue/Date of revision: 22.10.2018 Date of previous issue: 03.12.2013
ACIDIC MEMBRANE CLEANER
ACIDIC MEMBRANE CLEANER
REVISION DATE: 22/11/2018

SAFETY DATA SHEET

ACIDIC MEMBRANE CLEANER
1. IDENTIFICATION OF THE SUBSTANCE/PREPARATION AND THE COMPANY:
PRODUCT NAME: ACIDIC MEMBRANE CLEANER
CHEMICAL NAME 2: Mixture of organic acid and chelating agent

PART NO: 701ROC-003

SUPPLIER: Advanced Watertek Industries LLC
Ras Al Khor,Dubai
United Arab Emirates
Tel:+971-4-3333100
Fax:+971-4-3332570
EMRGENCY TELEPHONES: +971-4-3333100

2. HAZARDS IDENTIFICATION:
Classification of the substance or mixture :
Regulation (EC) NO.1272/2008 (CLP) Warning H319: Cause serious eye irritation
Directive 67/548/EEC & Directive 1999/45/EC XI; Irritant.R36/37/38
Label elements
According to Regulation (EC) No 1272/2008 & 453/2010 (CLP)
Pictogram:

Signal Word : Warning

Hazard Statement
H319 : Cause serious eye irritation.
H302 : Harmful if swallowed.
Precautionary Statements (Prevention):
P264 : Wash hand thoroughly after handling.
P270 : Do not eat, drink or smoke when using this product.
P280 : Wear eye/face protection.
Precautionary Statement (Response):
P305+P351+P338 : If in Eyes: Rinse cautiously with water for several minutes.
Remove contact lenses, if present and easy to do. Continue rinsing.
P337+P313 : If eye irritation persists: Get medical advice/attention.
Precautionary Statements (Disposal):
P501 : Dispose of content and /or container in accordance with local,
regional, national, and/or international regulations.
Other hazards : No Data Available
Additional Information : No Data Available

3. COMPOSITION/INFORMATION OF INGREDIENTS:
SODIUM TRIPOLYPHOSPHITE : 10% CAS NO: 7758-29-4
CITRIC ACID : 90% CAS No: 77-92-9
Page 1 of 4
ACIDIC MEMBRANE CLEANER
REVISION DATE: 22/11/2018

4. FIRST AID MEASURES:

INHALATION: Provide fresh air to victim, warmth and rest, preferably in a comfortable
sitting position.
Get medical attention if any discomfort continues.
INGESTION: DO NOT INDUCE VOMITING!
Rinse mouth thoroughly.
Get medical attention.
SKIN CONTACT: Immediately remove contaminated clothing.
Rinse immediately with plenty of water.
Continue to rinse for at least 15 minutes.
Get medical attention if irritation persists after washing.
EYES CONTACT: Rinse the eye with water immediately.
Continue to rinse for at least 15 minutes.
Contact physician if irritation persists.

5. FIRE FIGHTING MEASURES:

EXTINGUISHING MEDIA: Not combustible. Use extinguishing media suitable for surrounding fire.
PROTECTIVE MEASURE IN
FIRE: Use self-contained breathing apparatus and wear suitable protective clothing
PROTECTION OF FIREFIGHTERS: Wear positive pressure self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA). Structural
firefighters' protective clothing will only provide limited protection.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: Explosion hazard from the generation of dust.

6. ACCIDENTAL RELEASE MEASURES:

PERSONAL PRECAUTIONS,
PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT
& EMERGENCY PROCEDURES: Use personal protective equipment
ENVIRONMENTAL
PRECAUTIONS: Should be prevented from entering drains.
SPILL CLEANUP METHODS: Collect and reclaim or dispose in sealed containers in licensed waste.
Containers with collected spillage must be properly labeled with correct
Contents and hazard symbol.
7. HANDLING AND STORAGE:
USAGE PRECATIONS: Avoid spilling, skin and eye contact.
Avoid handling which leads to dust formation.
Static electricity and formation of sparks must be prevented.
STORAGE PRECATIONS: Keep in cool, dry, ventilated storage and closed containers.
Store separated from: Alkalies. Oxidising material. Aluminium.
SPECIFIC END USE(S) Water treatment chemicals

8. EXPOSURE CONTROLES AND PERSONAL PROTECTION:

INGREDIENT COMMENTS: No exposure limits noted ingredient(s).
VENTILATION: Provide sufficient ventilation for operations causing dust formation.
RESIPIRATORS: Wear respirator if there is dust formation.
PROTECTIVE GLOVES: Use protective gloves made of Rubber, neoprene or PVC.
EYE PRODUCTION: Wear approved safety goggles.
OTHER PROTECTION: Wear appropriate clothing to prevent repeated or prolonged skin
contact.
Page 2 of 4
ACIDIC MEMBRANE CLEANER
REVISION DATE: 22/11/2018

ENVIRONMENTAL EXPOSURE
CONTROL: Do not allow to enter drains, sewers or watercourses.
HYGIENIC WORK PRACTICES: No specific hygiene procedures noted, but good personal hygiene practices
are always advisable, especially when working with chemicals.
9. PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL PROPERTIES:
APPERANCE: Powder, dust
COLOUR: White
ODOUR/TASTE: No Data Available
MELT./[Link]
(°C, INTERVAL): >150
DENSITY/SPECIFIC GRAVITY: 1.67
FLASH POINT (°C) No Data Available
FLAMMABILITY Not flammable
EXPLOSIVE PROPERTIES Not explosive
TEMPERATURE (°C): No Data Available
pH-VALUE, DILUTED SOLUTIONS:2.5-3.5
CONCENTRATION % M: 3.0
SOLUBILITY DESCRIPTION: Soluble in water.

10. STABILITY AND REACTIVITY:

CONDITIONS TO AVOID : Avoid dust to ignition sources.
Avoid contact with: Strong oxidising agents. Strong alkalis.
In contact with metals generates hydrogen gas, which together with air
Can from explosive mixtures.
HAZARDOUS DECOMPITION. Toxic gases/vapors/fumes of: Carbon dioxide (CO2).Carbon monoxide (CO).
PRODUCTS: Aqueous solution in contact with aluminum may produce hydrogen
11. TOXICOLOGICAL INFORMATION:
TOXIC DOSE-LD 50: >2000 mg/kg (oral rat)
SKIN: Mild skin Irritant.
Not a skin sensitiser
EYES: Irritating.
RESPIRATORY OR SKIN
SENSITIZATION – SKIN Not a sensitizer
MUTAGENICITY Not a mutagen
CARCINOGENICITY Not a carcinogen
REPRODUCTION TOXICITY Not a reproductive toxin
STOT-SINGLE EXPOSURE No Data Available
STOT- REPEATED EXPOSURE No Data Available
OTHER INFORMATION No Data Available

12. ECOLOGICAL INFORMATION:

ECOTOXICOLOGICAL DATA: Acute toxicity.LC50 fish>100 mg/l Estimated
ECOLOGICAL
INFORMATION: Eliminated from wastewater plants by precipitation with ferric & aluminum
salts.
PERSISTENCE AND
Page 3 of 4
ACIDIC MEMBRANE CLEANER
REVISION DATE: 22/11/2018

DEGRADABILITY: No data is available on this product.

BIOACCUMULATIVE
POTENTIAL: Does not bioaccumulate.
MOBILITY IN SOIL: No data is available on this product.
OTHER ADVERSE EFFECTS: No data is available on this product.

13. DISPOSAL CONSIDERATIONS:

DISPOSAL METHODS: INCINERATE.
Absorb in vermiculite or dry sand, dispose in licensed special waste.
DISPOSAL OF PACKAGING: Empty containers can be sent for disposal or recycling. Empty containers can
be sent to landfill after cleaning, if in compliance with local and national
regulations.

14. TRANSPORT INFORMATION:

ADR CLASS: Not classified for transportation.
RAIL TRANSPORT NOTES: Not classified (ARD/RID)
MARINE POLLUTANT: No
SEA TRANSPORT NOTES: Not classified (IMDG)
AIR TRANSPORT NOTES: Not classified dangerous as per IATA/ICAO

15. REGULATORY INFORMATION:

RISK PHRASES: R-36/37/38 Irritating to eyes respiratory system and skin.
SAFETY PHRASES: S-22/24/25 Wear suitable protective clothing, gloves and eye/face
protection.
EU DIRECTIVES : User to follow EU directives and regulations
AUTORISATION AND
/OR RESTRICTION ON USE Not applicable
NATIONAL REGULATIONS User to follow national regulations

16. OTHER INFORMATION:

REVISION: This document differs from the previous version in the following areas:
Section:2 HAZARDS IDENTIFICATION:
Classification of the substance or mixture
Label elements
Section:7 HANDLING AND STORAGE
Specific End Use(S) Water treatment chemicals

FURTHER INFORMATION: The information supplied in this Safety Data Sheet is designed only as guidance
for the safe use, storage and handling of the product. This information is
correct to the best of our knowledge and belief at the date of publication
however, no guarantee is made to its accuracy. This information relates only
to the specific material designated and may not be valid for such material used
in combination with any other materials or in any other process.

Page 4 of 4
ALKALINE MEMBRANE CLEANER
ALKALINE MEMBRANE CLEANER
REVISION DATE: 22/11/2018

SAFETY DATA SHEET

ALKALINE MEMBRANE CLEANER
1. IDENTIFICATION OF THE SUBSTANCE/PREPARATION AND THE COMPANY:
PRODUCT NAME: ALKALINE MEMBRANE CLEANER
CHEMICAL NAME 2: Mixture of organic base and chelating agent
PART NO: 701ROC-004
SUPPLIER: Advanced Watertek Industries LLC
Ras Al khor, Dubai
United Arab Emirates
Tel:+971-4-3333100
Fax: +971-4-3332570
EMRGENCY TELEPHONES: +971-4-3333100
2. HAZARDS IDENTIFICATION:
Classification of the substance or mixture:
Regulation (EU) NO.1272/2008 (Annex VI) Warning H318: Cause serious eye damage.
Directive 67/548/EEC & Directive 1999/45/EC XI; Irritant.R36/37/38
Label elements
According to Regulation (EC) No 1272/2008 (CLP)
Pictogram:

Signal Word : Danger

Hazard Statement
H302 : Harmful if swallowed.
H315 : Cause skin irritation.
H318 : Cause serious eye damage.
H335 : May cause respiratory irritation.
H411 : Toxic to aquatic life with long lasting effects.
Precautionary Statements (Prevention):
P261 : Avoid breathing dust/fumes.
P264 : Wash hand thoroughly after handling.
P270 : Do not eat, drink or smoke when using this product.
P280 : Wear eye/face protection.
Precautionary Statement (Response):
P305+P351+P338 : IF IN EYES: Rinse cautiously with water for several minutes.
Remove contact lenses, if present and easy to do. Continue rinsing.
P310 : Immediately call a POISON CENTER or doctor/physician.
P362 : Take off contaminated clothing and wash before reuse.
P391 : Collect spillage.
Precautionary Statements (Disposal):
P501 : Dispose of content and /or container in accordance with local,
regional, national, and/or international regulations.
Other hazards : No Data Available
Additional Information : No Data Available
Page 1 of 4
ALKALINE MEMBRANE CLEANER
REVISION DATE: 22/11/2018

3. COMPOSITION/INFORMATION OF INGREDIENTS:
SODIUM TRIPOLYPHOSPHITE : 88 % CAS NO: 7758-29-4
SODIUM DODECYLBENZENE SULFONATE : 12 % CAS NO: 68081-81-2

4. FIRST AID MEASURES:

INHALATION: Provide fresh air to victim, warmth and rest, preferably in a comfortable
sitting position. Get medical attention if any discomfort continues.
INGESTION: DO NOT INDUCE VOMITING!
Vomiting occurs, lean patient forward or place on left side (head-down
position, if possible) to maintain open airway and prevent aspiration. Rinse
mouth thoroughly. Get medical attention.
SKIN CONTACT: Immediately remove contaminated clothing. Rinse immediately with plenty
of water. Continue to rinse for at least 15 minutes. Get medical attention if
irritation persists after washing.
EYES CONTACT: Rinse the eye with water immediately. Continue to rinse for at least 15 minutes.
Contact physician if irritation persists.

5. FIRE FIGHTING MEASURES:

EXTINGUISHING MEDIA: Not combustible. Use extinguishing media suitable for surrounding fire.
PROTECTIVE MEASURE IN
FIRE: Use self-contained breathing apparatus and wear suitable protective clothing
PROTECTION OF FIREFIGHTERS: Wear positive pressure self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA). Structural
firefighters' protective clothing will only provide limited protection.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: Explosion hazard from the generation of dust.

6. ACCIDENTAL RELEASE MEASURES:

PERSONAL PRECAUTIONS,
PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT
& EMERGENCY PROCEDURES: Use personal protective equipment
ENVIRONMENTAL
PRECAUTIONS: Should be prevented from entering drains.
SPILL CLEANUP METHODS: Collect and reclaim or dispose in sealed containers in licensed waste.
Containers with collected spillage must be properly labeled with correct
Contents and hazard symbol.

7. HANDLING AND STORAGE:

USAGE PRECAUTIONS: Avoid spilling, skin and eye contact. Avoid handling which leads to dust
formation. Static electricity and formation of sparks must be prevented.
STORAGE PRECAUTIONS: Keep in cool, dry, ventilated storage and closed containers.
Store separated from: Alkalis. Oxidizing material. Aluminum.
OTHER INFORMATION: Store in original containers. Keep containers securely sealed.
Store in a cool, dry area protected from environmental extremes.
Store away from incompatible materials and foodstuff containers.
SPECIFIC END USE(S) Water treatment chemicals

Page 2 of 4
ALKALINE MEMBRANE CLEANER
REVISION DATE: 22/11/2018

8. EXPOSURE CONTROLES AND PERSONAL PROTECTION:

INGREDIENT COMMENTS: No exposure limits noted ingredient(s).
VENTILATION: Provide sufficient ventilation for operations causing dust formation.
RESPIRATORY: Wear respirator if there is dust formation.
PROTECTIVE GLOVES: Use protective gloves made of: Rubber, neoprene or PVC.
EYE PROTECTION: Wear approved safety goggles.
OTHER PROTECTION: Wear appropriate clothing to prevent repeated or prolonged skin Contact.
ENVIRONMENTAL EXPOSURE
CONTROL: Do not allow to enter drains, sewers or watercourses.
HYGIENIC WORK PRACTICES: No specific hygiene procedures noted, but good personal hygiene practices are
always advisable, especially when working with chemicals.

9. PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL PROPERTIES:

APPERANCE: Powder, dust
COLOUR: White
ODOUR/TASTE: No Data Available
MELT./[Link]
(°C, INTERVAL): >150
DENSITY/SPECIFIC GRAVITY: 1.67
FLASH POINT (°C) No Data Available
FLAMMABILITY Not flammable
EXPLOSIVE PROPERTIES Not explosive
TEMPERATURE (°C): No Data Available
pH-VALUE, DILUTED SOLUTIONS:9.5-10.5
CONCENTRATION % M: 3.0
SOLUBILITY DESCRIPTION: Soluble in water.

10. STABILITY AND REACTIVITY:

STABILITY : Stable under normal temperatures and pressures.
HAZARDOUS POLYMERIZATION :Hazardous polymerization will not occur.
CONDITIONS TO AVOID : Dusting conditions, extreme heat, extreme humidity.
INCOMPATIBLE MATERIALS : Strong bases, oxidizing agents.
HAZARDOUS DECOMPOSITION
PRODUCTS: No Data Available.

11. TOXICOLOGICAL INFORMATION:

TOXIC DOSE-LD 50: >2000 mg/kg (oral rabbit)
SKIN: Mild skin Irritant.
Not a skin sensitiser
EYES: Irritating.
RESPIRATORY OR SKIN
SENSITIZATION – SKIN Not a sensitizer
MUTAGENICITY Not a mutagen
CARCINOGENICITY Not a carcinogen
REPRODUCTION TOXICITY Not a reproductive toxin
STOT-SINGLE EXPOSURE No Data Available
STOT- REPEATED EXPOSURE No Data Available

Page 3 of 4
ALKALINE MEMBRANE CLEANER
REVISION DATE: 22/11/2018

OTHER INFORMATION No Data Available

12. ECOLOGICAL INFORMATION:

ECOTOXICOLOGICAL DATA Acute toxicity.LC50 fish>100 mg/l Estimated
Acute toxicity.EC50 Daphnia>100mg/l Estimated
ECOLOGICAL INFORMATION: Eliminated from waste water plants by precipitation with ferric & aluminum salts.
PERSISTENCE AND
DEGRADABILITY: No data is available on this product.
BIOACCUMULATIVE
POTENTIAL: Does not bioaccumulate.
MOBILITY IN SOIL: No data is available on this product.
OTHER ADVERSE EFFECTS: No data is available on this product.

13. DISPOSAL CONSIDERATIONS:

DISPOSAL METHODS: Absorb in vermiculite or dry sand, dispose in licensed special Waste.
DISPOSAL OF PACKAGING: Empty containers can be sent for disposal or recycling. Empty containers can be
sent to landfill after cleaning, if in compliance with local and national regulations.

14. TRANSPORT INFORMATION:

ADR CLASS: Not classified for transportation.
RAIL TRANSPORT NOTES: Not classified (ARD/RID)
MARINE POLLUTANT: Low
SEA TRANSPORT NOTES: Not classified (IMDG)
AIR TRANSPORT NOTES: Not classified dangerous as per IATA/ICAO

15. REGULATORY INFORMATION:

RISK PHRASES: R-36/37/38 Irritating to eyes respiratory system and skin.
SAFETY PHRASES: S-26 In case of contact with eyes, rinse immediately with plenty of water and
seek medical advice.
S-22/24/25 Wear suitable protective clothing, gloves and eye/face protection.
EU DIRECTIVES : User to follow EU directives and regulations
AUTORISATION AND
/OR RESTRICTION ON USE Not applicable
NATIONAL REGULATIONS User to follow national regulations

16. OTHER INFORMATION:

REVISION: This document differs from the previous version in the following areas:
Section:2 HAZARDS IDENTIFICATION:
Classification of the substance or mixture
Label elements
Section:7 HANDLING AND STORAGE Specific End Use(S) Water treatment
chemicals
FURTHER INFORMATION: The information supplied in this Safety Data Sheet is designed only as guidance for
the safe use, storage and handling of the product. This information is correct to
the best of our knowledge and belief at the date of publication however, no
guarantee is made to its accuracy. This information relates only to the specific
material designated and may not be valid for such material used in combination
with any other materials or in any other process.
Page 4 of 4
MEMBRANE PRESERVATIVE
 Safety data sheet
Membrane preservative

ADVANCED WATERTEK [Link] Safety data sheet according to Regulation (EC) No. 1907/2006 as
amended from time to time.
Date / Revised: 01.02.2016 Version: 10.0
Product: Membrane preservative (E223)
(ID no. 30042375/SDS_GEN_EU/EN)

Date of print 02.02.2016

SECTION 1: Identification of the substance/mixture and of the
company/undertaking
1.1. Product identifier

Membrane preservative (E223)

Chemical name: Membrane preservative
NDEX-Number: 016-063-00-2
CAS Number: 7681-57-4

REACH registration number: 01-2119531326-45-0002, 01-2119531326-45-0000

1.2. Relevant identified uses of the substance or mixture and uses advised against
Relevant identified uses: food additive(s)
Recommended use: inorganic reducing agents, initial product for chemical syntheses

For the detailed identified uses of the product see appendix of the safety data sheet.

1.3. Details of the supplier of the safety data sheet

Company:
ADVANCED WATERTEK [Link]
P.O. BOX 24647, DUBAI UNITED ARAB EMIRATES
Telephone: +971 4 3333 100

1.4. Emergency telephone number

International emergency number:
Telephone: +971 4 3333 100

SECTION 2: Hazards Identification

2.1. Classification of the substance or mixture

According to Regulation (EC) No 1272/2008 [CLP]

Acute Tox. 4 (oral)

Eye Dam./Irrit. 1

H318,H302

For the classifications not written out in full in this section the full text can be found in section 16.

2.2. Label elements

According to Regulation (EC) NO 127/2008 [CLP]

ADVANCED WATERTEK [Link] Safety data sheet according to Regulation (EC) No. 1907/2006
Date / Revised: 02.08.2013 Version: 9.1
Product: Membrane preservative (E223)
(ID no. 30042375/SDS_GEN_EU/EN)

Date of print 04.08.2013

Pictogram:

Signal Word:
Danger

Hazard Statement:
H318 Causes serious eye damage.
H302 Harmful if swallowed.

Precautionary Statements (Prevention):

P280 Wear eye/face protection.
P270 Do not eat, drink or smoke when using this product.
P264 Wash with plenty of water and soap thoroughly after handling.

Precautionary Statements (Response):

P310 Immediately call a POISON CENTER or doctor/physician.
P305 + P35+P338 IF IN EYES: Rinse cautiously with water for several minutes. Remove
contact lenses, if present and easy to do. Continue rinsing.
P301 + P330 IF SWALLOWED: rinse mouth.

Precautionary Statements (Disposal):

P501 Dispose of contents/container to hazardous or special waste collection
point.

Labeling of special preparations (GHS):

EUH031:Contact with acids liberates toxic gas.

According to Regulation (EC) No 1272/2008 [CLP]

Hazard determining component(s) for labelling: disodium disulphite

2.3. Other hazards

According to Regulation (EC) No 1272/2008 [CLP]

No specific dangers known, if the regulations/notes for storage and handling are considered. If applicable
information is provided in this section on other hazards which do not result in classification but which may
contribute to the overall hazards of the substance or mixture.

SECTION 3: Composition/Information on Ingredients

3.1. Substances

Chemical nature

Membrane preservative
ADVANCED WATERTEK [Link] Safety data sheet according to Regulation (EC) No. 1907/2006
Date / Revised: 02.08.2013 Version: 9.1
Product: Membrane preservative (E223)
(ID no. 30042375/SDS_GEN_EU/EN)

Date of print 04.08.2013

CAS Number: 7681-57-4

EC-Number: 231-673-0
INDEX-Number: 016-063-00-2

Na2S2O5

For the classifications not written out in full in this section, including the indication of danger, the
hazard symbols, the R phrases, and the hazard statements, the full text is listed in section 16.

3.2. Mixtures
Not applicable

SECTION 4: First-Aid Measures

4.1. Description of first aid measures
Remove contaminated clothing.

If inhaled:
If difficulties occur after dust has been inhaled, remove to fresh air and seek medical attention. After
inhalation of decomposition products: Immediately administer a corticosteroid from a
controlled/metered dose inhaler.

On skin contact:
Wash thoroughly with soap and water.

On contact with eyes:

Immediately wash affected eyes for at least 15 minutes under running water with eyelids held open,
consult an eye specialist.

On ingestion:
Rinse mouth and then drink plenty of water.

4.2. Most important symptoms and effects, both acute and delayed
Symptoms: Overexposure may cause:, vomiting, asthmatic complaints, abdominal cramps,
shortness of breath, nausea, diarrhea, coughing

Hazards: Risk of sulfur dioxide formation by reaction with gastric acid after swallowing.

4.3. Indication of any immediate medical attention and special treatment needed
Treatment: Treat according to symptoms (decontamination, vital functions), no known specific
antidote.

SECTION 5: Fire-Fighting Measures

5.1. Extinguishing media
Suitable extinguishing media:
foam

5.2. Special hazards arising from the substance or mixture

sulphur dioxide
ADVANCED WATERTEK [Link] Safety data sheet according to Regulation (EC) No. 1907/2006
Date / Revised: 02.08.2013 Version: 9.1
Product: Membrane preservative (E223)
(ID no. 30042375/SDS_GEN_EU/EN)

Date of print 04.08.2013

The substances/groups of substances mentioned can be released if the product is involved in a fire.

5.3. Advice for fire-fighters

Special protective equipment:
Wear a self-contained breathing apparatus.

Further information:
Contaminated extinguishing water must be disposed of in accordance with official regulations. In
case of fire and/or explosion do not breathe fumes.

SECTION 6: Accidental Release Measures

6.1. Personal precautions, protective equipment and emergency procedures
Use personal protective clothing. Ensure adequate ventilation. Avoid dust formation. Avoid contact
with eyes.

6.2. Environmental precautions

Do not discharge into drains/surface waters/groundwater. Do not discharge into the subsoil/soil.

6.3. Methods and material for containment and cleaning up

Sweep/shovel up. Correctly dispose of recovered product immediately.

6.4. Reference to other sections

Information regarding exposure controls/personal protection and disposal considerations can be
found in section 8 and 13.

SECTION 7: Handling and Storage

7.1. Precautions for safe handling
Use only in well-ventilated areas. Avoid dust formation.

Protection against fire and explosion:

The substance/product is non-combustible. No special precautions necessary.

7.2. Conditions for safe storage, including any incompatibilities

Segregate from acids and acid forming substances. Segregate from oxidants.
Do not store with: Sodium nitrate, sodium nitrite, disodium sulfide; sodium sulfide.
Further information on storage conditions: Keep container tightly closed and dry; store in a cool
place. Keep container in a well-ventilated place.

7.3. Specific end use(s)

See exposure scenario(s) in the attachment to this safety data sheet.

SECTION 8: Exposure Controls/Personal Protection

8.1. Control parameters
Components with occupational exposure limits

446-09-5: Sulphur dioxide

7681-57-4: sodium metabisulphite
7757-82-6: Sodium sulphate
ADVANCED WATERTEK [Link] Safety data sheet according to Regulation (EC) No. 1907/2006
Date / Revised: 02.08.2013 Version: 9.1
Product: Membrane preservative (E223)
(ID no. 30042375/SDS_GEN_EU/EN)

Date of print 04.08.2013

PNEC
Freshwater 1 mg/l
marine water: 0.1 mg/l

STP: 75.4 mg/l

DNEL
Inhalation
Inhalation The nuisance dust limit (inhalativ fraction) was used as basis for the DNEL.

8.2. Exposure controls

Personal protective equipment
Respiratory protection:
Breathing protection if dusts are formed. Suitable respiratory protection for lower concentrations or
short-term effect: Particle filter with low efficiency for solid particles (e.g. EN 143 or 149, Type P1or
FFP1) Breathing protection if breathable aerosols/dust are formed. Combination filter for
gases/vapours of organic, inorganic, acid inorganic, alkaline compounds and toxic particles (e. g. EN
14387 Type ABEK-P3)

Hand protection:
Chemical resistant protective gloves (EN 374)
Suitable materials also with prolonged, direct contact (Recommended: Protective index 6,
corresponding > 480 minutes of permeation time according to EN 374):
polyvinylchloride (PVC) - 0.7 mm coating thickness
nitrile rubber (NBR) - 0.4 mm coating thickness
Supplementary note: The specifications are based on tests, literature data and information of glove
manufacturers or are derived from similar substances by analogy. Due to many conditions (e.g.
temperature) it must be considered, that the practical usage of a chemical-protective glove in practice
may be much shorter than the permeation time determined through testing. Manufacturer's directions
for use should be observed because of great diversity of types.

Eye protection:
Tightly fitting safety goggles (splash goggles) (e.g. EN 166)
Body protection:
Body protection must be chosen depending on activity and possible exposure, e.g. apron, protecting boots,
chemical-protection suit (according to EN 14605 in case of splashes or EN ISO 13982 in case of dust).

General safety and hygiene measures

Handle in accordance with good industrial hygiene and safety practice. Do not inhale vapours or
dust. Hands and/or face should be washed before breaks and at the end of the shift.

SECTION 9: Physical and Chemical Properties

9.1. Information on basic physical and chemical properties
Form : powder, crystalline
Colour : white to slightly yellow
Odour : faint odour, of sulfur dioxide
Odour threshold : Not determined due to potential health hazard by inhalation.
ADVANCED WATERTEK [Link] Safety data sheet according to Regulation (EC) No. 1907/2006
Date / Revised: 02.08.2013 Version: 9.1
Product: Membrane preservative (E223)
(ID no. 30042375/SDS_GEN_EU/EN)

Date of print 04.08.2013

pH Value :4.0 – 4.8

(5 %(m), 20°C)
Decomposition point : >150°C
Boiling point : The substance / product decomposes therefore not determined.
Flash point : Not applicable, the product is a solid
Evaporation rate :The product is a non-volatile solid.
Flammability : Not flammable (others)

Lower explosion limit : For solids not relevant for classification and labelling.

Vapour pressure :The vapour pressure of the aqueous solution consists of the partial
pressure for water and the partial pressure for sulphur dioxide
Density : 2.36 g/cm3
(20 °C)
Solubility in water : Literature data.
667 g/l
(25 °C)
Partitioning coefficient n-octanol/water (log Kow): not applicable
Thermal decomposition : 150 °C
To avoid thermal decomposition, do not overheat.
Viscosity, dynamic :Not applicable

9.2. Other information

Burning rate : 0 mm/s, 0 s (Directive 92/69/EEC, A.10)
Bulk density : 1,000 - 1,200 kg/m3
pKA : Not applicable

SECTION 10: Stability and Reactivity

10.1. Reactivity
No hazardous reactions if stored and handled as prescribed/indicated.

Corrosion to metals: No corrosive effect on metal.

10.2. Chemical stability

The product is stable if stored and handled as prescribed/indicated.

10.3. Possibility of hazardous reactions

Reacts with nitrites. Reacts with nitrates. Reacts with oxidizing agents.

10.4. Conditions to avoid

Avoid humidity.

10.5. Incompatible materials

Substances to avoid: acids, oxidizing agents, nitrites, nitrates, sulfides

10.6. Hazardous decomposition products

Hazardous decomposition product: Sulphur dioxide.
ADVANCED WATERTEK [Link] Safety data sheet according to Regulation (EC) No. 1907/2006
Date / Revised: 02.08.2013 Version: 9.1
Product: Membrane preservative (E223)
(ID no. 30042375/SDS_GEN_EU/EN)

Date of print 04.08.2013

SECTION 11: Toxicological Information

11.1. Information on toxicological effects
Acute toxicity

Assessment of acute toxicity: Of moderate toxicity after single ingestion. Virtually nontoxic by
inhalation. Virtually nontoxic after a single skin contact. The product has not been fully tested. The
statements have been derived in parts from products of a similar structure or composition.

Experimental/calculated data: LD50 rat (oral): 1,540 mg/kg (OECD Guideline 401)

LC50 rat (by inhalation): > 5.5 mg/l 4 h (IRT)

The product has not been tested. The statement has been derived from substances/products of a
similar structure or composition. Tested as dust aerosol.

LD50 rat (dermal): > 2,000 mg/kg (OECD Guideline 402) The product has not been tested. The
statement has been derived from substances/products of a similar structure or composition.

Irritation

Experimental/calculated data:
Skin corrosion/irritation rabbit: non-irritant (OECD Guideline 404)
Serious eye damage/irritation rabbit: irreversible damage (OECD Guideline 405)

Respiratory/Skin sensitization

Assessment of sensitization:
Skin sensitizing effects were not observed in animal studies. A sensitizing effect on particularly
sensitive individuals cannot be excluded.

Experimental/calculated data:
Mouse Local Lymph Node Assay (LLNA) mouse: Non-sensitizing. (OECD Guideline 429)

Germ cell mutagenicity

Assessment of mutagenicity:
No mutagenic effect was found in various tests with bacteria and mammalian cell culture. The
substance was not mutagenic in studies with mammals.
Carcinogenicity
Assessment of carcinogenicity:
In longer-term studies in rats in which the substance was given by feed,a carcinogenic effect was not
observed.

Reproductive toxicity

Assessment of reproduction toxicity: The results of animal studies gave no indication of a fertility
ADVANCED WATERTEK [Link] Safety data sheet according to Regulation (EC) No. 1907/2006
Date / Revised: 02.08.2013 Version: 9.1
Product: Membrane preservative (E223)
(ID no. 30042375/SDS_GEN_EU/EN)

Date of print 04.08.2013

impairing effect.

Developmental toxicity

Assessment of teratogenicity: No indications of a developmental toxic / teratogenic effect were seen

in animal studies.

Experiences in humans

Experimental/calculated data: Skin irritations described in isolated cases.

Specific target organ toxicity (single exposure)

Assessment of STOT single: Apart from effects causing lethality, no specific target organ toxicity was
observed in experimental studies.

Repeated dose toxicity and Specific target organ toxicity (repeated exposure)

Assessment of repeated dose toxicity: No substance-specific organtoxicity was observed after

repeated administration to animals.

Aspiration hazard: Not applicable

SECTION 12: Ecological Information

12.1. Toxicity
Assessment of aquatic toxicity:
Acutely harmful for aquatic organisms. The inhibition of the degradation activity of activated sludge is
not anticipated when introduced to biological treatment plants in appropriate low concentrations.

Toxicity to fish:
LC50 (96 h) 316 mg/l, Leuciscus idus (DIN 38412 Part 15, static) The details of the toxic effect
relate to the nominal concentration. The product has not been tested. The statement has been
derived from substances/products of a similar structure or composition.

Aquatic invertebrates:
EC50 (48 h) 89 mg/l, Daphnia magna (Directive 79/831/EEC, static)
Nominal concentration.

Aquatic plants:
EC50 (72 h) 43.8 mg/l (growth rate), algae (other, static)
Nominal concentration.

Microorganisms/Effect on activated sludge:

No observed effect concentration (3 h) > 1,000 mg/l, (OECD Guideline 209, aquatic)
The product has not been tested. The statement has been derived from substances/products of a
similar structure or composition.

Chronic toxicity to fish:

ADVANCED WATERTEK [Link] Safety data sheet according to Regulation (EC) No. 1907/2006
Date / Revised: 02.08.2013 Version: 9.1
Product: Membrane preservative (E223)
(ID no. 30042375/SDS_GEN_EU/EN)

Date of print 04.08.2013

No observed effect concentration (34 d) > 316 mg/l, Brachydanio rerio (OECD Guideline 210, Flow
through.) The product has not been tested. The statement has been derived from
substances/products of a similar structure or composition.

Chronic toxicity to aquatic invertebrates:

No observed effect concentration (21 d) > 10 mg/l, Daphnia magna (OECD Guideline 202, part 2,
semistatic)
Nominal concentration.

Assessment of terrestrial toxicity: Study scientifically not justified.

12.2. Persistence and degradability

Assessment biodegradation and elimination (H2O): Inorganic product which cannot be eliminated
from water by biological purification processes.

Assessment of stability in water:

According to structural properties, hydrolysis is not expected/probable.
Study scientifically not justified.

12.3. Bioaccumulative potential

Assessment bioaccumulation potential: Accumulation in organisms is not to be expected.
Bioaccumulation potential: Study scientifically not justified.

12.4. Mobility in soil

Assessment transport between environmental compartments:
The substance will not evaporate into the atmosphere from the water surface.
Adsorption to solid soil phase is not expected.

12.5. Results of PBT and vPvB assessment

According to Annex XIII of Regulation (EC) No.1907/2006 concerning the Registration, Evaluation,
Authorisation and Restriction of Chemicals (REACH): The product does not fulfill the criteria for PBT
(persistent/bioaccumulative/toxic) and vPvB (very persistent/very bioaccumulative). Self
classification

12.6. Other adverse effects

The substance is not listed in Regulation (EC) 1005/2009 on substances that deplete the ozone
layer.

12.7. Additional information

Sum parameter

Chemical oxygen demand (COD): (calculated) 165 mg/g

Other ecotoxicological advice:

Higher concentrations of the substance may cause a strong chemical oxygen consumption in
biological sewage-treatment plants and/or waterways.

SECTION 13: Disposal Considerations

ADVANCED WATERTEK [Link] Safety data sheet according to Regulation (EC) No. 1907/2006
Date / Revised: 02.08.2013 Version: 9.1
Product: Membrane preservative (E223)
(ID no. 30042375/SDS_GEN_EU/EN)

Date of print 04.08.2013

13.1. Waste treatment methods

SECTION 14: Transport Information

Land transport

ADR : Not classifies as a dangerous good under transport regulation

UN number : Not applicable
UN proper shipping name : Not applicable
Transport hazards class(es) : Not applicable
Packing group : Not applicable
Environmental hazard : Not applicable
Special precautions for user : None known
RID :Not classified as a dangerous goods under transport regulation.
UN number : Not applicable
UN proper shipping name : Not applicable
Transport hazard class(es) : Not applicable
Packing group : Not applicable
Environmental hazards : Not applicable
Special precautions for user : None known

Inland waterway transport

ADN :Not classified as a dangerous good under transport

regulations
UN number :Not applicable
UN proper shipping name :Not applicable
Transport hazard class(es) : Not applicable
Packing group : Not applicable
Environmental hazards : Not applicable
Special precautions for user :None know.

Transport in inland waterway vessel: Not evaluated

Sea transport

IMDG :Not classified as a dangerous good under transport regulations

UN number : Not applicable
UN proper shipping name : Not applicable
Transport hazard class(es) : Not applicable
Packing group : Not applicable
Environmental hazards : Not applicable
Special precautions for user : None known

Air transport

IATA/ICAO :Not classified as a dangerous good under transport regulations

UN number :Not applicable
ADVANCED WATERTEK [Link] Safety data sheet according to Regulation (EC) No. 1907/2006
Date / Revised: 02.08.2013 Version: 9.1
Product: Membrane preservative (E223)
(ID no. 30042375/SDS_GEN_EU/EN)

Date of print 04.08.2013

UN proper shipping name :Not applicable

Transport hazard class(es) :Not applicable
Packing group :Not applicable
Environmental hazards :Not applicable
Special precautions for user :None known

14.1. UN number
See corresponding entries for “UN number” for the respective regulations in the tables above.

14.2. UN proper shipping name

See corresponding entries for “UN proper shipping name” for the respective regulations in the tables
above.

14.3. Transport hazard class(es)

See corresponding entries for “Transport hazard class(es)” for the respective regulations in the
tables above.

14.4. Packing group

See corresponding entries for “Packing group” for the respective regulations in the tables above.

14.5. Environmental hazards

See corresponding entries for “Environmental hazards” for the respective regulations in the tables
above.

14.6. Special precautions for user

See corresponding entries for “Special precautions for user” for the respective regulations in the
tables above.

14.7. Transport in bulk according to Annex II of MARPOL73/78 and the IBC Code
Regulation: Not evaluated
Shipment approved: Not evaluated
Pollution name: Not evaluated
Pollution category: Not evaluated
Ship Type: Not evaluated

SECTION 15: Regulatory Information

15.1. Safety, health and environmental regulations/legislation specific for the substance or
mixture

15.2. Chemical Safety Assessment

Chemical Safety Assessment performed

SECTION 16: Other Information

Assessment of the hazard classes according to UN GHS criteria (most recent version):

Acute Tox. 4 (oral)

Eye Dam./Irrit. 1
Aquatic Acute 3
ADVANCED WATERTEK [Link] Safety data sheet according to Regulation (EC) No. 1907/2006
Date / Revised: 02.08.2013 Version: 9.1
Product: Membrane preservative (E223)
(ID no. 30042375/SDS_GEN_EU/EN)

Date of print 04.08.2013

chemical industry

Full text of the classifications, including the indication of danger, the hazard symbols, the R phrases,
and the hazard statements, if mentioned in section 2 or 3:
Acute Tox. :Acute toxicity
Eye Dam./Irrit. :Serious eye damage/eye irritation
H318 :Causes serious eye damage.
H302 :Harmful if swallowed.

The data contained in this safety data sheet are based on our current knowledge and experience and
describe the product only with regard to safety requirements. The data do not describe the product's
properties (product specification). Neither should any agreed property nor the suitability of the product
for any specific purpose be deduced from the data contained in the safety data sheet. It is the
responsibility of the recipient of the product to ensure any proprietary rights and existing laws and
legislation are observed.

Vertical lines in the left hand margin indicate an amendment from the previous version.